NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Exercise -1 Section (A) Semiconductor, Energy Band

Question 1. A N-type semiconductor is

  1. Negatively charged
  2. Positively charged
  3. Neutral
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. Neutral

Question 2. The forbidden energy band gap in conductors semiconductors and insulators are EG1, EG2, and EG3 respectively, The relation among them is

  1. EG1 = EG2 = EG3
  2. EG1 < EG2 < EG3
  3. EG1 > EG2 > EG3
  4. EG1 < EG2 > EG3

Answer: 2. EG31 < EG2 < EG3

Question 3. The mobility of free electrons is greater than that of free holes because

  1. They carry a negative charge
  2. They are light
  3. They mutually collide less
  4. They require low energy to continue their motion

Answer: 4. They require low energy to continue their motion

Question 4. Electric conduction in a semiconductor takes place due to

  1. Electrons Only
  2. Holes Only
  3. Both Electrons And Holes
  4. Neither electrons nor Holes

Answer: 3. Both Electrons And Holes

Question 5. Let n p and n e be the numbers of holes and conduction electrons in an intrinsic semiconductor

  1. np > ne
  2. np = ne
  3. np < ne
  4. np ≠ ne

Answer: 2. np = ne

Question 6. Let np and ne be the numbers of holes and conduction electrons in an extrinsic semiconductor

  1. np > ne
  2. np = ne
  3. np < ne
  4. np ≠ ne

Answer: 4. np ≠ ne

Question 7. An electric field is applied to a semiconductor. Let the number of charge carriers be n and the average drift speed be. If the temperature is increased,

  1. Both N And υ Will Increase
  2. N Will Increase But υ Will Decrease
  3. υ Will Increases But N Will Decrease
  4. Both N And υ Will Decrease

Answer: 2. N Will Increase But υ Will Decrease

Question 8. When an impurity is doped into an intrinsic semiconductor, the conductivity of the semiconductor

  1. Increases
  2. Decreases
  3. Remains The Same
  4. Become Zero

Answer: 1. Increases

Question 9. In a P-type semiconductor, the acceptor level is 57 meV, above the valence band. The maximum wavelength of light required to produce a hole will be

  1. 57 A°
  2. 57 × 10¯³ A°
  3. 217100 A°
  4. 11.61 × 10 A°

Answer: 3. 217100 A°

Question 10. The electrical conductivity of pure germanium can be increased by

  1. Increasing The Temperature
  2. Doping Acceptor Impurities
  3. Doping Donor Impurities
  4. Irradiating Ultraviolet Light On It.

Answer: 1. Increassing The Temperature

Question 11. A semiconductor is doped with a donor impurity

  1. The hole concentration increases
  2. The hole concentration decreases
  3. The electron concentration increases
  4. The electron concentration decreases

Answer: 2. The hole concentration decreases

Question 12. Which of the following when added as an impurity into silicon produces an n-type semiconductor?

  1. P
  2. Al
  3. B
  4. Mg

Answer: 1. P

Question 13. Which of the following diagrams correctly represents the energy levels in the p-type semiconductor?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The Energy Levels In The p–type

Question 14. In p-type semiconductor, the major charge carriers are :

  1. Holes
  2. Electrons
  3. Protons
  4. Neutrons

Answer: 3. Protons

Question 15. Copper and silicon are cooled from 300 K to 60K, and the specific resistance:-

  1. Decrease in copper but an increase in silicon
  2. Increase in copper but an increase in silicon
  3. Increase in both
  4. Decrease in both

Answer: 1. Decrease in copper but increase in silicon

Question 16. The value of the forbidden energy gap for the conductor is:

  1. 1 eV
  2. 6 eV
  3. 0 eV
  4. 3 eV

Answer: 1. 1 eV

Question 17. Ga As is a /an :

  1. Element Semiconductor
  2. Alloy Semiconductor
  3. Bad Conductor
  4. Metalic Semiconductor

Answer: Alloy Semiconductor

Question 18. The number of free electrons in Si at normal temperature is :

  1. 2.5 × 106 per cm3
  2. 1.5 × 1010 per cm3
  3. 1.5 × 1013 per cm3
  4. 2.5 × 1013 per cm3

Answer: 2. 1.5 × 1010 per cm3

Question 19. Hole are the charge carriers in :

  1. Semiconductor
  2. Ionic Solids
  3. P-Type Semiconductor
  4. Metals

Answer: 1. Semiconductor

Question 20. Regarding a semi-conductor which one of the following is wrong?

  1. There are no free electrons at 0 K
  2. There are no free electrons at room temperature
  3. The number of free electrons increases with the rise in temperature
  4. The charge carriers are electrons and holes.

Answer: 2. There are no free electrons at room temperature

Question 21. At absolute zero, Si acts as :

  1. Non-Metal
  2. Metal
  3. Insulator
  4. None Of These

Answer: 3. Insulator

Question 22. By increasing the temperature, the specific resistance of a conductor and ~ semiconductor:

  1. Increases For Both
  2. Decreases For Both
  3. Increases, Decreases Respectively
  4. Decreases, Increases Respectively

Answer: 3. Increases, Decreases Respectively

Question 23. The energy band gap is maximum in:

  1. Metals
  2. Superconductors
  3. Insulators
  4. Semiconductors

Answer: 3. Insulators

Question 24. A strip of copper and another of germanium are cooled from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance of :

  1. Each Of These Decreases
  2. Copper Strip Increases And That Of Germanium Decreases
  3. Copper Strip Decreases And That Of Germanium Increases
  4. Each Of These Increases

Answer: 3. Copper Strip Decreases And That Of Germanium Increases

Question 25. The difference in the variation of resistance with temperature in a metal and a semiconductor arises essentially due to the difference in the:

  1. Crystal Structure
  2. Variation Of The Number Of Charges Carries With Temperature
  3. Type Of Bonding
  4. Variation Of Scattering Mechanism With Temperature

Answer: 2. Variation Of The Number Of Charges Carries With Temperature

Question 26. In p-type semiconductors germanium is doped with :

  1. Gallium
  2. Aluminium
  3. Boron
  4. All Of These

Answer: 4. All Of These

Question 27. In a good conductor of electricity, the type of bonding that exists is :

  1. Ionic
  2. Van Der Waal
  3. Covalent
  4. Metallic

Answer: 4. Metallic

Question 28. Which of the following statements is true for an n-type semiconductor?

  1. The donor level lies closely below the bottom of the conduction band
  2. The donor level lies closely above the top of the valence band
  3. The donor level lies at the halfway mark of the forbidden energy gap
  4. None of the above

Answer: 1. The donor level lies closely below the bottom of the conduction band

Question 29. An n-type semiconductor is

  1. Negatively Charged
  2. Positively Charged
  3. Neutral
  4. None Of The Above

Answer: 3. Neutral

Question 30. The difference in the variation of resistance with temperature in a metal and a semiconductor arises essentially due to the difference in the

  1. Crystal Structure
  2. Change In The Number Of Charge Career
  3. Type Of Bonding
  4. None Of These

Answer: 2. Change In The Number Of Charge Career

Question 31. In P-Type Semiconductors Majority Charge Carriers Are

  1. Electrons
  2. Holes
  3. Neutrons
  4. Protons

Answer: 2. Holes

Question 32. Wire P and Q have the same resistance at ordinary (room) temperature. When heated, the resistance of P increases, and that of Q decreases. we conclude that

  1. p and Q are conductors of different materials.
  2. p is an n-type semiconductor and Q is a p-type semiconductor
  3. p is semiconductor and Q is conductor
  4. p is conductor and Q is semiconductor

Answer: 4. p is a conductor and Q is a semiconductor

Question 33. The resistance of a semiconductor and a conductor:

  1. Increases With Temperature For Both
  2. Decreases With Temperature For Both
  3. Increases And Decreases Respectively With Increase In Temperature
  4. Decreases And Increases Respectively With Increase In Temperature

Answer: 4. Decreases And Increases Respectively With Increase In Temperature

Question 34. In semiconductors at room temperature

  1. The valence band is filled and the conduction band is partially filled
  2. The valence band is filled
  3. The conduction band is empty
  4. The valence band is partially empty and the conduction band is partially filled

Answer: 4. The valence band is partially empty and the conduction band is partially filled

Question 35. Carbon, Silicon, and Germanium atoms have four valence electrons each. Their valence and conduction bonds are separated by energy band gaps represented by (Eg ) C, (Eg)si, and (Eg) Ge respectively. Which one of the following relationships is true in their case

  1. (Eg)c < (Eg)Ge
  2. (Eg)c > (Eg)si
  3. (Eg)c = (Eg)si
  4. (Eg)c < (Eg)si

Answer: 2. (Eg)c > (Eg)si

Question 36. In the energy band diagram of a material shown below, the open circles and filled circles denote holes and electrons respectively. The material is a/an :

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs In the energy band

  1. P-Type Semiconductor
  2. Insulator
  3. Metal
  4. N-Type Semiconductor

Answer: 1. P-Type Semiconductor

 

Question 35. Choose the correct option for the forward-biased characteristics of a p–n junction.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the forward biased characteristics of a p–n junction.

Answer: 3.

Question 36. The emitter-base junction of a transistor is …….biased while the collector-base junction is …….biased

  1. Reverse, forward
  2. Reverse, reverse
  3. Forward, forward
  4. Forward, reverse

Answer: 4. Forward, reverse

Question 37. If the two ends of a P-N junction are joined by a wire-

  1. There will not be a steady current in the circuit
  2. There will be a steady current from the N-side to the P-side
  3. There will be a steady current from the P-side to the N-side
  4. There may or may not be a current depending upon the resistance of the connecting wire.

Answer: 1. There will not be a steady current in the circuit

Question 38. The region that has no free electrons and holes in a P-N juction is-

  1. P-region
  2. N-region
  3. Junction
  4. Depletion Region

Answer: 4. Depletion Region

Question 39. In the P-N junction at the near junction, there are-

  1. Only Positive Ions
  2. Only Negative Ions
  3. Positive And Negative Ion Both
  4. Electron And Holes Both

Answer: 3. Positive And Negative Ion Both

Question 40. A diode is made forward biased by a two-volt battery however there is a drop of 0.5 V across the diode which is independent of the current. Also, a current greater than 10 mA produces large joule loss and damages the diode. If the diode is to be operated at 5 mA, the series resistance to be put is-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A diode made forward biased by a two volt battery

  1. 3 KΩ
  2. 300 KΩ
  3. 300Ω
  4. 200 KΩ

Answer: 3. 300Ω

Question 41. The ratio of resistance for forward to reverse bias of the P–N junction diode is-

  1. 10²: 1
  2. 10–²: 1
  3. 1: 10–4
  4. 1: 10

Answer: 4. 1: 10

Question 42. Zener diode is used-

  1. As an amplifier
  2. As a rectifier
  3. As an oscillator
  4. As a voltage regulator

Answer: 2. As a rectifier

Question 43. The zener breakdown will occur if-

  1. The impurity level is low
  2. The impurity level is high
  3. Impurity is less on the N-side
  4. Impurity is less on P-side

Answer: 2. Impurity level is high

Question 44. In the given fig. which of the diodes are forward-biased

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the diodes are foward biased

  1. 1,2,3
  2. 2,4,5
  3. 1,3,4
  4. 2,3,4

Answer: 1. 1,2,3

Question 45. Consider the following statements A and B and identify the correct answer-

  • A zener diode is always connected in reverse bias.
  • The potential barrier of a P-N junction lies between 0.1 to 0.3 V approximately.

Choose The Correct Answer

  1. A and B are correct
  2. A and B are wrong
  3. A is correct, but B is wrong
  4. A is wrong, but B is correct

Answer: 3. A is correct, but B is wrong

Question 46. The function of the rectifier is

  1. To convert AC into DC
  2. To convert dc into ac
  3. Both and
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. To convert AC into dc

Question 47. The cause of the potential barrier in a p-n diode is:

  1. Depletion Of Positive Charges Near The Junction
  2. Concentration Of Positive Charges Near The Junction
  3. Depletion Of Negative Charges Near The Junction
  4. Concentration Of Positive And Negative Charges Near The Junction

Answer: 4. Concentration Of Positive And Negative Charges Near The Junction

Question 48. A semi-conducting device is connected in a series in a circuit with a battery and a resistance. A current is allowed to pass through the circuit. If the polarity of the battery is reversed, the current drops to almost zero. The device may be:

  1. A P-N Junction
  2. An Intrinsic Semiconductor
  3. A P-Type Semiconductor
  4. An N-Type Semiconductor

Answer: 1. A P-N Junction

Question 49. In a junction diode, the holes are due to:

  1. Protons
  2. Extra Electrons
  3. Neutrons
  4. Missing Electrons

Answer: 4. Missing Electrons

Question 50. The depletion layer consists of:

  1. Electrons
  2. Protons
  3. Mobile Charge Carriers
  4. Immobile Ions

Answer: 4. Immobile Ions

Question 51. In forward bias the width of the depletion layer in a p-n junction diode:

  1. Increases
  2. Decreases
  3. Remains Constant
  4. First Increases Then Decreases

Answer: 2. Decreases

Question 52. The current (I) in the circuit will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Current in the circuit

  1. \(\frac{5}{40} \mathrm{~A}\)
  2. \(\frac{5}{50} \mathrm{~A}\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{10} \mathrm{~A}\)
  4. \(\frac{5}{20} \mathrm{~A}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{5}{50} \mathrm{~A}\)

Question 53. In a P-N junction diode not connected to any circuit-

  1. High potential at the N side and low potential at the P side
  2. High potential at the P side and low potential at the N side
  3. P and N both have at same potential
  4. The potentials of the N side and P side are undetermined

Answer: 1. High potential at the N side and low potential at the P side

Question 54. In a PN junction:-

  1. High potential at the N side and low potential at the P side
  2. High potential at the N side and low potential at the N side
  3. P and N both have at same potential
  4. Undetermined

Answer: 1. High potential at the N side and low potential at the P side

Question 55. Reverse bias applied to a junction diode-

  1. Lowers the potential barrier
  2. Raises the potential barrier
  3. Increases the majority carrier’s current
  4. Decreases the minority carrier’s current

Answer: 2. Raises the potential barrier

Question 56. The barrier potential of a p-n junction diode does not depend on-

  1. Diode design
  2. Temperature
  3. Forward bias
  4. Doping density

Answer: 1. Diode design

Question 57. The inverse saturation current in a P-N junction diode at 27°C is 10–5 amp. The value of forward current at 0.2 volts will be (e7.62 = 2038.6)

  1. 2037.6 × 10–3 A
  2. 203.76 × 10–3 A
  3. 20.376 × 10–3 A
  4. 2.0376 × 10–3 A

Answer: 3. 20.376 × 10–3 A

Question 58. The reason for the potential barrier in the p-n junction is:

  1. Excess Of Positive Charge At Junction
  2. Deficiency Of Positive Charge At Junction
  3. Deficiency Of Negative Charge At Junction
  4. Excess Of Positive And Negative Charge At Junction

Answer: 4. Excess Of Positive And Negative Charge At Junction

Question 59. In p-n junction depletion region decreases when:

  1. Zero Bias
  2. Forward Bias
  3. Reverse Bias
  4. Temperature Decreases

Answer: 2. Forward Bias

Question 60. Two identical P-N junctions may be connected in series with a battery in three ways (fig below). The potential drops across the two P-N junctions are equal in

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Two identical P-N junction

  1. Circuits 1 and 2
  2. Circuits 2 and 3
  3. Circuit 3 and 1
  4. Circuit 1 only

Answer: 3. Circuit 3 and 1

Question 62. In a P-N junction diode which is not connected to any circuit-

  1. The potential is the same everywhere
  2. The P-type side is at a higher potential than the N-type side
  3. There is an electric field at the junction directed from the N-type side to the P-type side
  4. There is an electric field at the junction directed from the P-type side to the N-type side

Answer: 2. The P-type side is at a higher potential than the N-type side

Question 63. For the given circuit shown in Fig, to act as a full wave rectifier, a.c. input should be connected across ……..and……..the d.c. output would appear across……..and……..

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs output would appear across

  1. A, C and B, D
  2. B, D and A, C
  3. A, B C, D
  4. C, A and D, B

Answer: 3. A, B C, D

Question 64. In a……biased P-N junction the net flow holes is from the N-region to the P-region-

  1. Forward Bias
  2. Reverse Bias
  3. no
  4. Both 1 and 2

Answer: 2. Reverse Bias

Question 65. For making the p-n junction diode forward biased:

  1. The same Potential Is Applied
  2. Greater Potential Is Given To N Compared To P
  3. Greater Potential Is Given To P Compared To N
  4. Unbalanced Concentration

Answer: 3. Greater Potential Is Given To P Compared To N

Question 66. When a p-n junction diode is reverse-biased, then

  1. No Current Flows
  2. The Depletion Region Is Increased
  3. The Depletion Region Is Reduced
  4. The Height Of The Potential Barrier Is Reduced

Answer: 2. The Depletion Region Is Increased

Question 67. In the middle of the depletion layer of reverse biased p – n juction, the

  1. Electric Field Is Zero
  2. Potential Is Maximum
  3. The Electric Field Is the Maximum
  4. Potential Is Zero

Answer: Electric Field Is Zero

Question 68. If the input is given between A and C, then the output at the ends of R will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs If the input is given between A and C

  1. Fully Rectified
  2. Half Rectified
  3. Ac
  4. None Of These

Answer: 2. Half Rectified

Question 69. Of the diodes shown in the following diagrams, which one of the diodes is reverse biased?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the diode is reverse biased.

 

Answer: 2.

Question 70. Application of a forward bias to a p-n junction –

  1. Widens the depletion zone
  2. Increases the number of donors on the N-side
  3. Increases the potential difference across the depletion zone
  4. Increases the electric field in the depletion zone

Answer: 4. Increases the electric field in the depletion zone

Question 71. A forward-biased diode is:-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A frorward biased diode

Answer: 4.

Question 72. A p-n photodiode is made of a material with a band gap of 2.0 eV. The minimum frequency of the radiation that can be absorbed by the material is nearly

  1. 10 × 1014 Hz
  2. 5 × 1014 Hz
  3. 1 × 1014 Hz
  4. 20 × 1014 Hz

Answer: 2. 5 × 1014 Hz

Question 73. When the P-N junction diode is forward-biased, then-

  1. The Depletion Region Is Reduced And Barrier Height Is Increased.
  2. The Depletion Region Is Widened And the Barrier Height Is Reduced.
  3. Both The Depletion Region And Barrier Height Are Reduced.
  4. Both The Depletion Region And Barrier Height Are Increased.

Answer: 3. Both The Depletion Region And Barrier Height Are Reduced.

Question 74. In a full wave rectifier circuit operating from 50 Hz mains frequency, the fundamental frequency in the ripple would be:

  1. 50Hz
  2. 25Hz
  3. 100Hz
  4. 70.7Hz

Answer: 3. 100Hz

Question 75. In the following, which one of the diodes is reverse-biased?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the diodes is reverse biased

Answer: 2.

Question 76. The circuit has two oppositely connected ideal diodes in parallel. What is the current flowing in the circuit?

  1. 2.31A
  2. 1.33A
  3. 1.71A
  4. 2.00A

Answer: 4. 2.00A

Question 77. The drift current in a p-n junction is

  1. From The N-Side To The P-Side
  2. From The P-Side To The N-Side
  3. From The N-Side To The P-Side If The Junction Is Forward-Baised And In The Opposite Direction If It Is Reverse-Biased
  4. From The P-Side To The N-Side If The Junction Is Forward-Biased And In The Opposite Direction If It Is Reverse-Baised

Answer: 1. From The N-Side To The P-Side

Question 78. The diffusion current in a p-n junction is

  1. From The N-Side To The P-Side
  2. From The P-Side To The N-Side
  3. From The N-Side To The P-Side Of The Junction Is Forward-Biased And In The opposite direction If It Is Reverse-Baised
  4. From The P-Side To The N-Side If The Junction Is Forward-Baised And In The Opposite Direction If It Is Reverse-Biased

Answer: 2. From The P-Side To The N-Side

Question 79. A semiconducting device is connected in a series circuit with a battery and a resistance. A current is found to pass through the circuit. If the polarity of the battery is reversed, the current drops to almost zero. The device may be

  1. An Intrinsic Semiconductor
  2. A P-Type Semiconductor
  3. An N-Type Semiconductor
  4. A P-N Junction

Answer: 4. A P-N Junction

Question 80. If the two ends P and N of a P-N of a P-N diode junction are joined by a wire

  1. There will not be a steady current in the circuit
  2. There will be a steady current from the N side to the P side
  3. There will be a steady current from the P side to the N side
  4. There may not be a current depending upon the resistance of the connecting wire

Answer: 1. There will not be a steady current in the circuit

Question 81. To make a PN junction conducting

  1. The value of forward bias should be more than the barrier potential
  2. The value of forward bias should be less than the barrier potential
  3. The value of reverse bias should be more than the barrier potential
  4. The value of reverse bias should be less than the barrier potential

Answer: 1. The value of forward bias should be more than the barrier potential

Question 82. Zener diode is used as

  1. Half Wave Rectifier
  2. Full Wave Rectifier
  3. Ac Voltage Stabilizer
  4. Dc Voltage Stabilizer

Answer: 3. Ac Voltage Stabilizer

Question 83. In the P-N junction, the barrier potential offers resistance to

  1. Free electrons in the N region and holes in the P region
  2. Free electrons in the P region and holes in the N region
  3. Only free electrons in the N region
  4. Only holes in the P region

Answer: 1. Free electrons in the N region and holes in the P region

Question 84. Two identical P-N diodes are connected in series in the following ways. Maximum current will flow in a circuit

  1. A
  2. B
  3. C
  4. D

Answer: 2. B

Question 85. In the following circuit readings in ammeters A1 and A2 will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Two ideal diodes

  1. 0.2A, Zero
  2. Xero, o.2 A
  3. 0.2A, 0.2A
  4. 0.2A,0.4A

Answer: 2. Xero, o.2 A

Question 86. A light-emitting diode has a voltage drop of 2 v across it and passes a current of 10 A. When it operates with a 6 v battery through a limiting resistor R, the value of R is

  1. 40 kΩ
  2. 4 kΩ
  3. 200 kΩ
  4. 400 kΩ

Answer: 4. 400 kΩ

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Section (C): Transistors

Question 1. An amplifier is nothing but an oscillator with –

  1. Positive Feedback
  2. High Gain
  3. No Feed Back
  4. Negative Feed Back

Answer: 1. Positive Feedback

Question 2. In A Normal Operation Of A Transistor,

  1. The Base-Emitter Junction Is Forward-Biased
  2. The Base-Collector Junction Is Forward-Biased
  3. The Base-Emitter Junction Is Reverse-Baised
  4. The Base-Collector Junction Is Reverse-Baised

Answer: 1. The Base-Emitter Junction Is Forward-Biased

Question 3. In the case of constants α and β of a transistor

  1. α = β
  2. β < 1 α > 1
  3. αβ = 1
  4. β > 1 α< 1

Answer: 4. β > 1 α< 1

Question 4. If α= 0.98 and current through emitter i e = 20 mA, the value of β is

  1. 4.9
  2. 49
  3. 96
  4. 9.6

Answer: 2. 49

Question 5. The transfer ratio B of a transistor is 50. the input resistance of the transistor when used in the common emitter configuration is 1 kΩ The peak value of the collector AC for an AC input voltage of 0.01 V peak is:

  1. 100 µA
  2. 0.01 mA
  3. 0.25 mA
  4. 500 µA

Answer: 4. 500 µA

Question 6. For a common emitter circuit if E I = 0.98 then the current gain for the common emitter circuit will be :

  1. 49
  2. 98
  3. 4.9
  4. 25.5

Answer: 1. 49

Question 7. A n-p-n transistor conducts when

  1. Both Collector And Emitter Are Positive Concerning The Base
  2. Collector Is Positive And Emitter Is Negative Concerning The Base
  3. Collector Is Positive And Emitter Is At the Same Potential As The Base
  4. Both Collector And Emitter Are Negative Concerning The Base

Answer: 2. Collector Is Positive And Emitter Is Negative Concerning The Base

Question 8. A Transistor (Pnp Or Npn) Can Be Used As

  1. An Amplifier
  2. An Oscillator
  3. A Switch
  4. All Of These

Answer: 4. All Of These

Question 9. The part of a transistor that is most heavily doped to produce a large number of majority charge carries is :

  1. Emitter
  2. Base
  3. Collector
  4. Can Be Any Of The Above Three

Answer: 1. Emitter

Question 10. In a common-base configuration of transistor. α = 0.98, I B = 0.02 mA, RL = 5 kΩ. The output voltage across the load is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs In a common-base configuration of transistor

  1. 3.2 v
  2. 4.9v
  3. 5.2v
  4. 6.2v

Answer: 2. 4.9v

Question 11. The minimum potential difference between the base and emitter required to switch a silicon transistor ‘ON’ is approximately?

  1. 1 V
  2. 3 V
  3. 5 V
  4. 4.2 V

Answer: 1. 1 V

Question 12. In the circuit shown in the figure, the current gainβ= 100 for an npn transistor. The bias resistance RB so that V CE = 5V is (VBE << 10 V)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs In a common-base configuration of transistor

  1. 2 × 103Ω
  2. 105Ω
  3. 2 × 105Ω 
  4. 5 × 105Ω

Answer: 3. 2 × 105Ω

Question 13. In a common emitter amplifier using an output resistance of 5000 ohms and input resistance of 2000 ohm, if the peak value of input signal voltage is 10 mV and β= 50 then the calculated power gain will be

  1. 6.25 × 103
  2. 1.4
  3. 62.5
  4. 2.5 × 10

Answer: 1. 6.25 × 103

Question 14. A transistor oscillator using a resonant circuit with an inductor L (of negligible resistance) and a capacitor C in series produces oscillations of frequency. If L is doubled and C is changed to 4C, the frequency will be:

  1. \(\frac{f}{4}\)
  2. 8f
  3. \(\frac{f}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{f}{2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{f}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)

Question 15. A transistor is operated in a common emitter configuration at constant collector voltage Vc = 1.5 V such that a change in the base current from 100 µA to 150 µA produces a change in the collector current from 5 mA to 10 mA. The current gain (β) is:-

  1. 67
  2. 75
  3. 100
  4. 50

Answer: 3. 100

Question 16. A common emitter amplifier has a voltage gain of 50 and a current gain is 25. The power gain of the amplifier is:

  1. 500
  2. 1000
  3. 1250
  4. 100

Answer: 3. 1250

Question 17. When npn transistor is used as an amplifier:

  1. Electrons Move From Base To Collector
  2. Holes Move From Emitter To Base
  3. Electrons Move From Collector To Base
  4. Holes Move From Base To Emitter

Answer: 4. Holes Move From Base To Emitter

Question 18. In a common base amplifier, the phase difference between the input signal voltage and output voltage is :

  1. \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
  2. Zero
  3. \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Answer: 3. Zero

Question 19. In a common–base mode of transistor, the collector current is 5.488 mA for an emitter current of 5.60 mA. The value of the base current amplification factor will be:

  1. 49
  2. 50
  3. 51
  4. 48

Answer: 1. 49

Question 20. A working transistor with its three legs marked P, Q, and R is tested using a multimeter. No conduction is found between P and Q. By connecting the common (negative) terminal of the multimeter to R and the other (positive) terminal to P or Q, some resistance is seen on the multimeter. Which of the following is true for the transistor?

  1. It is a PNP transistor with R as a collector
  2. It is a PNP transistor with R as an emitter
  3. It is an NPN transistor with R as a collector
  4. It is an NPN transistor with R as the base

Answer: 4. It is a PNP transistor with R as a collector

Question 21. An N-P-N transistor is connected in a common emitter configuration in which the collector supply is 9V and the voltage drop across the load resistance of 1000 connected in the collector circuit is 1 V. If the current amplification factor is (25/26), if the internal resistance of the transistor is 200, then which of the following options is incorrect amplification factor is (25/26), if the internal resistance of the transistor is 200, then which of the following options is incorrect

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs An N-P-N transisto

  1. \(V_{C E}=8 \mathrm{~V}\)
  2. The collector current is 1.0 mA
  3. Voltage gain \(\frac{50}{23}\) and power gain is 4.6
  4. The emitter current is 2.04 mA

Answer: 3. Voltage gain \(\frac{50}{23}\) and power gain is 4.6

Question 22. In a common emitter (CE) amplifier having a voltage gain of G, the transistor used has a transconductance of 0.03 mho and a current gain of 25. If the above transistor is replaced with another one with a transconductance of 0.02 mho and a current gain of 20, the voltage gain will be:

  1. 1.5 g
  2. \(\frac{1}{3} G\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{4} G\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3} G\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{2}{3} G\)

Question 23. The input resistance of a silicon transistor is 100. Base current is changed by 40 A which results in a change in collector current by 2mA. This transistor is used as a common emitter amplifier with a load resistance of 4 K. The voltage gain of the amplifier is :

  1. 2000
  2. 3000
  3. 4000
  4. 1000

Answer: 1. 2000

Question 24. For a given CE biasing circuit, if the voltage across the collector-emitter is 12V and current gain is 100, and the base current is 0.04 mA then determine the value collector resistance RC.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs For given CE biasing circuit,

  1. 1200
  2. 200
  3. 400
  4. 2000

Answer: 4. 2000

Question 25. The A-C current gain of a transistor is β= 19. In its common-emitter configuration, What will be the change in the emitter current for a change of 0.4 mA in the base current?

  1. 7.6 mA
  2. 7.2 mA
  3. 8 mA
  4. 6.8 mA

Answer: 3. 8 mA

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Section D: Logic Gates

Question 1. The truth table shown in the figure is for

  1. A 0 0 1 1
  2. B 0 1 0 1
  3. Y 1 0 0 1
  4. XOR
  5. AND
  6. XNOR
  7. OR

Answer: 1. XOR

Question 2. For the given combination of gates, if the logic states of inputs A, B, C are as follows A = B = C = 0 and A = B = 1, C = 0 then the logic states of output D are

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs For the given combination of gates,

  1. 0,0
  2. 0,1
  3. 1,0
  4. 1,1

Answer: 4. 1,1

Question 3. A gate has the following truth table

  1. P 1 1 0 0
  2. Q 1 0 1 0
  3. R 1 0 0 0

The gate is

  1. NOR
  2. OR
  3. NAND
  4. AND

Answer: 4. AND

Question 4. Which of the following gates will have an output of 1

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs gates will have an output of 1

Answer: 3.

Question 5. If A and B are two inputs in the AND gate, then the AND gate has an output of 1 when the values of A and B are

  1. A = 0, B = 0
  2. A = 1, B = 1
  3. A = 1, B = 0
  4. A = 0, B = 1

Answer: 4. A = 0, B = 1

Question 6. The Boolean equation of the NOR gate is

  1. C=A+B
  2. \(\mathrm{C}=\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\)
  3. C=A.B
  4. \(\mathrm{C}=\overline{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B}}\)

Answer: 1. C=A+B

Question 7. The following circuit represents

  1. OR gate
  2. XOr Gate
  3. AND gate
  4. NAND gate

Answer: 2. XOr Gate

Question 8. The following truth table represents which logic gate

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs logic gate

  1. XOR
  2. NOT
  3. NAND
  4. AND

Answer: 4. AND

Question 9. The given truth table is for which logic gate:-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs logic gate -

  1. NAND
  2. XOR
  3. NOR
  4. OR

Answer: 1. NAND

Question 10. The truth table is of the

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs NAND gate

  1. NAND gate
  2. OR gate
  3. NOT gate
  4. And gate

Answer: 1. NAND gate

Question 11. Zener dode is used for :-

  1. Rectification
  2. Stabilization
  3. Amplification
  4. Producing oscillations in an oscillator

Answer: 2. Stabilisation

Question 12. The output of the OR gate is 1:

  1. If either or both inputs are 1
  2. Only if both inputs are 1
  3. If either input is zero
  4. If both inputs are zero

Answer: 1. If either or both inputs are 1

Question 13. Name the type of gate used in the circuit given, find the relation between A, B, and Y, and draw the truth table.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The given logic gate

  1. AND gate
  2. NAND gate
  3. NOR gate
  4. OR gate

Answer: 1. AND gate

Question 14. The following figure shows a logic gate circuit with two inputs A and B and the output C. The voltage waveforms of A, B, and C are as shown below –

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The Voltage waveforms

The logic circuit gate is:-

  1. AND gate
  2. NAND gate
  3. NOR gate
  4. OR gate

Answer: 1. AND gate

Question 15. The circuit is equivalent to

  1. AND gate
  2. NAND gate
  3. NOR gate
  4. OR gate

Answer: 3. NOR gate

Question 16. In the circuit below, A and B represent two inputs and C represents the output.

  1. The circuit represents
  2. AND gate
  3. NAND gate
  4. OR gate
  5. NOR gate

Answer: 3. OR gate

Question 17. Given below are symbols for some logic gates

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs symbols for some logic gates

The XOR gate and NOR gate respectively are

  1. 1 and 2
  2. 2 and 3
  3. 3 and 4
  4. 1 and 4

Answer: 2. 2 and 3

Question 18. The following truth table corresponds to the logic gate

  1. A 0 0 1 1
  2. B 0 1 0 1
  3. X 0 1 1 1
  4. NAND
  5. OR
  6. AND
  7. XOR

Answer: 2. OR

Question 19. A truth table is given below. Which of the following has this type of truth table

  1. A 0 1 0 1
  2. B 0 0 1 1
  3. y 1 0 0 0
  4. XOR gate
  5. NOR gate
  6. AND gate
  7. OR gate

Answer: 2. AND gate

Question 20. An AND gate can be prepared by repetitive use of

  1. NOT gate
  2. OR gate
  3. NAND gate
  4. NOR gate

Answer: 4. NOR gate

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Exercise 2

Question 1. For a given circuit potential difference VAB is-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Circuit Potential Difference VAB is

  1. 10V
  2. 20V
  3. 30V
  4. None

Answer: 1. 10V

Question 2. The resistance of a discharge tube is:

  1. Zero
  2. Ohmic
  3. Non-ohmic
  4. Infinity

Answer: 3. Non-ohmic

Question 3. For a transistor \(\frac{I_c}{I_E}=0.96\) then current gain for common emitter configuration:

  1. 12
  2. 6
  3. 48
  4. 24

Answer: 4. 24

Question 4. For the given circuit of the P-N junction diode, which is correct

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs P-N junction diode

  1. In F.B. the voltage across R is V
  2. In R.B. the voltage across R is V
  3. In F.B. the voltage across R is 2 V
  4. In R.B. the voltage across R is 2 V

Answer: 1. In F.B. the voltage across R is V

Question 5. A sinusoidal voltage of peak-to-peak value of 310 V is connected in series with a diode and a load resistance R so that Half-wave rectification occurs. If the diode has negligible forward resistance, the root mean square voltage across the load resistance is

  1. 310 V
  2. 155 V
  3. 109.5 V
  4. 77.5

Answer: 4. 77.5

Question 6. A photocell employs the photoelectric effect to convert

  1. Change in the frequency of light into a change in electric voltage
  2. Change in the intensity of illumination into a change in photoelectric current
  3. Change in the intensity of illumination into a change in the work function of the photocathode
  4. Change in the frequency of light into a change in the electric current

Answer: 2. Change in the intensity of illumination into a change in photoelectric current

Question 7. Semiconductor Ge has a forbidden gap of 1.43 eV. Calculate the maximum wavelength that results from the electron-hole combination.

  1. 8654 Å
  2. 7650 Å
  3. 4982 Å
  4. 10500 Å

Answer: 1. 8654 Å

Question 8. 1. For a given transistor circuit, the base current is 10 A and the collector current is 5.2 mA. Can this transistor circuit be used as an amplifier? Your answer must be supported with a proper explanation.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Transistor circuit

Answer: yes, \(\beta=520\)

2. For a common emitter amplifier, the current gain is 69. If the emitter current is 7 mA then calculate the base current and collector current.

Answer: \(i_b=0.1 \mathrm{~mA}, \mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{c}}=6.9 \mathrm{Ma}\)

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Exercise 3 Part – 1: Neet Or Aipmt Question (Previous Years)

Question 1. A p-n photodiode is fabricated from a semiconductor with a band gap of 2.5 eV. It can detect a signal of wavelength

  1. 6000 Å
  2. 4000 nm
  3. 6000 nm
  4. 4000 Å

Answer: 4. 4000 Å

Question 2. The symbolic representation of four logic gates

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The symbolic representation of four logic gates

The logic symbols for OR, NOT, and NAND gates are respectively

  1. (1) (3), (4), (2)
  2. (2) (4), (1), (3)
  3. (3) (4), (2), (1)
  4. (4) (1), (3), (4)

Answer: 3. (3) (4), (2), (1)

Question 3.

  1. Draw the circuit diagram of the reversed bias p-n junction.
  2. Draw the output waveform across the diode in the given circuit.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The output wavefrom across diode in given circuit

3. Draw the truth table for the given logic gate.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The given logic gate

Question 4. Which one of the following statements is false?

  1. Pure Si doped with trivalent impurities gives a p-type semiconductor.
  2. The majority of carriers in a n-type semiconductor are holes.
  3. Minority carriers in a p-type semiconductor are electrons.
  4. The resistance of intrinsic semiconductors decreases with an increase in temperature.

Answer: 2. Majority of carriers in a n-type semiconductor are holes.

Question 5. The device that acts as a complete electronic circuit is

  1. Junction diode
  2. Integrated circuit
  3. Junction transistor
  4. Zener diode

Answer: 2. Integrated circuit

Question 6. A common emitter amplifier has a voltage gain of 50, an input impedance of 100, and an output impedance of 200. The power gain of the amplifier is

  1. 500
  2. 1000
  3. 1250
  4. 50

Answer: 3. 1250

Question 7. To get an output Y = 1 from the circuit shown below the input must be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs To get an output

  1. 0 1 0
  2. 0 0 1
  3. 1 0 1
  4. 1 0 0

Answer: 3. 1 0 1

Question 8. The following figure shows a logic gate circuit with two inputs A and B and the output Y. The voltage waveforms of A, B, and Y are as given.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Logical Gate cirucit

The logic gate is

  1. NOR gate
  2. OR gate
  3. AND gate
  4. NAND gate

Answer: 4. NAND gate

Question 9. In the following figure, the diodes which are forward-biased, are:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The diodes which are forward biased

  1. (3) only
  2. (3) and (1)
  3. (2) and (4)
  4. (1), (2), and (4)

Answer: 2. (3) and (1)

Question 10. Pure Si at 500K has an equal number of electron (n e) and hole (NH) concentrations of 1.5 × 1016 m–3. Doping by indium increases n h to 4.5 x 1022 m–3. The doped semiconductor is of:

  1. n-type with electron concentration n e = 5 × 1022 m–3
  2. p-type with electron concentration n e = 2.5 ×1010 m–3
  3. n-type with electron concentration n e = 2.5 × 1023 m–3
  4. p-type having electron concentrations n e = 5 × 109 m–3

Answer: 4. p-type having electron concentrations n e = 5 × 109 m–3

Question 11. A Zener diode, having a breakdown voltage equal to 15V, is used in a voltage regulator circuit shown in the figure. The current through the diode is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A zener diode

  1. 10 mA
  2. 15 mA
  3. 20 mA
  4. 5 mA

Answer: 4. 5 mA

Question 12. A transistor is operated in a common emitter configuration at VC = 2V such that a change in the base current from 100 μA to 300 μA produces a change in the collector current from 10 mA to 20 mA. The current gain is:

  1. 50
  2. 75
  3. 100
  4. 25

Answer: 1. 50

Question 13. In forward biasing of the p–n junction:

  1. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to p–the side and the depletion region becomes thick
  2. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to n–the side and the depletion region becomes thin
  3. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to n–the side and the depletion region becomes thick
  4. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to p–the side and the depletion region becomes thin

Answer: 4. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to p–side and the depletion region becomes thin

Question 14. Symbolic representations of four logic gates are shown as:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs symbols for some logic gates

Pick out which ones are for AND, NAND, and NOT gates, respectively:

  1. (1) (2), (3) and (4)
  2. (2) (3), (2) and (1)
  3. (3) (3), (3) and (4)
  4. (4) (2), (4) and (3)

Answer: 4. (4) (2), (4) and (3)

Question 15. If a small amount of pentavalent atoms is added to germanium crystal:

  1. It becomes a P-type semiconductor
  2. The antimony becomes an acceptor atom
  3. There will be more free electrons than holes in the semiconductor
  4. Its resistance is increased

Answer: 3. There will be more free electrons than holes in the semiconductor

Question 16. Two ideal diodes are connected to a battery as shown in the circuit. The current supplied by the battery is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Two ideal diodes

  1. 0.75 A
  2. Zero
  3. 0.25 A
  4. 0.5 A

Answer: 4. 0.5 A

Question 17. In a CE transistor amplifier, the audio signal voltage across the collector resistance of 2k is 2V. If the base resistance is 1k and the current amplification of the transistor is 100, the input signal voltage is:

  1. 0.1 V
  2. 1.0 V
  3. 1 mV
  4. 10 mV

Answer: 4. 10 mV

Question 18. C and Si both have the same lattice structure, having 4 bonding electrons in each. However, C is an insulator where as Si is intrinsic semiconductor. This is because:

  1. In the case of C the valence band is not filled at absolute zero temperature.
  2. In the case of C the conduction band is partly filled even at absolute zero temperature.
  3. The four bonding electrons in the case of C lie in the second orbit, whereas in the case of Si, they lie in the third.
  4. The four bonding electrons in the case of C lie in the third orbit, whereas for Si they lie in the fourth orbit.

Answer: 3. The four bonding electrons in the case of C lie in the second orbit, whereas in the case of Si, they lie in the third.

Question 19. Transfer characteristics [output voltage (V 0) vs input voltage (Vi )] for a base-biased transistor in CE configuration are shown in the figure. For using a transistor as a switch, it is used:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Output voltage (V0) vs input voltage

  1. In region 3
  2. Both in the region (1) and (3)
  3. In region 2
  4. In region 1

Answer: 2. Both in regions (1) and (3)

Question 20. The figure shows a logic circuit with two inputs A and B and the output C. The voltage waveforms across A, B, and C are as given. The logic circuit gate is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The voltage wave forms

  1. OR gate
  2. NOR gate
  3. AND gate
  4. NAND gate

Answer: 1. OR gate

Question 21. The input resistance of a silicon transistor is 100Ω. Base current is changed by 40 mA which results in a change in collector current by 2 mA. This transistor is used as a common emitter amplifier with a load resistance of 4 KΩ. The voltage gain of the amplifier is:

  1. 2000
  2. 3000
  3. 4000
  4. 1000

Answer: 1. 2000

Question 22. To get an output Y = 1 in a given circuit which of the following inputs will be correct:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs To get an output Y = 1

Answer: 2.

Question 23. In a n-type semiconductor, which of the following statement is true:

  1. Electrons are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are dopants.
  2. Holes are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are dopants.
  3. Holes are majority carriers and trivalent atoms are dopants.
  4. Electrons are majority carriers and trivalent atoms are dopants.

Answer: Holes are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are dopants.

Question 24. In a common emitter (CE) amplifier having a voltage gain of G, the transistor used has a transconductance of 0.03 mho and a current gain of 25. If the above transistor is replaced with another one with a transconductance of 0.02 mho and a current gain of 20, the voltage gain will be:

  1. 1.5 G
  2. \(\frac{1}{3} G\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{4} G\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3} G\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{2}{3} G\)

Question 25. The output(X) of the logic circuit shown in the figure will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The output(X) of the logic circuit

  1. \(X=\overline{A \cdot B}\)
  2. X = A.B
  3. \(X=\overline{A+B}\)
  4. \(X=\overline{\bar{A}}, \overline{\bar{B}}\)

Answer: 2. X = A.B

Question 26. The given graph represents the V- I characteristic of a semiconductor device.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs semiconductor device.

Which of the following statements is correct?

  1. It is a V – I characteristic for solar cells where point A represents open circuit voltage and point B short circuit current.
  2. It is for a solar cell and points A and B represent open circuit voltage and current, respectively.
  3. It is for a photodiode and points A and B represent open circuit voltage and current respectively.
  4. It is for an LED and points A and B represent open circuit voltage and short circuit current, respectively.

Answer: 1. It is a V – I characteristic for solar cells where point A represents open circuit voltage and point B short circuit current.

Question 27. The barrier potential of a p-n junction depends on:

  1. Type of semiconductor material
  2. Amount of doping
  3. Temperature

Which one of the following is correct?

  1. (1) and (2) only
  2. (2) only
  3. (2) and (3) only
  4. (1), (2), and (3)

Answer: 4. (1), (2) and (3)

Question 28. Which logic gate is represented by the following combination of logic gates?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs combination of logic gate

  1. NAND
  2. AND
  3. NOR
  4. OR

Answer: 2. AND

Question 29. To get output 1 for the following circuit, the correct choice for the input is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs To get output 1 for the following circuit,

  1. A = 1, B = 0, C = 1
  2. A = 0, B = 1, C = 0
  3. A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
  4. A = 1, B = 1, C = 0

Answer: 1. A = 1, B = 0, C = 1

Question 30. Consider the junction diode as ideal. The value of current flowing through AB is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The junction diode as ideal

  1. 10–3 A
  2. 0 A
  3. 10–2 A
  4. 10–1 A

Answer: 3. 10–2 A

Question 31. An NPN transistor is connected in a common emitter configuration in a given amplifier. A load resistance of 800 is connected in the collector circuit and the voltage drop across it is 0.8 V. If the current amplification factor is 0.96 and the input resistance of the circuit is 192, the voltage gain and the power gain of the amplifier will respectively be:

  1. 4,3.69
  2. 4,3.84
  3. 3.69, 3.84
  4. 4, 4

Answer: 2. 4,3.84

Question 32. The given electrical network is equivalent to

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Electrical network is equivalent to

  1. AND gate
  2. OR gate
  3. NOR gate
  4. NOT gate

Answer: 3. NOR gate

Question 33. In a common emitter transistor amplifier, the audio signal voltage across the collector is 3V. The resistance of the collector is 3k. If the current gain is 100 and the base resistance is 2k, the voltage and power gain of the amplifier are:

  1. 200 and 1000
  2. 15 and 200
  3. 150 and 15000
  4. 20 and 2000

Answer: 3. 150 and 15000

Question 34. Which one of the following represents the forward bias diode?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs bias diode

Answer: 1.

Question 35. In the circuit shown in the figure, the input voltage Vi is 20 V, VBE = 0, and VCE = 0. The values of I B, I C and are given by

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs he input voltage

  1. IB = 40 IA, IC = 10 mA, β = 250
  2. IB = 40 IA, IC = 5 mA, β= 125
  3. IB = 20 IA, IC = 5 mA, β = 250
  4. IB = 25 IA, IC = 5 mA, β= 200

Answer: 2. IB = 40 IA, IC = 5 mA, β= 125

Question 36. In a p-n junction diode, change in temperature due to heating

  1. Affects only reverse resistance
  2. Affects the overall V – I characteristics of p-n junction
  3. Does not affect the resistance of the p-n junction
  4. Affects only forward resistance

Answer: 2. Affects the overall V – I characteristics of p-n junction

Question 37. In the combination of the following gates the output Y can be written in terms of inputs A and B as

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Gates the output Y

  1. \(\overline{A \cdot B}\)
  2. \(\overline{A+B}\)
  3. \(\overline{A \cdot B}+A \cdot B\)
  4. \(\text { A. } \bar{B}+\bar{A} \cdot B\)

Answer: 4. \(\text { A. } \bar{B}+\bar{A} \cdot B\)

Question 38. For a p-type semiconductor, which of the following statements is true?

  1. Electrons are the majority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.
  2. Electrons are the majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.
  3. Holes are the majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.
  4. Holes are the majority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.

Answer: 3. Holes are the majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.

Question 39. The correct Boolean operation represented by the circuit diagram drawn is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The correct Boolean operation

  1. NOR
  2. AND
  3. OR
  4. NAND

Answer: 4. NAND

Question 40. An LED is constructed from a p-n junction diode using GaAsP. The energy gap is 1.9 eV. The wavelength of the light emitted will be equal to

  1. 10.4 x 10–26 m
  2. 654 nm
  3. 654 Å
  4. 654 x 10–11 m

Answer: 1. NAND

Question 41. The circuit diagram shown here corresponds to the logic gate.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Corresponds to the logic gate

  1. NOR
  2. AND
  3. OR
  4. NAND

Answer: 4. NAND

Question 42. Out of the following which one is a forward-biased diode?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs biased diode

Answer: 4.

Question 43. A n-p-n transistor is connected in a common emitter configuration (see figure) in which the collector voltage drop across load resistance (800 ) connected to the collector circuit is 0.8 V. The collector current is:

  1. 2 mA
  2. 0.1 mA
  3. 1 mA
  4. 0.2 Ma

Answer: 3. 1 mA

Question 44. Which of the following gates is called a universal gate?

  1. OR gate
  2. AND gate
  3. NAND gate
  4. NOT gate

Answer: 3. NAND gate

Question 45. An intrinsic semiconductor is converted into an n-type extrinsic semiconductor by doping it with

  1. Phosphorous
  2. Aluminium
  3. Silver
  4. Germanium

Answer: 1. Phosphorous

Question 46. The increase in the width of the depletion region in a p-n junction diode is due to:

  1. Increase in forward current
  2. Forward bias only
  3. Reverse bias only
  4. Both forward bias and reverse bias

Answer: 3. Reverse bias only

Question 47. For transistor action which of the following statements is correct?

  1. The base region must be very thin and lightly doped.
  2. Base, emitter, and collector regions should have the same doping concentration
  3. Base, emitter, and collector regions should have the same size
  4. Both the emitter junction as well as the collector junction are forward-biased

Answer: 1. The base region must be very thin and lightly doped.

Question 48. The electron concentration in an n-type semiconductor is the same as the hole concentration in a p-type semiconductor. An external field (electric) is applied across each of them. Compare the currents in them

  1. Current in p-type > current in n-type
  2. Current in n-type > current in p-type
  3. No current will flow in p-type, current will only flow in n-type
  4. Current in n-type = current in p-type

Answer: 2. Current in n-type > current in p-type

Question 49. Consider the following Statements (1) and (2) and identify the correct answer.

  1. A zener diode is connected in reverse bias when used as a voltage regulator.
  2. The potential barrier of the p-n junction lies between 0.1 V to 0.3 V
  3. (1) and (2) both are incorrect
  4. (1) is correct and (2) is incorrect
  5. (1) is incorrect but (2) is correct
  6. (1) and (2) both are correct

Answer: 2. (1) is correct and (2) is incorrect

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Part – 2 Aims Question (Previous Years)

Question 1. In the following common emitter configuration, an NPN transistor with a current gain = 100 is used. The output voltage of the amplifier will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The Output voltage of the amplifer will be

  1. 10 mV
  2. 0.1 V
  3. 1.0 V
  4. 10 V

Answer: 3. 1.0 V

Question 2. The temperature (T) dependence of the resistivity of a semiconductor is represented by

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The temperature (T) dependence of resistivity () of a semiconductor is represented by

Answer: 3.

Question 3. Which logic gate is represented by the following combination of logic gates?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Logic Gate Is Represented By The Following Combination Of Logic Gates - Copy

  1. OR
  2. NAND
  3. AND
  4. NOR

Answer: 3. AND

Question 4. A transistor connected at common emitter mode contains a load resistance of 5 k and an input resistance of 1 k. If the input peak voltage is 5 mV and the current gain is 50, find the voltage gain.

  1. 250
  2. 500
  3. 125
  4. 50

Answer: 1. 250

Part – 3: Jee (Main) Or Aieee Problems (Previous Years)

Question 1. The logic circuit shown below has the input waveforms ‘A’ and ‘B’ as shown. Pick out the correct output waveform.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The logic circuit

Answer: 4.

Question 2. A p-n junction (D) shown in the figure can act as a rectifier. An alternating current source (V) is connected to the circuit.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A p-n junction

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The current () in the resistor (R)

Answer: 2.

Question 3. The output of an OR gate is connected to both the inputs of a NAND gate. The combination will serve as a:

  1. NOT gate
  2. NOR gate
  3. AND gate
  4. OR gate

Answer: 2. NOR gate

Question 4. The truth table for a system of four NAND gates as shown in the figure is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Truth table for system of four NAND gates

Answer: 1.

Question 5. The forward-biased diode connection is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs bias diode

Answer: 1.

Question 6. The temperature dependence of resistances of Cu and undoped Si in the temperature range 300 – 400 K, is best described by:

  1. Linear increase for Cu, exponential increase for Si
  2. Linear increase for Cu, exponential decrease for Si
  3. Linear decrease for Cu, linear decrease for Si
  4. Linear increase for Cu, linear increase for Si

Answer: 2. Linear increase for Cu, exponential decrease for Si

Question 7. If a,b,c,d are inputs to a gate and x is its output, then, as per the following time graph, the gate is:

  1. AND
  2. OR
  3. NAND
  4. NOT

Answer: 2. OR

Question 8. Identify the semiconductor devices whose characteristics are given below, in the order (1),(2),(3),(4)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Identify the semiconductor devices

  1. Zener diode, simple diode, Light dependent resistance, Solar cell
  2. Solar cell, Light dependent resistance, Zener diode, simple diode
  3. Zener diode, Solar cell, Simple diode, Light dependent resistance
  4. Simple diode, Zener diode, Solar cell, Light dependent resistance.

Answer: 4. Simple diode, Zener diode, Solar cell, Light-dependent resistance.

Question 9. For a common emitter configuration, if α and β have their usual meanings, the incorrect relationship between α and β is.

  1. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta}{1-\beta}\)
  2. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta}{1+\beta}\)
  3. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta^2}{1+\beta^2}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\alpha}=\frac{1}{\beta}+1\)

Answer: 1.

  1. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta}{1-\beta}\)
  2. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta^2}{1+\beta^2}\)

Question 10. In a common emitter amplifier circuit using an n-p-n transistor, the phase difference between the input and the output voltages will be:

  1. 180°
  2. 45°
  3. 90°
  4. 135°

Answer: 1. 180°

Question 11. The reading of the ammeter for a silicon diode in the given circuit is:

  1. 11.5mA
  2. 13.5 mA
  3. 0
  4. 15 mA

Answer: 1. 11.5mA

Question 12. The mobility of electrons in a semiconductor is defined as the ratio of their drift velocity to the applied electric field. If, for an n-type semiconductor, the density of electrons is 1019 m-3 and their mobility is 1.6 m2/(V.s) then the resistivity of the semiconductor (since it is an n-type semiconductor (since it is an n-type semiconductor contribution of holes is ignored) is close to:

  1. 4Ωm
  2. 0.4Ωm
  3. 0.2Ωm
  4. 2Ωm

Answer: 2. 0.4Ωm

Question 13. Ge and Si diodes start conducting at 0.3 V and 0.7 V respectively. In the following figure if the Ge diode connection is reversed, the value of V0 changes by: (assume that the Ge diode has a large breakdown voltage)

  1. 0.6 V
  2. 0.2 V
  3. 0.4 V
  4. 0.8 V

Answer: 3. 0.4 V

Question 14. To get output ‘1’ at R, for the given logic gate circuit the input values must be:

  1. X = 1, Y = 1
  2. X = 0, Y = 0
  3. X = 0, Y = 1
  4. X = 1, Y = 0

Answer: 4. X = 1, Y = 0

Question 15. For the circuit shown below, the current through the Zener diode is:

  1. 14 mA
  2. 9 mA
  3. Zero
  4. 5 mA

Answer: 2. 9 mA

Question 16. The circuit shown below contains two ideal diodes, each with a forward resistance of 50Ω. If the battery voltage is 6 V, the current through the 100Ω resistance (in Amperes) is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the current through the 100 resistance

  1. 0.020
  2. 0.030
  3. 0.027
  4. 0.036

Answer: 1. 0.020

Question 17. In the given circuit the current through the Zener Diode is close to:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The current through Zener Diode

  1. 0.0 mA
  2. 6.7 mA
  3. 6.0 mA
  4. 4.0 mA

Answer: 1. 0.0 mA

Question 18. In the figure, given that supply can vary from 0 to 5.0 V, VCC= 5V,βdc= 200, RB= 100 kΩ, RC= 1 kΩ, and VBE= 1.0 V. The minimum base current and the input voltage at which the transistor will go to saturation will be, respectively:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The minimum base current and the input voltage

  1. 25μA and 2.8 V
  2. 20μA and 3.5 V
  3. 20μA and 2.8 V
  4. 25μA and 3.5 V

Answer: 4. 25μA and 3.5 V

Question 19. The output ofthe given logic circuit is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs logic circuit - Copy

  1. \(A \bar{B}+\bar{A} B\)
  2. \(\overline{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{B}\)
  3. \(A \bar{B}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{AB}+\overline{\mathrm{AB}}\)

Answer: 3. \(A \bar{B}\)

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Self Practice Paper

Question 1. In the circuit shown in the figure, A.C. of peak value 200 volts is being rectified. As compared to the resistance R, the diode resistance is negligible, the r.m.s. value of potential across the R in volts will be approximately_____

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A.C. of peak value 200 volts

  1. 200
  2. 100
  3. \(\frac{200}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  4. 280

Answer: 2. 100

Question 2. A semiconductor X is made by doping a germanium crystal with arsenic (Z = 33). A second semiconductor Y is made by doping germanium with indium (Z = 49). The two are joined end to end and connected to a battery as shown. Which of the following statements is correct_____

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A semi-conductor X

  1. X is p-type, Y is n-type and the junction is forward biased.
  2. X is n-type, Y is p-type and the junction is forward biased.
  3. X is p-type, Y is n-type and the junction is reverse-biased.
  4. X is n-type, Y is p-type and the junction is reverse-biased.

Answer: 4. X is n-type, Y is p-type, and the junction is reverse-biased.

Question 3. In the following figure, a battery of 2 volts is connected between A and B. It is assumed that the resistance of a diode is zero in forward bias and infinite in reverse bias. If the positive terminal of the battery is connected to A, then the current flowing in the circuit will be________

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A battery of 2 volt is connected between A and B.

  1. 0.1 A
  2. 0.2 A
  3. 0.3 A
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 0.2 A

Question 4. The reverse current in a P- N junction diode at low reverse voltage is 25µA. The value of forward current at a forward voltage of 0.05 V will be if \(\frac{K T}{e}=0.025\) Volt_______

  1. 16 mA
  2. 1.6 mA
  3. 0.16 mA
  4. 160 mA

Answer: 3. 0.16 mA

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes For Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments Errors In Measurement

To get an overview of error, least count, and significant figures, consider the example below.

Suppose we have to measure the length of a rod. How can we?

1. Let’s use a cm scale: (a scale on which only cm marks are there)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A cm Scale

We will measure length = 4 cm

Although the length will be a bit more than 4, we cannot say its length to be 4.1 cm or 4.2 cm, as the scale can measure upto cm only, not closer than that.

It (this scale) can measure upto cm accuracy only.

so we’ll say that its least count is 1 cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Least Count

2. Let us use an mm scale: (a scale on which mm marks are there)

We will measure length “l”= 4.2 cm, which is a closer measurement. Here also if we observe closely, we’ll find that the length is a bit more than 4.2, but we cannot say its length to be 4.21, 4.22, or 4.20 as this scale can measure upto 0.1 cms (1 mm) only, not closer than that.

It (this scale) can measure upto 0.1 cm accuracy

Its least count is 0.1 cm

Max uncertainty in “l” can be = 0.1cm

Max possible error in “l” can be = 0.1cm

Measurement of length = 4.2 cm. has two significant figures; 4 and 2, in which 4 is correct, and 2 is reasonably correct (Doubtful) because uncertainty of 0.1 cm is there.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To Get Closer Measurment

3. We can use Vernier calipers: ( which can measure more closely, upto 0.01 cm)

Then we’ll measure length “l” = 4.23 cm which is more closer measurement.

It can measure upto 0.01 cm accuracy

Least count = 0.01 cm Max uncertainty in “l” can be = 0.01cm

Max possible error in “l” can be = 0.01cm

Measurement of length = 4.23 cm. has three significant figures; 4, 2, and 3, in which 4 and 2 are correct, and 3 is reasonably correct (Doubtful) because uncertainty of 0.01 cm is there.

To get further closer measurement:-

4. We can use a Screw Gauge: ( which can measure more closely, upto 0.001 cm )

  • We’ll measure length l = 4.234 cm.
  • Max possible uncertainty (error) in l can be = 0.001 cm
  • Length = 4.234 cm. has four significant figures; 4, 2, 3 and 4.
  • Reasonably
  • Correct correct correct correct
  • To get a furthermore closer measurement

5. We can use a microscope:

  • We’ll measure length l = 4.2342 cm.
  • Max possible uncertainty (error) in l can be = 0.0001cm
  • length = 4.2342cm. has five significant figures; 4, 2, 3, 4, and 2

2. Significant Figures

From the above example, we can conclude that, in a measured quantity, Significant figures are = correct Figures + The first uncertain figure

Common rules of counting significant figures:

Rule 1:

  • All non-zero digits are significant e.i. 123.56 has five S.F.

Rule 2:

  • All zeros occurring between two non-zeros digits are significant (obviously) e.i. 1230.05 has six S.F.

Rule 3:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Common Rules Of Counting

So trailing zeroes after the decimal place is significant (Shows further accuracy) Once a measurement is done, significant figures will be decided according to the closeness of measurement.

Now if we want to display the measurement in some different units, the S.F. shouldn’t change (S.F. depends only on the accuracy of measurement) Number of S.F. is always conserved, change of units cannot change the S.F. Suppose measurement was done using mm scale, and we get = 85 mm (Two S. F.) If we want to display it in other units.

All should have two S.F.

The following rules support the conservation of S.F.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Suppose Measurement Was Done Using mm Scale

Rule 4:

From the previous example, we have seen that 8 and 5, So leading Zeros are not significant.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Rule 5

In the number less than one, all zeros after the decimal point and to the left of the first non-zero digit are insignificant (arises only due to change of unit)

0.000305 has three S.F.

⇒ 3.05 × 10–4 has three S.F.

Rule 5:

From the previous example, we have also seen that, 8 and 5. So the trailing zeros are also not
significant.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Zeroes

The terminal or trailing zeros in a number without a decimal point are not significant. (Also arises only due to change of unit)

154 m = 15400 cm = 15400 mm = 154 × 109 nm

All have only three S.F. All trailing zeros are insignificant

Rule 6:

There are certain measurements, that are exact i.e

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Rule 6

Number of apples are = 12 (exactly) = 12.000000……….∞

This type of measurement is infinitely accurate so, it has ∞ S.F.

  • Numbers of students in class = 125 (exact)
  • Speed of light in the vacuum = 299,792,458 m/s (exact)

Solved Examples:

Example 1. Count the total number of S.F. in 3.0800
Solution: S.F. = Five, as trailing zeros after decimal place are significant.

Example 2. Count the total number of S.F. in 0.00418
Solution: S.F. = Three, as leading zeros are not significant.

Example 3. Count the total number of S.F. in 3500
Solution: S.F. = Two, the trailing zeros are not significant.

Example 4. Count the total number of S.F. in 300.00
Solution: S.F. = Five, trailing zeros after the decimal point are significant.

Example 5. Count the total number of S.F. in 5.003020
Solution: S.F. = Seven, the trailing zeros after the decimal place are significant.

Example 6. Count the total number of S.F. in 6.020 × 1023
Solution: S.F. = Four; 6, 0, 2, 0; remaining 23 zeros are not significant.

Example 7. Count the total number of S.F. in 1.60 × 10–19
Solution: S.F. = Three; 1, 6, 0; remaining 19 zeros are not significant.

Operations according to significant figures:

Now let’s see how to do arithmetic operations ie. addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division according to significant figures

Addition ←→ subtraction

For this, let’s consider the example given below. In a simple pendulum, the length of the thread is measured (from mm scale) as 75.4 cm. and the radius of the bob is measured (from vernier) as 2.53 cm. Find leg = l+ radius

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments In a simple pendulum

l is known upto 0.1 cm( first decimal place) only. We don’t know what is at the next decimal place. So we can write l =75.4 cm = 75.4? cm and the radius r = 2.53 cm. If we add l and r, we don’t know which number will be added with 3. So we have to leave that position.

leq= 75.4? + 2.53 = 77.9? cm = 77.9 cm

Rules for Addition ←→ subtraction: (based on the previous example)

  • First, do the addition/subtraction in the normal manner.
  • Then round off all quantities to the decimal place of the least accurate quantity.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Suppose Measurement Was Done Using mm Scale

Rules for Multiply ←→ Division

Suppose we have to multiply 2.11 x 1.2 = 2.11. x 1.2?

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Rules for Multiply

  1. Multiply divide in the normal manner.
  2. Round off the answer to the weakest link (number having the least S.F.)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Round off the answer to the weakest link

Solved Example

Example 8. A cube has a side l= 1.2 × 10–2 m. Calculate its volume
Solution: l= 1.2 × 10–2

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A cube has a side

Rules of Rounding off

If the removable digit is less than 5 (50%); drop it.

⇒ \(47.833 \frac{\text { Round off }}{\text { till one decimal place }} 47.8\)

If the removable digit is greater than 5(50%), increase the last digit by 1.

⇒ \(47.862 \frac{\text { Round off }}{\text { till one decimal place }} 47.9\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Rules of Rounding off 3

Example 9. Using a screw gauge radius of the wire was found to be 2.50 mm. The length of wire found by mm. scale is 50.0 cm. If the mass of the wire was measured as 25 gm, the density of the wire in the correct S.F. will be (use π = 3.14 exactly )
Solution: 

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Using screw gauge radius of wire was found to be 2.50 mm

Least Count

We have studied (from page 1) that no measurement is perfect. Every instrument can measure upto a certain accuracy; called least count.

Least count: The Smallest quantity an institution can measure

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Least Count.

Permissible Error

Error in measurement due to the limitation (least count) of the instrument, is called permissible error. From the mm scale → we can measure upto 1 mm accuracy (least count = 1mm). From this, we will get measurements like Δl = 34 mm

But if from any other instrument, we get l= 34.5 mm then max permissible error (Δl) = 0.1 mm, and if from a more accurate instrument, we get l= 34.527 mm then max permissible error (Δl) = 0.001 mm = place value of last number.

Max. Permissible Error In Result Due To Error In Each Measurable Quantity:

Let Result f(x, y) contain two measurable quantities x and y

Let error in x = ± Δx i.e. x Δ (x – Δx, x + Δx) error in y = ± Δy i.e. y Δ (y – Δy, y + Δy)

Case: (1) If f(x, y) = x + y df = dx + dy error in f = Δf = ± Δx ± Δy max possible error in f = (Δf)max = max of (± Δx ± Δy) (Δf)max = Δx + Δy

Case: (2) If f = x – y df = dx – dy (Δf) = ± Δx + Δy

max possible error in f = (Δf)max = max of (± Δx± Δy)

(Δf)max = Δx + Δy

For getting a maximum permissible error, the sign should be adjusted, so that errors get added up to give maximum effect

i.e. f = 2x – 3y – z

(Δf)max = 2Δx + 3Δy + Δz

Solved Examples

Example 11. In resonance tube exp. we find l1 = 25.0 cm and l2 = 75.0 cm. The least count of the scale used to measure l is 0.1 cm. If there is no error in frequency What will be max permissible error in speed of sound (take f0 = 325 Hz.)
Solution: V = 2f0 (l2– l1)

(dV) = 2f0 (dl2 – dl1)

(ΔV)max = max of [2f0(± Δl2 + Δl2] = 2f0 (Δl2 + Δl1)

Δl1 = least count of the scale = 0.1 cm

Δl2 = least count of the scale = 0.1 cm

So max permissible error in speed of sound (ΔV)max = 2(325Hz) (0.1 cm + 0.1 cm) = 1.3 m/s Value of V = 2f

0 (l2 – l1) = 2(325Hz) (75.0 cm – 25.0 cm) = 325 m/s so V = ( 325 ± 1.3 ) m/s

Case (3) If f(x, y, z) = (constant) maybe to scatter all the terms, Let’s take log on both sides ln f = ln (constant) + a ln x + b ln y + c ln z

↓ Differentiating both sides

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{d f}{f}=0+a \frac{d x}{x}+b \frac{d y}{y}+c \frac{d z}{z} \\
& \frac{\Delta f}{f}= \pm a \frac{\Delta x}{x} \pm b \frac{\Delta y}{y} \pm c \frac{d z}{z}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒\(\begin{aligned}
& \left(\frac{\Delta f}{f}\right)_{\max }=\max \text { of }\left( \pm \mathrm{a} \frac{\Delta x}{x} \pm \mathrm{b} \frac{\Delta y}{y} \pm c \frac{\Delta z}{z}\right) \\
& \text { i.e. } \quad f=15 x^2 y^{-3 / 2} z^{-5}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{d f}{f}=0+2 \frac{d x}{x}-\frac{3}{2} \frac{d y}{y}-5 \frac{d z}{z} \\
& \frac{\Delta f}{f}= \pm 2 \frac{\Delta x}{x} \mp \frac{3}{2} \frac{\Delta y}{y} \mp 5 \frac{d z}{z}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta f}{f}\right)_{\max }=\max \text { of }\left( \pm 2 \frac{\Delta x}{x} \mp \frac{3}{2} \frac{\Delta y}{y} \mp 5 \frac{\Delta z}{z}\right)\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta f}{f}\right)_{\max }=2 \frac{\Delta x}{x}+\frac{3}{2} \frac{\Delta y}{y}+5 \frac{\Delta z}{z}\)

Solved Examples

Example 12. If the measured value of resistance R = 1.05Ω, wire diameter d = 0.60 mm, and length l= 75.3 cm. If the maximum error in resistance measurement is 0.01Ω   and the least count of diameter and length measuring device are 0.01 mm and 0.1 cm respectively, then find max. permissible error.

⇒ \(\text { in resistivity } \quad \rho=\frac{R\left(\frac{\pi d^2}{4}\right)}{\ell}\)

Solution: \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta R}{R}+2 \frac{\Delta d}{d}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}\)

ΔR = 0.01
Δd = 0.01 mm (least count)
Δl = 0.1 cm (least count)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.01 \Omega}{1.05 \Omega}+2 \frac{0.01 \mathrm{~mm}}{0.60 \mathrm{~mm}}+\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~cm}}{75.3 \mathrm{~cm}}\right) \times 100=4.3 \% .\)

Example 13. In Ohm’s law experiment, the potential drop across a resistance was measured as v = 5.0 volt and the current was measured as i = 2.0 amp. If the least count of the voltmeter and ammeter are 0.1 V and 0.01A respectively then find the maximum permissible error in resistance.
solution: \(R=\frac{v}{i}=v \times i^{-1}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta R}{R}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta v}{v}+\frac{\Delta i}{i}\)

Δv = 0.1 volt (least count)
Δi = 0.01 amp (least count)

⇒ \(\%\left(\frac{\Delta R}{R}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1}{5.0}+\frac{0.01}{2.00}\right) \times 100 \%=2.5 \%\)

Example 14. In Searle’s exp to find Young’s modulus, the diameter of wire is measured as D = 0.050 cm, the length of wire is L = 125 cm, and when a weight, m = 20.0 kg is put, extension in the length of the wire was found to be 0.100 cm. Find the maximum permissible error in Young’s modulus (Y).
Solution: \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{d}^2 / 4}=Y\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\ell}\right) \quad \Rightarrow \quad Y=\frac{\mathrm{mg} \ell}{(\pi / 4) \mathrm{d}^2 x}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta Y}{Y}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta m}{m}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+2 \frac{\Delta d}{d}+\frac{\Delta x}{x}\)

Here no information on least count is given so the maximum permissible error is  = place value of the last number.

m = 20.0 kg m = 0.1 kg (place value of the last number)

l= 125 cm = 1 cm (place value of last number)

d = 0.050 cm d = 0.001 cm (place value of the last number)

x = 0.100 cm x = 0.001 cm (place value of the last number)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta Y}{Y}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~kg}}{20.0 \mathrm{~kg}}+\frac{1 \mathrm{~cm}}{125 \mathrm{~cm}}+\frac{0.001 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.05 \mathrm{~cm}} \times 2+\frac{0.001 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.100 \mathrm{~cm}}\right) \times 100 \%=6.3 \%\)

Example 15. To find the value of ‘g’ using a simple pendulum. T = 2.00 sec; l = 1.00 m was measured. Estimate maximum permissible error in ‘g’. Also, find the value of ‘g’. ( use pi2 = 10 )
Solution:

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}=2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\ell}{\mathrm{g}}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{g}=\frac{4 \pi^2 \ell}{\mathrm{T}^2}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{T}} \quad=\left(\frac{0.01}{1.00}+2 \frac{0.01}{2.00}\right) \times 100 \% . \quad=2 \%\)

⇒ \(\text { value of } \mathrm{g}=\frac{4 \pi^2 \ell}{\mathrm{T}^2}=\frac{4 \times 10 \times 1.00}{(2.00)^2}=10.0 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\right)_{\max }=2 / 100 \text { so } \frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}_{\max }}{10.0}=\frac{2}{100} \text { so } \quad(\Delta \mathrm{g})_{\max }=0.2=\text { max error in ‘ } \mathrm{g} \text { ‘ }\)

So g = (10.0+0.2) m/s2

Other Types Of Errors:

1. Error due to external Causes:

These are the errors that arise due to reasons beyond the control of the experimentalist, e.g., change in room temperature, atmospheric pressure, humidity, variation of the accretion due to gravity, etc.

A suitable correction can, however, be applied for these errors if the factors affecting the result are also recorded.

2. Instrumental errors:

Every instrument, however cautiously manufactured, possesses imperfection to some extent. As a result of this imperfection, the measurements with the instrument cannot be free from errors.

Errors, however small, do occur owing to the inherent manufacturing defects in the measuring instruments and are called instrumental errors.

These errors are of constant magnitude and suitable corrections can be applied for these errors. e.i.. Zero errors in vernier calipers, and screw gauge, backlash errors in screw gauge, etc.

Personal or chance error:

Two observers using the same experiment setup, do not obtain the same result. Even the observations of a single experimentalist differ when it is repeated several times by him or her.

Such errors always occur inspire of the best and honest efforts on the part of the experimentalist and are known as personal errors. These errors are also called chance errors as they depend upon chance.

The effect of the chance error on the result can be considerably reduced by taking a large number of observations and then taking their mean. How to take the mean, is described in the next point.

4. Errors in Averaging :

Suppose to measure some quantity, we take several observations, a1, a2, a3…. an. To find the absolute error in each measurement and percentage error, we have to follow these steps (a)

First of all mean of all the observations is calculated: a mean = (a1+ a2 +a3 +…+ an) / n. The mean of these values is taken as the best possible value of the quantity under the given conditions of measurements.

Absolute Error:

The magnitude of the difference between the best possible or mean value of the quantity and the individual measurement value is called the absolute error of the measurement. The absolute error in an individual measured value is:

⇒ \(\Delta a_n=\left|a_{\text {mean }}-a_n\right|\)

The arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors is taken as the final or mean absolute error.

⇒ \(\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}=\left(\left|\Delta \mathrm{a}_1\right|+\left|\Delta \mathrm{a}_2\right|+\left|\Delta \mathrm{a}_3\right|+\ldots \ldots \ldots . .+\left|\Delta \mathrm{a}_n\right|\right) / \mathrm{n}\)

⇒ \(\Delta a_{\text {mean }}=\left(\sum_{i=1}^n\left|\Delta a_i\right|\right) / n\)

⇒ \(\text { we can say } \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}-\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }} \leq \mathrm{a} \leq \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}\)

Relative and Percentage Error

Relative error is the ratio of the mean absolute error and arithmetic mean

⇒ \(\text { Relative error }=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}}{\mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}}\)

When the relative error is expressed in percent, it is called the percentage error. Thus,

⇒ \(\text { Percentage error }=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}}{\mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}} \times 100 \%\)

Solved Examples

Example 16. In some observations, values of ‘g’ are coming as 9.81, 9.80, 9.82, 9.79, 9.78, 9.84, 9.79, 9.78, 9.79, and 9.80 m/s2. Calculate absolute errors and percentage errors in g.

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Calculate absolute errors and percentage error in g.

Percentage error \(=\frac{\Delta g_{\text {mean }}}{g_{\text {mean }}} \times 100=\frac{0.014}{9.80} \times 100 \%=0.14 \%\)

so ‘g’ = ( 9.80 ± 0.014 ) m/s2

Experiment – 1

Screw gauge (Micrometer)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Two measure diameter of a wire, a screw gauge is used

Screw gauge is used to measure closely upto \(\left(\frac{1 \mathrm{~mm}}{100}\right)\) How can it divide 1 mm in 100 parts! To divide 1 mm into 100 parts, a screw is used. In one rotation, the screw (spindle) moves forward by 1 mm. (Called the pitch of the screw ) The rotation of the screw (spindle) is divided into 100 parts (called circular scale), hence 1 mm is divided into 100 parts

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Two measure diameter of a wire, a screw gauge is used

1 rotation= 1 mm

100 circular parts= 1 mm

so 1 circular part= \(\frac{1 \mathrm{~mm}}{100}=\text { Least count of screw gauge }\)

So let’s generalize it

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments So lets generalize it

How to find the thickness of an object by screw gauge

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments How to find thickness of an object by screw gauge

Description of screw gauge:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Description of screw gauge

The object to be measured is put between the jaws. The sleeve is a hollow part, fixed with the frame and the main scale is printed on it. The spindle and thimble are welded and move together utilizing a screw.

The circular scale is printed on the thimble as shown. It generally consists of 100 divisions (sometimes 50 divisions also). The main scale has mm marks (Sometimes it also has 1/2 mm marks below mm marks.)

(Usually, if the pitch of the screw gauge is 1mm then there are 1mm marks on the main scale and if the pitch is 1/2 mm then there are 1/2 mm marks also)

This instrument can read upto 0.01 mm (10 um) with accuracy which is why it is called a micrometer

Solved Examples

Example 17. Read the normal screw gauge

  1. The main scale has only mm marks.
  2. In a complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm.
  3. The circular scale has 100 divisions

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The normal screw gauge

Example 18. Read the screw gauge

  1. Main scale has \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\) marks
  2. In complete rotation, the screw advances by \(\frac{1}{2}\) mm.
  3. The circular scale has 50 divisions.

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Circular scale has 50 division

Example 19. Read the screw gauge shown below:

  1. Main scale has \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\) marks
  2. In complete rotation, the screw advances by \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm} \text {. }\)
  3. The circular scale has 50 divisions.

Example 20. A wire of resistance R = 100.0Ω and length l = 50.0 cm is put between the jaws of the screw gauge. Its reading is shown in the figure. The pitch of the screw gauge is 0.5 mm and there are 50 divisions on a circular scale. Find its resistivity in correct significant figures and maximum permissible error in p (resistivity).
Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A wire of resistance

⇒ \(R=\frac{\rho \ell}{\pi d^2 / 4}\)

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{R \pi d^2}{4 \ell}=\frac{(100.0)(3.14)\left(8.42 \times 10^{-3}\right)}{4\left(50.0 \times 10^{-2}\right)}=1.32 \Omega / \mathrm{m}\)

⇒ \(\frac{d \rho}{\rho}=\frac{d R}{R}+\frac{2 d(D)}{D}+\frac{d \ell}{\ell}=\frac{0.1}{100.0}+2 \times \frac{0.01}{8.42}+\frac{0.1}{50}=0.00537(\approx 0.52 \%)\)

Answer:

Example 21. In a complete rotation, the spindle of a screw gauge advances by \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm} \text {. }\) There are 50 divisions on a circular scale. The main scale has \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\) mm marks → (is graduated to \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mm}\) or has least count \(=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\) If a wire is put between the jaws, 3 main scale divisions are visible, and 20 divisions of circular scale co-inside with the reference line. Find the diameter of the wire in the correct S.F

Solution: Diameter of wire \(\left(3 \times \frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\right)+(20)\left(\frac{1 / 2 \mathrm{~mm}}{50}\right)=1.5+0.20=1.70 \mathrm{~mm}\) (The answer should be upto two decimal places because this screw gauges can measure upto 0.01 mm accuracy).

Example 22. In the previous question if the mass of the wire is measured as 0.53 kg and the length of the wire is measured by an mm scale and is found to be 50.0 cm, find the density of the wire in correct significant figures.
Solution: \(\rho=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\left(\frac{\pi \mathrm{d}^2}{4}\right) \ell}=\frac{\left(0.53 \times 10^3\right) \times 4}{(3.14)\left(1.70 \times 10^{-3}\right)^2\left(50 \times 10^{-2}\right)} \mathrm{g} / \mathrm{m}^3=4.7 \times 10^8 \text { (2 S.F.) }\)

Example 23. Two measure diameter of a wire, a screw gauge is used. The main scale division is 1 mm. In a complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm and the circular scale has 100 divisions. The reading of the screw gauge is shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Two measure diameter of a wire, a screw gauge is used

If there is no error in mass measurement, but an error in length measurement is 1%, then find
max. Possible error in density.

Solution: \(\rho=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\left(\frac{\pi \mathrm{d}^2}{4}\right) \ell} \quad \Rightarrow \quad\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)=2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{d}}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}\)

Δd = least count of \(\frac{1 \mathrm{~mm}}{100}=0.01 \mathrm{~mm}\) and d = 3.07 mm from the figure so \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=\left(2 \times \frac{0.01}{3.07}+\frac{1}{100}\right) \times 100 \% \quad \Rightarrow \quad\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=1.65 \% \text {. }\)

Zero Error:

If there is no object between the jaws (i.e. jaws are in contact), the screw gauge should give zero reading. But due to extra material on jaws, even if there is no object, it gives some excess reading. This excess. Reading is called zero error:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Zero Error

Solved Examples

Example 24. Find the thickness of the wire. The main scale division is 1 mm. In a complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm and the circular scale has 100 divisions.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the thickness of the wire

Solution: Excess reading (Zero error) = 0.03 mm It is giving 7.67 mm in which there is 0.03 mm excess reading, which has to be removed ( subtracted) so actual reading = 7.67 – 0.03 = 7.64 mm

Example 25. Find the thickness of the wire. The main scale division is 1 mm. In a complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm and the circular scale has 100 divisions. The zero error of the screw gase is –0.07 mm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The main scale division is of 1 mm

Solution: Excess reading (Zero error) = – 0.07mm It is giving 7.95 mm in which there is -0.07 mm excess reading, which has to be removed ( subtracted) so actual reading = 7.95 -(- 0.07) = 8.02 mm.

Zero Correction:

  • Zero correction is an invert of zero error:
  • zero correction = – (zero error)

Actual reading = observed reading – zero error = observed reading + Zero correction

Experiment 2

Vernier calipers

It is used to measure accurately upto 0.1 mm.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Vernier callipers

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments On the upper plate, main scale is printed which is simply an mm scale

  • On the upper plate, the main scale is printed which is simply an mm scale.
  • On the lower plate, the vernier scale is printed, which is a bit compressed scale. Its one part is 0.9 mm. (10 vernier scale divisions = 9 mm ⇒ 1 vernier scale division = 0.9 mm)
  • The object which is to be measured is fitted between the jaws as shown.

How to read vernier calipers:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments How to read Vernier Callipers

Now let’s see How the slight difference between 1 MSD and 1 VSD reflects as least count

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments In the vernier caliperse, 9 main scale divisions matches with 10 vernier scale divisions

Required length = 13 mm + x =?

at point ‘A’, the main scale and vernier scale are matching

so length OA along main Scale = length OA along Vernier Scale

13 mm +3 (Main scale division) = ( 13 mm + x ) + 3 (vernier Scale division )

Get 13 mm + x = 13 mm + 3 (Main scale division – vernier Scale division)

= 13 mm + 3 ( 1 mm – 0.9 mm )

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments (Main scale division - vernier Scale division)

Hence the slight difference between 1 MSD (1 mm ) and 1 VSD (0.9 mm ) reflects as least count (0.1 mm)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Hence the slight difference between 1 MSD (1 mm )

Example 26. Read the vernier. 10 divisions of the vernier scale match with 9 divisions of the main scale

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the special type of vernier

Solution: 10 vernier scale divisions = 9 mm

1 vernier scale division = 0.9 mm

least count = (Main scale division – vernier Scale division)

= 1 mm – 0.9 mm (from figure)

= 0.1 mm

Thickness of the object = (main scale reading) + (vernier scale Reading) (least count )

So thickness of the object = 15 mm + (6) (0.1mm ) = 15.6 mm

Example 27. Read the special type of vernier. 20 divisions of the vernier scale match with 19 divisions of main scale.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the special type of vernier

Solution: 20 vernier scale divisions = 19 mm

1 vernier scale division \(=\frac{19}{20} \mathrm{~mm}\)

where least count = (Main scale division – vernier Scale division)

= 1 mm – 19/20 mm

= 0.05 mm

Thickness of the object = (main scale reading) + (vernier scale Reading) (least count )

So thickness of the object = 13 mm + (12) (0.05mm )

= 13.60 mm

Zero Error:

If there is no object between the jaws (ie. jaws are in contact ), the vernier should give zero reading. But due to some extra material on the jaws, even if there is no object between the jaws, it gives some excess Reading. This excess reading is called a zero error

Example 28. In the vernier calipers, 9 main scale divisions match with 10 vernier scale divisions. The thickness of the object using the defective vernier calipers will be :

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments In the vernier caliperse, 9 main scale divisions matches with 10 vernier scale divisions..

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments In the vernier caliperse, 9 main scale divisions matches with 10 vernier scale divisions.

Example 29. In the vernier calipers, 9 main scale divisions match with 10 vernier scale divisions.

The thickness of the object using the defective vernier calipers will be :

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The thickness of the object using the defected vernier calliperse

Solution: From the first figure, Excess reading (zero error ) = 0.6 mm If an object is placed, vernier gives 14.6 mm in which there is 0.6 mm excess reading, which has to be subtracted. So actual thickness = 14.6 – 0.6 = 14.0 mm we can also do it using the formula

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Main scale reading is –1 mm when there is no object between the jasws

Example 30. The main scale reading is –1 mm when there is no object between the jaws. In the vernier calipers, 9 main scale divisions match with 10 vernier scale divisions. The thickness of the object using the defective vernier calipers will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Main scale reading is –1 mm when there is no object between the jasws

Solution: Zero error = main scale reading + ( vernier scale reading ) ( least count ) = –1 mm + 6 (0.1 mm) = –0.4 mm observed reading = 11.8 mm So actual thickness = 11.8 – (-0.4) = 12.2 mm.

Zero Correction:

  • Zero correction is an invert of zero error.
  • Zero correction = – ( zero error )
  • In example 28, zero error was 0.6 mm, so zero correction will be – 0.6 mm
  • In example 29, zero error was -0.4 mm, so zero correction will be + 0.4 mm

Example 31. The main scale of the vernier calipers reads 10 mm in 10 divisions. 10 divisions of the Vernier scale coincide with 9 divisions of the main scale. When the two jaws of the calipers touch each other, the fifth division of the vernier coincides with 9 main scale divisions and the zero of the vernier is to the right of zero of the main scale.

When a cylinder is tightly placed between the two jaws, the zero of the vernier scale lies slightly behind 3.2 cm and the fourth vernier division coincides with a main scale division. The diameter of the cylinder is.

Solution: Zero error = 0.5 mm = 0.05 cm. Observed reading of cylinder diameter = 3.1 cm + (4) (0.01 cm). = 3.14 cm Actual thickness of cylinder = (3.14) – (0.05). = 3.09 cm

Example 32. In the previous question if the length of the cylinder is measured as 25 mm, and the mass of the cylinder is measured as 50.0 gm, find the density of the cylinder (gm/cm 3) in proper significant figures
Solution:

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{m}{\pi\left(d^2 / 4\right) h}\)

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{(50.0) \mathrm{gm}}{3.14 \times(3.09 / 2)^2 \times\left(25 \times 10^{-1}\right) \mathrm{cm}^3}=2.7 \mathrm{gm} / \mathrm{cm}^3 \text { (in two S.F.) }\)

Experiment 3

Determining the value of ‘g’ using a simple pendulum

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the value of ‘g’ using a simple pendulum

In this exp., a small spherical bob is hung with a cotton thread. This arrangement is called a sample pendulum. The bob is displaced slightly and allowed to oscillate. To find the period, the time taken for 50 oscillations is noted using a stopwatch

⇒ \(\text { Theoretically } T=2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{g}}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{g}=4 \pi^2 \frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{T}^2}\)

where L = Equivalent length of pendulum = length of thread (l) + radius (r) of bob,

T = time period of the simple pendulum \(=\frac{\text { Time taken for } 50 \text { oscillations }}{50}\)

so ‘g’ can be easily determined by equation …(1).

Graphical method to find ‘g’:

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}^2=\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{g}\right) \mathrm{L}\) \(\text { so, } \mathrm{T}^2 \propto \mathrm{L}\)

Find T for different values of L.

Plot T2 v/s L curve. From equation (2), it should be a straight line, with slope \(=\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{g}\right)\)

Find slope of T2 v/s L graph and equate it to \(\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{g}\right)\) and get ‘g’.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For different values of L, we get different values of ‘T’

Example 33. In certain observation, we got l= 23.2 cm, r = 1.32 cm, and the time taken for 10 oscillations was 10.0 sec. Estimate the value of ‘g’ in a proper significant figure. (take π² = 10)
Solution : Equivalent length of pendulum L = 23.2 cm + 1.32 cm

= 24.5 cm (according to the addition rule of S.F.)

And time period \(T=\frac{10.0}{10}=1.00\)

⇒ \(\text { get } \mathrm{g}=4 \pi^2 \frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{T}^2}=4 \times 10 \frac{24.5 \mathrm{~cm}}{(1.00)^2} \text { (in 3 S.F.) }\)

⇒ \(=4 \times 10 \times \frac{24.5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}}{(1.00)^2 \mathrm{sec}^2}=9.80 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{sec}^2\)

Example 34. For different values of L, we get different values of ‘T’. The curve between L v/s T² is shown. Estimate ‘g’ from this curve. (take π² = 10)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For different values of L, we get different values of ‘T’

Solution: \(\mathrm{L}=\left(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4 \pi^2}\right) \mathrm{T}^2\) \(\mathrm{L} v / s \mathrm{~T}^2=\left(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4 \pi^2}\right)\) slope \(=\frac{0.49}{2}=\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4 \pi^2} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{g}=9.8 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{sec}^2\)

Maximum permissible error in ‘g’ due to error in measurement of l, r, and T.

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}=4 \pi^2 \frac{(\ell+r)}{(\mathrm{t} / 50)^2}=4 \pi^2(2500) \frac{\ell+r}{\mathrm{t}^2}\)

⇒ \(\ln \mathrm{g}=\ln 4 \pi^2(2500)+\ln (\ell+\mathrm{r})-2 \ln (\mathrm{t}) \quad\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \ell+\Delta \mathrm{r}}{\ell+\mathrm{r}}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{t}}\).

Solved Examples

Example 35. In certain observations we got  = 23.2 cm, r = 1.32 cm, and the time taken for 10 oscillations was 10.0 sec. Find the maximum permissible error in (g)
solution:

⇒ \(\begin{array}{lll}
\ell=23.2 & \rightarrow & \Delta \ell=0.1 \mathrm{~cm} \\
\mathrm{r}=1.32 \mathrm{~cm} & \rightarrow & \Delta \mathrm{r}=0.01 \mathrm{~cm} \\
\mathrm{t}=10.0 \mathrm{sec} & \rightarrow & \Delta \mathrm{t}=0.1 \mathrm{sec}
\end{array}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~cm}+0.01 \mathrm{~cm}}{23.2 \mathrm{~cm}+1.32 \mathrm{~cm}}+2 \frac{0.1 \mathrm{sec}}{10.0 \mathrm{sec}}\right) \times 100 \%=2.44 \%\)

Example 36. Time is measured using a stopwatch of the least count of 0.1 seconds. In 10 oscillations, the time taken is 20.0 seconds. Find the maximum permissible error in the period.
Solution: \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{T}=\frac{\text { Total time }}{\text { Total oscillation }}=\frac{\mathrm{t}}{10} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \Delta \mathrm{T}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{10}=\frac{0.1}{10} \\
& \Delta \mathrm{T}=0.01 \text { second. }
\end{aligned}\)

Example 37. A student experiments determination of \(\mathrm{g}\left(=\frac{4 \pi^2 \ell}{\mathrm{T}^2}\right), \quad ” \ell ” \approx 1 \mathrm{~m}\) and he commits an error of “Δl”. For T he takes the time of n oscillations with the stopwatch of least count Δt. For which of the following data, the measurement of g will be most accurate?
Solutions:

⇒ \(\begin{gathered}
\text { Here } \mathrm{T}=\frac{\text { total time }}{\text { total oscillation }}=\frac{\mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{n}} \text { so } \mathrm{dT}=\frac{\mathrm{dt}}{\mathrm{n}} \\
\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{T}}
\end{gathered}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta g}{g}=\frac{0.5}{1}+2 \frac{0.1 / 20}{T}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta g}{g}=\frac{0.5}{1}+2 \frac{0.1 / 50}{T}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta g}{g}=\frac{0.5}{1}+2 \frac{0.02 / 20}{T}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta g}{g}=\frac{0.1}{1}+2 \frac{0.05 / 50}{T}\)

So % error in g will be minimum in option (D)

Experiment 4

Determining Young’s Modulus of a given wire by “Searle’s Method“: An elementary method: To determine Young’s Modulus, we can perform an ordinary experiment. Let’s hang a weight ‘m’ from a wire

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments An elementary method

from Hook’s law: \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathrm{A}}=\mathrm{Y}\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\ell_0}\right) \quad \mathrm{x}=\left(\frac{\ell_0}{\pi \mathrm{r}^2 \mathrm{Y}}\right) \mathrm{mg}\)

If we change the weight, the elongation of the wire will increase proportionally.

If we plot elongation v/s mg, we will get a straight line.

By measuring its slope and equating it to \(\left(\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y}\right)\) we can estimate Y.

Limitations in this ordinary method

1. For small loads, there may be some bends or kinks in the wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For different values of L, we get different values of ‘T’

So we had better start with some initial weight (say 2 kg). So that the wire becomes straight.

2. There is a slight difference in the behavior of wire underloading and unloading load

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments There is slight difference in behavior of wire under loading and unloading

  • So we had better take the average during loading and unloading.
  • The average load will be more and more linear or accurate.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The average load will be more and more linear or accurate

Modification in “Searle’s Method”.

To keep the experimental wire straight and kink-free, we start with some dead weight (2 kg)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Modification in “Searle’s Method”

Now we gradually add more and more weight. The extra elongation (Δx) will be proportional to extra weight (Δw).

⇒ \(x=\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y} w \quad \Rightarrow \quad \Delta x=\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y}(\Delta w)\)

so let’s plot Δx v/s Δw, the slope of which will be \(=\left(\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y}\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of Young’s modulus.

Measurement of Young’s modulus.

To measure extra elongation, compared to the initial loaded position, we use a reference wire, also carrying a 2 kg load (dead weight). This method of measuring elongation by comparison also cancels the side effect of tamp and yielding of support.

Observations:

  1. Initial Reading = x0 = 0.540 mm. (Micrometer Reading without extra load)
  2. Radius of wire = 0.200 mm. (using screw gauge)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Radius of wire

Measurement of extra extension due to extra load.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of extra extension due to extra load.

Method 1
Plot Δx v/s Δw (=Δm g)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Extra elongation extra load

⇒ \(\text { slope }=\frac{B P}{A P}=\ldots \ldots . .=\frac{\ell}{Y\left(\pi r^2\right)} \Rightarrow Y=\)

Method: 2
→ Between observation (1) (6)
→ and (2) (7)
→ and (3) (8) 2.5 kg extra weight is added
→ and (4) (9)
→ and (5) (10)

→→ → → So elongation from observation (1) (6), (2) (7), (3) (8), (4) (9), and → (5) (10) will be due to extra 2.5 kg wt. So we can find elongation due to 2.5 kg wt from x6 – x1, x5 – x2, x8 – x3, or x10 – x5, and then we can find average elongation due to 2.5 kg wt.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments So elongation from observation

⇒ \(\Delta x=(\Delta w)\left(\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y}\right)\) where Δw = Δm g = 25 N and (Δx) average = 0.5 cm Putting the values find Y = ………….

Solved Examples

Example 38. The adjacent graph shows the extra extension (x) of a wire of length 1m suspended from the top of a roof at one end with an extra load w connected to the other end. If the cross-sectional area of the wire is 10–6 m2, calculate the Young’s modulus of the material of the wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The adjacent graph shows the extra extension

  1. 2 × 1011 N/m2
  2. 2 × 10–11 N/m2
  3. 3 × 1013 N/m3
  4. 2 × 1016 N/m2

Answer:

Question 39. In the experiment, the curve between Δx and Δw is shown as a dotted line (1). If we use another wire of the same material, but with double length and double radius. Which of the curves is expected?

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Double length and double radius

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Solution: Initially slope \(=\frac{\Delta x}{\Delta w}=\frac{\ell_0}{\left(\pi r^2\right)(Y)}\)

in second case (slope)1 \(=\frac{\left(2 \ell_0\right)}{\pi(2 r)^2 Y}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{\ell_0}{\left(\pi r^2\right) Y}\)

So the slope will be halved.

Answer: 3. 3

Example 40. Assertion: In Searle’s experiment to find Young’s modulus, a reference wire is also used along with the experiment wire. Reason: Reference wire neutralizes the effect of temperature, yielding of support, and other external factors

  1. If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is a correct explanation of Assertion
  2. If both Assertion and Reason and true Reason is not a correct explanation of Assertion.
  3. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
  4. If both Assertion and Reason are false.

Answer: 1. If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is a correct explanation of Assertion

Question 41. If we use very thin and long wire

  • Sensitivity \(\left(\frac{\text { output }}{\text { input }}=\frac{\Delta x}{\Delta w}\right)\) of experiment will increase.
  • Young’s modulus will remain unchanged
  • The wire may break or yield during loading.
  • All of the above.

Answer: 4. All of the above.

Maximum permissible error in ‘Y’ due to error in measuring m, l0, r, x: \(Y=\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 x} \mathrm{mg}\)

If there is no tolerance in mass ; max permissible error in Y is \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{Y}}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \ell_0}{\ell_0}+2 \frac{\Delta r}{r}+\frac{\Delta x}{x}\)

Solved Example

Example 42. In Searle’s experiment to find Young’s modulus the diameter of wire is measured as d = 0.050 cm, the length of wire is l = 125 cm and when a weight, m = 20.0 kg is put, extension in the length of wire was found to be 0.100cm. Find the maximum permissible error in Young’s modulus (Y).Use: \(Y=\frac{\mathrm{mg} \ell}{(\pi / 4) \mathrm{d}^2 x} .\)
Solution: \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{d}^2 / 4}=Y\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\ell}\right) \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{Y}=\frac{\mathrm{mg} \ell}{(\pi / 4) \mathrm{d}^2 \mathrm{x}}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{d Y}{Y}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{m}}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{d}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{x}}\)

m = 20.0 kg Δm = 0.1 kg

Δ= 125 m Δl = 1 cm

d = 0.050 cm Δd = 0.001 cm

x = 0.100 cm Δx = 0.001 cm

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{dY}}{\mathrm{Y}}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~kg}}{20.0 \mathrm{~kg}}+\frac{1 \mathrm{~cm}}{125 \mathrm{~cm}}+\frac{2 \times 0.001 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.05 \mathrm{~cm}}+\frac{0.001 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.100 \mathrm{~cm}}\right) \times 100 \%=6.3 \%\)

Detailed Apparatus and method of Searl’s experiment

Searle’s Apparatus (Static Method)

The figure shows Searle’s apparatus. It consists of two metal frames F1 and F2 hinged together so that they can have only vertical relative motion. A spirit level L is supported at one end on a rigid cross-bar frame whose other end rests on the tip of a micrometer screw S, which moves vertically through the rigid crossbar

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Searle’s Apparatus (Static Method)

If there is any relative motion between the two frames, the spirit level no longer remains horizontal and the bubble is displaced. To bring the bubble back to its original position, the screw has to be moved up and down.

The distance through which the screw has to be moved gives the relative motion between the two frames. The frames are suspended by two identical long wires of steel from the same rigid horizontal support.

The wire B is an experimental wire and the wire A acts as a reference wire. The two frames are provided with two hooks H1 and H2 at their lower ends. The hook H1 carries a constant weight W to keep the wire taut. To the hook H2, a hanger is attached over which slotted weights can be put to apply the stretching force.

Procedure:

  1. Measure the length of the experimental wire from the point where it leaves the fixed support to the point where it is fixed in the frame.
  2. The diameter of the experimental wire is measured with the help of a screw gauge at about five different places and each place in two mutually perpendicular directions.
  3. Find the pitch and the least count of the micrometer and adjust it such that the bubble in the spirit level is exactly in the center. The initial reading of the micrometer is noted.
  4. The load on the hanger H2 is gradually increased in steps of 0.5 kg. Observe the reading on the micrometer at each stage after leveling the instrument with the help of the spirit level. To avoid the backlash error, all the final adjustments should be made by moving the screw in the upward direction only. If at any time the screw is raised too much, lower it below the central position and then raise it slowly to the proper position.
  5. Unload the wire by removing the weights in the same order and taking the reading on the micrometer screw each time. The reading taken for a particular load while loading the wire or unloading the wire should agree closely.

Experiment 5

Determining the specific heat capacity of an unknown liquid using a calorimeter:
The figure shows Regnault’s apparatus to determine the specific heat capacity of an unknown liquid. A solid sphere of known specific heat capacity s1 having mass m1 and initial temperature θ1 is mixed with the unknown liquid filled in a calorimeter.

Let masses of liquid and calorimeter are m2 and m3 respectively, specific heat capacities are s2 and s3 and initially, they were at room temperature θ2.

When the hot sphere is dropped in it, the sphere loses heat and the liquid calorimeter system takes heat. This process continues till the temperature of all the elements becomes the same (sayθ ). Heat lost by hot sphere = m1s1 (θ1 – θ) Heat taken by liquid & calorimeter = m2s2 (θ – θ2) + m3s3 (θ – θ2) If there were no external heat loss Heat given by sphere = Heat taken by liquid-Calorimeter system

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right) \\
\text { Get } \quad & s_2=\frac{m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)}{m_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)}-\frac{m_3 s_3}{m_2}
\end{aligned}\)

By measuring the final (steady state) temperature of the mixture, we can estimate s2: specific heat capacity of the unknown liquid.

To give the initial temperature (θ1) to the sphere, we keep it in the steam chamber (“O”), hanged by thread. Within some time (say 15 min) it achieves a constant temperature θ1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Now the calorimeter, filled with water (part C)

Now the calorimeter, filled with water (part C) is taken below the steam chamber, the wooden removable disc D is removed, and the thread is cut. The sphere drops into the water-calorimeter system and the mixing starts.

If the sp. heat capacity of liquid (s2) were known and that of the solid ball (s1) is unknown then we can find

⇒ \(s_1=\frac{\left(m_2 s_2+m_3 s_3\right)\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)}{m_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)}\)

Solved Examples

Example 43. The mass, specific heat capacity and initial temperature of the sphere were 1000 gm, 1/2 cal/gm°C, and 80°C respectively. The mass of the liquid and the calorimeter are 900 gm and 200 gm, and initially, both were at room temperature 20°C. Both the calorimeter and the sphere are made of the same material. If the steady-state temperature after mixing is found to be 40°C, then the specific heat capacity of the unknown liquid is

  1. 0.25 cal/gºC
  2. 0.5 cal/gºC
  3. 1 cal/gºC
  4. 1.5 cal/gºC

Answer: 3. 1 cal/gºC

⇒ \(\mathrm{S}_2=\frac{(1000)(1 / 2)\left(80^{\circ}-40^{\circ}\right)}{900\left(40^{\circ}-20^{\circ}\right)}-\frac{(200)(1 / 2)}{900}=1 \mathrm{cal} / \mathrm{gm}^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\)

Example 44. If accidentally the calorimeter remained open to the atmosphere for some time during the experiment, due to which the steady-state temperature comes out to be 30ºC, then total heat loss to surroundings during the experiment, is (Use the specific heat capacity of the liquid from the previous question).

  1. 20 kcal
  2. 15 kcal
  3. 10 kcal
  4. 8 kcal

Solution: (2) Heat given by the sphere = (1000) (1/2) (80 – 30) = 25,000 cal

Heat absorbed by the water calorimeter system = (900) (1) (40 – 30) + (200) (1/2) (40 – 30) = 10,000 cal.

So heat loss to surrounding = 15,000 cal

Example 45. If the loss in gravitational potential energy due to falling the sphere by h height and heat loss to H surrounding at a constant rate is also taken into account, the energy equation will be modified to

  1. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)+\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)-\dot{H} t\)
  2. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)-\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+\dot{H} t\)
  3. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)+\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+\dot{H} t\)
  4. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)-\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)-\dot{H} t\)

Solution: 3. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)+\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+\dot{H} t\)

Heat generated = \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)+\frac{m_1 g h}{J}\)

Maximum Permissible error in S 1 due to error in measuring θ1, θ2, and θ: To determine the specific heat capacity of an unknown solid,

we uses \(s_{\text {sold }}=\frac{m_1 s_1+m_2 s_2}{m_1}\left(\frac{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right)\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{s}=\frac{\mathrm{m}_1 \mathrm{~s}_1+\mathrm{m}_2 \mathrm{~s}_2}{m_1}\left(\frac{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right) \Rightarrow \frac{\mathrm{ds}}{\mathrm{s}}=\frac{\mathrm{d}\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2\right)}{\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2\right)}-\frac{d\left(\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}\right)}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{s}}\right)=\frac{ \pm \Delta \theta \mp \Delta \theta}{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}+\frac{\mp \Delta \theta \pm \Delta \theta}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\)

⇒ \(\Rightarrow \quad\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{s}}\right)_{\max }=2 \Delta \theta\left(\frac{1}{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}+\frac{1}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right)=2 \Delta \theta\left(\frac{\theta_1-\theta_2}{\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2\right)\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_1\right)}\right)\)

If the mass and sp. heat capacities of water and calorimeter are precisely known, and the least count of temperature is the same for all measurements. then \(\Delta \theta=\Delta \theta_1=\Delta \theta_2\) \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{S}}{\mathrm{S}}\right)_{\max }\) will be least when \(\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2\right)\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_1\right) \text { is max i.e. } \theta_{\mathrm{ss}}=\frac{\theta_1+\theta_2}{2}\)

If m1, s1, m2, s2 are precisely known, the maximum permissible % error in solid will be least when steady state temperature

⇒ \(\boldsymbol{\theta}_{\mathrm{ss}}=\frac{\theta_1+\theta_2}{2}\)

Solved Examples

Example 46. In the exp. of finding the sp. heat capacity of an unknown sphere (S2), the mass of the sphere and calorimeter are 1000 gm and 200 gm respectively and the sp. heat capacity of the calorimeter is equal to 1 to 2 cal/gm/ºC.

The mass of liquid (water) used is 900 gm. Initially, both the water and the calorimeter were at room temp 20.0ºC while the sphere was at temp 80.0ºC initially. If the steady state temp was found to be 40.0ºC, estimate the sp. heat capacity of the unknown sphere (S2). (use Swater = 1 cal/g/ºC ). Also, find the maximum permissible error in sp. heat capacity of the unknown sphere (S2 mass and specific heats of sphere and calorimeter are correctly known.)
Solution: To determine the specific heat capacity of an unknown solid,

⇒ \(\text { We use } s_{\text {sald }}=\frac{m_1 s_1+m_2 s_2}{m_1}\left(\frac{\theta_{s s}-\theta_2}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right) \text { and get } s_{\text {solid }}=1 / 2 \mathrm{cal} / \mathrm{g} /{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{s}}\right)_{\max }=2 \Delta \theta\left(\frac{1}{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}+\frac{1}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right)=2\left(0.1^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\right)\left(\frac{1}{40.0-20.0}+\frac{1}{80.0-40.0}\right)=1.5 \%\)

Electrical calorimeter 

The figure shows an electrical calorimeter to determine the specific heat capacity of an unknown liquid. First of all, the mass of the empty calorimeter (a copper container) is measured and suppose it is 1′.

Then the unknown liquid is poured into it. Now the combined mass of the calorimeter + liquid system is measured and let be 2′. So the mass of liquid is (m 2 – m1). Initially, both were at room temperature. Now a heater is immersed in it for time interval ‘t’.

The voltage drop across the heater is ‘V’ and the current passing through it is ‘t’. Due to the heat supplied, the temperature of both the liquid and calorimeter will rise simultaneously. After t sec; the heater was switched off, and the final temperature. If there is no heat loss to surroundings Heat supplied by the heater = Heat absorbed by the liquid + heat absorbed by the calorimeter

⇒ \((V I) t=\left(m_2-m_1\right) S_1\left(\theta_1-\theta_0\right)+m_1 S_c\left(\theta_1-\theta_0\right)\)

The specific heat of the liquid \(\mathrm{S}_{\ell}=\frac{\frac{(\mathrm{VI}) \mathrm{t}}{\theta_{\mathrm{f}}-\theta_0}-\mathrm{m}_1 \mathrm{~S}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\left(\mathrm{m}_2-\mathrm{m}_1\right)}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Electrical calorimeter

Radiation correction: There can be heat loss to the environment. To compensate for this loss, a correction is introduced. Let the heater be on for t sec, and then it is switched off.

Now the temperature of the mixture falls due to heat loss to the environment. The temperature of the mixture is measured t/2 sec. after switching off. Let the fall in temperature during this time is

Now the corrected final temperature is taken as \(\theta_f^{\prime}=\theta_f+\varepsilon\)

Solved Examples

Example 47. In this experiment voltage across the heater is 100.0 V and current is 10.0A, and the heater was switched on for t = 700.0 sec. Initially, all elements were at room temperature θ0 = 10.0°C and the final temperature was measured = 73.0°C. The mass of the empty calorimeter was 1.0 kg and the combined mass of the calorimeter + liquid is 3.0 kg.

The specific heat capacity of the calorimeter S c = 3.0 × 103 J/kg°C. The fall in temperature 350 seconds after switching off the heater was 7.0°C. Find the specific heat capacity of the unknown liquid in proper significant figures.

  1. 3.5 × 103 J/kg°C
  2. 3.50 × 103 J/kg°C
  3. 4.0 × 103 J/kg°C
  4. 3.500 × 103 J/kg°C

Solution: Corrected final temperature = 0f = 73.0° + 7.0° = 80.0°

⇒ \(\mathrm{S}_{\ell}=\frac{\frac{(100.0)(10.0)(700.0)}{80.0-10.0}-(1.0)\left(3.0 \times 10^3\right)}{3.0-1.0}\)

= 3.5 × 103 J/kg°C (According to the addition and multiplication rule of S.F.)

Example 48. If the mass and specific heat capacity of the calorimeter are negligible, what would be the maximum permissible error in St. Use the data mentioned below. m1 → 0, Sc → 0, m2 = 1.00 kg, V = 10.0 V, I = 10.0 A, t = 1.00 × 102 sec., 0 0 = 15°C, Corrected θf = 65°C

  1. 4%
  2. 5%
  3. 8%
  4. 12%

Answer:

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \text { If } \mathrm{m}_1 \rightarrow 0, \mathrm{~S}_{\mathrm{o}} \rightarrow 0 \\
& \mathrm{~S}_{\ell}=\frac{\text { VIt }}{\mathrm{m}_2\left(\theta_{\mathrm{f}}-\theta_0\right)}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{S}_{\ell}}{\mathrm{S}_{\ell}}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{t}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{m}_2}{\mathrm{~m}_2}+\frac{\Delta \theta_{\mathrm{f}}+\Delta \theta_0}{\theta_{\mathrm{f}}-\theta_0}=\frac{0.1}{10.0}+\frac{0.1}{10.0}+\frac{0.01 \times 10^2}{1.00 \times 10^2}+\frac{0.01}{1.00}+\frac{1+1}{50}=8 \%\)

Question 49. If the system were losing heat according to Newton’s cooling law, the temperature of the mixture would change with time (while the heater was on)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments If the system were loosing heat according to Newton's cooling law

Solution: As the temperature increases, heat loss to surroundings increases. After some time the rate at which heat is lost becomes equal to the rate at which heat is supplied and an equilibrium or steady state is achieved. Hence temperature becomes constant after some time.

therefore C is correct.

Experiment 6

Determining the speed of sound using the resonance tube method

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determining speed of sound using resonance tube method

Figure shows the experiment to find the velocity of sound in air using the Resonance tube method.

Principle: A resonance tube is a kind of closed organ pipe. So its natural freq. will be

⇒ \(\frac{V}{4 \ell_{e q}}, \frac{3 V}{4 \ell_{e q}}, \frac{5 V}{4 \ell_{e q}} \cdots \ldots . . \text { or } \quad \text { generally } \mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{n}}=(2 \mathrm{n}-1) \frac{V}{4 \ell_{e q}}\)

If it is forced with a tuning fork of frequency f0; for resonance, Natural freq = forcing freq.

⇒ \((2 \mathrm{n}-1) \frac{V}{4 \ell_{e q}}=\mathrm{f}_0 \quad \Rightarrow \quad \ell_{\text {eq }}=(2 n-1) \frac{V}{4 \mathrm{f}_0}\)

For the first Resonance \(\ell_{\infty q}=\frac{V}{4 \mathrm{f}_0}\) (corresponding to 1 st mode.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments first Resonance

For the sexond resonance \(\ell_{e q}=\frac{3 V}{4 f_0}\) (corresponding to 2nd mode)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments second Resonance

Working: The resonance tube is a 100 cm tube. Initially, it is filled with water. To increase the length of the air column in the tube, the water level is lowered. The air column is forced with a tuning fork of frequency f0. Let at length 1, we get a first resonance (loud voice) then

⇒ \(\ell_{\text {eq1 }}=\frac{V}{4 \mathrm{f}_0} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \ell_1+\varepsilon=\frac{V}{4 \mathrm{f}_0}\)

If we further lower the water level, the noise becomes moderate. But at  2. We, again get a loud noise (second resonance) then

⇒ \(\ell_{\text {equ }}=\frac{3 \mathrm{~V}}{4 \mathrm{f}_0} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \ell_2+\varepsilon=\frac{3 \mathrm{~V}}{4 \mathrm{f}_0}\)

For 1and 2

⇒ \(V=2 f_0\left(\ell_2-\ell_1\right)\)

Observation table:

Room temp. in beginning = 26°C, Room temp. at end = 28ºC

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determining speed of sound using resonance tube method.

  • l3=2l2-l2
  • end correction \((e)=\frac{\ell_2-3 \ell_1}{2}\)
  • e = 0.3d (d = diameter of tube)

Solved Examples

Example 50. The speed of sound calculated is roughly

  1. 340 m/sec
  2. 380 m/sec
  3. 430 m/sec
  4. None of these

Solution: l1

  • l2= 24.0 cm
  • l2 = 74.0 cm
  • v = 2f0 (l2 – l1) = 2(340) (0.740 – 0.240)
  • = (2) (340) (0.500) = 340 m/sec.

Example 51. In the previous question, the speed of sound at 0ºC is roughly

  1. 324 m/sec
  2. 380 m/sec
  3. 430 m/sec
  4. None of these

Answer: \(v \propto \sqrt{T} \Rightarrow \frac{V_{27^{\circ}}}{V_{0^{\circ}}}=\sqrt{\frac{300}{273}} V_0^*=V_{27} \cdot \sqrt{\frac{273}{300}}=340 \sqrt{\frac{273}{300}}=324 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{sec} \text {. }\)

Question 52. What should be the minimum length of the tube, so that the third resonance can also be heard?

  1. l2=421
  2. l2214
  3. l3=124
  4. None of these

Answer: \(v \alpha \sqrt{\mathrm{T}} \Rightarrow \frac{\mathrm{V}_{27^{\circ}}}{\mathrm{V}_{0^{\circ}}}=\sqrt{\frac{300}{273}} \mathrm{~V}_0^{\circ}=\mathrm{V}_{27} \cdot \sqrt{\frac{273}{300}}=340 \sqrt{\frac{273}{300}}=324 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{sec} \text {. }\)

Example 53. From the equation and end, correction can be calculated. Estimate the diameter of the tube using the formula (e = 0.3d)

  1. 2.5 cm
  2. 3.3 cm
  3. 5.2 cm
  4. None of these

Answer: \(\varepsilon=1 \mathrm{~cm}=0.3 \mathrm{~d}=\frac{1 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.3}=3.3 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Example 54. For the third resonance, which option shows the correct mode for displacement variation and pressure variation,

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Displacement Variation And Presuree Variation

Answer: 2.

Question 55. The equation of the standing wave for the second resonance can be

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Studying Wave

  1. Pex = 2A sin 2π (y + 1cm) cos 2π (340) t
  2. Pex = 2A sin 2π (y – 1cm) cos 2π (340) t
  3. Pex = 2A cos 2π (y + 1cm) cos 2π (340) t
  4. Pex = 2A cos 2π (y – 1cm) cos 2π (340) t

Answer: 1. \(k=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}=\frac{2 \pi}{1}=2 \pi \quad \omega=2 \pi \mathrm{f}=(2 \pi)(340)\)

Question 56. Taking the open end of the tube as y = 0, the position of the pressure nodes will be

  1. y = –1 cm, y = 49 cm
  2. y = 0 cm, y = 50 cm
  3. y = 1 cm, y = 51 cm
  4. None of these

Answer:  1. y = –1 cm, y = 49 cm

Max Permissible Error in the speed of sound due to error in f0, l1, l2:

For the Resonance tube experiment

V = 2f0 (l2 –l1)

ln V = ln 2 + ln f0 + ln (l2 – l1) max. permissible error in the speed of sound=

⇒ \(=\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{f}_0}{\mathrm{f}_0}+\frac{\Delta \ell_2+\Delta \ell_1}{\left(\ell_2+\ell_2\right)}\)

Solved Examples

Example 57. If a tuning fork of (340 Hz ± 1%) is used in the resonance tube method, and the first and second resonance lengths are 24.0 cm and 74.0 cm respectively. Find max—permissible error in speed of sound.

Solution: l1 = 20.0 cm → Δl1 = 0.1 cm

l2 = 74.0 cm → Δl2 = 0.1 cm

⇒ \(\mathrm{f}_0=(340 H z \pm 1 \%) \quad \frac{\Delta f_0}{f_0}=1 \%=\frac{1}{100}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta V}{V}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta f_0}{f_0}+\frac{\Delta \ell_2+\Delta \ell_1}{\ell_2-\ell_1}=\frac{1}{100}+\frac{0.1+0.1}{74.0-24.0}=\frac{1}{100}+\frac{0.2}{50.0}=0.014\)

Experiment 7

Verification of Ohm’s law using voltmeter and ammeter Ohm’s law states that the electric current I flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference (V) across its ends provided that the physical conditions of the conductor (such as temperature, dimensions, etc.) are kept constant. Mathematically.

V α I or V = IR

Here R is a constant known as resistance of the conductor and depends on the nature and dimensions of the conductor.

Circuit Diagram: The circuit diagram is as shown below:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Circuit Diagram

Procedure: By shifting the rheostat contact, readings of the ammeter and voltmeter are noted down. At least six sets of observations are taken.

Then a graph is plotted between the potential difference (V) across R and the current (I) through R. The graph comes to be a straight line as shown in the figure.

Result: It is found from the graph that the ratio V/I is constant. Hence, the current voltage relationship is established, i.e., VI.

It means Ohm’s law is established as \(I=\left(\frac{1}{R}\right)\) v, find the slope of the i-v curve and equates it to \(\frac{1}{R} \text {. }\) slope \(=\frac{B P}{A P}=\frac{1}{R}\) Get R=…………..

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A graph Is plotted

Solved Examples

Example 58. If the emf of the battery is 100 v, then what was the resistance of Rheostat adjusted at the 2nd reading (I = 2A, V = 20V)?

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The resistance Of rheostat

  1. 10
  2. 20
  3. 30
  4. 40

Answer: From the curve slope \(=\frac{I}{V}=\frac{1}{R}=\frac{1}{10} \quad R=10 \Omega\) for reading \(I=\frac{E m f}{R+R_{t m}} \quad 2=\frac{100}{10+R_{t h}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad R_m=40 \Omega\)

Example 59. If three wires of the same material but different dimensions were used in place of unknown resistance, we get these I-V curves.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments If three wires of same material

Match the column according to the correct curve:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Match The Columns

  1. (p)-(2); (q)-(3); (r)-(1)
  2. (p)-(3); (q)-(2); (r)-(1)
  3. (p)-(1); (q)-(2); (r)-(3)

One of these

Solution: \(R=\frac{\rho \ell}{A}=\frac{\rho \ell}{\pi r^2} \text { for case(p) } R \propto \frac{(1)}{(1)^2} \text { for case (q) } R \propto \frac{(1)}{(2)^2}\)

Example 60. I v/s V curve for a non-ohmic resistance is shown. The dynamic resistance is maximum at point

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The dynamic resistance is maximum at point

  1. a1
  2. b
  3. c
  4. same for all

Solution: Dynamic resistance \(R=\frac{d v}{d I}=\frac{1}{d I / d v}=\frac{1}{\text { slope }}\)

At pt. a slope is min, so R is max

Example 61. If by mistake, the Ammeter is connected parallel to the resistance then the I-V curve expected is (Here I = reading of ammeter, V = reading of voltmeter)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Voltmeter is connected in series with the resistance

Solution: 3. As the ammeter has very low resistance most of the current will pass through the ammeter so the reading of the ammeter (I) will be very large. The voltmeter has very high resistance so the reading of the voltmeter will be very low.

Example 62. If by mistake, the voltmeter is connected in series with the resistance then the I-V curve expected is (Here I = reading of ammeter, V = reading of voltmeter )

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Ammeter is connected parallel to the resistance

Solution: 4. Due to the voltmeter’s high resistance, the ammeter’s reading will be very low.

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \rho=\frac{R A}{L}=\frac{\pi D^2}{4 L} \frac{V}{I} \\
& \ln \rho=\ln \frac{\pi}{4}+2 \ln D-\ln L+\ln V-\ln I \\
& \frac{d \rho}{\rho}=2 \frac{d D}{D}-\frac{d L}{L}+\frac{d V}{V}-\frac{d I}{I}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}= \pm 2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}} \mp \frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}} \pm \frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}} \mp \frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}} \\
& \left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=\max \text { of }\left( \pm 2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}} \mp \frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}} \pm \frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}} \mp \frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}}\right)
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}}=\text { max. permissible error in } \rho \text {. }\)

Solved Examples

Example 63. In Ohm’s experiment, when a potential difference of 10.0 V is applied, the current measured is 1.00 A. If the length of the wire is found to be 10.0 cm, and the diameter of the wire is 2.50 mm, then the maximum permissible error in resistivity will be

  1. 1.8%
  2. 10.2%
  3. 3.8%
  4. 5.75%

Answer: \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=2\left(\frac{0.01}{2.50}\right)+\left(\frac{0.1}{10.0}\right)+\left(\frac{0.1}{10.0}\right)+\left(\frac{0.01}{1.00}\right)=3.8 \%\)

Question 64. If the % error in length, diameter, current, and voltage are the same then which of the following effects % error in measurement of resistivity, the most:

  1. Length Measurement
  2. Voltage Measurement
  3. Current Measurement
  4. Diameter Measurement

Answer: \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }\)

Question 65. From some instruments, the current measured is I = 10.0 Amp., the potential difference measured is V = 100.0 V, the length of the wire is 31.4 cm, and the diameter of the wire is 2.00 mm (all in the correct significant figure). The resistivity of wire(in correct significant figure) will be – (use π = 3.14 )Ω

  1. 1.00×10-4 Ω-m
  2. 1.00×10-4 Ω-m
  3. 1.00×10-4 Ω-m
  4. 1.00×10-4 Ω-m

Answer: \(\rho=\frac{\pi D^2}{4 L} \frac{V}{I}=\frac{(3.14)\left(2.00 \times 10^{-3}\right)^2}{4(0.314)}\left(\frac{100.0}{10.0}\right)\)

Question 66. In the previous question, the maximum permissible error in resistivity and resistance measurement will be (respectively

  1. 2.14%
  2. 1.5%
  3. 1.5%,2.5%
  4. 2.41%,1.1%
  5. None Of These

Solution: \(\left(\frac{\Delta R}{R}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta i}{i}+\frac{\Delta v}{v}=\frac{0.1}{10.0}+\frac{0.1}{100.0}=1.1 \%\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{d \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=2.42 \%\)

Experiment 8

Meter Bridge

The meter bridge is a simple case of Wheatstone-Bridge and is used to find the unknown Resistance. The unknown resistance is placed in place of R, and in place of S, a known resistance is used, u (Resistance Box).

There is a 1m long resistance wire between A and C. The jockey is moved along the wire. When R(100 – l) = S(l) then the Bridge will be balanced, and the galvanometer will give zero deflection. “l” can be measured by the meter scale.

The unknown resistance is \(R=S \frac{\ell}{100-\ell}\)

If the length of the unknown wire is L and the diameter of the wire is d, then the specific resistance of the wire

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{R\left(\frac{\pi d^2}{4}\right)}{L} \quad \text { from eq.(1) } \quad \rho=\frac{\pi d^2}{4 L}\left(\frac{(\ell)}{100-\ell}\right) S\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Meter bridge

Solved Examples

Example 67. If resistance S in RB = 300Ω, then the balanced length is found to be 25.0 cm from end A. The diameter of the unknown wire is 1mm and the length of the unknown wire is 31.4 cm. The specific resistivity of the wire should be

  1. 2.5 × 10–4 Ω-m
  2. 3.5 × 10–4 Ω-m
  3. 4.5 × 10–4 Ω-m
  4. None Of These

Solution: 1. 2.5 × 10–4 Ω-m

⇒ \(\frac{R}{300}=\frac{25}{75} \Rightarrow R=100 \Rightarrow \rho=\frac{R \pi d^2}{4 L}=2.5 \times 10^{-4} \Omega-m\)

Example 68. In the previous question. If R and S are interchanged, the balanced point is shifted by

  1. 30 cm
  2. 40 cm
  3. 50 cm
  4. None of these

Solution : If R and S wave interchanged , l= 75 , 100 – l = 25 Balance point will be shifted by 75 – 25 = 50 cm

Question 69. In a meter bridge, the null point is at l = 33.7 cm, when the resistance S is shunted by 12Ω resistance the null point is found to be shifted by a distance of 18.2 cm. The value of unknown resistance R should be

  1. 13.5 Ω
  2. 68.8Ω
  3. 3.42Ω
  4. None Of these

Solution: 2. 68.8Ω

⇒ \(\frac{R}{S}=\frac{33.7}{100-33.7} \Rightarrow \frac{R}{\left(\frac{12 \times S}{12+S}\right)}=\frac{(33.7+18.2)}{100-(33.7+18.2)}\) solving get R = 6.86Ω

End Corrections

In the meter Bridge circuit, some extra length comes (is found under metallic strips) at endpoints A and C. So some additional length (α and β) should be included at the ends for accurate results.

Hence in place of we use α + β and in place of 100 – l, we use 100 – l + α (where α and β are called end correction). To estimate α and β, we use known resistance R1 and R2 at the place of R and S in the meter Bridge.

Suppose we get a null point at l1 distance then

⇒ \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}=\frac{\ell_1+\alpha}{100-\ell_1+\beta}\)

Now we interchange the position of R1 and R2 and get a null point at l2 distance then

⇒ \(\frac{R_2}{R_1}=\frac{\ell_2+\alpha}{100-\ell_2+\beta}\)

Solving equation (1) and (2) get

⇒ \(\alpha=\frac{R_2 \ell_1-R_1 \ell_2}{R_1-R_2} \text { and } \beta=\frac{R_1 \ell_1-R_2 \ell_2}{R_1-R_2}-100\)

These end corrections (α and β) are used to modify the observations

Solved Examples

Example 70. If we used 100Ω and 200Ω resistance in place of R and S, we get null deflection at l1 = 33.0cm. If we interchange the Resistance, the null deflection was found to be at l2 = 67.0 cm. The end correction α and β should be:

  1. α = 1cm, β = 1cm
  2. α = 2cm, β = 1cm
  3. α = 1cm, β = 2cm
  4. None of these

Answer: \(\alpha=\frac{R_2 \ell_1-R_1 \ell_2}{R_1-R_2}=\frac{(200)(33)-(100)(67)}{100-200}=1 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Question 71. Now we start taking observations. At the position of R, unknown resistance is used, and at the position of S, 300Ω resistance is used. If the balanced length was found to be l = 26cm, estimate the unknown resistance.

  1. 108Ω
  2. 105.4Ω
  3. 100Ω
  4. 110Ω

Answer: \(\frac{\ell_{\text {eq }}}{(100-\ell)_{\text {e- }}}=\frac{R}{300}\)

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{R}{(300)}=\frac{26+1}{(100-26)+1}=\frac{27}{75} \\
& R=\frac{300 \times 27}{75}=108 \Omega .
\end{aligned}\)

Question 72. If the unknown Resistance calculated without using the end correction, is R1 and with using the end corrections is R 2 then (assume same end correction) (1) R1 > R2 when the balanced point is in the first half (2*) R1 < R2 when the balanced point is in first half (3*) R1 > R2 when the balanced point is in the second half(4) R1 > R2 always
Solution:

⇒ \(\mathrm{R}_1=\mathrm{S}\left(\frac{\ell}{100-\ell}\right), \quad \mathrm{R}_2=\mathrm{S}\left(\frac{\ell+\alpha}{100-\ell+\beta}\right)\)

If Balnce points in the first half says i= 40

⇒ \(R_1=S\left(\frac{40}{60}\right) \quad R_2=S\left(\frac{41}{61}\right) \quad \text { so } R_2>R_1\)

if the balance point is in the second half say I = 70

Solution: \(\mathrm{R}_1=\mathrm{S}\left(\frac{\ell}{100-\ell}\right), \quad \mathrm{R}_2=\mathrm{S}\left(\frac{\ell+\alpha}{100-\ell+\beta}\right)\)

if the balance point is in the first half say I= 40

⇒ \(R_1=S\left(\frac{40}{60}\right) \quad R_2=S\left(\frac{41}{61}\right) \quad \text { so } R_2>R_1\)

⇒ \(R_1=S\left(\frac{40}{60}\right) \quad R_2=S\left(\frac{41}{61}\right) \quad \text { so } R_2>R_1\)

If the Balance point is in the second half say i= 70

⇒ \(R_1=S\left(\frac{70}{30}\right) \quad R_2=S\left(\frac{71}{31}\right) \quad \text { so } R_2<R_1\)

Maximum Permissible Error in p:

The specific resistivity of wire, from meter bridge is \(\rho=\frac{\pi \mathrm{D}^{-S}}{4 \mathrm{~L}} \frac{\ell}{100-\ell}\)

Assume that known resistance in RB(S), and the total length of wire is precisely known, then let’s find the maximum permissible error due to an error in measurement of  (balance length) and D (diameter of wire).

⇒\(\ln \rho=\ln \left(\frac{\pi S}{4 L}\right)+2 \ln \mathrm{D}+\ln \ell-\ln (100-\ell) \quad \text { (assume there is no error in } \mathrm{S} \text { and } \mathrm{L} \text { ) }\)

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \rho}{\rho}=2 \frac{\mathrm{dD}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\mathrm{d} \ell}{\ell}-\frac{\mathrm{d}(100-\ell)}{(100-\ell)}=2 \frac{\mathrm{dD}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\mathrm{d} \ell}{\ell}+\frac{\mathrm{d} \ell}{100-\ell}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{100-\ell}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max } \text { due to error in } \ell \text { only is }=\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{100-\ell}=\frac{\Delta \ell(100)}{\ell(100-\ell)}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max } \text { will be least when } \ell(100-\ell) \text { is maximum, i.e. } \ell=50 \mathrm{~cm}\)

So % error in resistance (resistivity) will be minimal if the balance point is at the midpoint of the meter bridge wire.

Experiment 9

Post Office Box

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Post Office Box

In a wheat stone’s Bridge circuit \(\text { If } \frac{P}{Q}=\frac{R}{X}\) then the bridge is balanced. So unknown resistance \(X=\frac{Q}{P} R=\frac{R}{(P / Q)}\) To realize the wheat stone’s Bridge circuit, a pox office Box is described. Resistance P and Q are set in arms AB and BC where we can have 10Ω, 100 Ω, or 1000 Ω resistance to set any ratio \(\frac{P}{Q}.\)

These arms are called ratio arms. Initially, we take Q = 10Ω and P = 10Ω to set \(\frac{P}{Q}=1\) The unknown resistance (X) is connected between C and D, and the battery is connected across A and C (Just like wheat stone’s Bridge).

Now put Resistance in parts A to D such that the Bridge gets balanced. For this keep on increasing the resistance with 1Ω intervals, and check the deflection in the Galvanometer by first pressing key K1 key then the Galvanometer key K2.

Suppose at R = 4Ω, we get deflection toward left and at R = 5Ω, we get deflection toward right. So we can say that for bridge balance. R should be between 4 to 5.

Now x \(X=\frac{R}{(P / Q)}=\frac{R}{(10 / 10)}\) = R=4 to 5

So we can estimate that X should be between 4Ω and 5Ω.

To get closer to X, in the second observation, let’s choose \(\frac{P}{Q}=10 \text { e.i. }\left(\frac{P=100}{Q=10}\right) \text {. }\)

Suppose Now at R = 42. We are getting deflection toward the left, and at R = 43, deflection is toward the right. So Re (42,43).

Now, \(X=\frac{R}{(P / Q)}=\frac{R}{(100 / 10)}=\frac{1}{10} R \text { where } R \in(42,43)\)

So we can estimate that X e (4.2, 4.3). Now to get further closer, choose \(\frac{P}{Q}=100\) As we increase the \(\frac{P}{Q}\) ratio, R will be divided by a greater number, so the answer will be upto more decimal places so answer will be more accurate.

The Observation Table is shown below.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Resistance In The Ratio Arms

Solved Examples

Examples 73. If the length of the wire is (100.0 cm), and the radius of the wire, as measured from the screw gauge is (1.00 mm) then the specific resistance of the wire material is

  1. 13.35×10-6 Ω-m
  2. 13.4 × 10–6 Ω-m
  3. 13.352 × 10–6 Ω-m
  4. 16.5 × 10–6Ω-m

Solution: 2. 13.4 × 10–6 Ω-m

From observation table R = 4.25Ω

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{(R) \pi r^2}{\ell} \quad=\frac{4.25 \times 3.14 \times(1.00)^2 \times 10^{-6}}{\left(100.0 \times 10^{-2}\right)}\)

= 13.3×10-5Ω-m

Examples 74. Assertion: To locate null deflection, the battery key (K1) is pressed first and then the galvanometer key (K2). Reason: If first K 2 is pressed, and then as soon as K1 is pressed, the current suddenly tries to increase. so due to self-induction, a large stopping emf is generated in the galvanometer, which may damage the galvanometer.

  1. If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is a correct explanation of Assertion.
  2. If both Assertion and Reason and true but Reason is not a correct explanation of
    Assertion.
  3. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
  4. If both Assertion and Reason are false.

Answer: 1. If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is a correct explanation of Assertion.

Example 75. What is the maximum and minimum possible resistance, which can be determined using the PO Box shown above figure-2

  1. 1111 kΩ, 0.1 Ω
  2. 1111 kΩ, 0.01Ω
  3. 1111 kΩ, 0.001Ω
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. 1111 kΩ , 0.01Ω

Solution: \(X=\frac{Q}{P} R \quad \Rightarrow \quad(X)_{\max }=\frac{(Q)_{\max }}{(P)_{\min }}(R)_{\max }=\frac{1000}{10}(11110)=1111 \mathrm{k} \Omega\)

\((X)_{\min }=\frac{(Q)_{\min }}{(P)_{\max }}(R)_{\min }=\frac{10}{1000} \frac{10}{1000}(1)=0.01 \Omega\)

Example 76. In a certain experiment, if \(\frac{Q}{P}=\frac{1}{10}\) if 192Ωif used we are getting deflection toward right, at 193 Ω, again toward right but at 194 Ω, deflection is toward left. the unknown resistance should lie between

  1. 19.2 to 19.3 Ω
  2. 139. to 19.4 Ω
  3. 19 to 20Ω
  4. 19.4 to 19.5Ω

Answer: 2. 139. to 19.4 Ω

Solution: \(X=\frac{Q}{P}(R) \frac{1}{10}=(193 \leftrightarrow 194)=19.3 \leftrightarrow 19.4\)

⇒ \(X=\frac{Q}{P}(R) \frac{1}{10}=(193 \leftrightarrow 194)=19.3 \leftrightarrow 19.4\)

Example 77. If By mistake, Battery is connected between B and C Galvanometer is connected across A and C then

  1. We cannot get a balanced point.
  2. The experiment will be less accurate
  3. Experiments can be done similarly.
  4. The experiment can be done similarly but now, K2 should be pressed first, then K1.

Answer: 4. Experiment can be done similarly but now, K2 should be pressed first, then K1.

Experiment 10

To Find the Focal Length Of A Concave Mirror Using the U-V Method

Principle: For different u, we measure different v, and find f using mirror’s formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}\)

In this experiment, a concave mirror is fixed at position MM’ and a knitting needle is used as an object, mounted in front of the concave mirror. This needle is called an object needle (O in Fig)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To Find the focal length of a concave mirror using U-V Method

First of all, we make a rough estimation of f. For estimating f roughly, make a sharp image of a faraway object (like the sun) on filter paper. The image distance of the far object will be an approximate estimation of focal length).

Now, the object needle is kept beyond f, so that its real and inverted image can be formed. You can see this inverted image in the mirror by closing one eye and keeping the other eye along the pole of the mirror.

To locate the position of the image, use a second needle, and shift this needle such that its peak coincides with the image. The second needle gives the distance of image (v), so it is called the “image needle”.

Note the object distance ‘u’ and image distance ‘v’ from the mm scale on the optical bench and find the focus distance from that Similarly take 4-5 more observations.

Determining ‘f’ from u – v observation:

Using Mirror Formula

Use mirror formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}\) to find the focal length from each u – v observation. Finally, take an average of all.

From \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}} \mathrm{v} / \mathrm{s} \frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow \frac{1 / u}{1 / f}+\frac{1 / v}{1 / f}=1 \leftrightarrow \frac{x}{a}+\frac{y}{b}=1\)

So curve between \(\frac{1}{v} \mathrm{v} / \mathrm{s} \frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}\)
should be a straight line having x and y intercepts \(=\frac{1}{f} \text { and } \frac{1}{f}\) from the observations of u and v, plot \(\frac{1}{v} \text { v/s } \frac{1}{u}\) curve as a straight line, find the x and y intercepts and equate them to \(\frac{1}{f} \text { and } \frac{1}{f} \text {. }\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determining F From U-V Observation

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determining F From U-V Observation.,

From u – v curve:

The relation between u and v is

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

So curve between v v/s u is a rectangular hyperbola as shown in the figure. If we draw a line bisecting both the axis, i.e. line

u=v… 2

Graph of v vs. u for a Concave Mirror

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of v vs. u for a Concave Mirror

Then their intersection points should be v = 2f, u = 2f (By solving equation (1) and equation (2)) from u – v data, plot v v/s u curve, and draw a line bisecting the axis. Find the intersection points and equate them to (2f, 2f).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of v vs. u for a Concave Mirror.

From the intersection of lines joining u n and vn:

Indicate u1, u2, u3 ……. un on x-axis, and v1, v2, v3 …….. vn on y-axis. If we join u 1 with v1, u2, u3 with v3 and …………… so on. All line intersects at a common point (f, f).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of v vs. u for a Concave Mirror.,

Explanation

Line joining u1 and v1 is

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{x}{u_1}+\frac{y}{v_1}=1 \\
& \frac{1}{u_1}+\frac{1}{v_1}=\frac{1}{f} \text { or } \frac{f}{u_1}+\frac{f}{v_1}=1
\end{aligned}\) ………(1)

Line joining u2 and v2 is

Where \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{x}{u_2}+\frac{y}{v_2}=1 \\
& \frac{f}{u_2}+\frac{f}{v_2}=1
\end{aligned}\)

Similarly, line joining un and vn is

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{n}}}+\frac{\mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{n}}}=1 \\
& \frac{f}{u_n}+\frac{f}{v_n}=1
\end{aligned}\)

From equation (1’), (2’), (3’), we can say that x = f and y = f will satisfy all equations (1), (2), (3). So point (f, f) will be the common intersection point of all the lines.

From u – v data draw u 1, u2 …… un on the x-axis and v1, v1, …….. vn data on the y-axis. Join u 1 with v1, u2 with v2 …….. un with vn. Find a common intersection point and equate it to (f, f).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Intersection Point And Equate It

Index Error

In the u – v method, we require the distance between the object or image from the pole (vertex) of the mirror (actual distance).

But practically we measure the distance between the indices A and B. (Observed distance), which need not exactly coincide with the object and pole, there can be a slight mismatch called index error, which will be constant for every observation.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determanation Of Index Correction

Index error = Observed distance – Actual distance (Just like zero error in screw gauge, it is the excess reading).

To determine index error, the mirror and object needle are placed at arbitrary positions. For measuring actual distance, a knitting needle is just fitted between the pole of the mirror and object needle “O”.

The length of the knitting needle will give the actual object distance while the separation between indices A and B at that instant is the observed distance.

So index error is e = Observed distance – Actual distance = Separation between indices A and B – Length of knitting needle once we get e, in every observation, we get Actual distance = Observed distance (separation between the indices) – Excess reading (e) There is another term, Index correction which is inverse of index error. Index correction = – index error.

Example 78. To find index error for u, when a knitting needle of length 20.0 cm is adjusted between pole and object needle, the separation between the indices of object needle and mirror was observed to be 20.2 cm. Index correction for u is –

  1. –0.2 cm
  2. 0.2 cm
  3. –0.1 cm
  4. 0.1 cm

Solution: (2) Index error (Excess reading) = Observed reading – Actual reading = 20.2 – 20.0 = 0.2 cm

Example 79. To find the index error for v, when the same knitting needle is adjusted between the pole and the image needle, the separation between the indices of the image needle and mirror was found to be 19.9 cm. The index error for v is

  1. 0.1 cm
  2. –0.1 cm
  3. 0.2 cm
  4. –0.2 cm

Solution : (2) e = 19.9 cm – 20.0 cm = –0.1 cm

Example 80. In some observations, the observed object distance (Separation between indices of object needle and mirror) is 30.2 cm, and the observed image distance is 19.9 cm. Using index correction from the previous two questions, estimate the focal length of the concave mirror!

Solution: u = 30.2 – 0.2 (excess reading)

= 30.0 cm.

v = 19.9 – (–0.1) (excess reading)

= 20.0 cm.

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u} \Rightarrow f=12.0 \mathrm{~cm} .\)

Maximum permissible error in f due to imperfect measurement of u & v:

In this experiment, from a set (u, v), focus distance f can be calculated from the equation.

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{v} \Rightarrow \frac{d f}{f^2}=\frac{d u}{u^2}+\frac{d v}{v^2} \\
& \left(\frac{\Delta f}{f^2}\right)= \pm \frac{\Delta u}{u^2} \pm \frac{\Delta v}{v^2} \Rightarrow\left(\frac{\Delta f}{f^2}\right)_{\max }=+\frac{\Delta u}{u^2}+\frac{\Delta v}{v^2} \Rightarrow(\Delta f)_{\max }=\left(\frac{\Delta u}{u^2}+\frac{\Delta v}{v^2}\right) \times f^2
\end{aligned}\)

Solved Examples

Example 81. In the u – v method to find the focal length of a concave mirror, if the object distance was found to be 10.0 cm and the image distance was also found to be 10.0 cm then find a maximum permissible error in f, due to error in u and v measurement.
Solution: \(\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow \quad \frac{1}{(-10)}+\frac{1}{(-10)}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow|f|=5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

⇒ \((\Delta f)_{\max }=\left(\frac{\Delta u}{u^2}+\frac{\Delta v}{v^2}\right) \times f^2\) \((\Delta \mathrm{f})_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1}{10^2}+\frac{0.1}{10^2}\right) \times 5^2=0.05 \mathrm{~cm}\)

So, f = (5 ± 0.05) cm

Experiment 11

To find the focal length of a convex lens using the u-v method.

Principle: For different u, we measure different v, and find f using lens’s formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)

Procedure: In this experiment, a convex lens is fixed at position L and a knitting needle is used as an object, mounted in front of the concave mirror. This needle is called object needle.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To find focal length of a convex lens using u-v method.

First of all, we make a rough estimation of f. For estimating f roughly, make a sharp image of a faraway object (like the sun) on filter paper. The image distance of the far object will be an approximate estimation of focal length. Now, the object needle is kept beyond f, so that its real and inverted image (I in Fig) can be formed.

To locate the position of the image, use a second needle, and shift this needle such that its peak coincides with the image. The second needle gives the distance of image (v), so it is called the “image needle” (CD in figure). Note the object distance ‘u’ and image distance ‘v’ from the mm scale on an optical bench.

Similarly take 4-5 more observations.

Determining ‘f’ from u – v observation:

Using lens Formula:

Use lens formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\) to find the focal length from each u – v observation. Finally, take an average of all.

For \(\frac{1}{v} v / s \frac{1}{u}\) curve:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow \frac{1 / u}{-1 / f}+\frac{1 / v}{1 / f}=1 \leftrightarrow{ }^{\frac{x}{a}}+\frac{y}{b}=1\)

So curve between \(\frac{1}{v} \mathrm{v} / \mathrm{s} \frac{1}{u}\) should be a straight line having x and y intercepts \(=\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{f}\) and

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To find focal length of a convex lens using u-v method..

Graph of \(\frac{1}{v} \text { vs. } \frac{1}{u}\) for a convex lens from the observations of u and v, plot \(\frac{1}{v} v / s \frac{1}{u}\) curve as a straight line, find the x and y intercepts and equate them to \(-\frac{1}{f} \text { and } \frac{1}{f} \text {. }\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To find focal length of a convex lens using u-v method 3

From u – v curve:

Relation between u and v is \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)……(1)

Then their intersection points should be V = 2f, u = – 2f (By solving equation (1) and equation (2)) from u – v data, plot v v/s u curve, and draw a line y = -x. Find the intersection points and equate them to (-2f, 2f).

Graph of v vs. u for a Convex lens

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of v vs. u for a Convex lens

From the intersection of lines joining u n and vn:

Indicate u1, u2, u3 ……. un on x-axis, and v1, v2, v3 …….. vn on y-axis. If we join u 1 with v1, u2 with v2, u3 with v3 and …………… so on. All line intersects at a common point (-f, f).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments From intersection of lines joining u n and vn

From u – v data draw u1, u2 …… un on the x-axis and v1, v2, …….. vn data on the y-axis. Join u1 and v1, u2 with v2 …….. un and vn. Find a common intersection point and equate it to (-f, f)

Index error and max permissible error are similar to the concave mirror.

Experiment 12

Object: To study the dissipation of energy of a simple pendulum by plotting a graph between the square of amplitude and time.

Apparatus: Ticker timer, paper tape, meter scale, thread, clamp, metallic brick as bob, clamps, split cork, and a spring balance.

Principle: The energy of a simple harmonic oscillator is directly proportional to its amplitude. When the bob of a simple pendulum is set into vibrations, its amplitude goes on decreasing with time due to friction of air and friction at the point of support.

Such vibrations whose amplitude decreases with time due to some dissipative force are called damped vibrations. The vibrations of a simple pendulum are also damped. At any time t the energy Et = E. e–λt, where λ is the decay constant and energy E is given by E =1/2 KA2 where A is the amplitude and K is force constant.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The energy of a simple harmonic oscillator

Method

  1. Find the mass of the metallic brick by the spring balance.
  2. Fix the clamp stand on the edge of the table with the help of clamps.
  3. One end of the thread with the metallic brick and pass the other end of the thread through the split cork hold the cork in the clamp stand.
  4. Fix the ticker timer at the same height above the ground on the brick is attach the paper tape at the center of the brick with the help of the cello tape.
  5. Full the brick towards the ticker timer and take the paper tape. Start the ticker timer and release the brick.
  6. As the brick reaches the outer extreme switch off the ticker timer.
  7. Remove the paper tape. The pattern of dots obtained on the tape will be as shown below.
  8. Mark the central dot A and the extreme dots B and C corresponding to the extreme positions of the metallic brick.
  9. Measure the distance of the dots from the central dot A

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The pattern of dots obtained on the tape

Observations:

  1. Least count of spring balance = …………. kg
  2. Corrected mass of the metallic block = m = …………. kg
  3. Period of ticker-timer (one tick) = ………….. sec
  4. Length of simple pendulum, = L = …………… m

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Side from dot

Graph

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph

From the graph, it is clear that Energy (Amp)2 and the energy of the pendulum decrease with time.

Precaution

  1. An inextensible string thread should be used for making the pendulum.
  2. The lower faces of the split cork should lie in the same horizontal plane.
  3. The amplitude of oscillation should be kept small.
  4. The experiment should be performed at a place which is free from any air disturbance.
  5. The metallic brick should be suspended close to the ground.
  6. The metallic brick should move along the reference line without any jerky motion.

Result

The sum of the kinetic energy and potential energy of the bob (metallic block) of the simple pendulum is constant within the limits of the experimental error. This shows that the energy is being transferred from kinetic to potential and vice versa. From the above graph, it is proved that there is dissipation of energy during SHM of a simple pendulum.

Precaution

  1. Pendulum support should be rigid
  2. The amplitude should remain small.
  3. The pendulum should be sufficiently long (about 2 meters).
  4. Pulling string should be used to avoid spinning the metallic block
  5. Paper tape should be attached to the center of the bottom of the block.

Source of Error

  1. The support may not be fully rigid.
  2. Movement of metallic block may not be proper

Experiment 13

Object: To determine the mass of a given body using a meter scale by the principle of moments

Apparatus: A meter scale, a broad heavy wedge with a sharp edge, a weight box, a body of unknown mass

Principle

Meter scale as a beam balance: –

Introduction: Like a physical balance, a meter scale can be used as a beam balance making use of the same principle of moments. Besides it has an adjustable power arm and weight arm about the fulcrum whose length can be adjusted.

Diagram:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Metre-scale balance

Construction (Arrangement): The meter scale is balanced by putting its 50 cm mark over the sharp edge of a heavy broad wedge works as a fulcrum. In this position, the weight of the meter scale and the reaction of the wedge, balance each other.

Working: The body is tied to a strong and light thread loop and suspended on the left of the wedge on some fixed mark. (Say 20 cm in diagram)

A light paper pan is suspended by a strong and light thread on the right. Weights are put on the pan. The position of the loop of the pan and weight in it are so adjusted that the meter scale becomes horizontal again. The position of the thread of the loops and the amount of weights in the pan are noted.

The mass of the body is calculated using the following theory.

Theory: If m and M are the mass of the body and mass of the weight used and a1 and a2 are the distance of their loops from the wedge. Then, power (mass) arm = a1, weight arm = a2 or \(m=\frac{M a_2}{a_1}\)

Two different methods:

Arm lengths are fixed and equal and weight is adjustable.

The thread loops are suspended at position forming both arms of equal length. Weight in the paper pan is adjusted till the meter scale becomes horizontal. (figure (a)) In this case a1 = a2 = a Hence, mga1 = Mga2 or m=M

A physical balance makes use of this method.

Masses and power arm fixed and weight arm adjustable.

Mass is suspended at a fixed distance a1.

The length of the power arm is adjusted by moving the weight loop thread in and out till the meter scale becomes horizontal

In this case a

1 = a1, a2 =A

Hence mga1 = Mga2, becomes mg a= MgA Or \mathrm{m}=\mathrm{M} \frac{\mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{a}}\(\)

Procedure

First method

  1. Arrange the meter scale horizontally by supporting it at the sharp edge of the broad heavy wedge at the 50 cm mark.
  2. Suspend the body of unknown mass by a loop thread at a fixed mark on the left of the wedge.
  3. Suspended paper pan at the same distance on the right of the wedge with some weights in it.
  4. Adjust the weights in a paper pan till the meter scale becomes horizontal.
  5. Note the mass of the weights in the pan.
  6. Repeat steps 2 to 5, three times by increasing the length of the arms in equal steps keeping the lengths equal.
  7. Record the observations as given below in a table.

Observation And Calculations

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Length of weight (or power) arm a cm

Note: Observations are as sample

Mean mass, \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{m}_1+\mathrm{m}_2+\mathrm{m}_3}{3} \mathrm{~g}=\ldots . . \mathrm{g}\)

It will be found that M1 = M2 = M3 = m in all cases.

Result

The unknown mass of the body, m = 20 g

Second method

  1. 1,2. Steps 1 and 2 of the first method.
  2. Suspend the paper pan on the right of the wedge with some known weight in it.
  3. Adjust the distance of the paper pan till the meter scale becomes horizontal.
  4. Note the position of the paper pan and thus length of the weight arm.
  5. Repeat steps 2 to 5, three times by increasing the mass of the weights by an equal amount.
  6. Record the observations as given below in the table.

Observation And Calculations

Fixed length of power arm = a= 25 cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Mass of weight in the paper pan

(Note: Observations are as sample)

Mean mass, \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{m}_1+\mathrm{m}_2+\mathrm{m}_3}{3} \mathrm{~g}=\ldots . \mathrm{g}\)

It will be found that \(\mathrm{m}_1=\mathrm{m}_2=\mathrm{m}_3=\mathrm{m} \text { in all cases. }\)

Result

The unknown mass of the body, m = 24 g

Precautions:

  1. The wedge should be broad and heavy with a sharp edge.
  2. The meter scale should have uniform mass distribution.
  3. Threads used for loops should be thin, light, and strong.

Sources Of Error

  1. The wedge may not be sharp.
  2. The meter scale may have faulty calibration.
  3. The threads used for loops may be thick and heavy.

Experiment 14

Aim

To determine the surface tension of water by capillary rise method.

Apparatus

Three capillary tubes of different radii and a tipped pointer clamped in a metallic plate with a handle, traveling microscope, clamp and stand, a fine motion adjustable height stand, a flat bottom open dish, clean water in a beaker, and thermometer.

Theory

Rise of liquid level in a capillary tube (Ascent formula):

Let a capillary tube be dipped in a liquid which makes a concave meniscus in the tube. Due to surface tension, the tube molecules exert a force T on the liquid molecules in the unit length of the circle of contact of the liquid surface with the tube. This force acts at an angleθ (angle of contact) with the wall of the vessel.

Components T sinθ perpendicular to the wall of the tube cancel for the whole circle. Component T cosθ along the wall of the tube on all molecules becomes 2πrT cosθ. It is this upward force that pulls the liquid upward in the capillary tube.

The liquid rises in the capillary tube upto a height till the weight of the liquid rises equals this force. Let the liquid rise upto a height of h (as measured for the lower meniscus B) and let the meniscus ABC have a hemispherical shape.

The volume of liquid in the meniscus above B. Then, the volume of the liquid rises upto the lower meniscus = πr²h. The volume of a cylinder of radius and height r – Volume of hemisphere of radius r.

⇒ \(=\pi r^2 \cdot r-\frac{2}{3} \pi r^3=\frac{1}{3} \pi r^3\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Volume of cylinder of radius and height

Total volume of the liquid risen \(=\pi r^2 h+\frac{1}{3} \pi r^3=\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right]\)

If liquid has a density p, then mass of liquid risen \(=\pi r^2=\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho\) and weight of the liquid risen \(=\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho g\) and weight of the liquid risen \(=\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho g\) and weight of the liquid risen \(=\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho g\) For Equilibrium ‘

⇒ \(\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho g=2 \pi r T \cos \theta \quad \text { or } \quad h=\frac{2 T \cos \theta}{r \rho g}-\frac{r}{3}\)

[From above we find that \(h \propto \frac{1}{r},\) liquid rises more in a capillary tube of small radius] Also, \(\mathrm{T}=\frac{(\mathrm{h}+\mathrm{r} / 3) \mathrm{r} \rho \mathrm{g}}{2 \cos \theta}\) Measuring height h of liquid risen in capillary tube and knowing other quantities, surface tension of
liquid (T), can be calculated.

[In practice, r/3 is neglected as compared to h, then \(\mathrm{T}=\frac{\mathrm{hr} \rho \mathrm{g}}{2 \cos \theta}\) ]

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Travelling microscope
A traveling microscope is a device that is used for the accurate measurement of very small distances. It is a compound microscope fixed on a strong metallic horizontal platform that can be balanced with the help of leveling screws L and L’.

The compound microscope can slide or travel both along horizontal and vertical levels. Due to the horizontal or vertical traveling of the microscope, we have named it as a traveling microscope.

The compound microscope consists of two convex lenses called objective O which is placed close to the object and eye-piece E placed near the eye of an observer. Objective O is a simple convex lens small aperture and a small focal length.

These two lenses are placed in two distinct tubes placed coaxially. To focus object the tubes can be moved by using a rack and pinion arrangement R. The microscope has a crosswire in front of the eye-piece which serves as a reference mark. The object to be seen is placed in front of the objective and the image is viewed through the eyepiece. The image formed is virtual, magnified, and inverted.

The distance through which the microscope moves can be read with the help of a vernier scale (V) moves with the microscope along with the scale engraved on the framework. The horizontal movement of the microscope is done with the help of screw P. and the vertical movement of the microscope is done with the help of screw Q whereas the horizontal and vertical shifting for the fine adjustment microscope can be done with the help of fine screws P’ and Q’.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of surface tension by capillary rise method

Setting the apparatus

  1. Place the adjustable height stand on the table and make its base horizontal by leveling screws.
  2. Take dirt and grease-free water in an open dish with a flat bottom and put it on the top of the stand.
  3. Take three capillary tubes of different radii (ranging from 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm)
  4. Clean and dry them, and clamp the capillary tubes in a metallic plate in order of increasing radius.
  5. Also, clamp a pointer after the third capillary tube.
  6. Clamp the horizontal handle of the metallic plate in a vertical stand, so the capillary tubes and the pointer become vertical.
  7. Adjust the height of the metallic plate so that the capillary tubes dip in water in an open dish.
  8. Adjust the position of the pointer, such that its tip just touches the water surface.

Measurement of capillary rise

  1. Find the least count of the traveling microscope for the horizontal and the vertical scale.
  2. Record the same in the notebook.
  3. Raise the microscope to a suitable height, keeping its axis horizontal and pointing towards the capillary tubes.
  4. Bring the microscope in front of the first capillary tube (which has maximum rise).
  5. Make the horizontal cross wire just touch the central part of the concave meniscus (seen convex through a microscope.
  6. Note the reading of the position of the microscope on the vertical scale.
  7. Now move the microscope horizontally and bring it in front of the second capillary tube.
  8. Lower the microscope and repeat steps 11 and 12.
  9. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the third capillary tube.
  10. Lower the stand so that the pointer tip becomes visible.
  11. Move the microscope horizontally and bring it in front of the pointer.
  12. Lower the microscope and make the horizontal cross-wire touch the tip of the pointer. Repeat step 12.
  13. Measurement of the internal diameter of the capillary tube.
  14. Place the first capillary tube horizontally on the adjustable stand.
  15. Focus the microscope on the end dipped in water. A white circle (inner bore) surrounded by a green circular strip (glass cross-section) will be seen.
  16. Make horizontal cross-wire touch the inner circle at A. Note microscope reading on vertical
    scale.
  17. Raise the microscope to make the horizontal cross-wire touch the circle at B. Note the reading (the difference gives the vertical internal diameter AB of the capillary tube).
  18. Move the microscope on a horizontal scale and make the vertical cross wire touch the inner circle at C. Note the microscope reading on the horizontal scale.
  19. Move the microscope to the right to make the vertical cross-wire touch the circle at D. Note the reading (the difference gives the horizontal diameter CD of the capillary tube).
  20. Repeat steps 19 to 24 for the other two capillary tubes.
  21. Note the temperature of the water in the dish.
  22. Record your observations as given below.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of the internal diameter of the capillary tube.

 

Table for the height of liquid rise

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Table for height of liquid rise

Table for internal diameter of the capillary tube

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Table for internal diameter of the capillary tube

  • The temperature of the water, (t) = …….. ºC
  • Density of water at observed temperature, p = …….. (g cm–3)
  • The angle of contact of water in a glass, θ = 8º
  • i.e., cos θ = 0.99027 taken as 1.

Calculations

From formula, \(\mathrm{T}=\frac{\mathrm{r}(\mathrm{h}+\mathrm{r} / 3) \rho g}{2 \cos \theta}\).

Put values of h (column 4-first table) and r (column 4-second table) for each capillary tube separately and find the value of T (in dynes cm –1).

Find Mean VAlue, \(T=\frac{T_1+T_2+T_3}{3}=\ldots . . . \text { dynes } \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)

Result

The surface tension of water at tºc = …….dynes cm –1.

Precautions

  1. The capillary tube and water should be free from grease.
  2. The capillary tube should be set vertically.
  3. The microscope should be moved in a lower direction only to avoid backlash errors.
  4. The internal diameter of the capillary tube should be measured in two mutually perpendicular directions.
  5. The temperature of the water should be noted.

Sources Of Error:

Water and capillary tubes may not be free from grease.

Experiment 14

Aim: To study the effect of the detergent on surface tension by observing capillary rise.

Apparatus

Three capillary tubes of different radii and a tipped pointer clamped in a metallic plate with a handle, traveling microscope, clamp and stand, a fine motion adjustable height stand, a flat bottom open dish, clean water in a beaker, and thermometer.

Theory

A detergent when added to distilled water reduces the surface tension of water. If we use the same capillary tube to study the rise of pure distilled water and then the rise of detergent mixed water (solution), we shall find that the rise will be lesser in case of solution. If the quantity of detergent (solution concentration) is increased, the rise will be still lesser.

Procedure

  1. Set the apparatus as in the previous Experiment.
  2. Find the rise of pure distilled (grease-free) water through the capillary tube following all the steps of the previous Experiment.
  3. Take a known volume of distilled water from the same sample.
  4. Dissolve a small known mass of a detergent in the water to make a dilute solution.
  5. Find the rise of the solution in the same capillary tube. The rise will be less than that for pure water.
  6. Add double the mass of detergent in the same volume of water to have a solution with double concentration.
  7. Find the rise of this concentrated solution in the same capillary tube. The rise will be still lesser.
  8. Repeat with the solution of the same detergent having increased concentration. The rise will decrease as concentration increases.

[Note: Do not make the solution too concentrated to affect density] Observation The rise in capillary tube decreases with the addition of detergent in pure water with more addition of detergent, the rise becomes lesser and lesser.

Result

  1. The detergent reduces the surface tension of water.
  2. The capillary tube and water should be free from grease.
  3. Capillary tube should be set vertically.
  4. The microscope should be moved in a lower direction only to avoid backlash errors.
  5. The internal diameter of the capillary tube should be measured in two mutually perpendicular directions.
  6. The temperature of the water should be noted.

Sources of Error

Water and capillary tubes may not be free from grease.

Experiment 15

AIM: To determine the coefficient of viscosity of a given viscous liquid by measuring the terminal velocity of a given spherical body.

Apparatus: A half-meter high, 5 cm broad glass cylindrical jar with millimeter graduations along its height, transparent viscous liquid, one steel ball, screw gauge, stop clock/watch, thermometer, and clamp withstand.

Theory:

Terminal velocity :

Definition: The maximum velocity acquired by the body, falling freely in a viscous medium, is called terminal velocity.

Expression: Considering a small sphere of radius r of density p falling freely in a viscous medium (liquid) of density p. The forces acting on it are :

The weight of the sphere acting downward \(=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3 \rho g\)

The effective downward force, \(\mathrm{mg}=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3 \rho \mathrm{g}-\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{r}^3 \sigma \mathrm{g}=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3(\rho-\sigma) \mathrm{g}\)

The upward force of viscosity, F = 6pipinrv

When the downward force is balanced by the upward force of viscosity, the body falls with a constant velocity, called terminal velocity. Hence, with terminal velocity,

⇒ \(6 \pi \eta r v=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3(\rho-\sigma) g\) or terminal velocity

This is the required expression.

Terminal velocity \(=\frac{2}{9} \frac{r^2(\rho-\sigma) g}{\eta} \quad \text { or } \quad \eta=\frac{2}{9} \frac{r^2(\rho-\sigma) g}{v}\)

knowing r, p, and e, and measuring v, n can be calculated.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Terminal velocity

Procedure:

  1. Clean the glass jar and fill it with the viscous liquid, which must be transparent.
  2. Check that the vertical scale along the height of the jar is visible. Note it’s the least count.
  3. Test the stop clock/watch for its tight spring. Find its least count and zero error (if any)
  4. Find and note the least count and zero error of the screw gauge.
  1. Determine the mean radius of the ball.
  2. Drop the ball gently in the liquid. It falls into the liquid with accelerated velocity for about one-third of the height. Then it falls with uniform terminal velocity.
  3. Start the stop clock/watch when the ball reaches some convenient division (20 cm, 25 cm,…..).
  4. Stop the stop clock/watch just when the ball reaches the lowest convenient division (45 cm).
  5. Find and note the distance fallen and the time taken by the ball.
  6. Repeat steps 6 to 9 two times more.
  7. Note and record the temperature of the liquid.
  8. Record your observations as given ahead.

Observations:

Least count of vertical scale =…….mm.

Least count of stop clock/watch =…….s.

Zero error of stop clock/watch =…….s.

Pitch of the screw (p) = 1 mm.

Number of divisions on the circular scale = 100

Least count of screw gauge (L.C.) \(=\frac{1}{100}=0.01 \mathrm{~mm}\)

Zero error of screw gauge (e) =……mm.

Zero correction of screw gauge (C) (– e) =…….mm

Diameter of spherical ball

  1. Along one direction, D1 = ……..mm
  2. In the perpendicular direction, D2 = ……..mm

Terminal velocity of spherical ball

  1. Distance fallen S = …..mm
  2. Time taken, t1 = …..s
  3. t2 = …..s
  4. t3 = …..s

Calculations

Mean Diameter \(D=\frac{D_1+D_2}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\)

Mean radius \(\mathrm{r}=\frac{\mathrm{D}}{2} \mathrm{~mm} \quad=\ldots \ldots \ldots \mathrm{cm}\)

Mean Time \(\mathrm{t}=\frac{\mathrm{t}_1+\mathrm{t}_2+\mathrm{t}_3}{3}=\ldots . . \mathrm{s}\)

Mean Terminal Velocity \(v=\frac{S}{t} \quad=\mathrm{cm} \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

From formula, \(\eta=\frac{2 r^2(\rho-\sigma) g}{9 v} \text { C.G.S. units. }\)

Result

The coefficient of viscosity of the liquid at temperature (θºC) = …..C.G.S. units

Precautions

  1. Liquid should be transparent to watch the motion of the ball.
  2. Balls should be perfectly spherical.
  3. Velocity should be noted only when it becomes constant.

Sources Of Error

  1. The liquid may have a uniform density.
  2. The balls may not be perfectly spherical.
  3. The noted velocity may not be constant

Experiment 16

AIM: To study the relationship between the temperature of a hot body and time by plotting a cooling curve.

Apparatus

Newton’s law of cooling apparatus (a thin-walled copper calorimeter suspended in a double-walled enclosure) two thermometers, clamp and stand, stop clock/watch.

Theory:

Newton was the first person to investigate the heat lost by a body in the air. He found that the rate of loss of heat is proportional to the excess temperature over the surroundings. This result, called Newton’s law of cooling, is approximately true in still air only for a temperature excess of 20 K or 30 K. Consider a hot body at a temperature T placed in surroundings at temperature T0.

Rate of loss loss of heat \(=-\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

Using Newton’s law of cooling \(-\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}} \propto\left(\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{T}_0\right)\) or \(\frac{d Q}{d t}=-k\left(T-T_0\right)\) where k is constant of proportionality whose value depends upon the area and nature of surface of the body. If the temperature of the body falls by a small amount of dT in time dt, then DQ= mcdT

where m is the mass of the body and c is the specific heat of the material of the body.

Now, \(\mathrm{mc} \frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\mathrm{k}\left(\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{T}_0\right)\)

Or, \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{mc}}\left(\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{T}_0\right)\) [ he re \(\mathrm{K}=\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{mc}}\) =constant]

Again \(\frac{d T}{T-T_0}=-K d t\)

Integrating \(\int \frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}-\mathrm{T}_0} \mathrm{dT}=-\mathrm{K} \int \mathrm{dt}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The Relationship Between The Temperature Of A Hot Body

This is the equation of a straight line having a negative slope (– K) and intercept C on the Y-axis, The Figure shows the graph of loge (T – T0) versus time t. While t has been treated as the x-variable, loge (T – T0) has been treated as the y-variable.

If Tm is the maximum temperature of a hot body, then at t = 0 from equation

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \log \left(T_m-T_0\right)=C \\
& \log \left(T-T_0\right)-\log \left(T_m-T_0\right)=-k t \\
& \log \left(\frac{T-T_0}{T_m-T_0}\right)=-k t \quad \Rightarrow \quad \frac{T-T_0}{T_m-T_0}=e^{-k t}
\end{aligned}\)

So, \(\left(T-T_0\right)=\left(T_m-T_0\right) e^{-k t}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The Relationship Between The Temperature Of A Hot Body.

Procedure

  1. Fill the space between the double wall of the enclosure with water and put the enclosure on a laboratory table.
  2. Fill the calorimeter two-thirds with water heated to about 80ºC.
  3. Suspend the calorimeter inside the enclosure along with a stirrer in it. Cover it with a wooden lid having a hole in its middle.
  4. Suspend from clamp and stand, one thermometer in enclosure water and the other in calorimeter water.
  5. Note the least count of the thermometers.
  6. Set the stop clock/watch at zero and note its least count.
  7. Note the temperature (T0) of water in the enclosure.
  8. Start stirring the water in the calorimeter to make it cool uniformly.
  9. Just when the calorimeter water has some convenient temperature reading (say 70ºC), note it and start the stop clock/watch.
  10. Continue stirring and note the temperature after every 5 minutes. The temperature falls quickly in the beginning.
  11. Note enclosure water temperature after every five minutes.
  12. When the fall of temperature becomes slow note the temperature at intervals of two minutes for 10 minutes and then at intervals of 5 minutes.
  13. Stop when the fall of temperature becomes very slow.
  14. Record your observations as given ahead

Observations

  • Least count of enclosure water thermometer = …………ºC
  • Least count of calorimeter water thermometer = …………ºC
  • Least count of stop clock/watch = …………s.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Table for time and temperature

Calculations

  1. The temperature of water in the enclosure will be found to remain the same. If not then take its mean as T0.
  2. Find the temperature difference (T – T0) and record it in column 5 of the table.
  3. Plot a graph between time t (column 2) and temperature T (column 3), taking t along the X-axis and T along the Y-axis. The graph is shown in the given figure. It is called the cooling curve’ of the liquid.

The graph between time and temperature (Cooling curve)

Scale:

  • X-axis: 1 cm = 5 minutes of t
  • Y – axis: 1 cm = 5º C of T

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Cooling Curve

Result

The temperature falls quickly in the beginning and then slowly as the difference in temperature goes on decreasing. This is in agreement with Newton’s law of cooling.

Precautions

The double-walled enclosure should be used to maintain the surroundings at a constant temperature.

Stirring should remain continuous for uniform cooling

  1. Sources Of Errors Surrounding temperature may change.
  2. The stirring of hot liquid may not be continuous.

Experiment 17

AIM: To determine the specific heat of a given solid (lead shots) by method of mixtures.

Apparatus

Solid (lead shots), copper calorimeter with a copper stirrer and lid, calorimeter jacket (a wooden box with a coating of insulating material inside), hypsometer, heating arrangement tripod, burner, and wire gauze or a hot plate, two Celsius thermometers graduated in 0.2ºC. Water and a physical balance, weight box, and milligram fractional weights.

Theory

The law of mixtures states that when two substances at different temperatures are mixed, i.e., brought in thermal contact with each other, then the heat is exchanged between them, the substance at a higher temperature loses heat, and that at a lower temperature gains heat. The exchange of heat energy continues till both substances attain a common temperature called equilibrium temperature.

The amount of heat energy lost by the hotter body is equal to the amount of heat energy gained by the colder body, provided

No heat is lost to the surroundings and The substances mixed do not react chemically to produce or absorb heat.

In brief, the law mixtures is written as: On mixing of two substances at different temperatures, if no heat is lost to surroundings; at the equilibrium temperature, Heat gained = Heat lost For a body of mass m, and specific heats, when its temperature falls by Δ, the amount of heat lost by it is given as ΔQ = m.s Δ The same formula is used for the amount of heat gained by colder body where Δ0, would be the temperature rise.

Specific Heat

Specific heat of a substance is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of the unit mass of the substance through one degree Celsius. S.I. unit of specific heat is J kg –1 K–1. A convenient measure of mass in the lab is gram and temperature is ºC. so we express specific heat as J g –1 ºC–1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Specific heat of a substance is the amount of heat

Procedure

  1. To ensure that two thermometers read the temperature of a body the same, one is compared with the other one which is taken as the standard thermometer. Mark the thermometer used for measuring the temperature of water in the calorimeter at room temperature as TA and the other used in the hypsometer as TB.
  2. Suspend them side by side from a clamp stand and note their readings. The error in the temperature measured by thermometer B is e = TB = TA The correction is (– e).
  3. The correction (– e) is algebraically added to readings of temperature recorded by thermometer T B used hypsometer.
  4. Take about 100 grams of lead shots in the tube of the hypsometer and add a sufficient quantity of water to the hypsometer.
  5. Insert the thermometer marked T
  6. B in the tube such that its bulb is surrounded by lead shots and fix the tube inside the mouth of the hypsometer.
  7. Place the hypsometer on the wire gauze placed on the tripod and start heating it using the burner.

Note: Alternatively, the hot plate may be used in place of the tripod and burner arrangement.

Measuring Masses:

  1. Ensure that the physical balance is in proper working condition and on turning the knob, the pointer moves equal divisions on the left and right sides of the zero mark of the scale provided at the back of the pointer.
  2. Check that the calorimeter is clean and dry. Use a piece of cloth to rub it and shine its surface. Weigh the calorimeter along with the stirrer, note the reading as m c.
  3. Weigh the calorimeter with a stirrer and lid. Record it as m 1.
  4. Place a few pieces of ice in a beaker containing water such that its temperature becomes 5 to 7ºC below the room temperature. Fill 2/3 of the calorimeter with cold water from the beaker and ensure that no moisture from air should condense on the surface of the calorimeter, clean the surface if at all the drops appear.
  5. Weigh the calorimeter with a stirrer, lid, and water in it.
  6. Place the calorimeter in the jacket. Insert the thermometer labeled as A through the lid cover of a calorimeter and hold it in a clamp provided on the jacket such that the bulb of the thermometer is well immersed in water but does not touch the bottom of the calorimeter.
  7. Note and record the temperature of water in the calorimeter.
  8. Observe the temperature of the solid in a hypsometer at intervals of two minutes till the temperature becomes steady. After the temperature becomes steady for about 5 minutes, record it
  9. Apply the correction (–e) to it and write the corrected temperature of the solid.
  10. Note the temperature of cold water in the calorimeter once again. This is to be taken as the reading for calculations. Immediately after this, remove the cork along with the thermometer from the copper tube of the hypsometer. Take out the tube, raise the lid of a calorimeter, and transfer the hot solid quickly to water in the calorimeter without any splash of water.
  11. Stir the water in the calorimeter till the temperature of the mixture becomes steady. Note the equilibrium temperature reached by the hot solid and the cold water in the calorimeter.
  12. Gently take the thermometer out of the water in the calorimeter. Take care that no water drops come out of the calorimeter along with the thermometer.
  13. Take out the calorimeter from the jacket and weigh the calorimeter with stirrer, lid water, and solid in it. Record it as m3.

Observations:

  • Room temperature reading by thermometer A, TA = ……………ºC
  • Room temperature reading by thermometer B, TB = ……………ºC
  • Correction required for thermometer B, e = TA – TB
  • Mass of calorimeter + stirrer, m = ……………g
  • Specific heat of the material of calorimeter, copper from tables, sc = 0.4 J/g/ºC,
    Specific heat of water sw = 4.2 J/g/ºC
  • Water equivalent of calorimeter, W = m1 (sC/sW) when s
  • W for water is taken as 1 cal/g/ºC
  • W = m × s 0.4 1 otherwise write W as W = m \(\left(\frac{0.4}{4.2}\right) \mathrm{g}\)
  • Mass of calorimeter + stirrer + lid = m1 = ………g
  • Mass of calorimeter + lid + cold water = m2 = ………g
  • The temperature of cold water in the calorimeter, θ1 = ………ºC
  • Steady temperature of solid in hypsometer by thermometer B, θ2= ………ºC
  • Corrected temperature of solid, θ2, θ2 = θ2+ (– e) ………ºC
  • Final, i.e., equilibrium temperature of the mixture θe= ………ºC
  • Mass of calorimeter + stirrer + lid + water + solid m3=……………g

Calculation:

  1. Let the specific heat of the solid be S J/g/ºC
    • Mass of clod water in calorimeter, m w = m 2 – m1 = ……….g
    • Water equivalent of calorimeter + stirrer, \(\mathrm{W}=\mathrm{m} \times \frac{\mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{w}}}\)
    • Rise in temperature of cold water and calorimeter and stirrer, θe – θ1 = ……….ºC Amount of heat gained by cold water and calorimeter = (m w+ W) × sw × (θe – θ1) = ……J ..(1)
    • where specific heat of water = sw=4.2j/g/C
  2. Mass of solid added to cold water, ms = m3 – m2 = ………..g
    • Rise in temperature of solid, θ2 – θe = ………ºC
    • Assumed value of specific heat of solid, s = ………….J/g/ºC
    • Heat lost by hot solid = mass × sp. heat × fall of temperature = (m3 – m2) s (θ2 – θe) ..(2)
    • Applying the law of mixtures, keeping in view the conditions,
    • Heat lost = Heat gained

Equating (2) and (1)

(m3 – m2) s (θ2 – θe) = (mw + W) sw (θe –θ1)

Therefore \(s=\frac{\left(m_w+W\right)}{\left(m_3-m_2\right)} \frac{\left(\theta_e-\theta_1\right) \cdot s_w}{\left(\theta_2-\theta_e\right)}=\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots . . . \mathrm{J} / \mathrm{g} /{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\)

s may be written in S.I. unit as J/kg/ºC, by multiplying the calculated value above by 1000.

Result

Specific heat of given (solid), s = …………J/kg/ºC
Value from tables s t = …………J/kg/ºC

Percentage Error in the value of \(\mathrm{S}=\frac{\mathrm{s}-\mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{t}}}{\mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{t}}} \times 100=\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots\)

Precautions

  1. Physical balance should be in proper working condition
  2. A sufficient quantity of water should be taken in the boiler of the hypsometer
  3. The calorimeter should be wiped clean and its surface should be shining to minimize any loss of heat due to radiation.
  4. The thermometers used should be of the same range and their least counts be compared before starting the experiment. Cold water in the calorimeter should not be so cold that it forms dew droplets on the outer surface of the calorimeter. Solid used should not be chemically reactive with water.
  5. The hypsometer, burner, and heating system should be at sufficient distance from the calorimeter so that the calorimeter absorbs no heat from them.
  6. The solid should be heated such that its temperature is steady for about 5 to 7 minutes.
  7. The solid should be transferred quickly so that its temperature when dropped in water is the same as recorded.
  8. Water should not be allowed to splash while dropping the solid in water in the calorimeter.
  9. After measuring the equilibrium temperature, the thermometer when removed should not have any water droplets sticking to it.
  10. Cold water taken in the beaker should be as much below temperature as the equilibrium temperature after adding solid is expected to go above it. This is to take care of heat absorbed from surroundings by cold water or that lost by warm water during the course of the experiment. It would be of interest to know that this correction had been thought of by Count Rumford in the 19th century.

Sources Of Error

  1. Radiation losses can be minimized but cannot be eliminated.
  2. During the transfer of hot solid into the calorimeter, the heat loss cannot be accounted for
  3. Though mercury in the thermometer bulbs has low thermal capacity, it absorbs some heat and lowers the temperature to be measured.

Experiment 18

Aim: To compare electro-motive-force (E.M.Fs) of two primary cells using a potentiometer.

Apparatus: A potentiometer with sliding key (or jockey), a leclanche cell, a Daniel cell, an ammeter, a low resistance Rheostat, a one-way-key, a galvanometer, a resistance box, a battery of 2 to 3 accumulators (or E.M.F. higher than the E.M.F. of individual cell to be compared), a voltmeter, connecting wires: a two-way key and a piece of sandpaper.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments If the fall in potential between A and J

Theory: 

  1. A potentiometer is an instrument designed for an accurate comparison of potential differences and for measuring small potential differences. In an ordinary form it consists of a long, uniform resistance wire of manganin or constantan stretched over a wooden board usually in 4 turns (or 10 turns) each of 100 cm in length.
  2. The wire is fixed at its ends to two binding screws. A metre-scale is fitted parallel to the wire and a sliding key or jockey is provided for contact.
  3. The working of a potentiometer can be understood by considering a simple diagram Let a wire AB be connected to a source of constant potential difference ‘E’ known as ‘ Auxiliary battery’.
  4. This source will maintain a current in the wire flowing from A to B and there will be a constant fall of potential from the end of A to B. This source thus establishes in the wire a potential difference per unit length known as the ‘potential Gradient’.
  5. If L is the length of the wire, this potential gradient will be E/L volts. Let one of the cells, whose E.M.F. ‘E 1’ is to be compared with the E.M.F. ‘E2’ of the other cell, be connected with its + ve electrode at A and the other electrode through a galvanometer to a movable contact i.e., jockey J.
  6. If the fall in potential between A and J due to the current flowing in the wire is equal to the E.M.F. ‘E 1’ of the cell, the galvanometer will show no deflection when the jockey is pressed at J indicating no current in the galvanometer. This position on the wire AB is possible only when E is greater Than E 1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A potentiometer with sliding key

If the point J is at a distance l1 cm from A, the fall in potential between A and J will be E1= pl1 and therefore E1 1= pl at the null deflection.

If this cell is now replaced by the second cell of E.M.F. ‘E 2’ and another balance is obtained at a distance l 2 cm from A, then E2= p/l

therefore \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_1}{\mathrm{E}_2}=\frac{\rho l_1}{\rho l_2}=\frac{l_1}{l_2} \quad \text { or } \quad \frac{\mathrm{E}_1}{\mathrm{E}_2}=\frac{l_1}{l_2}\)

Since the galvanometer shows no deflection at the null point no current is drawn from the experimental cell and it is thus the actual E.M.F of the cell that is compared in this experiment.

Procedure:-

  1. Draw a diagram showing the scheme of connections
  2. Remove the insulation from the end of the connecting copper wires and clean the ends with sandpaper
  3. Connect the positive pole of the auxiliary battery (a battery of constant e.m.f) to the zero end (A) of the potentiometer and the negative pole through a one-way-key, an ammeter, and a low resistance rheostat to the other end of the potentiometer.
  4. Connect the positive pole of the cells E1 and E2 to the terminal at the zero and (A) and the negative poles to terminals a and b of the two-way key connect the common terminal c of the two-way key through a galvanometer (G) and a resistance box (R.B) to the jockey.
  5. To test the connections: – Introduce the plug-in position in the one-way-key (K) in the auxiliary circuit and also in between the terminals a and c of the two-way-key. Take out a 2,000 ohms plug from the resistance box (R.B). Press the jockey at the zero end and note the direction of deflection in the galvanometer.
  6. Press the jockey at the other end of the potentiometer wire; if the direction of deflection is opposite to that in the first case, the connections are correct. If the direction of deflection is in the same direction then increase the current in the auxiliary circuit with a rheostat till the deflection obtained in the galvanometer is in the opposite direction when the jockey is pressed at the other end.
  7. Move the jockey along the wire from the zero end A towards the other end B to find point J 1 where the galvanometer shows no defection. Put in the 2000 ohms plug in the resistance box and find the null point accurately. Note the length ‘l1’ of the wire and also the current in the ammeter.
  8. Disconnect the cell E: 1 and put the cell E2 in the circuit. Again remove the 2000 ohms plug from the resistance box and find the corresponding length (l2) accurately for no deflection of the galvanometer keeping the ammeter reading the same.
  9. Repeat the observation alternately for each cell again for the same value of current.
  10. Increase the current by adjusting the rheostat and obtain similarly, four sets of observations.
  11. (The rheostat used in the circuit should have a low resistance as compared to the resistance of the potentiometer wire.)

Observation and Calculations:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measure the E.M.F of the two cells

Mean \(\frac{E_1}{E_2}=\)

E.M.F of leclanche cell (E1) = ………….. volts

(By voltmeter)

E.M.F. of Daniel cell (E2) = ………. volts

(By voltmeter)

\(\frac{E_1}{E_2}=\)

Precaution: –

  1. The e.m.f. of the auxiliary battery should be constant and always greater than the e.m.f of either of the two cells, whose e.m.f are to be compared.
  2. The positive pole of the auxiliary battery and the positive poles of the cell must be connected to the terminal on the zero side of the potentiometer wire otherwise it would be impossible to obtain a balance point.
  3. The rheostat should be of low resistance and whenever the deflection shown is to the same side when a jockey is pressed at all points of the wire, the current must be increased to obtain the balance point at a desired length.
  4. The current should remain constant for each set of observations with the two cells.
  5. The current should be passed only for the duration it is necessary, otherwise the balance point will keep on changing.
  6. The balance points should be obtained at large distances from the zero end.
  7. The length should always be measured from the end of the wire where positive poles are connected.
  8. The balance point should be found alternately with the two cells.
  9. A high resistance should be used in series with the galvanometer. This does not affect the position of the balance point in any way. Near the position of the exact balance point, however, this resistance should be removed. (Note that the same purpose can be served by putting a shunt across the galvanometer)
  10. A resistance box should never be used in the auxiliary circuit.
  11. To avoid any change in the e.m.f. of a cell due to polarization, the reading should be taken after sufficient intervals of time.

Sources of Error :

  1. The potentiometer wire may not be uniform.
  2. The resistance of the wire may change due to the temperature rise.
  3. Contact potentials may not be negligible.

Experiment 18

Aim: To determine the internal resistance of a primary cell using a potentiometer.

Apparatus: A potentiometer, a Leclanche cell, a battery of three cells, an ammeter, a low resistance rhostat, two one-way keys a sensitive galvanometer two resistance boxes, a jockey connecting wires, and a piece of sane paper.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Internal Resistance Of A cell

Theory

In the potentiometer circuit of Fig. let ‘l1’ be the length of the potentiometer wire upto the point X, when the balance is obtained with the cell (E) in an open circuit i.e. when key K2 is not closed, and ‘l2’ the length upto Y when the balance is obtained with the cell shunted through a resistance S. Then if E is the e.m.f. of the cell and ‘V’ the P.D. between its terminals when shunted, we have according to the principle of the potentiometer, and E1 and V2

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{E}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{l_1}{l_2}\)

If ‘r’ is the internal resistance of the cell and I the current through it when shunted by S, then by Ohm’s Law

⇒ \(\begin{array}{lll}
E=I(S+r) & \text { and } & V=I S \\
\frac{E}{V}=\frac{S+r}{S} & \ldots . \text { (2) }
\end{array}\)

From 1 and 2

⇒ \(1+\frac{\mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{S}}=\frac{l_1}{l_2}\)

Hence \(\mathrm{r}=\frac{\left(l_1-l_1\right) \mathrm{S}}{l_2}\)

Procedure

  1. Draw a diagram as shown in the scheme of connections in Fig.
  2. Remove the insulation from the ends of the copper wires and clean the ends with sandpaper. Connect the positive pole of the auxiliary battery to the zero end (A) of the potentiometer and the negative pole through a one-way key (K1), an ammeter, and a low resistance rheostat to the other end (B) of the potentiometer wire.
  3. Connect the positive pole of the cell (E) to the terminal at the zero end (A) and the negative pole the jockey through the galvanometer (G) and resistance box (R.B.)
  4. Connect a resistance box S across the cell (E) through a one-way key (K2)
  5. Insert the plug-in key K1 and adjust a constant current in the potentiometer circuit with the help of rheostat.
  6. Move the jockey along the wire to find a point where the galvanometer shows no deflection. Insert the 2000 ohms lug and find the null point accurately as at X. Note the length l1 of the wire and the current in the ammeter. Put in the key K2 take out 2 ohm plug from the resistance box S and make all other plugs tight by giving them a slight twist. Find the balance point again as at Y and note the corresponding length l2 Repeat twice for the same value of the current in the auxiliary circuit and same shunt resistance in a similar manner.
  7. Remove the plugs from the keys K1 and K2. Wait for some time, insert the plug in the key K1, and find l 1 similarly keeping the current same. Put in the key K2, take out a resistance of 3 or 4 ohms, and find the length l1repeat similarly for S equal to 5
  8. Change the value of current in the external circuit by a slight amount and repeat observations as in Step 6.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Remove the insulation from the ends of the copper wires

Result

The internal resistance of Leclanche cell (r) = ….. ohms

Precautions

  1. The e.m.f. of the auxiliary battery should be constant and always greater than the e.m.f. of either of the two cells, whose e.m.fs. are to be compared.
  2. The positive pole of the auxiliary battery and the positive poles of the cells must be connected to the terminal on the zero side of the potentiometer wire otherwise it would be impossible to obtain the balance point
  3. The rheostat should be of a low resistance and whenever the deflection shown is to the same side when a jockey is pressed at all points of the wire, the current must be increased to obtain the balance point at a desired length.
  4. The current should remain constant for each set of observations with two cells.
  5. The current should be passed only for the duration it is necessary, otherwise, the balance point will keep on changing
  6. The balance points should be obtained at large distances from the zero end.
  7. The internal resistance of a Leclanche cell is not constant but varies with the current drawn from the cell. Hence to get constant readings the resistance from the resistance box S must be varied by a small amount (say 3 to 8 ohms).
  • [Note, To prevent a large current from being passed through the galvanometer either shunt it with a wire or put a large resistance of about 2000 ohms in series with it. But when the balance point is located, to find it more precisely the shunt should be removed or all the plugs of the series resistance box should be inserted].

Exercise

Question 1. A student is required to measure the emf of a cell, he should use –

  1. Potentiometer
  2. Voltmeter
  3. Ammeter
  4. Either 1 or 2

Answer: 1. Potentiometer

Question 2. A potentiometer is an ideal device for measuring potential differences, because-

  1. It uses a sensitive galvanometer
  2. It does not disturb the potential difference it measures
  3. It is an elaborate arrangement
  4. It has a long wire hence heat developed is quickly radiated

Answer: 2. It does not disturb the potential difference it measures

Question 3. Which of the following statements is correct during the measurement of emf of the cell by a potentiometer?

  1. No current flows through the potentiometer wire upto position of a null point
  2. At the null point in any potentiometer experiment, no current flows through the whole of the potentiometer wire.
  3. No current is drawn from the cell when the null point is obtained
  4. No current is drawn from the battery when the null point is obtained

Answer: 3. No current is drawn from the cell when the null point is obtained

Question 4. Which of the following statements is not wrong?

  1. To increase the sensitivity of a potentiometer increase current through potentiometer wire.
  2. To increase sensitivity increase external resistance in the battery circuit connected to the potentiometer.
  3. To increase sensitivity increase battery voltage
  4. To increase sensitivity increase the emf of battery.

Answer: 4. To increase sensitivity increase the emf of battery.

Experiment 9

Aim:

To find the resistance of a galvanometer by half deflection method and find its figure of merit.

Apparatus:

A Weston type moving coil galvanometer, a cell, two resistance boxes, two one-way keys, a voltmeter, connecting wires, and sandpaper.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Half deflection method

Theory –

The connections for finding the resistance of a galvanometer by the half deflection method are shown in Fig. When the key, K1 is closed, keeping the key K2 open, the current Ig through the galvanometer is given by

⇒ \(I_g=\frac{E}{R+G}\) where E = E.M.F. of the cell.

R = Resistance from the resistance box R.B.

G = Galvanometer resistance.

If j is the deflection produced, then \(\frac{E}{R+G}=k \theta\)

If now the key K2 is closed and the value of the shunt resistance S is adjusted so that the deflection is reduced to half of the first value, then the current flowing through the galvanometer I’g is given by \(I_g^{\prime}=\frac{E}{R+\frac{G S}{(G+S)}}\left(\frac{S}{G+S}\right)=\frac{k \theta}{2}\) or, \(I_g^{\prime}=\frac{E S}{R(G+S)+G S}=\frac{k \theta}{2}\) Comparing (1) and (2), we get R + G) 2S = R(G + S) + GS or (R – S) G = RS or \(G=\frac{R S}{R-S}\) If the value of R is very large as compared to S, then \(\frac{R S}{R-S}\) is nearly equal to unity. Hence g=S

The figure of Merit:-

The figure of merit of a galvanometer is that much current is sent through the galvanometer to produce a deflection of one division on the scale. If k is the figure of merit of the galvanometer, and ‘k’ is the number of divisions on the scale, then (Ig) through the galvanometer is given by ig=Kθ

Procedure:-

  1. Draw a diagram showing the scheme of connections as in fig. and make the connections accordingly.
  2. Check the connections and show the same to the teacher before passing the current.
  3. Introduce a high resistance R from the resistance box (R. B), close the key K1, and adjust the value of R till the deflection is within scale and maximum. Note the deflection and the value of the resistance R.
  4. Close the key K2 and adjust the value of the shunt resistance S so that the deflection is reduced exactly to half the first value. Note this deflection and the value of the resistance S.
  5. Repeat the experiment three times taking different deflections of the galvanometer.

To find the figure of merit: –

Find the e.m.f. of the cell by a voltmeter. See the positive of the cell connected to the positive marked terminal of the voltmeter.

Connect the cell E, the galvanometer G, the resistance box R.B., and the key K1 in series take out a 5,000 ohms plug from the resistance box, and make all other plugs tight. put in the key K1 and adjust the value of the resistance R from the resistance box so that a deflection θ near about 30 divisions is indicated in the galvanometer. Note the deflection θ in the galvanometer and also the value of the resistance R from the resistance box.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the e.m.f. of the cell by a voltmeter

Adjust the value of R from the resistance box to get a deflection of about 20 divisions and again note the deflection and the resistance.

Increase the number of cells to two. Find the e.m.f and the value of the resistance R to get a deflection of about 30 and again about 20 divisions as in the previous step.

Resistance of Galvanometer:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Resistance of Galvanometer

Mean Value of G = …………. ohms

Figure of merit: –

  1. Galvanometer resistance (G) = ……….Ω
  2. Number of division on the galvanometer scale = …………..

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Galvanometer resistance

Precautions: –

  1. The value of ‘R’ should be large
  2. To decrease the deflection, the shunt resistance should be decreased and vice-versa.
  3. In this method, it is assumed that the deflection is proportional to the current. This is possible only in a weston type moving coil galvanometer.
  4. The connections must be tight and the ends of connecting wires should be cleaned.

Experiment 20

Aim: To find the focal length of a convex mirror using a convex lens.

Apparatus: An optical bench with four uprights, a convex mirror, a convex lens, a knitting needle, and a half-meter scale.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the focal length of a convex mirror using a convex lens.

Suppose a convex lens L is interposed between a convex mirror M and an object needle O as. When the relative position of M, L, and O are adjusted in such a way that there is no parallax between the object needle O and its image I, then in that position, the rays will fall normally on the convex mirror M.

The rays which fall on the mirror normally should meet at the centre of curvature C of the mirror when produced. The distance MC gives the radius of curvature R. Half of the radius of curvature gives the focal length F of the mirror.

Now without disturbing the positions of the object O and the lens L, the convex mirror is removed and another needle is placed in the position of the image I of the object O, formed by the lens L by using the parallax method.

Measure MI’ Now \(f,=\frac{R}{2}=\frac{M I}{2}\)

Procedure

  1. Mount the convex mirror M, a convex lens L, and the object needle O on an optical bench. Look for the inverted image of O through the system of the lens L and the mirror M by adjusting the position of O or L for that of the mirror. When the inverted image is not obtained, a convex lens of a larger focal length should be used.
  2. Remove the parallax between the object needle O and its inverted image and note the position of O, L, and M on the bench scale.
  3. Remove the mirror M and do not disturb the lens L and O at all. Take another needle I’ and place it on the other side of the lens.
  4. Take five sets of observations for different positions of O and L.
  5. Determine the index correction between the mirror M and the image needle I’.

Observation and Calculations:

  1. Index correction
  2. Length of the knitting needle, y = ……… cm
  3. Observed distance with the needle between M and I’ x = ……… cm
  4. Index correction between M and I = (y – x) = ……… cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Table Determination of Focal Length

  1. Mean, MI’ = …….. cm
  2. Corrected distance, MI’ = …….. cm
  3. therefore \(\mathrm{f}=\frac{\text { CorrectedMI’ }}{2}=\ldots \ldots . . . \mathrm{cm}\)

Result:

The focal length of the given convex mirror =…….. cm

Precautions:

  1. The line joining the pole of the mirror, the centre of the lens L, and the tip of the needle, should be parallel to the length of the optical bench.
  2. The auxiliary lens L must have a sufficiently large focal length.
  3. The parallax should be removed tip to tip while removing the parallax, the eye should be kept at the least distance of distinct vision i.e., 25 cm away from the needle.
  4. In the second part of the experiment i.e., after removing the mirror M, the position of L and O should not be disturbed at all.

Experiment 20 (2)

Aim: To find the focal length of a convex lens by plotting graphs between u and v and between 1/u and 1/v.

Apparatus: A convex lens of short focal length (say 15 to 20 cm.), two needles, three uprights, one clamp, an optical bench a half-meter rod, and a knitting needle.

Theory: The position of the image formed by a convex lens depends upon the position of the object the lens below shows the different positions of the images formed by a convex lens for different object positions. The relation between u, v, and f for a convex lens is \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)

Procedure

Find the rough focal length of the given convex lens by focusing a sharp, clear, and inverted image of a distant object on a white paper and measuring this distance between the lens and the white paper with a meter scale.

If the optical bench is provided with leveling screw, then level it using a spirit level.

Mount the convex lens (held in its holder) on the central upright of the optical bench. Also, add the two needles on the remaining two uprights. Arrange the tips of the needles at the same vertical height as the centre of the lens.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The rough focal length of the given convex lens

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Two pin method for determining the focal length f of a convex lens.

Mark one needle as AB object needle and the other one CD as an image needle and distinguish between them by rubbing the tip of one of the needles with a piece of chalk or putting a paper flag on it.

Find the index corrections for u and v using a knitting needle.

Shift the position of the object needle AB to a distance greater than 2f from the lens. Look from the other side of the lens along its principal axis near the end of the bench. If the setting is correct, an inverted, real image A’B’ is seen. Now adjust the position of the second needle CD such that the parallax between the image of the object needle and the image needle is removed. The position of the second needle is so adjusted that the parallax is removed from tip to tip.

Note the positions of the lenses, the object needle, and the image needle on the bench scale and thus find the observed values of u and v. Apply index corrections to get the corrected values for u and v.

Repeat the above steps for 5 different positions of the object by placing it beyond 2F and between F and 2F. Record your observations as detailed below.

Observations:

  1. Approximate focal length of length of the lens f = …….. cm
  2. For index correction
  3. The actual length of the knitting needle x = …….. cm

For u

  1. Observed distance between the object needle and the lens
  2. When a knitting needle is inserted between them, y = …….. cm
  3. Index error for u, e
  4. 1 = (y – x) = …….. cm

3. Index correction for u, –e 1 = (x – y) = …….. cm

For v

  1. Observed distance between the image needle and the lens
  2. When the knitting needle is inserted between them, z = …….. cm
  3. Index error for v, e
  4. 1 = (z – x) = …….. cm
  5. Index correction for v –e 2 = (x – z) = …….. cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Approximate focal length of length of the lens

Plotting Graphs and Calculations of f

u – v Graph 

Choose a suitable but the same scale to represent u along the x-axis and v along the y-axis Remember that u is negative and v is positive for a convex lens, according to the coordinate sign convention used these days.

Plot the points for various sets of values of u and v from the observation table. The graph will be a rectangular hyperbola.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph og u vs v for a convex lens

Find f from this graph: Draw a line OC bisecting the angle X’ OY and cutting the graph at point C. The coordinates of this point are (–2f, 2f). Note the distances of the foot of the perpendiculars OA and OB respectively on the X and Y axis. Half of these distances are given the focal length of the convex lens. Thus \(\mathrm{f}=\frac{\mathrm{OA}}{2}=\ldots \ldots . . \mathrm{cm}\)

Take the mean of these two values of f.

Calculation of f from graph between 1/u and 1/v: Choose a suitable but the same scale to
represent \(\frac{1}{u}\) along x-axis and ,\(\frac{1}{v}\)
along y-axis, taking O as the origin (0,0).

Plot the graph between \(\frac{1}{u}\) and \(\frac{1}{v}\) The graph would be a straight line as shown in the figure below making equal intercepts (OA and OB) on them measure AO and OB. Then \(f=\frac{1}{O A}=\frac{1}{O B}\)……………………..cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of 1u vs 1v for a convex lens

Result:

The focal length of the given convex lens as determined from the graph of (u, v) from fig. above =………… cm.

\(\left(\frac{1}{u}, \frac{1}{v}\right)\) above= cm

Precaution

  1. The tips of the needles should be as high as the optical centre of the lens.
  2. The uprights carrying the lens and the needles should not be shaky.
  3. Parallax should be removed tip to tip.
  4. The eye should be placed at such a position that the distance between the image needle and the eye is more than 25 cm.
  5. The image and object needles should not be interchanged for different sets of observations.
  6. A piece of chalk may be rubbed on the tip of the object needle or a paper flag put on it, to distinguish it from the image needle.

Exercise

Question 1. By plotting \(\frac{1}{v}\) versus \(\frac{1}{u}\) focal length of a convex mirror can be found-

  1. No, as it forms a virtual image
  2. Yes, only if the scale is large
  3. Yes, only if the scale is small
  4. Yes, only if the aperture is small

Answer: 1. No, as it forms a virtual image

Question 2. The focal length of which of the following can not be obtained directly-

  1. Convex Mirror And Convex Lens
  2. Convex Mirror & Concave Lens
  3. Convex Lens And Concave Mirror
  4. Concave Lens And Concave Mirror

Answer: 2. Convex Mirror & Concave Lens

Question 3. Which of the following statements is false –

  1. The bench correction is always equal to the negative of the bench error
  2. The larger the distance between the two objects larger the magnitude of parallax
  3. Parallax disappears if the positions of two objects coincide
  4. Parallax can occur between any two objects

Answer: 2. The Larger the distance between the two objects larger the magnitude of parallax

Question 4. The focal length of a convex mirror is obtained by using a convex lens. The following observations are recorded during the experiment

  1. Object Position = 5 Cm
  2. Lens = 35.4 Cm
  3. Image = 93.8 Cm
  4. Mirror = 63.3 Cm
  5. Bench Error = –0.1 Cm

Then The Focal Length Of the Mirror Will Be

  1. 7.5 cm
  2. 8.4 cm
  3. 15.3 cm
  4. None Of These

Answer: 3. 15.3 cm

Question 5. For spherical mirrors, graph plotted between \(-\frac{1}{V} \text { and }-\frac{1}{u} \text { is – }\)

  1. A straight line with slope 1
  2. Straight line with slope – 1
  3. Parabola
  4. None

Answer: 2. Straight line with slope – 1

Experiment 21

Aim: To determine the angle of minimum deviation for a given glass prism by plotting a graph between the angle of incidence and angle of deviation and hence find the refractive index of the material of the prism.

Apparatus

A drawing board, a sheet of paper, a glass triangular prism, pins, a half-meter scale, a graph paper, and a protractor.

Theory:

Refraction Through a prism (angle of minimum deviation)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Refraction of light through a prism

Minimum Deviation – In (Fig 1), ABC represents the principal section of a glass prism. Let EF be a ray of light that is incident on the refracting face AB of the prism. The straight path FG represents the refracted ray through the prism and GH represents the emergent ray. FN 1 and GN 2 are drawn normal to the refracting faces AB and AC at points F and G respectively.

Incident ray EF is Produced to PT, and as a result of refraction through the prism, ABC emerges along GH. The incident ray shown as EF (extruded as dotted line FPT) deviates and follows the path PGH. The angle is the angle between the incident ray EFPT (produced) shown dotted and the emergent ray GH (produced backward) to meet EFT at point P.

This angle is known as the angle of deviation. the angle BAC of the prism (i.e., the angle between its two refracting faces) is called the angle of the prism and it is denoted by the letter ‘A’ It can be proved from simple geometrical considerations that \(\angle \mathrm{A}+\angle \delta=\angle \mathrm{i}+\angle \mathrm{e}\)

and A = r1 + r2 …….2

where i = angle of incidence

  1. e = angle of emergence
  2. r1 = angle of refraction at face AB
  3. r2 = angle of refraction at face AC.

The relation (1) clearly shows that the angle of deviation s varies with the angle of incidence i.

The variation of angle s with angle i is represented graphically

The angle i0 decreases with the increase in the value of i initially, till a particular value (i) of the angle of incidence is reached. For this value of angle of incidence, the corresponding value of the angle of deviation is minimum and it is denoted by the letter m.

This angle of deviation is called the angle of minimum deviation. When a prism is so placed concerning the incident ray that the angle of deviation produced by it is minimum, then the prism is said to be in the position of minimum deviation. In this position, the following relation holds between the angles.

⇒ \(\text { i.e., } \angle \mathrm{i}=\angle \mathrm{e} \text { and } \angle \mathrm{r}_1=\angle \mathrm{r}_2\)

In this position, the incident ray and the emergent ray are symmetrical concerning the prism and the ray passes through the prism is parallel to its base. The refractive index of the material of the prism is given as

\(\mu=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+\delta_m}{2}\right)}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

Where sm is the angle of minimum deviation and A is the angle of the prism. Variation of the angle of deviation with the angle of incidence for refraction through a prism

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Variation of angle of deviation with angle of incidence for refration on through a prism

Procedure:

Fix the sheet of white paper on the drawing board with cello tape or drawing pins.

Draw a straight line XY nearly at the centre of the sheet parallel to its length. Mark points marked as O at suitable spacing on this line XY and draw normal to the line XY at points O as Draw straight line PQ corresponding to the incident rays that are drawn at angle of incidence ranging from 30º to 60º, i.e., for angles of 30º, 40º, 50º and 60º using a protractor.

Place the prism with one of its refracting surfaces on the line XY and trace its boundary
ABC.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Place the prism with one of its refracting surfaces on the line

Fix two pins P and Q about 8 cm apart on the incident ray line and view its image with your one eye closed from the face BC of the prism. Fix two pins R and S on the paper such that the tips of these pins and the tips of the images of the incident ray pins P and Q all lie on the same straight line.

Remove the pins R and S and encircle their pinpricks on the paper. Remove the pins P
and Q and also encircle their pinpricks.

Join the points (i.e., pinpricks) S and R and produce it backward to meet the incident
ray PQ produced (shown by dotted lines). Thus RS is the emergent ray corresponding to
the incident ray PQ. Draw arrowheads to show the direction of the rays.

Measure the angle of deviation with a protractor.

Repeat the steps (3 to 7) for different values of angle of incidence and measure the corresponding angles of deviation. Take at least seven values of angle i ranging from 30º – 60º.

Measurement of refracting angle ‘A’ of the prism.

Draw a line XY on the drawing sheet as depicted

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of the refracting angle A of the prism.

Mark points O in the middle of XY and E and F on either side of O equidistant from E such that OE = OF (say 1 cm each).

Draw three vertical lines EG, OI, and FH through E, O, and F respectively, such that these are parallel to each other.

Place the prism with its refracting edge A on the line Ol such that BC is along XY. The
points E and F would be symmetric for edges B and C.

Draw the boundary ABC of the face of the prism touching the board.

Fix pins P1 and P2 vertically, 4 cm apart, observe their reflection in the face AB, and fix pin P3 such that the images of P1, P2, and P3 are in a straight line. Fix another pin P4 such that prick of P4 is also in the same straight line. Join the pricks of P3 and P4 by line LK and produce it backward. KL is a reflected ray of incident ray GK.

Similarly, locate NM by joining P’ 3 P’4 as the reflected ray of incident ray HM. Draw NM
backward to meet the line LK product backward at point P. The point P should lie on the
line OI if observations are correctly taken.

The angle LPN is equal to 2<A(it can be proved geometrically from the figure). Measure
the angle LPN and determine <A, the angle of the prism.

Observations:

Table for angles i and δ

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The graph will be a curve

Plotting the graph between <i and <δ Plot a graph between angles I and δ for various sets of values recorded in the observation table. The graph will be a curve

For angle ‘A’ of prism

LPN = ………..°= 2A or Angle A =…………°

Calculations: Determine the angle of minimum deviation m from the graph.

Result: The angle of deviation δ first decreases with the increase in the angle of incidence, attains a minimum value and then increases with further increase in the angle of incidence as indicated in the (δ—i) graph

Percautions:

  1. A sharp pencil should be used for drawing the boundary of the prism.
  2. The separation between the pins should not be less than 8 cm.
  3. The angle of incidence should lie between 30° to 60°.
  4. The same angle of prism should be used for all the observations. So an ink mark should be placed on it to distinguish it as the refracting angle A of the prism.
  5. The pins should have sharp tips and be fixed vertically and the pinpricks should be encircled immediately after they are removed.
  6. Proper arrows should be drawn to indicate the incident, the refracted, and the emergent rays.
  7. A smooth curve practically passing through all the plotted points should be drawn.

Experiment 22

AIM: To determine the refractive index of a glass slab using a traveling microscope.

Apparatus:

A piece of paper, a marker, a glass slab, a traveling microscope, and lycopodium powder.

Theory:

Refraction is a phenomenon of propagation of light from one transparent medium into the other medium such that light deviates from its original path. The ratio of the velocity of light in the first medium to that in the second medium is called the refractive index of the second medium concerning the first.

Usually, the first medium is air. The bottom surface of a vessel containing a refracting liquid appears to be raised, such that the apparent depth is less than the real depth. The refractive index of the refracting liquid is defined as the ratio of real depth to the apparent depth.

Mathematically, Refractive index \(\mu=\frac{\text { real depth }}{\text { apparent depth }}\)

For accurate measurements of depths, a traveling microscope is used. If the reading of real depth at the bottom of the slab is r1, if the reading at the cross due to refraction is r2, and at the top of the slab if the reading is r3, then real depth = r3 — r1, and apparent depth = r3 — r2.

Therefore , refractive index of glass (material of slab)\(\mu=\frac{r_3-r_1}{r_3-r_2}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Travelling microscope taking reading

Procedure:

  1. For accurate measurement of depth, a traveling microscope is used.
  2. Note the number of divisions of vernier which coincide with several full-scale divisions.
  3. Find the value of each main division and hence the least count of the microscope scale as (1 M.S.D —V.S.D)
  4. Set the microscope in its stand such that it is capable of sliding vertically up and down
    as the screw attached to the rack and pinion is turned.
  5. On a sheet of white paper, a cross and place it below the objective of the microscope.
  6. Move the microscope very gently. Using the screw, focus the eyepiece on the cross mark and
    bring the cross in focus such that the cross wires, coincides with the marked cross on
    the paper. Note the reading of the microscope as r1.
  7. Place the given glass slab on the cross mark. You would observe that the cross-mark
    appears to be raised.
  8. Move the microscope gradually and gently upward to bring the cross mark in focus and
    on the cross of cross wires. Record the reading as r2
  9. Sprinkle some fine lycopodium powder on the glass slab and move the microscope upward
    till the powder particles come into focus. Record the reading on the scale as r3.
  10. The difference of readings r3 and r1 i.e. r3 — r1 gives the real depth whereas r3—r2 gives the
    apparent depth.
  11. Record your observations as follows and calculate the value of refractive index m.

Observations:

  1. Least count of traveling microscope.
  2. 10 Vernier Scale Division = 9 Main Scale Divisions (Scales may differ from instrument to instrument).
  3. Value of one main scale division = 1mm i.e. 0.1 cm.
  4. 10 V.S.D =9 M.S.D (V.S.D. Vernier Scale Division, M.SD. Main Scale Divisions)

⇒ \(\text { 1V.S.D }=\frac{9}{10} \text { M.S.D }\)

⇒ \(\text { L.C }=1 \text { M.S.D }-1 \text { V.S.D }=1 \text { M.S.D }-\frac{9}{10} \text { M.S.D }=\frac{1}{10} \text { M.S.D or } \frac{1}{10} \times 0.1 \mathrm{~cm}=0.01 \mathrm{~cm}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Least count of voltmeter

 

Mean values r1 =…….cm, r2=……..r3=……cm

Calculations:

Real depth = d r= r3 – r1 =……. cm.

Apparent depth = da = r3 – r2 =……. cm.

Refractive index \(\mu=\frac{\text { Real depth }}{\text { Apparent depth }}=\frac{\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{a}}}=\ldots \ldots .\)

Percautions:

  1. The least count of the scale of the traveling microscope should be carefully calculated.
  2. Microscope once focussed on the cross mark, the focussing should not be disturbed
    throughout the experiment.
  3. Eyepieces should be adjusted such that cross wires are distinctly seen.
  4. Cross wires, the cross should be set on the ink cross mark on the paper.
  5. Only a thin layer of powder should be spread on the top of the slab
  6. Express your result upto significant figures keeping in view the least count of instruments.

Result

The refractive index of the glass slab by using a traveling microscope is determined as

Experiment 23

Aim: To study the static and dynamic curves of a p–n junction diode in forward bias and to determine its static and dynamic resistances

Apparatus: A p-n junction diode, a3V battery, a high resistance rheostat, 0-3 volt voltmeter, one milliammeter, one-way key, and connecting wires.

Theory: When a junction diode is forward biased, a forward current is produced which increases with an increase in bias voltage. This increase is not proportional.

The ratio of forward bias voltage (V) and forward current (I) is called the static resistance of semiconductor diode, i.e., \(R=\frac{V_F}{I_F}\)

In case of a varying bias voltage and varying forward current, the ratio of change in forward bias voltage(V) and the corresponding change in forward current (I)is called the dynamic resistance \(\left(r=\frac{\Delta V_F}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{F}}}\right)\)

To find the static and dynamic resistance of the semiconductor diode, a graph has to be plotted between forward bias voltage(V) and forward bias current (I). This graph is called the characteristic curve of a semiconductor diode.

Producer:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To find the static and dynamic resistance of semiconductor diode

  1. Make the connections as shown in the figure.
  2. Keep the moving contact of the rheostat to the minimum and insert the key K. Voltmeter and milliammeter will show a zero reading.
  3. Move the contact towards the positive to apply the forward bias voltage V = 0.1 V.
  4. The current remains zero
  5. Increase the forward bias voltage to 0.3 V in steps. The current will still be zero. (This
    is due to the junction potential barrier of 0.3 V).
  6. Increase V to 0.4 V. Record the current.
  7. Increase V in the step of 0.2 and note the corresponding current.
  8. At V = 2.4 V. The current increases suddenly. This represents the forward breakdown
    stage.
  9. Draw a graph of I on y- the y-axis and V on the x-axis.

Record of Readings

  1. Least count of voltmeter = ………V Zero error of mA = ………mV
  2. Least count of milliammeter = ………mA Zero error of voltmeter = ………V

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Least count of voltmeter

Calculations

For static resistance (R)

⇒ \(R=\frac{V_F}{I_F}\)

From the graph \(\mathrm{R}=\frac{\mathrm{OA}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{OA}^{\prime \prime}}=\ldots \ldots . . . ., \text { ohm }\)

Diode is …… (specify the code)

For dynamic resistance (r)

⇒ \(r=\frac{\Delta V_F}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{F}}}\)

From the graph \(r=\frac{A C}{B C} \text { ohms }\)

Result

  1. The static resistance of the given semiconductor diode = ……….. ohm
  2. The dynamic resistance of the given semiconductor diode = ……….. ohm

Precautions

  1. Make all connections neat, clean, and tight
  2. The key should be used in the circuit and opened when the circuit is not in use
  3. Avoid applying forward bias voltage beyond the breakdown
  4. Possible sources of errors
  5. The connection may not be tight
  6. The junction diode may be faulty

Experiment 24

AIM: To draw the characteristic curves of a Zener diode and to determine its reverse breakdown voltage.

Apparatus: A zener diode (with a reverse breakdown voltage of 6 V), a ten-volt battery, a rheostat, two voltmeters (range 0, 10 V), one milliammeter, one 20 resistance, one-way key, connecting wires.

Theory:

A Zener diode is a semiconductor diode in which the n-type sections are heavily doped, This heavy doping results in a low value of reverse breakdown voltage. The reverse breakdown voltage of the Zener diode is called Zener voltage (Vz). The reverse current that results after the breakdown is called zener current (Iz).

Vi = Input voltage
V0 = Output voltage
Ri = Input resistance
Ii = Input current
Iz= Zener diode current
IL = Load current
IL = Ii – Iz
V0 = Vi – Ri Ii
V0 = RL IL

Initially, as Vi increases, Ii increases hence V0 increases linearly. At break-down, the increase of Vi increases I i by a large amount, so that V0 = Vi – RiI i becomes constant. This constant value of V 0 Which is the reverse breakdown voltage, is called zener voltage.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Circuit Diagram

Procedure:

  1. Make the connections as shown in the figure above making sense that the Zener diode is reverse biased Bring the moving contact to a rheostat to the minimum and insert the key K. Voltmeter and ammeter will read zero
  2. Move the contact a little towards the positive end to apply some reverse bias voltage (Vi). Milliammeter reading remains zero.
  3. As Vi is further increased, Ii starts increasing and V0 becomes less than Vi. Note the values of Vi V0 and Ii.
  4. Keep increasing Vi in small steps of 0.5 V. Note the corresponding values of I i and V0
  5. At one stage as Vi is increased, Ii increases by a large amount and V0 does not increase. this is a reverse breakdown situation.
  6. As Vi is increased further, I will increase keeping V0 constant. Record your observation in a tabular column
  7. Draw a graph of output voltage V0 along the y-axis and input voltage along the x-axis. The graph will be as shown in the figure.
  8. Draw a graph of input current along the y-axis and input voltage along the x-axis. The graph will be shown in the figure

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Bring the moving contact to rheostat

Result:

The Breakdown voltage of the given Zener diode is 6 volts.

Percautions:

  • Use voltmeter and milliammeter of suitable range.
  • Connect the zener diode p-n junction in reverse bias.
  • The key should be kept open when the circuit is not in use.

Experiment 25

AIM: To study the characteristics of a common emitter n-p-n or p-n-p transistor and to find out the values of current and voltage gains.

Requirements: An n-p-n transistor, a 3 V battery, a 30 V battery, two rheostats, one 0–3 V voltmeter, one 0–30 V voltmeter, one 0–500 A microammeter, one 0–50 mA milliammeter, two-way keys, connecting wires.

Theory:

A transistor can be considered as a thin wafer of one type of semiconductor between two layers of another type. An NPN transistor has one p-type wafer in between two n-type. Similarly p-n-p the transistor has one n-type wafer between two p-type.

In a common emitter circuit, the emitter base makes the input section and the collector base the output section, with the emitter-base junction, forward bise, and the collector-base junction, reverse biased. The resistance offered by the emitter-base junction is called input resistance Ri and has a low value.

The resistance offered by the collector-base junction is called output resistance R0 and has a high value. Due to the high output resistance, a high resistance can be used as a load resistance.

The ratio \(\frac{R_L}{R_i} \text { or } \frac{R_0}{R_i}\) measures the resistance gain of the common emitter transistor. The ratio of change in collector current to the corresponding change in base current measures the current gain in the common emitter transistor and is represented by B.

⇒ \(\beta=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}\)

The product of current gain and the resistance gain measures the voltage gain of the common emitter transistor.

Formula Used

Input resistance, \(\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{i}}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}\)

Out put resistance, \(\mathrm{R}_0=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}\)

Resistance again, \(=\frac{R_0}{R_i}\)

Current gain, \(\beta=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}\)

Voltage gain correct gain x resistance gain

i.e., \(A_v=\beta \frac{R_0}{R_i}\)

Circuit Diagram

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Circuit Diagram

Procedure

  1. Make a circuit diagram as shown in Figure (A)
  2. Drag the moveable contact of rheostat to the minimum so that voltmeters, V1 and V2 read zero volt

For Input Characteristics

  1. Apply the forward bias voltage at the emitter-base junction note the base voltage (Vb) and the base current (I b)
  2. Keep increasing Vb till I b rises suddenly
  3. Make collector voltage 10 V and repeat the above steps
  4. Now make collector voltage 20 V, 30 V, and repeat the above steps. Note the value of Vb and I b in each case

For Output Characteristics

  1. Make all reading zero. Keep the collector voltage zero.
  2. Make base current I b = 100 uA by adjusting the base voltage. You will be able to read some collector current even though the collector voltage is zero.
  3. Make the collector voltage 10V, 20V, 30V, etc., and note corresponding collector currents. Record your observations in the tabular form as given below.
  4. Make the current I b equal to 200 uA, and note the values of I c corresponding to the different values of V.

Record Of Reobservations

  1. Least count of voltmeter, V1 = ………V
  2. Least count of voltmeter, V2 = ………V
  3. Least count of milliammeter = ………mA
  4. Least count of microammeter = ………uA

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For base voltage and base current

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For collector voltage and collector current

Graphs

I (For Input Characteristics)

Draw a graph of base voltage (Vb) on the x-axis and base current (I b) on the y-axis from table no. 1. The graph.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments I (For Input Characteristics)

The slope of the graph gives the value of \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{c}}}\) and its reciprocal gives the value of input resistance R1

⇒ \(\mathrm{R}_1=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}=\ldots \ldots . . \mathrm{ohms}\)

2 For Output Characteristics

Draw the graph between collector voltage Vc and colletor current I c for 10 mA base current I b taking Vc along the x-axis and Ic along the y-axis from table no.2. The graph will be as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments II For Output Characteristics

From the graph, the slope gives the value of \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{c}}}\) and its reciprocal gives the output resistance. \(\mathrm{R}_0=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}=\ldots \ldots \ldots . \mathrm{ohm}\)

3 For Calculation of Current Gain

Plot a graph of base current (I b) on the x-axis and collector current Ic on the y-axis. The graph will be as shown in the figure.

The slope of the graph will give the value of \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}\) which is the value of current gain (b).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The slope of the graph will give the value

  1. AC = …………………..mA= …………………..A
  2. BC = …………………..uA= …………………..A

⇒ \(\beta=\frac{A C}{B C}=\)

For calculation of voltage gain (Av)

Voltage gain = Current gain × Resistance gain \(A=\beta \times \frac{R_0}{R_i}\)

Result:

For the given common emitter transistor, Current gain b= ………

Votage gain Av = ……….

Percautions:

  1. Use voltmeter and milliammeter of suitable range
  2. The key should be kept open when the circuit is not in use

Possible Sources Of Error:

  1. Voltmeter and ammeter may have a zero error
  2. All the connections may not be tight

Experiment 26

AIM: To identify a diode, an L.E.D., a transistor, a resistor, and a capacitor from a mixed collection of such item

Apparatus: A multimeter and a collection of a junction diode, L.E.D., a transistor, a resistor, a capacitor and an integrated circuit.

Theory:

  1. For identification of different items, we have to consider both, their physical appearance and working
  2. An IC (integrated circuit) is in the form of a chip (with a flat back) and has multiple terminals,
    say 8 or more. Therefore, it can easily be identified.
  3. A transistor is a three-terminal device and can be sorted out just by appearance
  4. A resistor, a capacitor, a diode, and an LED are two terminal devices. To identify these we
    use the following facts:
  5. A diode is a two-terminal device that conducts only when it is forward-biased
  6. An LED is a light-emitting diode. It is also a two-terminal device which conducts and emits light
    only when it is forward-biased.
  7. A Resistor is a two-terminal device. It conducts both with d.c. voltage and a.c. voltage. Further, a resistor conducts equally even when terminals of d.c. the battery is reversed.
  8. A capacitor is a two-terminal device that does not conduct with d.c. voltage applies either way. But, conducts with a.c. Voltage.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A capacitor is a two terminal devic

Producer:

  • Look at the given mixture of various components of an electrical circuit and pick up the one having more than three terminals. The number of terminals maybe 8, 10, 14, or 16. This component will have a flat face. This component will be the integrated circuit i.e., IC.
  • Now find out the component having three legs or terminals. It will be a transistor
  • The component having two legs may either be a junction or capacitor or resistor or a light-emitting diode. These items can be distinguished from each other by using a multimeter as an ohmmeter.
  • Touch the probes to the two ends of each item and observe the deflection on the resistance scale. After this, interchange the two probes and again observe the deflection.
  • If the same constant deflection is observed in the two cases (before and after interchanging
    the probes), the item under observation is a resistor.
  • If unequal deflections are observed, it is a junction diode.
  • If unequal deflections are observed in the two cases along with the emission of light in the
  • case when the deflection is large, the item under observation is an LED
  • On touching the probes, if a large deflection is observed, which then gradually decreases to zero the item under observation is a capacitor.
  • In case the capacity of the capacitor is of the order of picofarad, then the deflection will become zero within no time.

Result:

When the item is observed physically

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments When the item is observed physically

With a multimeter as an ohmmeter:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments With multimeter as an ohmmeter

Percautions:

Observe all those precautions that were related to a multimeter and explain at the end of a multimeter.

Experiment  27

AIM: Use of multimeter to:

  1. Identify the base of the transistor.
  2. Distinguish between N-P-N and P-N-P type transistors.
  3. Identify terminals of an IC
  4. See the unidirectional flow of current in the case of a diode and LED.
  5. Check whether the given electronic component (e.g., diode, transistor, or IC) is in working order.

Apparatus

A multimeter, P-N-P transistor, N-P-N transistor, an IC, junction diode, L.E.D., etc

Theory:

Multimeter: It is an electrical instrument that can be used to measure all three electrical quantities i.e., electrical resistance, current (a.c. and d.c.), and voltage (direct and alternating). Since it can measure Ampere (A) (unit of current), Volt (V) (Unit of e.m.f), and Ohm (unit of resistance), that is why also called an AVO meter. In this single instrument will replace the voltmeter and Ammeter.

Construction

The most commonly used form of the multimeter is shown in the figure, which is a pointer-type moving coil galvanometer. The pointer of the multimeter can move over its dial, which is marked in resistance, current, and voltage scales of different ranges.

The zeros of all the scales are on the extreme left, except that of the resistance scale, whose zero is on the extreme right. A dry cell of 1.5 V is provided inside it. When the multimeter is used as an ohmmeter, the dry cell comes in a closed circuit.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments coil galvanometer.

Circuit jacks: In the multimeter. there are two circuit jacks, one each at the extreme corners of the bottom of the multimeter. The jack at the right corner is marked positive ( + ), while the other at the left corner is marked negative ( – ). In certain multimeters, the positive circuit jack is not provided but circuit jacks are provided in front of all the markings in regions A, B, C, and D. When the range switch is turned in any region, then all the circuit jacks in that region act as the positive circuit jacks.

Two testing leads (generally one black and the other red) are provided with a multimeter. Each lead carries two probes (One smaller than the other) as its two ends. The smaller probe of red lead is inserted in the jack marked positive, while the smaller probe of black lead is inserted in the jack marked negative.

It may be pointed out that the battery cell remains connected to the meter only when the range switch is in region A. Further, the positive of the battery cell is connected to the negative circuit jack, and the negative of the battery cell is connected to the positive circuit jack.

Zero ohm switch: This is provided at the left side of the multimeter. However, in some multimeters, the zero ohm switch is also provided on its front panel. This switch is set while measuring resistance.

To set this switch, the smaller probes are inserted in the two jacks and the bigger probes are short-circuited. This switch is worked, till the pointer comes to the zero mark, which lies at the right end resistance scale. The section of multimeters as different types of meters is explained below

Ammeter: The galvanometer gets converted into d.c. ammeter when the range switch lies in region B of the multimeter panel. When the range switch is in region B, it can be used as d.c. ammeter of range 0 to 0.25 mA, 0 to 25 mA, and 0 to 500 mA by bringing the knob in front of the desired mark when the range switch is in the region B, a very small resistance called shunt resistance whose value is different range, gets connected in parallel to the galvanometer. In this position, the battery cell is cut off from the meter.

Voltmeter: A multimeter can be used to measure both direct and alternating voltage

d.c. Voltmeter: The galvanometer gets converted into d.c. voltmeter when the range switch lies in the region C of the multimeter panel. With different positions of range switch in this region, it can be used as d.c. voltmeter of ranges 0-0.25 V, 0-2.5 V 0-50 V and 0 to 1000 volts. When the range switch is in region C, a high resistance, whose value depends upon the range selected, gets connected in series to the galvanometer. In this case, the battery cell is not in the circuit with the meter.

a.c. Voltmeter: The galvanometer gets converted into a.c. voltmeter when the range switch is turned and it lies in the region D of the multimeter panel. With the different positions of the range switch in this region, a multimeter can be used as a.c. voltmeter of range 0 to 10 V, 50 V, 250 V, and 1000 V. A solid-state crystal diode rectifier is incorporated in the circuit to use it for a.c. measurement.

ohm-meter: When the knob in the lower part of the multimeter i.e., the range switch is turned to be in the region A of the multimeter panel, the galvanometer gets converted into a resistance meter.

When the range switch is in front of a small black mark against the ×K mark, it works as a resistance meter of range 0 to 50 K and when the knob is in front of × M mark, it works as a resistance meter of range 0 to 50 × 106 ohm.

When the range switch is in region A, a battery cell of 0.5 V and a suitable resistor whose value is different for × K and × M marks, gets connected in series to the galvanometer.

Procedure

Take a multimeter and plug in the smaller probes of the testing leads into jack sockets marked as positive ( + ) and negative ( – ).

Turn the selector switch in the region A, so that it points towards the small black mark against ×M or ×K. Adjust the zero ohm switch till the pointer of the multimeter comes to the zero mark of the resistance scale (on the extreme right) when the two probes are short-circuited. (a) To identify the base of the transistor:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Transistor

In most cases, the central lead of a transistor is base lead but in some cases, it may not be so. To identify the base lead, the two probes to the extreme two legs of the transistor. Note the resistance of the transistor between these two legs.

Now, interchange the probes touching the two extreme legs of the transistor again and note the resistance of the transistor between these legs.

If in both cases the resistance of the transistor is high, then the central leg is the base of the transistor and the two extreme legs are the emitter and collector because the emitter-collector junction offers high resistance in both directions.

But if the resistance is high in one direction and low in the other direction, then one of the extreme legs is the base of the transistor.

To find, which of the extreme legs is base, touch one probe to the other to the central leg. Note the resistance between these two legs. Now interchange the two probes and again note the resistance. In case the resistance is low in one direction and high in another direction, then the left leg is the base otherwise the right leg is the base of the transistor.

To find whether the given transistor is N-P-N or P-N-P

First, find the base of the transistor as explained above

Now touch the probe of black wire to the base and the probe of the red wire to any one of the
remaining two legs and note the resistance from the multimeter.

In case the resistance of the transistor is low, it is an N-P-N transistor, otherwise P-N-P

Flow of current in junction diode:

Touch the two probes of the multimeter with the two legs of the diode and note the value of resistance. Now interchange the two probes and note the resistance. If in one case resistance is low and in another case resistance is high, then it shows the unidirectional flow of current through a junction diode.

The flow of current in an L.E.D.

Touch the two probes of the multimeter with the two legs of the L.E.D. and note the value of resistance. Now interchange the two probes and note the resistance. If in one case resistance is low and in another case resistance is high, also the L.E.D. will glow by emitting light when its resistance is low, then it shows the unidirectional flow of current through an L.E.D.

Check whether the given diode or transistor is in working order:

Set the multimeter as resistance meter as explained in steps 1 and 2. Now touch the probes with the two legs of the junction diode and note the value of resistance. Now interchange the probes and again note the resistance. If in one case resistance is low and in the second case resistance is high, then the junction diode is in working order. If in both cases the resistance is then the junction diode is spoilt.

For A Transistor

Confirm the base, emitter, and collector of the given transistor. Find the resistance of the E-B junction and B-C junction using the multimeter, keeping in mind either the given transistor is P-N-P or N-P-N. again find the resistance of the E-B junction and the B-C junction by interchanging the probes.

If in both directions the resistances of both the junctions come to be low, then the given transistor is spoiled if in one direction resistance is low while in the other direction, the resistance is high, showing that the transistor is working order.

Percautions:

The following precautions should be observed while using a multimeter.

The electrical quantity to be measured should be confirmed each time before starting the measurement otherwise the multimeter may get damaged if one starts measuring voltage and the selector switch is in the region of current or resistance etc.

The instrument should not be exposed to high temperatures and moisture for a long time, otherwise, it will get damaged.

When the order of the magnitude of voltage or current is not known, measurement is always started on the highest range and then an adequate lower range is selected in gradual steps.

while handling high voltages, probes should be held from their insulating covers.

Due to the high sensitivity of the instruments, they should not be given big shocks/vibrations.

Batteries out of life should be immediately replaced by new ones. Otherwise, components inside will get corroded by leakage of the electrolyte.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments Multiple Choice Questions

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments MCQs

Question 1. Using a screw gauge, the observation of the diameter of a wire is 1.324, 1.326, 1.334, and 1.336 cm respectively. Find the average diameter, the mean error, the relative error, and the % error.
Answer: \(\overline{\mathrm{D}}=1.330 \mathrm{~cm}, \overline{\Delta \mathrm{D}}=0.005 \mathrm{~cm}\) = 1, Relative error = + 0.004 %, error = 0.4%

Question 2. Round off the following numbers within three significant figures –

  1. 0.03927 kg
  2. 4.085 x 108 sec
  3. 5.2354 m
  4. 4.735 x 10–6 kg

Answer:

  1. 0.0393 kg
  2. 4.08 x 108 sec
  3. 5.24 m
  4. 4.74 x 10–6 kg

Question 3. If a tuning fork of frequency (f0) 340 Hz and tolerance ± 1% is used in the resonance column method [v = 2f 0 (l2 – l1)], the first and the second resonance are measured at l1 = 24.0 cm and l2 = 74.0 cm. Find max—permissible error in speed of sound.
Answer: 1.4%

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments MCQs Part -2 Only One Option Correct Type

Question 1. The length of a rectangular plate is measured by a meter scale and is found to be 10.0 cm. Its width is measured by vernier calipers as 1.00 cm. The least count of the meter scale and vernier calipers are 0.1 cm and 0.01 cm respectively (Obviously). Maximum permissible error in area measurement is –

  1. + 0.2 cm²
  2. + 0.1 cm²
  3. + 0.3 cm²
  4. Zero

Answer: 1. + 0.2 cm²

Question 2. In the previous question, the minimum possible error in area measurement can be

  1. + 0.02 cm²
  2. + 0.01 cm²
  3. + 0.03 cm²
  4. Zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Question 3. For a cubical block, the error in the measurement of sides is + 1%, and the error in the measurement of mass is + 2%, the maximum possible error in density is –

  1. 1%
  2. 5%
  3. 3%
  4. 7%

Answer: 2. 1%

Question 4. To estimate ‘g’ (from \(\mathrm{g}=4 \pi^2 \frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{T}^2}\) error in measurement of L is ± 2% and error in measurement of T is + 3%. The error in estimated ‘g’ will be

  1. ± 8%
  2. ± 6%
  3. ± 3%
  4. ± 5%

Answer: 1. ± 8%

Question 5. The least count of a stopwatch is 0.2 seconds. The time of 20 oscillations of a pendulum is measured to be 25 seconds. The percentage error in the period is

  1. 16%
  2. 0.8 %
  3. 1.8 %
  4. 8 %

Answer: 1. 16%

Question 6. The dimensions of a rectangular block measured with vernier calipers having the least count of 0.1 mm are 5 mm × 10 mm × 5 mm. The maximum percentage error in the measurement of the volume of the block is

  1. 5 %
  2. 10 %
  3. 15 %
  4. 20 %

Answer: 1. 5 %

Question 7. An experiment measures quantities x, y, z, and then t is calculated from the data as \(t=\frac{x y^2}{z^3}\) If percentage errors in x, y, and z are respectively 1%, 3%, 2%, then percentage error in t is :

  1. 10 %
  2. 4 %
  3. 7 %
  4. 13 %

Answer: 4. 13 %

Question 8. The external and internal diameters of a hollow cylinder are measured to be (4.23 ± 0.01) cm and (3.89 ± 0.01) cm. The thickness of the wall of the cylinder is

  1. (0.34 ± 0.02) cm
  2. (0.17 ± 0.02) cm
  3. (0.17 ± 0.01) cm
  4. (0.34 ± 0.01) cm

Answer: 3. (0.17 ± 0.01) cm

Question 9. The mass of a ball is 1.76 kg. The mass of 25 such balls is

  1. 0.44 × 103 kg
  2. 44.0 kg
  3. 44 kg
  4. 44.00 kg

Answer: 2. 44.0 kg

Question 10. Two resistors R1 (24 ± 0.5)  and R2 (8 ± 0.3)  are joined in series. The equivalent resistance is

  1. 32 ± 0.33 Ω
  2. 32 ± 0.8Ω
  3. 32 ± 0.2 Ω
  4. 32 ± 0.5 Ω

Answer: 2. 32 ± 0.8Ω

Question 11. The pitch of a screw gauge is 0.5 mm and there are 100 divisions on its circular scale. The instrument reads +2 divisions when nothing is put in between its jaws. In measuring the diameter of a wire, there are 8 divisions on the main scale and 83rd division coincides with the reference line. Then the diameter of the wire is

  1. 4.05 mm
  2. 4.405 mm
  3. 3.05 mm
  4. 1.25 mm

Answer: 2. 4.405 mm

Question 12. The pitch of a screw gauge having 50 divisions on its circular scale is 1 mm. When the two jaws of the screw gauge are in contact with each other, the zero of the circular scale lies 6 divisions below the line of graduation. When a wire is placed between the jaws, 3 linear scale divisions are visible while the 31st division on the circular scale coincides with the reference line. The diameter of the wire is :

  1. 3.62 mm
  2. 3.50 mm
  3. 3.5 mm
  4. 3.74 mm

Answer: 4. 3.74 mm

Question 13. The smallest division on the main scale of vernier calipers is 1 mm, and 10 vernier divisions coincide with 9 main scale divisions. While measuring the diameter of a sphere, the zero mark of the vernier scale lies between 2.0 and 2.1 cm and the fifth division of the vernier scale coincides with a scale division. The diameter of the sphere is

  1. 2.05 cm
  2. 3.05 cm
  3. 2.50 cm
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. 2.05 cm

Question 14. You are given two unknown resistors X and Y. These resistances are to be determined, using an ammeter of R A = 0.5 and a voltmeter of Rv = 20 k. It is known that X is in the range of a few ohms and Y is in the range of several kiloohms. Which circuit is preferable to measure X and Y: Resistor Circuit

  1. x (a) y (b)
  2. x → (a), y → (b) x → (b), y → (a)
  3. x → (a), y → (a) x → (b), y → (b)

Answer: 2. x → (a), y → (b) x → (b), y → (a)

Question 15. The main scale of the vernier calipers reads 10 mm in 10 divisions. 10 divisions of the Vernier scale coincide with 9 divisions of the main scale. When a cylinder is tightly placed between the two jaws, the zero of the vernier scale lies slightly behind 3.2 cm and the fourth vernier division coincides with a main scale division. The diameter of the cylinder is :

  1. 3.09 cm
  2. 3.14 cm
  3. 3.04 cm
  4. 3.03 cm

Answer: 2. 3.14 cm

Question 16. Two resistances are measured in Ohm.

  • R1 = 3Ω ± 1%
  • R2 = 6Ω ± 2%

When they are connected in parallel, the maximum percentage error in equivalent resistance is x. Find 3x.

  1. 4
  2. 5
  3. 7
  4. 9

Answer: 1. 4

Question 17. The edge of a cube is a = 1.2 10−2 m. Then its volume will be recorded as:

  1. 1.72 x 10−6 m3
  2. 1.728 x 10−6 m3
  3. 1.7 x 10−6 m3
  4. 1.73 x 10−6 m3

Answer: 3. 1.7 x 10−6 m3

Question 18. In the shown arrangement of the experiment of the meter bridge if the length AC corresponding to the null deflection of the galvanometer is x, what would be its value if the radius of the wire AB is doubled? 

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQs The radius of the wire AB

  1. x
  2. x/4
  3. 4x
  4. 2x

Answer: 1. X

Question 19. In the post office arrangement to determine the value of unknown resistance, the unknown resistance should be connected between:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQs The post office arrangement

  1. B and C
  2. C and D
  3. A and D
  4. B1 and C

Answer: 3. A and D

Question 20. A wire has a mass (0.3 ± 0.003)g, radius (0.5 ± 0.005)mm and length (6 ± 0.06)cm. The maximum percentage error in the measurement of its density is:

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Answer: 4. 4

Question 21. A student experiments determination of \(\left(=\frac{4 \pi^2 \ell}{\mathrm{T}^2}\right), \ell \approx 1 \mathrm{~m}\), and he commits an error of Δl. For T he takes the time of n oscillations with the stopwatch of least count ΔT and he commits a human error of 0.1 sec. For which of the following data, the measurement of g will be most accurate?

  1. ΔL = 0.5, ΔT = 0.1, n = 20
  2. ΔL = 0.5, ΔT = 0.1, n = 50
  3. ΔL = 0.5, ΔT = 0.01, n = 20
  4. ΔL = 0.1, ΔT = 0.05, n = 50

Answer: 4. ΔL = 0.1, ΔT = 0.05, n = 50

Question 22. A resistance of 2 is connected across one gap of a metre-bridge (the length of the wire is 100 cm) and an unknown resistance, greater than 2, is connected across the other gap. When these resistances are interchanged, the balance point shifts by 20 cm. Neglecting any corrections, the unknown resistance is

Answer: 1. 3Ω

Question 23. A vernier caliper has 1 mm marks on the main scale. It has 20 equal divisions on the Vernier scale which match with 16 main scale divisions. For this Vernier calipers, the least count is:

  1. 0.02 mm
  2. 0.05 mm
  3. 0.1 mm
  4. 0.2 mm

Answer: 4. 0.2 mm

Question 24. A meter bridge is set up as shown, to determine an unknown resistance ‘X’ using a standard 10 ohm resistor. The galvanometer shows a null point when the tapping key is at the 52 cm mark. The end-corrections are 1 cm and 2 cm respectively for the ends A and B. The determined value of ‘X’ is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQs A meter bridge is set-up as shown, to determine an unknown resistance ‘X’

  1. 10.2 ohm
  2. 10.6 ohm
  3. 10.8 ohm
  4. 11.1 ohm

Answer: 2. 10.6 ohm

Question 25. Unit of diploe moment is:

  1. -amp-m
  2. coulomb-m
  3. amp-m²
  4. coulomb-m²

Answer: 2. coulomb-m

Question 26. The length, breadth, and thickness of a block are given by l = 12cm, b = 6 cm, and t = 2.45 cm. The volume of the block according to the idea of significant figures should be:

  1. 1× 102 cm3
  2. 2 × 102 cm3
  3. 1.763 × 102 cm3
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. 2 × 102 cm3

Question 27. An ice cube of density 900 kg/m 3 is floating in water of density 1000 kg/m 3. The percentage of the volume of ice-cube outside the water is:

  1. 20%
  2. 35%
  3. 10%
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. 10%

Question 28. In an experiment four quantities a, b, c, and d are measured with percentage errors 1%, 2%, 3%, and 4% respectively. Quantity P is calculated as follows :

  1. 10%
  2. 7%
  3. 4%
  4. 14%

Answer: 4. 14%

Question 29. An experiment measures quantities a, b, c, and x calculated from x = If the percentage errors in a, b, c are ± 1%, ± 3%, and ± 2% respectively.

  1. The percentage error in x can be ± 13%
  2. The percentage error in x can be ± 30%
  3. The percentage error in x can be ± 20%
  4. The percentage error in x can be ± 26%

Answer: 1. The percentage error in x can be ± 13%

Question 30. If the error in the measurement of the radius of a sphere is 2%, then the error in the determination of the volume of the sphere will be

  1. 4%
  2. 6%
  3. 8%
  4. 2%

Answer: 2. 6%

Exercise- 2

Question 1. The number of circular divisions on the shown screw gauge is 50. It moves 0.5 mm on the main scale for one complete rotation. The main scale reading is 2. The diameter of the ball is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQs The number of circular divisions on the shown screw gauge is 50.

  1. 2.25 mm
  2. 2.20 mm
  3. 1.20 mm
  4. 1.25 mm

Answer: 3. 1.20 mm

Question 2. A student experiments to determine the Young’s modulus of a wire, exactly 2 m long, by Searle’s method. In a particular reading, the student measures the extension in the length of the wire to be 0.8 mm with an uncertainty of ±0.05 mm at a load of exactly 1.0 kg. The student also measures the diameter of the wire to be 0.4 mm with an uncertainty of ±0.01 mm. Take g = 9.8 m/s2 (exact). The Young’s modulus obtained from the reading is

  1. (2.0 ± 0.3) × 1011 N/m2
  2. (2.0 ± 0.2) × 1011 N/m2
  3. (2.0 ± 0.1) × 1011 N/m2
  4. (2.0 ± 0.05) × 1011 N/m2

Answer: 2. (2.0 ± 0.2) × 1011 N/m22

Question 3. Students 1, 2, and 3 experiment with measuring the acceleration due to gravity (g) using a simple pendulum. They use different lengths of the pendulum and /or record time for different numbers of oscillations. The observations are shown in the table. Least count for length = 0.1 cm Least count for time = 0.1 s If Eg 100 1, E2and E3 are the percentage errors in g, i.e., for students 1 2, and 3, respectively,

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQsThe acceleration due to gravity

  1. E1 = 0
  2. E1 is minimum
  3. E1 = E2
  4. E2 is maximum

Answer: 2. E1 is minimum

Question 4. The density of a solid ball is to be determined in an experiment. The diameter of the ball is measured with a screw gauge, whose pitch is 0.5 mm and there are 50 divisions on the circular scale. The reading on the main scale is 2.5 mm and that on the circular scale is 20 divisions. If the measured mass of the ball has a relative error of 2%, the relative percentage error in the density is

  1. 0.9%
  2. 2.4%
  3. 3.1%
  4. 4.2%

Answer: 3. 3.1%

Question 5. Consider vernier calipers in which each 1 cm on the main scale is divided into 8 equal divisions and a screw gauge with 100 divisions on its circular scale. In the vernier calipers, 5 divisions of the vernier scale coincide with 4 divisions on the main scale, and in the screw gauge, one complete rotation of the circular scale moves it by two divisions on the linear scale. Then,

  1. If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the Vernier calipers, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.01mm.
  2. If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the Vernier calipers, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.005mm.
  3. If the least count of the linear scale of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the vernier calipers, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.005 mm.
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the Vernier calipers, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.005mm.

Question 6. The energy of a system as a function of time t is given as E(t) = A2 exp(–at), where a = 0.2s–1. The measurement of A has an error of 1.25%. If the error in the measurement of time is 1.50%, the percentage error in the value of E(t) at t = 5 s is

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Answer: 4. 4

Question 7. A body of uniform cross-sectional area floats in a liquid of density thrice its value. The fraction of exposed height will be:

  1. 2/3
  2. 5/6
  3. 1/6
  4. 1/3

Answer: 1. 2/3

Question 8. A meter bridge is used to find the resistance of a wire using a standard resistance 20 with 0.5% tolerance. The unknown resistance is placed in the left gap of the meter bridge. The null point is obtained at 60.0 cm from the left end. The maximum permissible error in this measurement is 0.1 cm. Find the maximum error in the measurement of the resistance.

  1. 0.37Ω
  2. 0.35Ω
  3. 0.20Ω
  4. 0.27Ω

Answer: 4. 0.27Ω

Question 9. Two full turns of the circular scale of a screw gauge cover a distance of 1mm on its main scale. The total number of divisions on the circular scale is 50. Further, it is found that the screw gauge has a zero error of –0.03 mm. While measuring the diameter of a thin wire, a student notes the main scale reading of 3 mm and the number of circular scale divisions in line with the main scale as 35. The diameter of the wire is:

  1. 3.32 mm
  2. 3.73 mm
  3. 3.67 mm
  4. 3.38 mm

Answer: 4. 3.38 mm

Question 10. An experiment is performed to find the refractive index of glass using a traveling microscope. In this experiment, distance is measured by

  1. A vernier scale provided on the microscope
  2. A standard laboratory scale
  3. A metal scale provided on the microscope
  4. A screw gauge provided on the microscope

Answer: 1. A vernier scale provided on the microscope

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments MCQs Part – 1: Neet / Aipmt Question (Previous Years)

Question 1. A student measures the distance traversed in free fall of a body, initially at rest, in a given time. He uses this data to estimate g, the acceleration due to gravity. If the maximum percentage errors in the measurement of the distance and the time are e 1 and e2 respectively, the percentage error in the estimation of g is

  1. e2 – e1
  2. e1 + 2e2
  3. e1 + e
  4. e1 – 2e2

Answer: 2. e1 + 2e2

Question 2. In an experiment, the percentage of error that occurred in the measurement of physical quantities A, B, C, and D are 1%, 2%, 3%, and 4% respectively. Then the maximum percentage of error in the measurement X, where X = \(X=\frac{A^2 B^{1 / 2}}{C^{1 / 3} D^3}\) will be

  1. 10%
  2. \(\left(\frac{3}{13}\right) \%\)
  3. 16%
  4. 10%

Answer: 3. \(\left(\frac{3}{13}\right) \%\)

Question 3. The main scale of vernier calipers has n divisions/cm. n division of the vernier scale coincides with (n – 1) divisions of the main scale. The least count of the vernier calipers is :

  1. \(\frac{1}{(n+1)(n-1)} c m\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{cm}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^2} \mathrm{~cm}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{n(n+1)} \mathrm{cm}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^2} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments MCQs Part – 2: Jee (Main) / AIEEE Problems (Previous Years)

Question 1. In an experiment, the angles are required to be measured using an instrument. 29 divisions of the main scale exactly coincide with the 30 divisions of the vernier scale. If the smallest division of the main scale is half a degree ( 0.5°), then the least count of the instrument is:

  1. Half minute
  2. One degree
  3. Half degree
  4. One minute

Answer: 4. One minute

Question 2. In an optics experiment, with the position of the object fixed, a student varies the position of the convex lens and for each position, the screen is adjusted to get a clear image of the object. A graph between the object distance u and the image distance v, from the lens, is plotted using the same scale for the two axes. A straight line passing through the origin and making an angle of 45° with the x-axis meets the experimental curve at P. The coordinates of P will be:

  1. \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{f}}{2}, \frac{\mathrm{f}}{2}\right)\)
  2. (f, f)
  3. (4f, 4f)
  4. (2f, 2f)

Answer: 4. (2f, 2f)

Question 3. The respective number of significant figures for the numbers 23.023, 0.0003, and 2.1 × 10–3 are

  1. 5, 1, 2
  2. 5, 1, 5
  3. 5, 5, 2
  4. 4, 4, 2

Answer: 1. 5, 1, 2

Question 4. 4. A screw gauge gives the following reading when used to measure the diameter of a wire.

  • Main scale reading : 0 mm
  • Circular scale reading: 52 division
  • Given that 1 mm on the main scale corresponds to 100 divisions of the circular scale.

The diameter of the wire from the above data is:

  1. 0.52 cm
  2. 0.052 cm
  3. 0.026 cm
  4. 0.005 cm

Answer: 2. 0.052 cm

Question 5. If 400Ω of resistance is made by adding four 100 Ω resistances of tolerance 5%, then the tolerance of the combination is:

  1. 5%
  2. 10 %
  3. 15 %
  4. 20 %

Answer: 1. 5%

Question 6. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is T = 2g. The measured value of L is 20.0 cm known as 1 mm accuracy and the time for 100 oscillations of the pendulum is found to be 90s using a wristwatch of 1s resolution. The accuracy in the determination of g is:

  1. 2%
  2. 3%
  3. 1%
  4. 5%

Answer: 2. 3%

Question 7. The density of a material in the shape of a cube is determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its mass. If the relative errors in measuring the mass and length are respectively 1.5% and 1%, the maximum error in determining the density is:

  1. 4.5%
  2. 6%
  3. 2.5%
  4. 3.5 %

Answer: 1. 4.5%

Question 8. The pitch and the number of divisions, on the circular scale, for a given screw gauge are 0.5 mm and 100 respectively. When the screw gauge is fully tightened without any object, the zero of its circular scale lies 3 divisions below the mean line. The readings of the main scale and the circular scale, for a thin sheet are 5.5 mm and 48 respectively, the thickness of this sheet is :

  1. 5.740 mm
  2. 5.950 mm
  3. 5.725 mm
  4. 5.755 mm

Answer: 4. 5.755 mm

Question 9. Expression for time in terms of G (universal gravitational constant), h (Planck constant), and c (speed of light) is proportional to:

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{h c^5}{G}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{c}^3}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{c}^3}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{c}^3}}\)

Answer: 4. \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{c}^3}}\)

Question 10. The diameter and height of a cylinder are measured by a meter scale to be 12.6 ± 0.1 cm and 34.2 ± 0.1 cm, respectively. What will be the value of its volume in the appropriate significant figure?

  1. 4264 ± 81 cm³
  2. 4300 ± 80 cm³
  3. 4260 ± 80 cm³
  4. 4264.4 ± 81.0 cm³

Answer: 3. 4260 ± 80 cm

Question 11. The least count of the main scale of a screw gauge is 1 mm. The minimum number of divisions on its circular scale required to measure the 5m diameter of a wire is:

  1. 200
  2. 50
  3. 500
  4. 100

Answer: 1. 200

Question 12. In a simple pendulum experiment for the determination of acceleration due to gravity (g), the time taken for 20 oscillations is measured by using a watch of 1 second least count. The mean value of time taken comes out to be 30 seconds. The length of the pendulum is measured by using a meter scale of least count 1 mm and the value obtained is 55.0 cm. The percentage error in the determination of g is close to:

  1. 0.2%
  2. 0.7%
  3. 6.8 %
  4. 3.5 %

Answer: 3. 6.8 %

Question 13. In the density measurement of a cube, the mass and edge length are measured as (10.00 0.10) kg and (0.10  0.01) m, respectively. The error in the measurement of density is:

  1. 0.07 kg/m³
  2. 0.10 kg/m³
  3. 0.01 kg/m³
  4. 0.31 kg/m³

Answer: 4. 0.31 kg/m³

Question 14. The area of a square is 5.29 cm². The area of 7 such squares taking into account the significant figures is:

  1. 37.0 cm²
  2. 37 cm²
  3. 37.03 cm²
  4. 37.030 cm²

Answer: 3. 37.03 cm²

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section (A): Magnet And Magnetic Field Due To A Moving Charge

Question 1. The charge on a particle is 100 times that of the electron. It is revolving in a circular path of radius 0.8 m at a frequency of 1011 revolutions per second. The magnetic field at the centre of the path will be 

  1. \(10^{-7} \mu_0\)
  2. \(\frac{10^{-7}}{\mu_0}\)
  3. \(10^{-17} \mu_0\)
  4. \(10^{-6} \mu_{}\)

Answer: 4. \(10^{-6} \mu_{}\)

Question 2. Gauss is the unit of –

  1. Magnetic induction
  2. Intensity of magnetization
  3. dipole moment
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. Magnetic induction

Question 3. A ring of radius r is uniformly charged with charge q. If the ring is rotated about its axis with angular frequency ω, then the magnetic induction at its centre will be –

  1. \(10^{-7} \times \frac{\omega}{q r}\)
  2. \(10^{-7} \times \frac{q}{\omega r}\)
  3. \(10^{-7} \times \frac{r}{q \omega}\)
  4. \(10^{-7} \times \frac{r}{q \omega}\)

Answer: 3. \(10^{-7} \times \frac{r}{q \omega}\)

Question 4. If an electron revolves in the path of a circle of radius of 0.5 × 10–10 m at a frequency of 5 × 1015 cycles/s, the equivalent electric current in the circle is (charge of an electron 1.6 × 10 –19 C)

  1. 0.4mA
  2. 0.8mA
  3. 1.2mA
  4. 1.6mA

Answer: 4. 1.2mA

Question 5. A charged particle moves through a magnetic field in a direction perpendicular to it. Then the :

  1. Acceleration remains unchanged
  2. Velocity remains unchanged
  3. The speed of the particle remains unchanged
  4. The direction of the particle remains unchanged

Answer: 3. Speed of the particle remains unchanged

Question 6. A particle mass m, charge Q and kinetic energy T enter a transverse uniform magnetic field of B induction. After 3 s the kinetic energy of the particle will be

  1. 3T
  2. 2T
  3. T
  4. 4T

Answer: 3. T

Question 7. If a current is passed through a spring then the spring will :

  1. Expand
  2. Compress
  3. Remain same
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. Compress

Question 8. At a specific instant emission of radioactive compound is deflected in a magnetic field. The compound can emit:

  1. Electrons
  2. Protons
  3. He2+
  4. Neutrons

The emission at the instant can be 1, 2, 3

  1. 1, 2, 3,4
  2. 4
  3. 2,3

Answer: 1. 1, 2, 3

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section B: Magnetic Field Due To A Straight Wire

Question 1. A thin wire is bent to form a square loop ABCD. A battery of e.m.f 2V is connected between points A and C. The magnetic induction due to the current in the loop at centre O will-

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Point Away From The Plane Of Paper

  1. Be zero
  2. Point away from the plane of paper
  3. point along the plane of the paper
  4. Point into the plane of paper

Answer: 1. Be zero

Question 2. A small linear segment of an electric circuit is lying on the x-axis extending from \(x=-\frac{a}{2} \text { to } x=\frac{a}{2}\) and a current i is flowing in it. The magnetic induction due to the segment at a point x = a on the x-axis will be

  1. α a
  2. zero
  3. α a2
  4. \(\propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{a}}\)

Answer: 2. zero

Question 3. A current i is flowing in a straight conductor of length L. The magnetic induction at a point distant \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{4}\) from its centre will be

  1. \(\frac{4 \mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\sqrt{5} \pi \mathrm{L}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi L}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\sqrt{2} \mathrm{~L}}\)
  4. Zero

Answer: 1. \(\frac{4 \mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\sqrt{5} \pi \mathrm{L}}\)

Question 4. Two insulated wires of infinite length are lying mutually at right angles to each other as shown in. Currents of 2A and 1.5A respectively are flowing in them. The value of magnetic induction at point P will be

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Value Of MagneticInduction At Point P Will Be

  1. \(2 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~N} / \mathrm{A}-\mathrm{m}\)
  2. \(2 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~N} / \mathrm{A}-\mathrm{m}\)
  3. \(1.5 \times 10^{-5} \text { tesla }\)
  4. \(2 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~N} / \mathrm{A}-\mathrm{m}\)

Answer: 3. \(1.5 \times 10^{-5} \text { tesla }\)

Question 5. A current of I ampere is flowing in an equilateral triangle of side a. The magnetic induction at the centroid will be

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{3 \sqrt{3} \pi a}\)
  2. \(\frac{3 \mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{a}}\)
  3. \(\frac{5 \sqrt{2} \mu_0 i}{3 \pi a}\)
  4. \(\frac{9 \mu_0 i}{2 \pi a}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{9 \mu_0 i}{2 \pi a}\)

Question 6. A current is flowing in a hexagonal coil of side a (Fig.). The magnetic induction at the centre of the coil will be

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field The Magnetic Induction At The Centre Of The Coil

  1. \(\frac{3 \sqrt{3} \mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\pi a}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{3 \sqrt{3} \pi a}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{\sqrt{3} \pi a}\)
  4. \(\frac{\sqrt{3} \mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\pi a}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{\sqrt{3} \mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\pi a}\)

Question 7. A straight wire of diameter 0.5 mm carrying a current of 1A is replaced by another wire of diameter 1 mm carrying the same current. The strength of the magnetic field far away is:

  1. Twice the earlier value
  2. One-half of the earlier value
  3. One-quarter of the earlier value
  4. Same as the earlier value

Answer: 4. Same as earlier value

Question 8. Two long parallel wires P and Q are held at a distance of 5m between them. If P and Q carry current of 2.5 amp and 5 amp respectively in the same direction, then the magnetic field at a point halfway between the wires is

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Two long parallel wires P and Q are held at a distance of 5m between them

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0}{\pi}\)
  2. \(\frac{\sqrt{3} \mu_0}{2 \pi}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi}\)
  4. \(\frac{3 \mu_0}{2 \pi}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi}\)

Question 9. A long straight wire carries an electric current of 2 A. The magnetic induction at a perpendicular distance of 5m from the wire will be

  1. 4 × 10–8 T
  2. 8 × 10–8 T
  3. 12 × 10–8 T
  4. 16 × 10–8 T

Answer: 2. 8 × 10–8 T

Question 10. The strength of the magnetic field at a point distant r near a long straight current-carrying wire is B. The field at a distance of r/2 will be

  1. B/2
  2. B/4
  3. 4B
  4. 2B

Answer: 4. 2B

Question 11. A wire in the form of a square of side ‘a’ carries a current ‘i’. Then the magnetic induction at the centre of the square wire is (Magnetic permeability of free space = u0)

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{a}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_{\mathrm{o}} \mathrm{i} \sqrt{2}}{\pi \mathrm{a}}\)
  3. \(\frac{2 \sqrt{2} \mu_0 i}{\pi a}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\sqrt{2} \pi a}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{2 \sqrt{2} \mu_0 i}{\pi a}\)

Question 12. The vector form of Biot-Savart’s law for a current carrying element is

  1. \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{Id} \vec{I} \sin \phi}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{d} \vec{B}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{I d / \times \hat{r}}{r^2}\)
  3. \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{Id} \vec{I} \times \hat{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{r}^3}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{Id} \vec{l} \times \hat{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)

Answer: 4. \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{Id} \vec{l} \times \hat{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)

Question 13. Two long straight wires are kept parallel. A current of 1 ampere is flowing in each wire in the same direction. The distance between them is 2r. The intensity of the magnetic field at the midpoint between them :

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Two long straight wires are kept parallel

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
  2. \(\frac{4 \mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
  3. 0
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 r}\)

Answer: 3. 0

Question 14. Two infinitely long, thin, insulated, straight wires lie in the x-y plane along the x and y-axis respectively. Each wire carries a current I, respectively in the positive x-direction and positive y-direction. The magnetic field will be zero at all points on the straight line:

  1. y=x
  2. y=-x
  3. y=x-1
  4. y=-x+1

Answer: 1. y=x

Question 15. Two parallel, long wires carry currents i 1 and i2 with i1 > i2. When the current is in the same direction, the magnetic field at a point midway between the wire is 10uT. If the direction of i 2 is reversed, the field becomes 30T. The ratio i1/i2 is

  1. 4
  2. 3
  3. 2
  4. 1

Answer: 3. 2

Question 16. Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart. They carry steady equal currents flowing out of the plane of the paper, as shown. The variation of the magnetic field B along the XX’ is given by

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart

Answer: 2.

Question 17. Wires 1 and 2 carrying currents i1 and i2 respectively are inclined at an angle to each other. What is the force on a small element dl of wire 2 at distance r from wire 1 (as shown in the figure) due to the magnetic field of wire 1?

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Wires 1 and 2 carrying currents i1 and i2 respectively are inclined at an angle  to each other

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}} \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 \mathrm{dl} \tan \theta\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}} \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 \mathrm{dl} \sin \theta\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi r} i_1 i_2 \mathrm{dl}(\cos \theta+1)\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}} \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 \mathrm{dl} \sin \theta\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi r} i_1 i_2 \mathrm{dl}(\cos \theta+1)\)

Question 18. A current i ampere flows along an infinitely long straight thin-walled tube, then the magnetic induction at any point inside the tube is:

  1. Infinite
  2. zero
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}, \frac{2 i}{r} \text { tesla }\)
  4. \(\frac{2 i}{r} \text { tesla }\)

Answer: 2. zero

Question 19. A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady current i. The current is uniformly distributed across its cross-section. The ratio of the magnetic field at \(\frac{a}{2}\) and 2a from axis is

  1. 1/4
  2. 4
  3. 1
  4. 1/2

Answer: 3. 1

Question 20. A current flows along the length of an infinitely long, straight, thin-walled pipe. Then :

  1. The magnetic field is zero only on the axis of the pipe
  2. The magnetic field is different at different points inside the pipe
  3. The magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is zero
  4. The magnetic field at all points inside the pipe is the same, but not zero

Answer: 3. The magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is zero

Question 21. Two identical conducting wires AOB and COD are placed at right angles to each other. The wire AOB carries an electric current I2 and COD carries a current O. The magnetic field on a point lying at a distance d from O, in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the wires AOB and COD, will be given by

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi}\left(\frac{I_1+I_2}{d}\right)^{1 / 2}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\left(\mathrm{I}_1^2+\mathrm{I}_2^2\right)^{1 / 2}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\left(\mathrm{I}_1+\mathrm{I}_2\right)\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\left(\mathrm{I}_1^2+\mathrm{I}_2^2\right)\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\left(\mathrm{I}_1^2+\mathrm{I}_2^2\right)^{1 / 2}\)

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section C: Magnetic Field Due To A Circular Loop

Question 1. An electric current i is flowing in a circular coil of radius a. At what distance from the center on the axis of the coil will the magnetic field be 1/8th of its value at the center?

  1. 3a
  2. \(\sqrt{3} a\)
  3. \(\frac{a}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{a}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Answer: 2. 3a

Question 2. The ratio of magnetic inductions at the center of a circular coil of radius a and on its axis at a distance equal to its radius will be

  1. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\sqrt{2}}{1}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{2 \sqrt{2}}{1}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Question 3. A wire loop PQRSP is constructed by joining two semi-circular coils of radii r1 and r2 respectively as shown in Fig. Current i is flowing in the loop. The magnetic induction at point O will be

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A wire loop PQRSP is constructed by joining two semi circular coils of radii

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4}\left[\frac{1}{r_1}-\frac{1}{r_2}\right]\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{4}\left[\frac{1}{r_1}+\frac{1}{r_2}\right]\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2}\left[\frac{1}{r_1}-\frac{1}{r_2}\right]\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2}\left[\frac{1}{r_1}+\frac{1}{r_2}\right]\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2}\left[\frac{1}{r_1}-\frac{1}{r_2}\right]\)

Question 4. The magnetic field on the axis of a current-carrying circular coil of radius at a distance 2a from its centre will be

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{10 \sqrt{5} a}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{4 \mathrm{a}}\)
  4. \(\mu_0 i\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{10 \sqrt{5} a}\)

Question 5. The use of Helmholtz coils is to produce –

  1. Uniform magnetic field
  2. Non-uniform magnetic field
  3. Varying magnetic field
  4. Zero magnetic field

Answer: 1. Uniform magnetic field

Question 6. Two similar coils of radius R and several turns N are lying concentrically with their planes at right 3 angles to each other. The currents flowing in them are I and I respectively. The resultant magnetic induction at the centre will be (in Wb/m2).

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{3} \mu_0 \frac{\mathrm{NI}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{5} \frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{NI}}{\mathrm{R}}\)

Question 7. Two similar coils are kept mutually perpendicular such that their centres coincide. At the centre, find the ratio of the magnetic field due to one coil and the resultant magnetic field through both coils, if the same current is flown:

  1. \(1: \sqrt{2}\)
  2. 1:2
  3. 1:3
  4. \(\sqrt{3}: 1\)

Answer: 1. \(1: \sqrt{2}\)

Question 8. A coil of one turn is made of a wire of a certain length and then from the same length a coil of two turns is made. If the same current is passed in both cases, then the ratio of the magnetic induction at their centres will be

  1. 2:1
  2. 1:4
  3. 4:1
  4. 1:2

Answer: 2. 1:4

Question 9. Magnetic field due to 0.1A current flowing through a circular coil of radius 0.1 m and 1000 turns at the centre of the coil is

  1. 0.2T
  2. 2 ×10–4 T
  3. 6.28 ×10–4 T
  4. 9.8 ×10–4 T

Answer: 3. 6.28 ×10–4 T

Question 10. Magnetic field due to a ring having n turns at a distance x from the centre on its axis is proportional to (if r = radius of the ring)

  1. \(\frac{r}{\left(x^2+r^2\right)}\)
  2. \(\frac{r^2}{\left(x^2+r^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
  3. \(\frac{n r^2}{\left(x^2+r^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{n^2 r^2}{\left(x^2+r^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{n r^2}{\left(x^2+r^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)

Question 11. A circular arc of wire subtends an angle \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) at the centre. If it carries a current I and its radius of curvature is R, then the magnetic field at the centre of the arc is

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{8 R}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 R}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{8 R}\)

Question 12. The magnetic field of a given length of wire carrying a current for a single-turn circular coil at the centre is B, then its value for two turns for the same wire, when the same current passes through it, is

  1. \(\frac{B}{4}\)
  2. \(\frac{B}{2}\)
  3. 2B
  4. 4B

Answer: 4. 4B

Question 13. If in a circular coil A of radius R, current i is flowing and in another coil B of radius 2R a current 2i is flowing, then the ratio of the magnetic fields, BA and BB produced at the centre by them will be :

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 1/2
  4. 4

Answer: 1. 1

Question 14. A long wire carries a steady current. It is bent into a circle of one turn and the magnetic field at the centre of the coil is B. It is then bent into a circular loop of n turns. The magnetic field at the centre of the coil will be:

  1. nB
  2. n2B
  3. 2nB
  4. 2n2B

Answer: 2. n2B

Question 15. The magnetic field due to a current carrying circular loop of radius 3 cm at a point on the axis at a distance of 4 cm from the centre is 54 T. What will be its value at the centre of the loop?

  1. 250 μT
  2. 150 μT
  3. 125 μT
  4. 75μT

Answer: 1. 250 μT

Question 16. A long solenoid has 200 turns per cm and carries a current i. The magnetic field at its centre is 6.28×10–2 Weber/m2. Another long solenoid has 100 turns per cm and it carries a current i/3. The value of the magnetic field at its centre is

  1. 1.05 × 10–4 Weber/m2
  2. 1.05 × 10–2 Weber/m2
  3. 1.05 × 10–5 Weber/m2
  4. 1.05 × 1010–3 Weber/m2

Answer: 2. 1.05 × 10–2 Weber/m2

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section D: Magnetic Field Due To A Straight Wire And Circular Arc

Question 1. The magnetic induction at center O due to the arrangement shown in fig.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field The magnetic induction at centre O

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 \pi r}(1+\pi)\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 \pi r}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 \pi r}(1-\pi)\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{r}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 \pi r}(1+\pi)\)

Question 2. A current of 30 amp. is flowing in a conductor as shown in Fig. The magnetic induction at point O will be

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A current of 30 amp

  1. 1.5 tesla
  2. 1.5π × 10–4 Tesla
  3. zero
  4. O.15 Tesla

Answer: 2. 1.5π × 10–4 Tesla

Question 3. The magnetic induction at centre O in the following figure will be

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field The magnetic induction at centre O.

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i \alpha}{4 \pi}\left(\frac{1}{r_1}-\frac{1}{r_2}\right) \odot\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i \alpha}{4 \pi}\left(\frac{1}{r_1}+\frac{1}{r_2}\right) \odot\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i \alpha}{2 \pi}\left[\frac{1}{r_1}-\frac{1}{r_2}\right] \otimes\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i \alpha}{2 \pi}\left[\frac{1}{r_1}+\frac{1}{r_2}\right]\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i \alpha}{4 \pi}\left(\frac{1}{r_1}-\frac{1}{r_2}\right) \odot\)

Question 4. Two circular coils 1 and 2 are made from the same wire but the radius of the 1st coil is twice that of the 2nd coil. What is the ratio of the potential difference applied across them so that the magnetic field at their centres is the same:

  1. 3
  2. 4
  3. 6
  4. 2

Answer: 2. 4

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section (E): Magnetic Field Due To A Cylinder, Large Sheet, Solenoid, Toroid And Ampere’s Law

Question 1. When the number of turns in a toroidal coil is doubled, then the value of magnetic flux density will become-

  1. Four times
  2. Eight times
  3. Half
  4. Double

Answer: 2. Eight times

Question 2. The length of a solenoid is 0.1 m and its diameter is very small. A wire is wound over it in two layers. The number of turns in the inner layer is 50 and that on the outer layer is 40. The strength of the current flowing in two layers is in the same direction and is 3 ampere. The magnetic induction in the middle of the solenoid will be

  1. 3.4 × 10–3 Tesla
  2. 3.4 × 10–3 Gauss
  3. 3.4 × 103 Tesla
  4. 3.4 × 103 Gauss

Answer: 4. 3.4 × 103 Gauss

Question 3. The magnetic field inside a long solenoid is –

  1. Infinite
  2. Zero
  3. Uniform
  4. Non-uniform

Answer: 1. Infinite

Question 4. The correct curve between the magnetic induction along the axis of a long solenoid due to current flow I in it and distance x from one end is

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field The correct curve between the magnetic induction

Answer: 2.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field The correct curve between the magnetic induction 4

Question 5. A long solenoid has 200 turns per cm and carries a current of 2.5 amp. The magnetic field at its centre is μ0 = 4π × 10–7 weber/amp-m]:

  1. 3.14 × 10–2 weber/m²
  2. 6.28 × 10–2 weber/m²
  3. 9.42 × 10–2 weber/m²
  4. 12.56 × 10–2 weber/m²

Answer: 1. 3.14 × 10–2 weber/m²

Question 6. In a coaxial, straight cable, the central conductor and the outer conductor carry equal currents in opposite directions. The magnetic field is zero.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Inside the inner conductor

  1. Outside the cable
  2. Inside the inner conductor
  3. Inside the outer conductor
  4. In between the two conductors.

Answer: 2. Inside the inner conductor

Question 7. A wire is wound on a long rod of material of relative permeability r = 4000 to make a solenoid. If the current through the wire is 5 A and the number of turns per unit length is 1000 per metre, then the magnetic field inside the solenoid is:

  1. 25.12 mT
  2. 12.56 m T
  3. 12.56 T
  4. 25.12 T

Answer: 1. 25.12 mT

Question 8. A cylindrical wire of radius R carries current I uniformly distributed over its cross-section. If a circular \(\int \vec{B} \cdot \vec{d}\) loop of radius ‘ r ‘ is taken as a campervan loop, then the variation value over this loop with radius ‘ r ‘ of the loop will be best represented by

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A cylindrical wire of radius R is carrying current i uniformly distributed over its cross-section

Answer: 2.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A cylindrical wire of radius R is carrying current i uniformly distributed over its cross-section.

Question 9. A current flows along the length of an infinitely long, straight, thin-walled pipe. Then

  1. The magnetic field at all points inside the pipe is the same, but not zero
  2. The magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is zero
  3. The magnetic field is zero only on the axis of the pipe
  4. The magnetic field is different at different points inside the pipe.

Answer: 3. The magnetic field is zero only on the axis of the pipe

Question 10. A long solenoid carrying a current produces a magnetic field B along its axis. If the current is doubled and the number of turns per cm is halved, the new value of the magnetic field is:

  1. 2B
  2. 4B
  3. B/2
  4. B

Answer: 3. B/2

Question 11. A long, thick straight conductor of radius R carries current I uniformly distributed in its cross-section area. The ratio of the energy density of the magnetic field at a distance R/2 from the surface inside the conductor and outside the conductor is:

  1. 1: 16
  2. 1: 1
  3. 1: 4
  4. 9/16

Answer: 4. 9/16

Question 12. A coaxial cable is made up of two conductors. The inner conductor is solid and is of radius R1 & the outer conductor is hollow of inner radius R2 and outer radius R3. The space between the conductors is filled with air. The inner and outer conductors are carrying currents of equal magnitudes and in opposite directions. Then the variation of the magnetic field with distance from the axis is best plotted as:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A coaxial cable is made up of two conductors.

Answer: 3.

 

 

 

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A coaxial cable is made up of two conductors.3

 

 

 

 

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section (F): Magnetic Force On A Charge

Question 1. When a charged particle moves at right angles to a magnetic field then which of the following quantities changes-

  1. Energy
  2. Momentum
  3. Speed
  4. All Of Above

Answer: 2. Momentum

Question 2. A proton, a neutron, and an α-particle are accelerated through the same potential difference and then they enter a uniform normal magnetic field. If the radius of the circular path of the proton is 8 cm then the radius of the circular path of the deuteron will be

  1. 11.31 cm
  2. 22 cm
  3. 5 cm
  4. 2.5 cm

Answer: 1. 11.31 cm

Question 3. A proton and an α-particle enter a uniform magnetic field at right angles to it with the same velocity. The period of α the particle as compared to that of the proton, will be

  1. Four Times
  2. Two Times
  3. Half
  4. One Fourth

Answer: 2. Four Times

Question 4. A charged particle with charge q is moving in a uniform magnetic field. If this particle makes some angle (0 < θ < 180º) with the magnetic field then its path will be –

  1. Circular
  2. Straight Line
  3. Helical
  4. Parabolic

Answer: 3. Helical

Question 5. If a positively charged particle is moving as shown in the fig., then it will get deflected due to the magnetic field towards

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field If a positively charged particle

  1. +x direction
  2. +y direction
  3. –x direction
  4. +z direction

Answer: 4. +z direction

Question 6. Which of the following particles will experience maximum magnetic force (magnitude) when projected with the same velocity perpendicular to a magnetic field?

  1. Electron
  2. Proton
  3. He+
  4. Li++

Answer: 4. Li++

Question 7. An electric current enters and leaves a uniform circular wire of radius through diametrically opposite points. A charged particle q moving along the axis of the circular wire passes through its center at speed υ. The magnetic force acting on the particle when it passes through the center has a magnitude.

  1. \(q v \frac{\mu_0 i}{2 a}\)
  2. \(\mathrm{q} v \frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{a}}\) m
  3. \(q v \frac{\mu_0 i}{a}\)
  4. Zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Question 8. A charged particle is moved along a magnetic field line. The magnetic force on the particle is

  1. Along its velocity
  2. Opposite to its velocity
  3. Perpendicular to its velocity
  4. Zero.

Answer: 4. Zero.

Question 9. Two particles X and Y having equal charges, after being accelerated through the same potential difference, enter a region of uniform magnetic field and describe circular paths of radii R1 and R2 respectively. The ratio of the masses of X to that of Y.

  1. \(\left(\frac{R_1}{R_2}\right)^{1 / 2}\)
  2. \(\frac{R_2}{R_1}\)
  3. \(\left(\frac{R_1}{R_2}\right)^2\)
  4. \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\left(\frac{R_1}{R_2}\right)^2\)

Question 10. A negatively charged particle falling freely under gravity enters a region having a uniform horizontal magnetic field pointing toward the north. The particle will be deflected towards

  1. East
  2. West
  3. North
  4. South

Answer: 2. West

Question 11. A proton of mass m and charge q enters a magnetic field B with a velocity v at an angle θ with the direction of B. The radius of curvature of the resulting path is

  1. \(\frac{m v}{q B}\)
  2. \(\frac{m v \sin \theta}{q B}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}}{\mathrm{qB} \sin \theta}\)
  4. \(\frac{m v \cos \theta}{q B}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}}{\mathrm{qB} \sin \theta}\)

Question 12. Two particles A and B of masses m A and mB respectively and having the same charge are moving in a plane. A uniform magnetic field exists perpendicular to this plane. The speeds of the particles are vA and v B respectively and the trajectories are as shown in the figure. Then

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A uniform magnetic field exists perpendicular to this plane

  1. mAvA < mBvB
  2. mAvA > mBvB
  3. mA < mB and vA < vB
  4. mA = mB and vA = vB

Answer: 2. mAvA > mBvB

Question 13. A charged particle is released from rest in a region of steady and uniform electric and magnetic fields that are parallel to each other. The particle will move in a

  1. Straight line
  2. Circle
  3. Helix
  4. Cycloid

Answer: 1. Straight line

Question 14. A particle of mass M and charge Q moving with velocity describes a circular path of radius R when subjected to a uniform transverse magnetic field of induction B. The work done by the field when the particle completes one full circle is

  1. \(\left(\frac{m v^2}{R}\right) 2 \pi R\)
  2. Zero
  3. BQ.2πR
  4. BQv.2πR

Answer: 2. Zero

Question 15. An electron moves with a velocity of 1 × 103 m/s in a magnetic field of induction 0.3 T at an angle of 30°. If em of electron is 1.76 × 1011 C/kg, the radius of the path is nearly:

  1. 10–9 meter
  2. 2 × 10–8 meter
  3. 10–8 meter
  4. 10–10 meter

Answer: 3. 10–8 meter

Question 16. A charged particle of charge q and mass m enters perpendicularly in a magnetic field. The kinetic energy of the particle is E; then the frequency of rotation is :

  1. \(\frac{q B}{m \pi}\)
  2. \(\frac{q B}{2 \pi m}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{qBE}}{2 \pi \mathrm{m}}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{qB}}{2 \pi \mathrm{E}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{q B}{2 \pi m}\)

Question 17. A Beam Of Particles With a Specific Charge of 108 C/Kg Is Entering With Velocity 3 × 105 M/S By Making An Angle Of 30° With The Uniform Magnetic Field Of 0.3 Tesla. Radius Of Curvature Of Path Of Particle Is

  1. 0.5 Cm
  2. 0.02 Cm
  3. 1.25 Cm
  4. 2 Cm

Answer: 4. 0.02 Cm

Question 18. If An Electron Enters A Magnetic Field With Its Velocity Pointing In The Same Direction As The Magnetic Field, Then:

  1. The Electron Will Turn To Its Right
  2. The Electron Will Turn To Its Left
  3. The Velocity Of The Electron Will Increase
  4. The Velocity Of The Electron Will Remain Unchanged

Answer: 4. The Velocity Of The Electron Will Remain Unchanged

Question 19. A Charge Of 1c Is Moving In A Perpendicular Magnetic Field Of 0.5 Tesla With A Velocity Of 10 M/Sec. Force Experienced Is:

  1. 5 N
  2. 10 N
  3. 0.5 N
  4. 0 N

Answer: 1. 5 N

Question 20. An Electron Accelerated By 200 V, Enters A Magnetic Field. If Its Velocity Is 8.4 × 10 6 M/Sec. Then (E/M) For It Will Be : (In C/Kg)

  1. 1.75 × 1010
  2. 1.75 × 1011
  3. 1.75 × 109
  4. 1.75 × 106

Answer: 2. 1.75 × 1011

Question 21. A Charge Q Is Moving In A Uniform Magnetic Field. The Magnetic Force Acting On It Does Not Depend Upon

  1. Charge
  2. Mass
  3. Velocity
  4. Magnetic Field

Answer: 2. Mass

Question 22. An Electron Is Travelling In the East Direction And A Magnetic Field Is Applied In an Upward Direction, the electron Will Deflect Towards

  1. South
  2. North
  3. West
  4. East

Answer: 2. North

Question 23. A Proton Enters A Magnetic Field With Velocity Parallel To The Magnetic Field. The Path Followed By The Proton Is A

  1. Circle
  2. Parabola
  3. Helix
  4. Straight Line

Answer: 4. Straight Line

Question 24. An electron (mass = 9.0 × 10–31 kg and charge = 1.6 × 10–19 coulomb) is moving in a circular orbit in a magnetic field of 1.0 × 10–4 Weber/m2. Its period of revolution is:

  1. 3.5 × 10–7 second
  2. 7.0 × 10–7 seconds
  3. 1.05 × 10–6 seconds
  4. 2.1 × 10—6 second

Answer: 1. 3.5 × 10–7 second

Question 25. A particle of mass 0.6 g and having a charge of 25 nC is moving horizontally with a uniform velocity of 1.2 × 104 ms–1 in a uniform magnetic field, then the value of the minimum magnetic induction is (g = 10ms–2)

  1. Zero
  2. 10 T
  3. 20 T
  4. 200 T

Answer: 3. 20 T

Question 26. An electron is moving with velocity in the direction of the magnetic field, then the force acting on the electron is:-

  1. Zero
  2. \(\mathrm{e}(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})\)
  3. \(\mathrm{e}(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}})\)
  4. 200 Joule

Answer: 1. \(\mathrm{e}(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})\)

Question 27. A Vertical Wire Carries A Current In an Upward Direction. An Electron Beam Sent Horizontally Towards The Wire Will Be Deflected (Gravity Free Space)

  1. Towards Right
  2. Towards Left
  3. Upwards
  4. Downwards

Answer: 3. Upwards

Question 28. If An Electron And A Proton Having the Same Momentum Enter Perpendicularly To A Magnetic Field, Then :

  1. Curved Path Of Electron And Proton Will Be Same (Ignoring The Sense Of Revolution)
  2. They Will Move Undeflected
  3. Curved Path Of Electron Is More Curved Than That Of Proton
  4. Path Of Proton Is More Curved

Answer: 1. The Curved Path Of the Electron And Proton Will Be the Same (Ignoring The Sense Of Revolution)

Question 29. A Magnetic Needle Is Kept In A Non-Uniform Magnetic Field. It Experiences :

  1. A Torque But Not A Force
  2. Neither A Force Nor A Torque
  3. A Force And A Torque
  4. A Force But Not A Torque

Answer: 3. A Force And A Torque

Question 30. Two thin, long, parallel wires, separated by a distance ‘d’ carry a current of ‘i’ A in the same direction. They will:

  1. Attract each other with a force of \(\frac{\mu_0 i^2}{(2 \pi d)}\)
  2. Repel, each other with a force of \(\frac{\mu_0 i^2}{(2 \pi d)}\)
  3. Attract each other with a force of \(\frac{\mu_0 i^2}{\left(2 \pi d^2\right)}\)
  4. Repel each other with a force of \(\frac{\mu_0 i^2}{\left(2 \pi d^2\right)}\)

Answer: 1. Attract each other with a force of \(\frac{\mu_0 i^2}{(2 \pi d)}\)

Question 31. A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field are acting along the same direction in a certain region. If an electron is projected along the direction of the fields with a certain velocity, then :

  1. Its velocity will decrease
  2. Its velocity will increase
  3. It will turn toward the right of direction of motion
  4. It will turn towards the left of the direction of motion.

Answer: 1. Its velocity will decrease

Question 32. A charged particle of mass m and charge q travels on a circular path of radius r that is perpendicular to a magnetic field B. The time taken by the particle to complete one revolution is:

  1. \(\frac{2 \pi m q}{B}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 \pi q^2 B}{B}\)
  3. \(\frac{2 \pi q B}{m}\)
  4. \(\frac{2 \pi m}{q B}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{2 \pi m}{q B}\)

Question 33. In a region, steady and uniform electric and magnetic fields are present. These two fields are parallel to each other. A charged particle is released from rest in this region. The path of the particle will be a:

  1. Circle
  2. Helix
  3. Straight line
  4. Ellipse

Answer: 3. Straight line

Question 34. A charged particle with charge q enters a region of constant, uniform, and mutually orthogonal fields B E B v and with a velocity perpendicular to both and, and comes out without any change in v magnitude or direction of. Then :

  1. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} / \mathrm{B}^2\)
  2. \(\vec{v}=\vec{E} \times \vec{E} / B^2\)
  3. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} / \mathrm{E}^2\)

Answer: 1. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} / \mathrm{B}^2\)

Question 35. A charged particle moves through a magnetic field perpendicular to its direction. Then :

  1. The momentum changes but the kinetic energy is constant
  2. Both momentum and kinetic energy of the particle are not constant
  3. Both, the momentum and kinetic energy of the particle are constant
  4. Kinetic energy changes but the momentum is constant

Answer: 1. The momentum changes but the kinetic energy is constant

Question 36. A α particle is accelerated by a potential difference of 10 4V. Find the change in its direction of motion, if it enters normally in a region of thickness 0.1 m having transverse magnetic induction of 0.1 Tesla. (Given: mass of -particle is equal to 6.4 × 10–27 kg) 

  1. 15º
  2. 30º
  3. 45º
  4. 60º

Answer: 2. 15º

Question 37. The figure shows a convex lens of focal length 10 cm lying in a uniform magnetic field B of magnitude 1.2 T parallel to its principal axis. A particle having a charge of 2.0 × 10 –3 C and a mass of 2.0 × 10–5 kg is projected perpendicular to the plane of the diagram with a speed of 4.8 m/s.

The particle moves along a circle with its center on the principal axis at a distance of 15 cm from the lens. The axis of the lens and the circle are the same. Show that the image of the particle goes along a circle and find the radius of that circle.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field The Change In Its Direction Of Motion

  1. 8 cm
  2. 16 cm
  3. 32 cm
  4. 64 cm

Answer: 1. 8 cm

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section (G): Electric And Magnetic Force On A Charge

Question 1. Uniform electric and magnetic fields are produced in the same direction. An electron moves in such a way that its velocity remains in the direction of the electric field. The electron will –

  1. Turn towards left
  2. Turn towards right
  3. Get decelerated
  4. Get accelerated

Answer: 2. Turn towards right

Question 2. In the following fig., three paths of ∝ particles crossing a nucleus N are shown. The correct path is

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Three Paths Of Particle Crossing A Nucleus N

  1. a and c
  2. a and b
  3. a, b and c
  4. only a

Answer: 1. a and c

Question 3. The distance between the plates of a parallel plate condenser is 4 mm and the potential difference between them is 200V. The condenser is placed in a magnetic field B. An electron is projected vertically upwards parallel to the plates with a velocity of 106 m/s. The electron passes undeviated through the space between the plates. The magnitude and direction of magnetic field B will be –

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field The magnitude and direction of magnetic field B will be

  1. 0.05T
  2. 0.02T
  3. 0.05 T Outward
  4. 0.02T Outward

Answer: 1. 0.05T

Question 4. A beam of protons enters a uniform magnetic field of 0.3T with a velocity of 4 × 10 5m/s in a direction making an angle of 60º with the direction of the magnetic field. The path of motion of the particle will be

  1. Circular
  2. Straight Line
  3. Spiral
  4. Helical

Answer: 4. Helical

Question 5. In the above question, the radius of the path of the particle will be

  1. 12.0m
  2. 1.2m
  3. 0.12m
  4. 0.012m

Answer: 4. 0.012m

Question 6. In the above question, the pitch of the helix will be

  1. 4.37 m
  2. 0.437 m
  3. 0.0437 m
  4. 0.00437 m

Answer: 3. 0.0437 m

Question 7. In a certain region of space electric field and magnetic field are perpendicular to each other and in B E an electron enters in region perpendicular to the direction of both and moves undeflected, The velocity of the electron is:

  1. \(\frac{|\vec{E}|}{|\vec{B}|}\)
  2. \(\vec{E} \times \vec{B}\)
  3. \(\frac{|\vec{B}|}{|\vec{E}|}\)
  4. \(\frac{|\vec{B}|}{|\vec{E}|}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{|\vec{E}|}{|\vec{B}|}\)

Question 8. A charged particle with velocity 2 × 103 m/s passed undeflected through an electric and perpendicular magnetic field. The magnetic field is 1.5 Tesla. Find electric field intensity.

  1. 2 × 103 N/C
  2. 1.5 × 103 N/C
  3. 3 × 103 N/C
  4. 4/3 × 10–3 N/C

Answer: 3. 3 × 103 N/C

Question 9. A charged particle moves in a region having a uniform magnetic field and a parallel, uniform electric field. At some instant, the velocity of the particle is perpendicular to the field direction. The path of the particle will be

  1. A Straight Line
  2. A Circle
  3. A Helix With Uniform Pitch
  4. A Helix With Nonuniform Pitch.

Answer: 4. A Helix With Nonuniform Pitch.

Question 10. In a mass spectrometer used for measuring the masses of ions, the ions are initially accelerated by an electric potential V and then made to describe semicircular paths of radius R using a magnetic field B. If the charge on the ions V and B are kept constant, the ratio mass of the ion will be proportional to:

  1. \(\frac{1}{R}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}^2}\)
  3. R2
  4. R

Answer: 2. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}^2}\)

Question 11. A charge ‘q’ moves in a region where the electric field and magnetic field both exit, then the force on it is:

  1. \(\frac{1}{R}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{R^2}\)
  3. R2
  4. R

Answer: 2. \(\frac{1}{R^2}\)

Question 12. A very long straight wire carries a current I. At the instant when a charge +Q at point P has velocity, as shown, the force on the charge is:-

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A very long straight wire carries a current I

  1. Opposite To Ox
  2. Along Ox
  3. Opposite To Oy
  4. Along Oy

Answer: 4. Along Oy

Question 13. An electron moves in a circular orbit with a uniform speed v. It produces a magnetic field B at the center of the circle. The radius of the circle is proportional to :

  1. \(\frac{B}{v}\)
  2. \(\frac{v}{B}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{v}{B}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{B}{v}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\sqrt{\frac{v}{B}}\)

Question 14. When a charged particle moving with velocity is subjected to a magnetic field of induction, the force on it is non-zero. This implies that:

  1. Angle Between And Is Necessarily 90°
  2. Angle Between And Can Have Any Value Other Than 90°
  3. Angle Between And Can Have Any Value Other Than Zero And 180°
  4. Angle Between And Is Either Zero Or 180°

Answer: 3. Angle Between And Can Have Any Value Other Than Zero And 180°

Question 15. Under the influence of a uniform magnetic field a charged particle is moving in a circle of radius R with constant speed v. The period of the motion :

  1. Depends On V And Not On R
  2. Depends On Both R And V
  3. Is Independent Of Both R And V
  4. Depends On R And Not On V

Answer: 3. Is Independent Of Both R And V

Question 16. In a mass spectrometer used for measuring the masses of ions, the ions are initially accelerated by an electric potential V and then made to describe semicircular paths of radius R using a describe semicircular paths of radius R using a magnetic field B. If V and B are kept constant, the ratio. \(\left(\frac{\text { charge on the ion }}{\text { mass of the ion }}\right)\) will be proportional to:

  1. \(\frac{1}{R}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{R^2}\)
  3. R2
  4. R

Answer: 2. \(\frac{1}{R^2}\)

Question 17. A beam of electrons passes undeflected through mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic fields. If the electric field is switched off, and the same magnetic field is maintained, the electrons move:

  1. In an elliptical orbit
  2. In a circular orbit
  3. Along a parabolic path
  4. Along a straight line

Answer: 2. In a circular orbit

Question 18. A magnetic line of force inside a bar magnet:

  1. Are From North-Pole To South-Pole Of The Magnet
  2. Do Not Exist
  3. Depend Upon The Area Of Cross-Section Of The Bar Magnet
  4. Are From South-Pole To North-Pole Of The Magnet

Answer: 4. Are From South-Pole To North-Pole Of The Magnet

Question 19. An experimenter’s diary reads as follows; “a charged particle is projected in a magnetic field of \((7.0 \hat{i}-3.0 \hat{j}) \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~T}\). The acceleration of the particle is found to be \((x \hat{i}+7.0 \hat{j}) \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\). Find the value of x.

  1. 2
  2. 4
  3. 3
  4. 1

Answer: 3. 3

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section (H): Magnetic Force On A Current Carrying Wire

Question 1. A 0.5 m long straight wire in which a current of 1.2 A is flowing is kept a right angle to a uniform magnetic field of 2.0 tesla. The force acting on the wire will be –

  1. 2N
  2. 2.4 N
  3. 1.2 N
  4. 3 N

Answer: 3. 1.2 N

Question 2. Two parallel wires P and Q carry electric currents of 10 A and 2A respectively in mutually opposite directions. The distance between the wires is 10 cm. If the wire P is of infinite length and wire Q is 2m long, then the force acting Q will be –

  1. 4 × 10–5 N
  2. 8 × 10–5 N
  3. 4 × 105 N
  4. 0 N

Answer: 1. 4 × 10–5 N

Question 3. A current of 2A is flowing in a wire of length 50 cm. If this wire is lying in a uniform magnetic field of 5 × 10–4 N/A-m making an angle of 60º with the field, then the force acting on the wire will be –

  1. 4.33 × 10–4 N
  2. 4N
  3. 4 dyne
  4. zero

Answer: 1. 4.33 × 10–4 N

Question 4. A current-carrying, straight wire is kept along the axis of a circular loop carrying a current. The straight wire

  1. Will Exert An Inward Force On The Circular Loop
  2. Will Exert An Outward Force On The Circular Loop
  3. Will Not Exert Any Force On The Circular Loop
  4. Will Exert A Force On The Circular Loop Parallel To Itself.

Answer: 4. Will Exert A Force On The Circular Loop Parallel To Itself.

Question 5. A proton beam is going from north to south and an electron beam is going from south to north. Neglecting the earth’s magnetic field, the electron beam will be deflected.

  1. Towards The Proton Beam
  2. Away From The Proton Beam
  3. Away From The Electron Beam
  4. None Of These

Answer: 1. Towards The Proton Beam

Question 6. Two parallel wires carrying currents in the same direction attract each other because of

  1. Potential Difference Between Them
  2. Mutual Inductance Between Them
  3. Electric Force Between Them
  4. Magnetic Force Between Them

Answer: 4. Magnetic Force Between Them

Question 7. A conducting loop carrying a current I is placed in a uniform magnetic field pointing into the plane of the paper as shown. The loop will tend to.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A conducting loop carrying a current is placed in a uniform magnetic field

  1. Move Along The Positive X Direction
  2. Move Along The Negative X Direction
  3. Contract
  4. Expand

Answer: 4. Expand

Question 8. A thin flexible wire of length L is connected to two adjacent fixed points and carries a current in the clockwise direction, as shown in the figure. When the system is put in a uniform magnetic field of strength B going into the plane of the paper, the wire takes the shape of a circle.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A thin flexible wire of length L is connected to two adjacent fixed points carries a current

  1. IBL
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{IBL}}{\pi}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{IBL}}{2 \pi}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{IBL}}{4 \pi}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mathrm{IBL}}{4 \pi}\)

Question 9. A rectangular loop carrying a current i is situated near a long straight wire such that the wire is parallel to one of the sides of the loop and the plane of the loop is same as the left wire. If a steady current I is established in the wire as shown in the (fig) the loop will –

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A rectangular loop carrying a current

  1. Rotate About An Axis Parallel To The Wire
  2. Move Away From The Wire
  3. Move Towards The Wire
  4. Remain Stationary.

Answer: 3. Move Towards The Wire

Question 10. Select the correct alternative(s): Two thin long parallel wires separated by a distance ‘b’ are carrying a current ‘i’ ampere each. The magnitude of the force per unit length exerted by one wire on the other is

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i^2}{b^2}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i^2}{2 \pi b}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \pi \mathrm{b}^2}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i^2}{2 \pi b}\)

Question 11. Two parallel wires carry currents of 20 A and 40 A in opposite directions. Another wire carrying a current antiparallel to 20 A is placed midway between the two wires. The magnetic force on it will be

  1. Towards 20 a
  2. Towards 40 a
  3. Zero
  4. Perpendicular to the plane of the currents

Answer: 2. Towards 40 a

Question 12. A closed-loop PQRS carrying a current is placed in a uniform magnetic field. if the magnetic forces on segments PS, SR, and RQ are F1, F2, and F3 respectively, and are in the plane of the paper and along the directions shown the directions shown, the force on the segment QP is Two long conductors, separated by a distance d carry currents I 1 and I 2 in the same direction.

  1. F3 – F1 – F2
  2. \(\sqrt{\left(F_3-F_1\right)^2+F_2^2}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\left(F_3-F_1\right)^2-F_2^2}\)
  4. F3 – F1 + F2

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{\left(F_3-F_1\right)^2+F_2^2}\)

Question 13. They exert a force F on each other. Now the current in one of them is increased to two times and its direction is reversed. The distance is also increased to 3d. The new value of the force between them is :

  1. –2 F
  2. F/3
  3. –2F/3
  4. – F/3

Answer: 3. –2F/3

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section (I): Magnetic Force And Torque On A Current Carrying Loop And Magnetic Dipole Moment

Question 1. If the angular momentum of the electron is then its magnetic moment will be eJ (1)

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{eJ}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
  2. \(\frac{e J}{2 m}\)
  3. eJ2m
  4. \(\frac{2 m}{e J}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mathrm{eJ}}{\mathrm{m}}\)

Question 2. A coil of 100 turns is lying in a magnetic field of 1T as shown in the figure. A current of 1A is flowing in this coil. The torque acting on the coil will be

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A coil of 100 turns is lying in a magnetic field of 1T

  1. 1N–m
  2. 2N–m
  3. 3N–m
  4. 4N–m

Answer: 2. 2N–m

Question 3. Four wires of equal length are bent in the form of four loops P, Q, R, and S. These are suspended in a uniform magnetic field and the same current is passed in them. The maximum torque will act on.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Four wires of equal length are bent in the form of four loops

  1. P
  2. Q
  3. R
  4. S

Answer: 4. S

Question 4. A bar magnet has a magnetic moment of 2.5 JT–1 and is placed in a magnetic field of 0.2 T. Work was done in turning the magnet from a parallel to an antiparallel position relative to the field direction.

  1. 0.5 J
  2. 1 J
  3. 2.0 J
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 1 J

Question 5. A circular loop of area 1 cm 2, carrying a current of 10 A, is placed in a magnetic field of 0.1 T perpendicular to the plane of the loop. The torque on the loop due to the magnetic field is

  1. Zero
  2. 10-4 N-M
  3. 10–2 N-M
  4. 1 N-M

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 6. A toroid of mean radius ‘a’, cross-section radius ‘r’, and a total number of turns N. It carries a current ‘i’. The torque experienced by the toroid if a uniform magnetic field of strength B is applied :

  1. Is zero
  2. Is binπ r²
  3. Is binπa²
  4. Depends on the direction of the magnetic field.

Answer: 3. Is binπa²

Question 7. A bar magnet of magnetic moment is placed in a magnetic field of induction. The torque exerted on it is :

  1. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \vec{B}\)
  2. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \vec{B}\)
  3. \(\vec{M} \times \vec{B}\)
  4. \(-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\vec{M} \times \vec{B}\)

Question 8. Current is flowing in a coil of area A and number of turns N, then magnetic moment of the coil M is equal to:

  1. NiA
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{Ni}}{\mathrm{A}}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{Ni}}{\sqrt{\mathrm{A}}}\)
  4. N2Ai

Answer: 1. NiA

Question 9. A circular loop has a radius of 5 cm and it carries a current of 0.1 amp. Its magnetic moment is:

  1. 1.32 × 10–4 amp. – m²
  2. 2.62 × 10–4 amp. – m²
  3. 5.25 × 10–4 amp. – m²
  4. 7.85 × 10–4 amp. – m²

Answer: 4. 7.85 × 10–4 amp. – m²

Question 10. The dipole moment of a current loop is independent of

  1. Current In The Loop
  2. Number Of Turns
  3. Area Of The Loop
  4. Magnetic Field In Which It Is Situated

Answer: 4. Magnetic Field In Which It Is Situated

Question 11. Current I is carried in a wire of length L. If the wire is formed into a circular coil, the maximum magnitude of torque in a given magnetic field B will be:

  1. \(\frac{\text { LIB }}{4 \pi}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{L}^2 \mathrm{IB}}{4 \pi}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{L}^2 \mathrm{IB}}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{LIB}^2}{2}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mathrm{L}^2 \mathrm{IB}}{4 \pi}\)

Question 12. Due to the flow of current in a circular loop of radius R, the magnetic induction produced at the center of the loop is B. The magnetic moment of the loop is = Permeability constant]:

  1. BR3/ 2πμ0
  2. 2πBR3μ0
  3. BR2/ 2μ0
  4. 2πBR2/μ0

Answer: 2. 2πBR3μ0

Question 13. The magnetic moment of a circular coil carrying current is:

  1. Directly proportional to the length of the wire in the coil
  2. Inversely proportional to the length of the wire in the coil
  3. Directly proportional to the square of the length of the wire in the coil
  4. Inversely proportional to the square of the length of the wire in the coil

Answer: 3. Directly proportional to the square of the length of the wire in the coil

Question 14. To double the torque acting on a rectangular coil of n turns when placed in a magnetic field.

  1. The area of the coil and the magnetic induction should be doubled
  2. The area or current through the coil should be doubled
  3. Only the area of the coil should be doubled
  4. The number of turns is to be halved

Answer: 2. Area or current through the coil should be doubled

Question 15. The magnetic dipole moment of a rectangular loop is

  1. Inversely proportional to the current in the loop
  2. Inversely proportional to the area of the loop
  3. Parallel to the plane of the loop and proportional to the area of the loop
  4. Perpendicular to the plane of the loop and proportional to the area of the loop

Answer: 4. Perpendicular to the plane of the loop and proportional to the area of the loop

Question 16. Two bar magnets having the same geometry with magnetic moments M and 2M are firstly placed in such a way that their similar poles are same side then their period of osculation is T1. Now the polarity of one of the magnets is reversed the period of oscillation is T1. The period of oscillations will be:-

  1. T1 < T2
  2. T1 > T2
  3. T1 = T2
  4. T2 = ∞

Answer: 2. T1 > T2

Question 17. A charged particle (charge q) is moving in a circle of radius R with uniform speed v. The associated magnetic moment μ is given by :

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{qvR}}{2}d\)
  2. qvR²
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{qvR}^2}{2}\)
  4. qvR

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mathrm{qvR}}{2}\)

Question 18. A magnetic needle lying parallel to a magnetic field requires W units of work to turn it through 60º. The torque needed to maintain the needle in this position will be:

  1. \(\sqrt{3} W\)
  2. W
  3. \((\sqrt{3} / 2) W\)
  4. 2W

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{3} W\)

Question 19. Two particles, each of mass m and charge q, are attached to the two ends of a light rigid rod of length 2 R. The rod is rotated at constant angular speed about a perpendicular axis passing through its center. The ratio of the magnitudes of the magnetic moment of the system and its angular momentum about the center of the rod is:

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{q}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\)
  2. \(\frac{q}{m}\)
  3. \(\frac{2 q}{m}\)
  4. \(\frac{q}{\pi m}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mathrm{q}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\)

Question 20. A current-carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field towards the right in four different orientations, arranged in the decreasing order of Potential Energy.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field towards right

  1. 1,3,2,4
  2. 1,2,3,4
  3. 1,4,2,3
  4. 3,4,1,2

Answer: 1. 1,3,2,4

Question 21. A circular coil of diameter 2.0 cm has 500 turns in it and carries a current of 1.0 A. Its axis makes an angle of 30º with the uniform magnetic field of magnitude 0.40 T that exists in the space. Find the torque acting on the coil.

  1. π × 10-8 N – m
  2. π × 10-4 N – m
  3. π × 10-6 N – m
  4. π× 10-2 N – m

Answer: 4. π× 10-2 N – m

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section (J): Magnetic Field Due To A Magnet And Earth

Question 1. When a current of 1 ampere is passed in a coil lying in the magnetic meridian then a magnetic needle 8 at its center gives some deflection. If the current in the coil is increased to ampere then at what distance from the center of the coil will the deflection of the needle remain unchanged?

  1. 2R
  2. 4R
  3. 8R
  4. R

Answer: 4. 2R

Question 2. Tangent galvanometer measures:

  1. Capacitance
  2. Current
  3. Resistance
  4. Potential difference

Answer: 2. Current

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Section (k): properties of magnetic material

Question 1. When a small magnetizing field h is applied to a magnetic material, the intensity of magnetization is proportional to:

  1. H‾²
  2. H1/2
  3. H
  4. H2

Answer: 3. H

Question 2. How does the magnetic susceptibility x of a paramagnetic material change with absolute temperature t?

  1. χ ∝ T
  2. χ ∝ T ¯¹
  3. χ = Constant
  4. χ ∝ eT

Answer: 2. χ ∝ T ¯¹

Question 3. Consider the following statements for a paramagnetic substance kept in a magnetic field:

  1. If the magnetic field increases, the magnetization increases.
  2. If the temperature rises, the magnetization increases.
  3. Both (a) and (b) are true (a) is true but (b) is false
  4. Is true but (a) is false both (a) and (b) are false

Answer: 2. If the temperature rises, the magnetization increases.

Question 4. Which of the following relations is not correct?

  1. B = μ0 (H+I)
  2. B = μ0 (H+χm)
  3. μ0 = μ0 (1+χm)
  4. μr = 1 + χm

Answer: 3. μ0 = μ0 (1+χm)

Question 5. The hysteresis loop for the material of a permanent magnet is:

  1. Short and wide
  2. Tall and narrow
  3. Tall and wide
  4. Short and narrow

Answer: 1. Short and wide

Question 6. Select the incorrect alternative (s): when a ferromagnetic material goes through a complete cycle of magnetization, the magnetic susceptibility:

  1. Has a fixed value
  2. May be zero
  3. May be infinite
  4. May be negative

Answer: 1. Has a fixed value

Question 7. The material for making permanent magnets should have :

  1. High retentivity, high coercivity
  2. High retentivity, low coercivity
  3. Low retentivity, high coercivity
  4. Low retentivity, low coercivity

Answer: 1. High retentivity, high coercivity

Question 8. (A) soft iron is a conductor of electricity. (B) it is a magnetic material. (C) it is an alloy of iron. (D) It is used for making permanent magnets. State whether :

  1. A and c are true
  2. A and b are true
  3. C and d are true
  4. B and d are true

Answer: 2. A and b are true

Question 9. Soft iron is used in many electrical machines for :

  1. Low hysteresis loss and low permeability
  2. Low hysteresis loss and high permeability
  3. High hysteresis loss and low permeability
  4. High hysteresis loss and high permeability

Answer: 2. Low hysteresis loss and high permeability

Question 10. For protecting sensitive equipment from the external magnetic field, it should be :

  1. Placed inside an aluminum can
  2. Placed inside an iron can
  3. Wrapped with insulation around it when passing current through it
  4. Surrounded by fine copper sheet

Answer: 2. Placed inside an iron can

Question 11. If a long hollow copper pipe carries a current, then a magnetic field is produced :

  1. Inside the pipe only
  2. Outside the pipe only
  3. Both inside and outside the pipe
  4. Nowhere

Answer: 2. Outside the pipe only

Question 12. The materials suitable for making electromagnets should have

  1. High retentivity and high coercivity
  2. Low retentivity and low coercivity
  3. High retentivity and low coercivity
  4. Low retentivity and high coercivity

Answer: 3. High retentivity and low coercivity

Question 13. Needles n 1, n 2, and n 3 are made of a ferromagnetic, a paramagnetic, and a diamagnetic substance respectively. A magnet when brought close to them will:

  1. Attract all three of them
  2. Attract n 1 and n2 strongly but repel n3
  3. Attract n 1 strongly, n2 weakly, and repel n3 weakly
  4. Attract n 1 strongly, but repel n 2 and n3 weakly

Answer: 3. Attract n1 strongly, n2 weakly and repel n3 weakly

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Exercise 2

Question 1. Two identical magnetic dipoles of magnetic moments 1.0 A-m2 each, placed at a separation of 2 m with their axes perpendicular to each other. The resultant magnetic field at a point midway between the dipole is:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Two identical magnetic dipoles of magnetic moments

  1. 5 × 10–7 T
  2. × 10–7 T
  3. 10–7 T
  4. 2 × 10–7 T

Answer: 2. × 10–7 T

Question 2. A moving charge produces

  1. Electric field only
  2. Magnetic filed only
  3. Both of them
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. Both of them

Question 3. Consider a long, straight wire of cross-section area A carrying a current i. Let there be n free electrons per unit volume. An observer places himself on a trolley moving in the direction opposite to the current with a speed v = (i/nAe) and separated from the wire by a distance r. The magnetic field seen by the observer is

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi r}\)
  2. Zero
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{\pi r}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{\pi r}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi r}\)

Question 4. An infinitely long conductor PQR is bent to form a right angle as shown. A current flows through PQR. The magnetic field due to this current at the point M is H 1. Now, another infinitely long straight conductor QS is connected at Q so that the current in PQ remains unchanged. The magnetic field at M is now H

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field An infinitely long conductor PQR

  1. 1/2
  2. 1
  3. 2/3
  4. 2

Answer: 3. 2/3

Question 5. A non-planer loop of conducting wire carrying a current I is placed as shown in the figure. Each of the straight sections of the loop is of length 2a. The magnetic field due to this loop at the point P(a, 0, a) points in the direction.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A non-planer loop of conducting wire carrying a current 

  1. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}(-\hat{j}+\hat{k})\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}(-\hat{j}+\hat{k}+\hat{i})\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k})\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k})\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k})\)

Question 6. The figure shows an amperian path ABCDA. Part ABC is in vertical plane PSTU while part CDA is in horizontal plane PQRS. The direction of circulation along the path is shown by an arrow near point B and this path according to Ampere’s law will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field An Amperian Path ABCDA

  1. (i1 – i2 + i3) μ0
  2. (– i1 + i2) μ0
  3. i3 μ0
  4. (i1 + i2) μ0

Answer: 4. (i1 + i2) μ0

Question 7. A proton, a deuteron, and an α-particle having the same kinetic energy are moving in circular trajectories in a constant magnetic field. If r p, rd, and r denote respectively the radii of the trajectories of these particles then

  1. rα = rp < rd
  2. rα > rd > rp
  3. rα = rd > rp
  4. rp = rd = rα

Answer: 1. rα = rp < rd

Question 8. Two very long, straight, parallel wires carry steady currents I and – I respectively. The distance between the wires is d. At a certain instant of time, a point charge q is at a point equidistant from the v two wires, in the plane of the wires. Its instantaneous velocity is perpendicular to this plane. The magnitude of the force due to the magnetic field acting on the charge at this instant is

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 \text { Iqv }}{2 \pi d}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \text { Iqv }}{\pi d}\)
  3. \(\frac{2 \mu_0 \text { Iqv }}{\pi d}\)
  4. 0

Answer: 4. 0

Question 9. An ionized gas contains both positive and negative ions. If it is subjected simultaneously to an electric field along the + x direction and a magnetic field along the +z direction, then

  1. Positive ions deflect toward the +y direction
  2. All ions deflect toward the +y direction
  3. All ions deflect toward the –y direction
  4. Positive ions deflect towards –y direction and negative ions towards +y direction

Answer: 3. All ions deflect toward the –y direction

Question 10. A conducting circular loop of radius r carries a constant current i. It is placed in a uniform magnetic field B such that B is perpendicular to the plane of the loop. The magnetic force acting on the loop is

  1. ir B
  2. 2π r i B
  3. zero
  4. π r i B

Answer: 3. zero

Question 11. In the figure shown a current I1 is established in the long straight wire AB. Another wire CD carrying the current CD is placed in the plane of the paper. The line joining the ends of this wire is perpendicular to the wire AB. The resultant force on the wire CD is:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Is established in the long straight wire AB

  1. Towards negative x-axis
  2. Towards positive y-axis
  3. Somewhere between –x-axis and + y-axis
  4. Somewhere between the +x axis and + y-axis

Answer: 4. Somewhere between the +x axis and + y-axis

Question 12. A steady current ‘l’ flows in a small square loop of wire of side L in a horizontal plane. The loop is now 2 1 folded about its middle such that half of it lies in a vertical plane. Let and respectively denote the magnetic moments of the current loop before and after folding. Then :

  1. A is feebly repelled
  2. B is feebly attached
  3. C is strongly attracted
  4. D remains unaffected

Which one of the following is true?

  1. B is of a paramagnetic material
  2. C is of a diamagnetic material
  3. D is of a ferromagnetic material
  4. A is of a non–magnetic material

Answer: 3. D is of a ferromagnetic material

Question 13. A particle of charge q and mass m moves in a circular orbit of radius r with angular speed w. The ratio of the magnitude of its magnetic moment to that of its angular momentum depends on

  1. w and q
  2. w, q and m
  3. q and m
  4. w and m

Answer: 3. q and m

Question 14. A power line lies along the east-west direction and carries a current of 10 amperes. The force per meter due to the earth’s magnetic field of 10–4 T is

  1. 10–5 N
  2. 10–4 N
  3. 10–3 N
  4. 10–2 N

Answer: 3. 10–3 N

Question 15. A circular coil of radius 20 cm and 20 turns of wire is mounted vertically with its plane in a magnetic meridian. A small magnetic needle (free to rotate about a vertical axis) is placed at the center of the coil. It is deflected through 45° when a current is passed through the coil in equilibrium Horizontal component of the earth’s field is 0.34 × 10–4 T. The current in the coil is:

  1. \(\frac{17}{10 \pi} \mathrm{A}\)
  2. 6A
  3. 6×10-3A
  4. \(\frac{3}{50} \mathrm{~A}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{17}{10 \pi} \mathrm{A}\)

Question 16. The magnetic materials having negative magnetic susceptibility are:

  1. Nonmagnetic
  2. Para magnetic
  3. Diamagnetic
  4. Ferromagnetic

Answer: 3. Diamagnetic

Question 17. A loop carrying current I lies in the x-y plane as shown in the figure. the unit vector is coming out of the plane of the paper. the magnetic moment of the current loop is :

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A loop carrying current lies in the x-y plane

  1. \(a^2 \mathrm{I} \hat{k}\)
  2. \(\left(\frac{\pi}{2}+1\right) a^2 I \hat{k}\)
  3. \(-\left(\frac{\pi}{2}+1\right) a^2 I \hat{k}\)
  4. \((2 \pi+1) \mathrm{a}^2 \mathrm{I} \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\left(\frac{\pi}{2}+1\right) a^2 I \hat{k}\)

Question 18. An infinitely long hollow conducting cylinder with inner radius R/2 and outer radius R carries a uniform B current density along its length. The magnitude of the magnetic field, as a function of the radial distance r from the axis is best represented by:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field An infinitely long hollow conducting cylinder with inner radius

Answer: 4.

Question 19. If a long horizontal wire is bent as shown in the figure and current i is passed through it, then the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field produced at the center of the circular part will be.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field If a long horizontal wire is bent

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{r}, \otimes\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 r}\left(1-\frac{1}{\pi}\right), \otimes\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \mathrm{i}}\left[1+\frac{1}{\pi}\right] \otimes\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{r}\left(1-\frac{1}{\pi}\right), \otimes\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 r}\left(1-\frac{1}{\pi}\right), \otimes\)

Question 20. The cosmic rays falling are deflected towards

  1. East
  2. West
  3. Directly come down
  4. None of the above

Answer: 1. East

Question 21. If A 1 = 24 and q1 = e and A0 = 22 and q 2 = 2e ions enter a uniform perpendicular magnetic field with the same speed, the ratio of the radius of their circular paths will be

  1. 12/11
  2. 24/11
  3. 11/12
  4. 11/24

Answer: 1. 12/11

Question 22. Which one of the following is ferromagnetic?

  1. Co
  2. Zn
  3. Hg
  4. Pt

Answer: 1. Co

Question 23. Sometimes positively charged particle comes from space toward earth with high velocity. Its deviation due to the magnetic field of Earth will be:

  1. Towards north
  2. Towards south
  3. Towards west
  4. Towards east

Answer: 4. Towards east

Question 24. For paramagnetic materials magnetic susceptibility is related to temperature as

  1. χ ∝ T²
  2. χ ∝ T¹
  3. χ ∝ T¯¹
  4. χ ∝ T²

Answer: 3. χ ∝ T¯¹

Question 25. Current I is flowing in a conducting circular loop of radius R. It is kept in a uniform magnetic field B. Find the magnetic force acting on the loop.

  1. IRB
  2. 2πIRB
  3. Zero
  4. πIRB

Answer: 3. Zero

Question 26. The magnetic field at the center of the semi-circular wire carrying current i is

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 r}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 r}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{r}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi r}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{r}\)

Question 27. A wire EF carrying current i1 is placed near a current-carrying rectangular loop ABCD as shown. Then the wire EF

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A wire EF carrying current

  1. Remains unaffected
  2. Is attracted towards the loop
  3. Is repelled away from the loop
  4. First attracted and then repelled

Answer: 3. Is repelled away from the loop

Question 28. If a current of I amp is flowing in the winding of the solenoid and n is the number of turns per unit length, then the magnetic field at the center of the solenoid is

  1. μ0n1
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 n i}{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \mathrm{n}}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{n}\)

Answer: 1. μ0n1

Question 29. On a magnetic needle placed in a uniform magnetic field:

  1. F ≠0, τ ≠ 0
  2. F ≠0, τ= 0
  3. F =0, τ ≠ 0
  4. F =0, τ = 0

Answer: 3. F =0, τ ≠ 0

Question 30. An electron moves at a right angle to a magnetic field of 1.5 × 10 –2 T with a 6 × 107 m/s speed. If the specific charge of the electron is 1.7 × 1011 C/kg. The radius of the circular path will be:

  1. 2.9 cm
  2. 3.9 cm
  3. 2.35 cm
  4. 2 cm

Answer: 3. 2.35 cm

Question 31. A bar magnet of magnetic moment is placed in the magnetic field. The torque acting on the magnet is:

  1. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)
  2. \(\vec{M}-\vec{B}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{2} \vec{M} \times \vec{B}\)
  4. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

Question 32. An electron and proton enter a magnetic field perpendicularly. Both have the same kinetic energy. Which of the following is true?

  1. The trajectory of the electron is less curved
  2. The trajectory of the proton is less curved
  3. Both trajectories are equally curved
  4. Both move on a straight-line path

Answer: 2. Trajectory of the proton is less curved

Question 33. A small circular flexible loop of wire of radius r carries a current I. It is placed in a uniform magnetic field B. The tension in the loop will be doubled if :

  1. I is halved
  2. B is halved
  3. r is doubled
  4. both B and I are doubled

Answer: 3. r is doubled

Question 34. Two concentric circular coils of ten turns each are situated in the same plane. Their radii are 20 cm and 40 cm and carry respectively 0.2A and 0.3A currents in opposite directions. The magnetic field in Tesla at the center is

  1. \(\frac{35 \mu_0}{4}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0}{80}\)
  3. \(\frac{7 \mu_0}{80}\)
  4. \(\frac{5 \mu_0}{4}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{5 \mu_0}{4}\)

Question 35. A hydrogen atom is paramagnetic. A hydrogen molecule is-

  1. Diamagnetic
  2. Paramagnetic
  3. Ferromagnetic
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. Diamagnetic

Question 36. Under the influence of a uniform magnetic field a charged particle is moving in a circle of radius R with constant speed v. The period of the motion

  1. Depends on v and not on r
  2. Depends on both r and v
  3. Is independent of both r and v
  4. Depends on r and not on v

Answer: 3. Is independent of both r and v

Question 37. A charged particle (charge q) is moving in a circle of radius R with uniform speed v. The associated magnetic moment μ is given by :

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{qvR}}{2}\)
  2. qvR2
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{qvR}^2}{2}\)
  4. qvR

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mathrm{qvR}}{2}\)

Question 38. The charge on a particle Y is double the charge on particle X. These two particles X and Y after being accelerated through the same potential difference enter a region of uniform magnetic field and describe circular paths of radii R1 and R2 respectively. The ratio of the mass of X to that of Y is:

  1. (2R1 / R2)2
  2. (R1 / 2R2)2
  3. R1 2 / 2R22
  4. 2R1 / R2

Answer: 3. R1 2 / 2R22

Question 39. The magnetic needle of a tangent galvanometer is deflected by an angle 30°due to a magnet. The horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is 0.34 × 10 –4 T along the plane of the coil. The intensity of the magnetic field of the magnet is:

  1. 1.96 × 10–4 T
  2. 1.96 × 10–5 T
  3. 1.96 × 104 T
  4. 1.96 × 105 T

Answer: 2. 1.96 × 10–5 T

Question 40. There are 50 turns of a wire in every cm length of a long solenoid. If 4A currents are flowing in the solenoid, the approximate value of the magnetic field along its axis at an internal point and one end will be respectively:

  1. 12.6 × 10–3 Wb/m2 , 6.3 × 10–3 Wb/m2
  2. 12.6 × 10–3 Wb/m2, 25.1 × 10–3 Wb/m2
  3. 25.1 × 10–3 Wb/m2, 12.6 × 10–3 Wb/m2
  4. 25.1 × 10–5 Wb/m2, 12.6 × 10–5 Wb/m2

Answer: 3. 25.1 × 10–3 Wb/m2, 12.6 × 10–3 Wb/m2

Question 41. A particle of charge –16 × 10–18 C moving with velocity 10ms–1 along the x-axis enters a region where a magnetic field of induction B is along the y-axis and an electric field of magnitude 104V/m is along the negative z-axis. If the charged particle continues moving along the x-axis, the magnitude of B is

  1. 1016 Wb/m2
  2. 105 Wb/m2
  3. 103 Wb/m2
  4. 10–3 Web/m2

Answer: 3. 103 Wb/m2

Question 42. Before using the tangent galvanometer, its coil is set up in:

  1. Magnetic Meridian
  2. Perpendicular To Magnetic Meridian
  3. At Angle Of 45° To Magnetic Meridian
  4. It Does Not Require Any Setting

Answer: 1. Magnetic Meridian

Question 43. Two magnets are kept in a vibration magnetometer and vibrate in Earth’s magnetic field. There are 12 vibrations per minute when like poles are kept together, but only 4 vibrations per minute when opposite poles are kept together then the ratio of magnetic moments will be:

  1. 3: 1
  2. 1 : 3
  3. 3: 5
  4. 5: 4

Answer: 4. 3: 1

Question 44. In a hydrogen atom, an electron revolves around the nucleus 6.6 × 10 15 revolutions per second in a radius of 0.53 Å. The value of the magnetic field at the center of the orbit will be:

  1. 0.125 V/m2
  2. 1.25 V/m2
  3. 12.5 V/m2
  4. 125 V/m2 a

Answer: 3. 12.5 V/m2

Question 45. Properties related to diamagnetism are given below, select the wrong statement.

  1. Diamagnetic material does not have a permanent magnetic moment.
  2. Diamagnetism is explained in terms of electromagnetic induction.
  3. Diamagnetic substances have small positive magnetic susceptibility.
  4. Magnetic moments of different electrons cancel each other.

Answer: 3. Diamagnetic substances have small positive magnetic susceptibility.

Question 46. In a moving coil, the galvenometer number of turns is 48, and the area of the coil is 4 × 10 –2 m2. If the intensity of the magnetic field is 0.2 then how many turns in it are required to increase its sensitivity by 25% while area (A) and magnetic field (B) are constant?

  1. 24
  2. 36
  3. 60
  4. 54

Answer: 3. 60

Question 47. A magnet is parallel to a uniform magnetic field work done to rotate it by 60° is 0.8 joule. Then rotate it by 30° again will be:

  1. 0.8 × 107 Ag
  2. 4.0 Ag
  3. 8 Ag
  4. 0.8 Ag

Answer: 1. 0.8 × 107 Ag

Question 48. The charge on particle Y is double the charge on particle X. These two particles X and Y after being accelerated through the same potential difference enter the region of uniform magnetic field and describe circular parts of radii R1 and R2 respectively. The ratio of the mass of X to that of Y is

  1. (2R1/R2)2
  2. (R1/2R2)2
  3. \(\frac{R_1^2}{2 R_2^2}\)
  4. 2R1/R2

Answer: 3. \(\frac{R_1^2}{2 R_2^2}\)

Question 49. A proton and a deuteron are accelerated with the same potential difference and enter perpendicularly in a region of magnetic field B. If r p and r d are the radii of circular paths taken by proton and deuteron d respectively, the ratio p r would be

  1. \(2 \sqrt{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  3. \(\frac{R_1^2}{2 R_2^2}\)
  4. 2

Answer: .(Bonus/2)

Question 50. A particle of charge ‘q’ and mass ‘m’ move in a circular orbit of radius ‘r’ with frequency ‘v’. The ratio of the magnetic moment to angular momentum is

  1. \(\frac{2 q v}{m}\)
  2. \(\frac{q v}{2 m}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{q}}{2 \mathrm{mr}}\)
  4. \(\frac{q}{2 m}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{q}{2 m}\)

Question 51. A rectangular loop of length 20 cm, along y -the axis and breadth 10 cm along the z-axis carries a current of \((0.3 \hat{i}+0.4 \hat{j})\). If a uniform magnetic field (0.3 + 0.4 ) acts on the loop, the torque acting on it is

  1. 9.6 × 10–4 Nm along x-axis
  2. 9.6 × 10–3 Nm along the y-axis
  3. 9.6 × 10–2 Nm along the z-axis
  4. 9.6 × 10–3 Nm along the z-axis

Answer: 3. 9.6 × 10–2 Nm along z-axis

Question 52. The length of a magnet is large compared to its width and breadth. The period of its oscillation in a vibration magnetometer is 2s. The magnet is cut perpendicular to its length into three equal parts and three parts are then placed on each other with their like poles together. The period of this combination will be:

  1. 2s
  2. 2/3s
  3. \(2 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~s}\)
  4. \(2 / \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~s}\)

Answer: 2. 2/3s

Question 53. Two concentric coils each of radius equal to 2π cm are placed at right angles to each other. 3 ampere and 4 ampere are the currents flowing in each coil respectively. The magnetic induction in weber/m 2 at the centre of the coils will be (μ0 = 4π × 10–7 Wb/A.m):

  1. 12 × 10-5
  2. 10-5
  3. 5 × 10-5
  4. 7 × 10-5

Answer: 3. 5 × 10-5

Question 54. The relative permittivity and permeability of a material are r and r, respectively. Which of the following values of these quantities are allowed for a diamagnetic material?

  1. εr = 1.5 , μr = 0.5
  2. εr = 0.5 , μr = 0.5
  3. εr = 1.5 ,μr = 1.5
  4. εr = 0.5 , μr = 1.5

Answer: 1. εr = 1.5 ,μr = 0.5

Question 55. A horizontal overhead powerline is at a height of 4 m from the ground and carries a current of 100 A from east to west. The magnetic field directly below it on the ground is (μ0 = 4π × 10–7 T mA–1):

  1. 5 × 10-6T northward
  2. 5 × 10-6 T southward
  3. 2.5 × 10-7 T northward
  4. 2.5 × 10-7 T southward

Answer: 2. 5 × 10–6 T southward

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Exercise-3

Question 1. A uniform electric field and uniform magnetic field are acting along the same direction in a certain region. If an electron is projected in the region such that its velocity is pointed along the direction of fields, then the electron:

  1. Will turn towards the right of direction of motion
  2. Speed will decrease
  3. Speed will increase
  4. Will turn towards the left direction of motion

Answer: 2. Speed will decrease

Question 2. A square loop, carrying a steady current I1 is placed in a horizontal plane near a long straight conductor carrying a steady current I1 at a distance d from the conductor as shown in the figure. The loop will experience :

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A square loop, carrying a steady current

  1. A net repulsive force away from the conductor
  2. A net torque acting upward perpendicular to the horizontal plane
  3. A net torque acting downward normally to the horizontal plane
  4. A net attractive force toward the conductor

Answer: 4. A net attractive force towards the conductor

Question 3. Charge q is uniformly spread on a thin ring of radius R. The ring rotates about its axis with a uniform frequency of f Hz. The magnitude of magnetic induction at the center of the ring is

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 q f}{2 R}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 q}{2 f R}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 q}{2 \pi f R}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{qf}}{2 \pi R}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 q f}{2 R}\)

Question 4. A short bar magnet of magnetic moment 0.4J T–1 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.16 T. The magnet is in stable equilibrium when the potential energy is:

  1. –0.064 J
  2. zero
  3. – 0.082 J
  4. 0.064

Answer: 1. –0.064 J

Question 5. A compass needle which is allowed to move in a horizontal plane is taken to a geomagnetic pole. It:

  1. Will become rigid showing no movement
  2. Will stay in any position
  3. Will stay in north-south direction only
  4. Will stay in east-west direction only

Answer: 2. Will stay in any position

Question 6. An alternating electric field, of frequency v, is applied across the dees (radius = R) of a cyclotron that is being used to accelerate protons (mass = m). The operating magnetic field (B) used in the cyclotron and the kinetic energy (K) of the proton beam, produced by it, are given by :

  1. \(B=\frac{m v}{e} \text { and } K=2 m \pi^2 v^2 R^2\)
  2. \(B=\frac{2 \pi m v}{e} \text { and } K=m^2 \pi v R^2\)
  3. \(B=\frac{2 \pi m v}{e} \text { and } K=2 m \pi^2 v^2 R^2\)
  4. \(B=\frac{2 \pi m v}{e} \text { and } K=2 m \pi^2 v^2 R^2\)

Answer: 3. \(B=\frac{2 \pi m v}{e} \text { and } K=2 m \pi^2 v^2 R^2\)

Question 7. Two similar coils of radius R are lying concentrically with their planes at right angles to each other. The currents flowing in them are a 2 I, respectively. The resultant magnetic field induction at the center will be:

  1. \(\frac{\sqrt{5} \mu_0 I}{2 R}\)
  2. \(\frac{3 \mu_0 I}{2 R}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{R}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\sqrt{5} \mu_0 I}{2 R}\)

Question 8. A proton carrying 1 MeV kinetic energy is moving in a circular path of radius R in a uniform magnetic field. What should be the energy of an α- particle to describe a circle of the same radius in the same field?

  1. 2 MeV
  2. 1 MeV
  3. 0.5 MeV
  4. 4 MeV

Answer: 2. 1 MeV

Question 9. A magnetic needle suspended parallel to a magnetic field requires J of work to turn it through 60°. The torque needed to maintain the needle in this position will be :

  1. \(2 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~J}\)
  2. 3J
  3. \(\sqrt{3} \mathrm{~J}\)
  4. \(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{~J}\)

Answer: 2. \(2 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~J}\)

Question 10. A bar magnet of length ‘I’ and magnetic dipole moment ‘M’ is bent in the form of an arc as shown in the figure. The new magnetic dipole moment will be :

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A bar magnet of length ‘I’ and magnetic dipole moment ‘M

  1. \(\frac{3}{\pi} \mathrm{M}\)
  2. \(\frac{2}{\pi} \mathrm{M}\)
  3. \(\frac{M}{2}\)
  4. M

Answer: 1. \(\frac{3}{\pi} \mathrm{M}\)

Question 11. A current loop in a magnetic field:

  1. Can be in equilibrium in one orientation
  2. Can be in equilibrium in two orientations, both equilibrium states are unstable
  3. Can be in equilibrium in two orientations, one stable while the other is unstable
  4. Experiences a torque whether the field is uniform or nonuniform in all orientations

Answer: 3. Can be in equilibrium in two orientations, one stable while the other is unstable

Question 24. When a proton is released from rest in a room, it starts with an initial acceleration a0 towards the west. When it is projected towards the north with a speed of v0 it moves with an initial acceleration of 3a0 toward the west. The electric and magnetic fields in the room are :

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{e}} \text { west, } \frac{2 \mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{ev}_0} \text { down }\)
  2. \(\frac{\mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{e}} \text { east, } \frac{3 \mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{ev}_0} \text { up }\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{e}} \text { east, } \frac{3 \mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{ev}_0} \text { down }\)
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{e}} \text { west, } \frac{2 \mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{ev}_0} \text { up }\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{e}} \text { west, } \frac{2 \mathrm{ma}_0}{\mathrm{ev}_0} \text { down }\)

Question 12. The following figures show the arrangement of bar magnets in different configurations. Each magnet has m magnetic dipole. Which configuration has the highest net magnetic dipole moment?

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field the arrangement of bar magnets in different configurations.

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Answer: 3. 3

Question 13. Two identical long conducting wires AOB and COD are placed at a right angle to each other, with one above the other such that ‘O’ is the common point for the two. The wires carry I1 and O2 currents, respectively. Point ‘O’ is lying at a distance ‘d’ from ‘O’ along a direction perpendicular to the plane containing the wires. The magnetic field at the point ‘P’ will be :

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi d}\left(\frac{I_1}{I_2}\right)\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi d}\left(I_1+I_2\right)\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi d}\left(I_1^2-I_2^2\right)\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\left(\mathrm{I}_1^2+\mathrm{I}_2^2\right)^{1 / 2}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\left(\mathrm{I}_1^2+\mathrm{I}_2^2\right)^{1 / 2}\)

Question 14. An electron moving in a circular orbit of radius r makes n rotations per second. The magnetic field produced at the center has magnitude:

  1. Zero
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 n^2 e}{r}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 n e}{2 r}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 n e}{2 \pi r}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\mu_0 n e}{2 r}\)

Question 15. A wire-carrying current I has the shape as shown in the adjoining figure. Linear parts of the wire are very long and parallel to the X-axis while a semicircular portion of radius R is lying in the Y-Z plane. The magnetic field at point O is

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A wire carrying current  has the shape

  1. \(\vec{B}=-\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{I}{R}(\mu \hat{i} \times 2 \hat{k})\)
  2. \(\vec{B}=-\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{1}{R}(\pi \hat{i}+2 \hat{k})\)
  3. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{R}}(\pi \hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{k}})\)
  4. \(\vec{B}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{I}{R}(\pi \hat{i}+2 \hat{k})\)

Answer: 2. \(\vec{B}=-\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{1}{R}(\pi \hat{i}+2 \hat{k})\)

Question 16. A long straight wire of radius carries a steady current I. The current is uniformly distributed over its cross-section. The ratio of the magnetic fields B and B, at radial distances a/2 and 2a respectively, from the axis of the wire is:

  1. 4
  2. 1/4
  3. 1/2
  4. 1

Answer: 4. 1

Question 17. The magnetic susceptibility is negative for

  1. Paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials
  2. Diamagnetic material only
  3. Paramagnetic material only
  4. Ferromagnetic material only

Answer: 2. Diamagnetic material only

Question 18. A square loop ABCD carrying a current i is placed near and coplanar with a long straight conductor XY carrying a current I, the net force on the loop will be

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A square loop ABCD carrying a current

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{IIL}}{2 \pi}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 \mu_0 \mathrm{II}}{3 \pi}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ii}}{2 \pi}\)
  4. \(\frac{2 \mu_0 \mathrm{IiL}}{3 \pi}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{2 \mu_0 \mathrm{II}}{3 \pi}\)

Question 19. A long solenoid has 1000 turns. When a current of 4A flows through it, the magnetic flux linked with each turn of the solenoid is 4 × 10–3 Wb. The self-inductance of the solenoid is

  1. 1H
  2. 4H
  3. 3 H
  4. 2H

Answer: 1. 1H

Question 20. A long wire carrying a steady current is bent into a circular loop of one turn. The magnetic field at the center of the loop is B. It is then bent into a circular coil of n turns. The magnetic field at the center of this coil of n turns will be:

  1. 2n2 B
  2. nB
  3. n2B
  4. 2nB

Answer: 3. n2B

Question 21. An electron is moving in a circular path under the influence of a transverse magnetic field of 3.57 × 10–2 T. If the value of e/m is 1.76 × 1011 C/kg, the frequency of revolution of the electron is.

  1. 6.82MHz
  2. 1 GHz
  3. 100 MHz
  4. 62.8MHz

Answer: 2. 1 GHz

Question 22. A metallic rod of mass per unit length 0.5 kg m –1 is lying horizontally on a smooth inclined plane which makes an angle of 30º with the horizontal. The rod is not allowed to slide down by flowing a current through it when a magnetic field of induction 0.25 T is acting on it in the vertical direction. The current flowing in the rod to keep it stationary is:

  1. 7.14 A
  2. 11.32 A
  3. 14.76 A
  4. 5.98 A

Answer: 2. 11.32 A

Question 23. A cylindrical conductor of radius R carries constant current. The plot of the magnitude of the magnetic field, B with the distance, d from the center of the conductor, is correctly represented by the figure:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A cylindrical conductor of radius R is carrying constant current

Answer: 4.

Question 24. At point A on the earth’s surface of the angle of dip, δ= +25º. At point B on the earth’s surface the angle of dip, δ= –25º. We can interpret that:

  1. A and B are both located in the southern hemisphere.
  2. A and B are both located in the northern hemisphere.
  3. A is located in the southern hemisphere and B is located in the northern hemisphere.
  4. A is located in the northern hemisphere and B is located in the southern hemisphere.

Answer: 3. A is located in the southern hemisphere and B is located in the northern hemisphere.

Question 25. Ionized hydrogen atoms and α-particle with momenta enter perpendicular to a constant magnetic field, B. The ratio of the radii of their paths rH: rα will be :

  1. 1: 4
  2. 2: 1
  3. 1: 2
  4. 4: 1

Answer: 2. 2: 1

Question 26. Two toroids 1 and 2 have total no. of turns 200 and 100 respectively with average radii 40 cm and 20 cm. If they carry the same current I, the ratio of the magnetic fields along the two loops is

  1. 1: 1
  2. 4: 1
  3. 2: 1
  4. 1: 2

Answer: 1. 1: 1

Question 27. A straight conductor carrying current I splits into two parts as shown in the figure. The radius of the circular loop is R. The total magnetic field at the center P of the loop is,

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A straight conductor carrying current

  1. Zero
  2. 3μ0i / 32R, outward
  3. 3μ0i / 32R, inward
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 \mathrm{R}} \text {, inward }\)

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 28. The variation of EMF with time for four types of generators is shown in the figures. Which amongst them can be called AC?

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field The variation of EMF with time for four types of generators

  1. (a) and (d)
  2. (a), (b), (c), (d)
  3. (a) and (b)
  4. only (a)

Answer: 2. (a), (b), (c),

Question 29. A long solenoid of 50 cm in length having 100 turns carries a current of 2.5 A. The magnetic field at the center of the solenoid is \(\left(\mu_0=4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{Tm} \mathrm{A}^{-1}\right)\)

  1. 3.14×10-5T
  2. 6.28×10-4T
  3. 3.14×10-4T
  4. 6.28×10-5T

Answer: 2. 6.28×10-4T

Question 30. An infinitely long straight conductor carries a current of 5A as shown. An electron is moving with a speed of 10 m/s parallel to the conductor. The perpendicular distance between the electron and the conductor is 20 cm at an instant. Calculate the magnitude of the force experienced by the electron at that instant.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field An infinitely long straight conductor carries a current of 5A

  1. 8×10-20N
  2. 4×10-20N
  3. 8×10-20N
  4. 4×10-20N

Answer: 3. 8×10-20N

Question 31. A thick current-carrying cable of radius ‘R’ carries current ‘I’ uniformly distributed across its cross-section. The variation of magnetic field BI due to the cable with the distance ‘r’ from the axis of the cable i Represented By

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A thick current carrying cable of radius ‘R’ carries current ‘I’

Answer: 2.

Question 32. In the product \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{q}(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})=\mathrm{q} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times\left(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+\mathrm{B}_0 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\right)\)

For q = 1 and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}+4 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+6 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}} \text { and } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=4 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}-20 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+12 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\)

What will be the complete expression for \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

  1. \(-6 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}-6 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}-8 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\)
  2. \(8 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}+8 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}-6 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\)
  3. \(6 \vec{i}+6 \vec{j}-8 \vec{k}\)
  4. \(-8 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}-8 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}-6 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\)

Answer: 1. \(-6 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}-6 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}-8 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\)

Question 33. A uniform conducting wire of length 12a and resistance ‘R’ is wound up as a current-carrying coil in the shape of

  1. An equilateral triangle of side ‘a’
  2. A square of side ‘a’

The magnetic dipole moments of the coil in each case respectively are

  1. 3Ia2 and Ia2
  2. 3Ia2 and 4Ia2
  3. 4Ia2 and 3Ia2
  4. \(\sqrt{3} \mathrm{la}^2 \text { and } 3 \mathrm{la}^3\)

Answer: 4. \(\sqrt{3} \mathrm{la}^2 \text { and } 3 \mathrm{la}^3\)

Question 34. The relations amongst the three elements of earth’s magnetic field, namely horizontal component H, vertical  component V, and dip are, (BE = total magnetic field)

  1. V = BE tan , H = BE
  2. V = BE sin , H = BE cos
  3. V = BE cos, H = BE sin d
  4. V = BE, H = BE tan

Answer: 2. V = BE sin , H = BE cos

Question 35. A wire of length L meter carrying a current of I ampere is bent in the form of a circle. Its magnetic moment is,

  1. I L2/4 A m2
  2. I L2 /4 A m2
  3. 2 I L2 / A m2
  4. I L2 /4 A m

Answer: 4. I L2 /4 A m

Question 36. An iron rod of susceptibility 599 is subjected to a magnetizing field of 1200 A m -1. The permeability of the material of the rod is \(\left(\mu_0=4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{Tm} A^{-1}\right)\)

  1. \(2.4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{TmA^{-1 }}\)
  2. \(2.4 \pi \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{Tm} \mathrm{m}^{-1}\)
  3. \(8.0 \pi \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T} \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~A} A^{-1}\)
  4. \(2.4 \pi \times 10^{-5} T m A^{-1}\)

Answer: 2. 7 1 4 1T m A 1) 2)

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Part- II: Jee (Main) / Air Problems (Previous Years)

Question 1. Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart. They carry steady equal currents flowing out of the plane of the paper as shown. The variation of magnetic field B along the line XX´ is given by

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart.

Answer: 1.

Question 2. A current I flows in an infinitely long wire with a cross-section in the form of a semicircular ring of radius R. The magnitude of the magnetic induction along its axis is:

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{\pi^2 R}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi^2 R}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi R}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 \pi R}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{\pi^2 R}\)

Question 3. An electric charge +q moves with velocity \(\vec{v}=3 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-3 \hat{k}\) in an electromagnetic field given by: \(\vec{E}=3 \hat{i}+\hat{j}+2 \hat{k} \text { and } \vec{B}=\hat{i}+\hat{j}+3 \hat{k}\) The y – component of the force experienced by + q is :

  1. 11q
  2. 5q
  3. 3q
  4. 2q

Answer: 1. 11q

Question 4. A thin circular disk of radius R is uniformly charged with density  > 0 per unit area. The disk rotates about its axis with a uniform angular speed . The magnetic moment of the disk is :

  1. \(\pi R^4 \sigma \omega\)
  2. \(\frac{\pi \mathrm{R}^4}{2} \sigma \omega\)
  3. \(\frac{\pi R^4}{4} \sigma \omega\)
  4. \(2 \pi R^4 \sigma \omega\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\pi R^4}{4} \sigma \omega\)

Question 5. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over the surface of the non-conducting disc of radius R. The disc rotates about an axis perpendicular to its plane and passes through its center with an angular velocity ω. As a result of this rotation, a magnetic field of induction B is obtained at the center of the disc. if we keep both the amount of charge placed on the disc and its angular velocity constant and vary the radius of the disc then the variation of the magnetic induction at the center of the disc will be represented by the figure

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A charge Q is uniformly distributed over the surface of non-condcting disc of radius R

Answer: 1.

Question 6. Proton, Deuteron and alpha particles of the same kinetic energy are moving in circular trajectories in a constant magnetic field. The radii of the proton, deuteron, and alpha particle are respectively r p, r d, and rα. Which one of the following relations is correct?

  1. \(r_\alpha=r_p=r_d\)
  2. \(r_\alpha=r_p<r_d\)
  3. \(r_\alpha>r_d>r_p\)
  4. \(r_a=r_d>r_p\)

Answer: 2. \(r_\alpha=r_p<r_d\)

Question 7. Two short bar magnets of length 1 cm each have magnetic moments 1.20 Am2 and 1.00 Am2 respectively. They are placed on a horizontal table parallel to each other with their N poles pointing toward the South. They have a common magnetic equator and are separated by a distance of 20.0 cm. The value of the resultant horizontal magnetic induction at the mid-point O of the line joining their centers is close to (Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic induction is 3.6× 10 –5 Wb/m2)

  1. 3.6 × 10–5 Wb/m2
  2. 2.56 × 10–4 Wb/m2
  3. 3.50 × 10–4 Wb/m2
  4. 5.80 × 10–4 Wb/m2

Answer: 2. 2.56 × 10–4 Wb/m2

Question 8. The coercivity of a small magnet where the ferromagnet gets demagnetized is 3 × 10 3 Am–1. The current required to be passed in a solenoid of length 20 cm and several turns 100, so that the magnetic gets demagnetized when inside the solenoid, is:

  1. 30 mA
  2. 60 mA
  3. 3 A
  4. 6 A

Answer: 4. 6 A

Question 9. Two coaxial ideal and long solenoids of different radii carry current I in the same direction. Let be F2 the magnetic force on the inner solenoid due to the outer one and be the magnetic force on the outer solenoid due to the inner one. Then

  1. \(\vec{F}_1=\vec{F}_2=0\)
  2. \(\vec{F}_1 \text { is radially inwards and } \vec{F}_2 \text { is radially outwards }\)
  3. \(\vec{F}_1 \text { is radially inwards and } \vec{F}_2=0\)
  4. \(\vec{F}_1 \text { is radially outwards and } \vec{F}_2=0\)

Answer: 1. \(\vec{F}_1=\vec{F}_2=0\)

Question 10. Two long current-carrying thin wires, both with current L, are held by insulating threads of length L and are in equilibrium as shown in the figure, with threads making an angle ‘’ with the vertical. If wires have a mass per unit length then the value  I is : (g = gravitational acceleration)

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Two long current carrying thin wires

  1. \(\sin \theta \sqrt{\frac{\pi \lambda g L}{\mu_0 \cos \theta}}\)
  2. \(2 \sin \theta \sqrt{\frac{\pi \lambda \mathrm{gL}}{\mu_0 \cos \theta}}\)
  3. \(2 \sqrt{\frac{\pi g L}{\mu_0} \tan \theta}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{\pi \lambda \mathrm{gL}}{\mu_0} \tan \theta}\)

Answer: 2. \(2 \sin \theta \sqrt{\frac{\pi \lambda \mathrm{gL}}{\mu_0 \cos \theta}}\)

Question 11. A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm and 5 cm carrying a current I of 12 A is placed in different orientations as shown in the figures below:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm and 5 cm

If there is a uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T in the positive z direction, in which orientations the loop would be in stable equilibrium and (ii) unstable equilibrium?

  1. (a) and (b), respectively
  2. (a) and (c), respectively
  3. (b) and (d), respectively
  4. (b) and (c), respectively

Answer: 3. (b) and (d), respectively

Question 12. Two identical wires A and B, each of length l, carry the same current l. Wire A is bent into a circle of radius R and wire B is bent to form a square of side ‘a’. If B A and BB are the values of a magnetic field at the centers of the circle and square respectively, then the ratio \(\frac{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{B}}}\) is

  1. \(\frac{\pi^2}{16 \sqrt{2}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\pi^2}{16}\)
  3. \(\frac{\pi^2}{8 \sqrt{2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{\pi^2}{8}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\pi^2}{8 \sqrt{2}}\)

Question 13. Hysteresis loops for two magnetic materials A and B are given below :

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Hysteresis loops for two magnetic materials

These materials are used to make magnets for electric generators, transformer cores, and electromagnet cores. Then it is proper to use:

  1. A for electromagnets and B for electric generators.
  2. A for transformers and B for electric generators.
  3. B for electromagnets and transformers.
  4. A for electric generators and transformers.

Answer: 3. B for electromagnets and transformers.

Question 14. A magnetic needle of magnetic moment 6.7 × 10–2 Am2 and moment of inertia 7.5 × 10–6 kg m2 is performing simple harmonic oscillations in a magnetic field of 0.01 T. Time taken for 10 complete oscillations is

  1. 8.76s
  2. 6.65s
  3. 8.89s
  4. 6.98s

Answer: 2. 6.65s

Question 15. The dipole moment of a circular loop carrying a current is m and the magnetic field at the center of the loop is B1. When the dipole moment is doubled by keeping the current constant, the magnetic field at the center of the loop is B2. The ratio \(\frac{\mathrm{B}_1}{\mathrm{~B}_2}\)

  1. \(\sqrt{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{3}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{2}\)

Question 16. An electron, a proton, and an alpha particle having the same kinetic energy are moving in circular orbits of radii re, rp, and rα respectively in uniform magnetic field B. The relation between re, rp, and rα is

  1. re < rp< rα
  2. re < rα< rp
  3. re > rp = rα
  4. re < rp = rα

Answer: 4. re < rp = rα

Question 17. An infinitely long, current-carrying wire and a small current-carrying loop are in the plane of the paper as shown. The radius of the loop is a and the distance of its center from the wire is d(d ≫ a). If the loop applies a force F on the wire then:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field An infinitely long, current carrying wire and a small current carrying loop are in the plane

  1. F=0
  2. \(F \propto\left(\frac{a}{d}\right)^2\)
  3. \(F \propto\left(\frac{a^2}{d^3}\right)\)
  4. \(F \propto\left(\frac{a}{d}\right)\)

Answer: 2. \(F \propto\left(\frac{a}{d}\right)^2\)

Question 18. A current loop, having two circular arcs joined by two radial lines is shown in the figure. It carries a current of 10 A. The magnetic field at point O will be close to :

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A current loop, having two circular arcs joined by two radial lines

  1. 1.5 × 10-5 T
  2. 1.0 × 10-7 T
  3. 1.0 × 10-5 T
  4. 1.5 × 10-7 T

Answer: 3. 1.0 × 10-5 T

Question 19. A bar magnet is demagnetized by inserting it inside a solenoid of length 0.2 m, 100 turns, and carrying a current of 5.2 A. The coercivity of the bar magnet is :

  1. 285 A/m
  2. 520 A/m
  3. 1200 A/m
  4. 2600 A/m

Answer: 4. 2600 A/m

Question 20. One of the two identical conducting wires of length L is bent in the form of a circular loop and the other one is into a circular coil of N identical turns. If the same current is passed in both, the ratio of the magnetic field at the central of the loop (BL) to that at the center of the coil \(\frac{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{C}}}\) will be:

  1. \(\frac{1}{N}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~N}^2}\)
  3. N2
  4. N

Answer: 2. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~N}^2}\)

Question 21. A particle having the same charge as of electron moves in a circular path of radius 0.5 cm under the influence of a magnetic field of 0.5 T. If an electric field of 100 V/m makes it move in a straight path, then the mass of the particle is (Given charge of electron = 1.6 × 10–19 C)

  1. 2.0×10-24kg
  2. 1.6×10-27kg
  3. 9.1×10-31kg
  4. 1.6×10-19 kg

Answer: 1. 2.0×10-24kg

Question 22. A magnet of total magnetic moment A–m2 is placed in a time-varying magnetic field where B = 1 Tesla and ω= 0.125 rad/s. The work done for reversing the direction of the magnetic moment at t = 1 second is:

  1. 0.014 J
  2. 0.01 J
  3. 0.028 J
  4. 0.007 J

Answer: (Bonus) The correct answer is 0.02 J

Question 23. An insulating thin rod of length l has a linear charge density \(\rho(x)=\rho_0 \frac{x}{\ell}\) on it. The rod is rotated about an axis passing through the origin (x = 0) and perpendicular to the rod. If the rod makes n rotations per second, then the time-averaged magnetic moment of the rod is

  1. \(\frac{\pi}{4} n \rho \ell^3\)
  2. \(\pi \mathrm{n} \rho \ell^3\)
  3. \(\frac{\pi}{3} n \rho \ell^3\)
  4. \(n \rho \ell^3\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\pi}{4} n \rho \ell^3\)

Question 24. At some locations on earth, the horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is 18 × 10 –16T. At this location, a magnetic needle of length 0.12 m and pole strength 1.8 Am is suspended from its mid-point using a thread, it makes a 45° angle with horizontal equilibrium. To keep this needle horizontal, the vertical force that should be applied at one of its ends is

  1. 6.5 x 10-5 n
  2. 3.6 x 10-5N
  3. 1.3×10-5N
  4. 1.8×10-5N

Answer: 1. 6.5 x 10-5 n

Question 25. A paramagnetic substance in the form of a cube with sides 1 cm has a magnetic dipole moment of 20× 10–6J/T when a magnetic intensity of 60 × 103 A/m is applied. Its magnetic susceptibility is-

  1. 4.3×10-2
  2. 2.3×10-2
  3. 3.3×10-4
  4. 3.3×10-2

Answer: 3. 3.3×10-4

Question 26. A paramagnetic material has 1028 atoms/m3. Its magnetic susceptibility at temperature 350 K is 2.8 × 10–4. Its susceptibility at 300 K is :

  1. 3.726 × 10–4
  2. 3.672 × 10–4
  3. 3.267 × 10–4
  4. 2.672 × 10–4

Answer: 3. 3.267 × 10–4

Question 27. The mean intensity of radiation on the surface of the Sun is about 108 W/m2. The rms value of the corresponding magnetic field is closest to :

  1. 102 T
  2. 1 T
  3. 10–2 T
  4. 10–4 T

Answer: 4. 10–4 T

Question 28. A proton and an α-particle (with their masses in the ratio of 1: 4 and charges in the ratio of 1: 2) are accelerated from rest through a potential difference V. If a uniform magnetic field (B) is set up perpendicular to their velocities, the ratio of the radii rp : r of the circular paths described by them will be:

  1. 1:3
  2. \(1: \sqrt{3}\)
  3. \(1: \sqrt{2}\)
  4. 1: 2

Answer: 3. \(1: \sqrt{2}\)

Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Multiple Choice Questions Self Practice Paper

Question 1. Four infinitely long ‘L’ shaped wires, each carrying a current have been arranged as shown in the figure. Obtain the magnetic field strength at the point ‘O’ equidistant from all four corners.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Four infinitely long 'L' shaped wires

  1. 0
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi a}\)
  3. \(\frac{2 \mu_0 i}{\pi a}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{\pi a}\)

Answer: 1. 0

Question 2. Find the magnetic field B at the center of a square loop of side ‘a’, carrying a current i.

  1. \(\frac{2 \sqrt{2} \mu_0 i}{\pi a}\)
  2. \(\frac{\sqrt{2} \mu_0 i}{\pi a}\)
  3. \(\frac{2 \mu_0 i}{\pi a}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi a}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{2 \sqrt{2} \mu_0 i}{\pi a}\)

Question 3. Each of the batteries shown in the figure has an emf equal to 10 V. Find the magnetic field B at the point p.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Each of the batteries

  1. 0T
  2. 2T
  3. 3T
  4. 5T

Answer: 1. 0T

Question 4. A charged particle is accelerated through a potential difference of 24 kV and acquires a speed of 2×10 6 m/s. It is then injected perpendicularly into a magnetic field of strength 0.2 T. Find the radius of the circle described by it.

  1. 12 cm
  2. 10 cm
  3. 6 cm
  4. 4 cm

Answer: 1. 12 cm

Question 5. In the formula X = 3 YZ2, the quantities X and Z have the dimensions of capacitance and magnetic induction respectively. The dimensions of Y in the MKS system are…………..

  1. M–3 L–2 T4 Q4
  2. M –3 L–2 T2 Q4
  3. M –2 L–2 T4 Q4
  4. M –3 L–4 T4 Q4

Answer: 1. M–3 L–2 T4 Q4

Question 6. A particle having a charge of 2.0 × 10–8 C and a mass of 2.0 × 10–10 g is projected with a speed of 2.0 × 103 m/s in a region having a uniform magnetic field (B = 0.1 T). Find the radius of the circle formed by the particle and also the frequency.

  1. \(20 \mathrm{~cm}, \frac{5}{\pi} \times 10^3 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)
  2. \(20 \mathrm{~cm}, \frac{5}{\pi} \times 10^3 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)
  3. \(20 \mathrm{~cm}, \frac{2}{\pi} \times 10^3 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)
  4. \(20 \mathrm{~cm}, \frac{4}{\pi} \times 10^3 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Answer: 1. \(20 \mathrm{~cm}, \frac{5}{\pi} \times 10^3 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Question 7. A proton describes a circle of radius 1 cm in a magnetic field of strength 0.10 T. What would be the radius of the circle described by a deuterium moving with the same speed in the same magnetic field?

  1. 2 cm
  2. 4 cm
  3. 6 cm
  4. 8 cm

Answer: 1. 2 cm

Question 8. A proton is projected with a velocity of 3 × 106 m/s perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field of 0.6T. Find the acceleration of the proton mass of a proton

  1. \(\frac{864}{5} \times 10^{11} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)
  2. \(\frac{864}{5} \times 10^{10} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)
  3. \(\frac{864}{5} \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)
  4. \(\frac{864}{5} \times 10^{12} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{864}{5} \times 10^{12} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)

Question 9. A particle having a charge of 5.0 uC and a mass of 5.0 × 10–12 kg is projected with a speed of 1.0 km/s in a magnetic field of magnitude 5.0 mT. The angle between the magnetic field vector and the velocity vector is sin–1 (0.90). Show that the path of the particle will be a helix. Find the diameter of the helix and its pitch.

  1. 47 cm, 67 cm
  2. 36 cm, 56 cm
  3. 56 cm, 67 cm
  4. 57 cm, 58 cm

Answer: 2. 36 cm, 56 cm

Question 10. A proton projected in a magnetic field of 0.04 T travels along a helical path of radius 5.0 cm and pitch 20 cm. Find the components of the velocity of the proton along and perpendicular to the magnetic field. Take the mass of the proton = 1.6 × 10–27 kg.

  1. \(\frac{4}{\pi} \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}, 2 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)
  2. \(\frac{2}{\pi} \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}, 2 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)
  3. \(\frac{4}{\pi} \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}, 4 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{\pi} \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}, 4 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{\pi} \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}, 2 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)

Question 11. A particle moves in a circle of radius 1.0 cm under the action of a magnetic field of 0.40 T. An electric field of 200 V/m makes the path straight. Find the charge/mass ratio of the particle.

  1. \(\frac{5}{4} \times 10^5 \mathrm{C} / \mathrm{kg}\)
  2. \(\frac{5}{3} \times 10^5 \mathrm{C} / \mathrm{kg}\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{8} \times 10^5 \mathrm{C} / \mathrm{kg}\)
  4. \(\frac{8}{5} \times 10^5 \mathrm{C} / \mathrm{kg}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{5}{4} \times 10^5 \mathrm{C} / \mathrm{kg}\)

Question 12. A proton goes undeflected in a crossed electric and magnetic field (the fields are perpendicular to each other) at a speed of 10 5 m/s. The velocity is perpendicular to both the fields. When the electric field is switched off, the proton moves along a circle of radius 2 cm. Find the magnitudes of the electric and magnetic fields. Take the mass of the proton = 1.6 × 10 –27 kg.

  1. 2 × 10 3 N/C. 5 × 10–2 T
  2. 5 × 10 3 N/C. 5 × 10–1 T
  3. 5 × 10 3 N/C. 5 × 10–2 T
  4. 5 × 10 3 N/C. 5 × 10–3 T

Answer: 3. 5 × 10 3 N/C. 5 × 10–2 T

Question 13. A particle having mass m and charge q is released from the origin in a region in which electric field and B \(\vec{B}=+B_0 \hat{j} \text { and } \vec{E}=+E_0 \hat{i}\) magnetic field are given by and . Find the speed of the particle as a function of its X coordinate

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 q E_0 x}{m}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{q E_0 x}{2 m}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{q E_0 x}{4 m}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{q E_0 x}{m}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{\frac{2 q E_0 x}{m}}\)

Question 14. Consider a 10 cm long portion of a straight wire carrying a current of 10 A placed in a magnetic field of 0.1 T making an angle of 37º with the wire. What magnetic force does the wire experience?

  1. 6 × 10–1 N
  2. 6 × 10–2 N
  3. 6 × 10–3 N
  4. 6 × 10–4 N

Answer: 2. 6 × 10–2 N

Question 15. A current of 2 A enters at the corner d of a square frame abcd of side 10 cm and leaves at the opposite corner b. A magnetic field B = 0.1 T exists in the space in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the frame as shown in the figure. Find the magnitude of the resultant magnetic force on the four sides of the frame.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A current of 2 A enters at the corner d of a square frame

  1. 1 × 10–2 N
  2. 2 × 10–2 N
  3. \(\sqrt{2} \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~N}\)
  4. \(2 \sqrt{2} \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~N}\)

Answer: 4. \(2 \sqrt{2} \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~N}\)

Question 16. A magnetic field of strength 1.0 T is produced by a strong electromagnet in a cylindrical region of diameter 4.0 cm as shown in the figure. A wire, carrying a current of 2.0 A, is placed perpendicular to and intersecting the axis of the cylindrical region. Find the magnitude of the force acting on the wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A magnetic field of strength

  1. 4 × 10–2 N
  2. 16 × 10–2 N
  3. 32 × 10–2 N
  4. 8 × 10–2 N

Answer: 4. 8 × 10–2 N

Question 17. A wire of length l carries a current i along the y-axis. A magnetic field exists which is given as
\(\vec{B}=B_0(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k}) T .\) Find the magnitude of the magnetic force acting on the wire.

  1. \(\sqrt{2} \mathrm{~B}_0 \mathrm{i} \ell\)
  2. \(2 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~B}_0 \mathrm{i} \ell\)
  3. \(3 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~B}_0 \mathrm{i} \ell\)
  4. \(4 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~B}_0 \mathrm{i} \ell\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{2} \mathrm{~B}_0 \mathrm{i} \ell\)

Question 18. A straight, long wire carries a current of 20 A. Another wire carrying an equal current is placed parallel to it. If the force acting on the unit length of the second wire is 2.0 × 10–4 N, what is the separation between them?

  1. 20cm
  2. 40cm
  3. 60cm
  4. 80cm

Answer: 2. 40cm

Question 19. A circular coil of 100 turns has an effective radius of 0.05 m and carries a current of 0.1 amp. How much work is required to turn it in an external magnetic field of 1.5 wb/m2 through 1800 about an axis perpendicular to the magnetic field? The plane of the coil is initially perpendicular to the magnetic field.

  1. \(\pm 50 \pi \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~J}\)
  2. \(\pm 75 \pi \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~J}\)
  3. \(\pm 45 \pi \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~J}\)
  4. \(\pm 35 \pi \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~J}\)

Answer: 2. \(\pm 75 \pi \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~J}\)

Question 20. A rectangular coil of 100 turns has a length of 4 cm and a width of 5 cm. It is placed with its plane parallel to a uniform magnetic field and a current of 2A is sent through the coil. Find the magnitude of the magnetic field B, if the torque acting on the coil is 0.2 N-m.

  1. \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~T}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{4} \mathrm{~T}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{8} T\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{3} T\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~T}\)

Question 21. A point charge is moving in a circle with constant speed. Consider the magnetic field produced by the charge at a fixed point P (not the center of the circle) on the axis of the circle.

  1. It is constant in magnitude only
  2. It is constant in direction only
  3. It is constant in direction and magnitude both
  4. It is not constant in magnitude and direction both.

Answer: It is constant in magnitude only

Question 22. A current-carrying wire is placed in the grooves of an insulating semi-circular disc of radius ‘R’, as shown. The current enters at point A and leaves from point B. Determine the magnetic field at the point

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A current carrying wire is placed in the grooves of an insulating semi circular

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{8 \pi R \sqrt{3}}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 \pi R \sqrt{3}}\)
  3. \(\frac{\sqrt{3} \mu_0 I}{4 \pi R}\)
  4. No of these

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 \pi R \sqrt{3}}\)

Question 23. The Axis of a solid cylinder of infinite length and radius R lies along the y-axis it carries a uniformly R R, y, distributed current ‘ i ’ along the +y direction. Magnetic field at a point

  1. \(\left(\frac{R}{2}, y, \frac{R}{2}\right)\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi R}(\hat{j}-\hat{k})\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 \pi R} \hat{j}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{4 \pi R}(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}})\)

Answer: 1. \(\left(\frac{R}{2}, y, \frac{R}{2}\right)\)

Question 24. A long, straight wire carries a current along the Z-axis. One can not find two points in the X-Y plane such that

  1. The magnetic fields are equal in magnitude and same in direction
  2. The directions of the magnetic fields are the same
  3. The magnitudes of the magnetic fields are equal
  4. The field at one point is opposite to that at the other point.

Answer: 1. The magnetic fields are equal in magnitude and same in direction

Question 25. A uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}=(3 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}+\hat{k})\) exists in region of space. A semicircular wire of radius 1 m carrying current 1 A having its center at (2, 2, 0) is placed in an x-y plane as shown in Fig. The force on the semicircular wire will be

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A uniform magnetic field

  1. \(\sqrt{2}(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k})\)
  2. \(\sqrt{2}(\hat{i}-\hat{j}+\hat{k})\)
  3. \(\sqrt{2}(\hat{i}+\hat{j}-\hat{k})\)
  4. \(\sqrt{2}(-\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}})\)

Answer: 2. \(\sqrt{2}(\hat{i}-\hat{j}+\hat{k})\)

Question 26. A proton of mass 1.67 × 10–27 kg and charge 1.6 × 10–19 C is projected with a speed of 2 × 106 m/s at an angle of 60° to the x-axis. If a uniform magnetic field of 0.104 T is applied along the y-axis, the path of the proton is:

  1. A circle of radius 0.2 m and period π× 10–7 s
  2. A circle of radius 0.1 m and period 2π × 10–7 s
  3. A helix of radius 0.1 m and period 2π × 10–7 s
  4. A helix of radius 0.2 m and period 4π × 10–7 s

Answer: 3. A circle of radius 0.1 m and period 2π × 10–7 s

Question 27. An electron traveling with a speed u along the positive x-axis enters into a region of magnetic field where B = –B 0 ˆk (x > 0). It comes out of the region with speed v then

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field An electron traveling with a speed u along the positive

  1. v = u at y > 0
  2. v = u at y < 0
  3. v > u at y > 0
  4. v > u at y < 0

Answer: 2. v = u at y < 0

Question 28. Which of the following statements is correct in the given figure?

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field loop will rotate clockwise about axis OO’ when seen from O

  1. Net Force On The Loop Is Non-Zero
  2. Net Torque On The Loop Is Zero
  3. Loop Will Rotate Clockwise About Axis Oo’ When Seen From O
  4. Loop Will Rotate Anticlockwise About Oo’ When Seen From O

Answer: 3. Loop Will Rotate Clockwise About Axis Oo’ When Seen From O

Question 29. A magnetic field \(\vec{B}=B_0 \hat{j}\) exists in the region \(\mathrm{a}<\mathrm{x}<2 \mathrm{a} \text { and } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=-\mathrm{B}_0 \hat{\mathrm{j}}\) and , in the region 2a < x < 3a, where B V v i= 0ˆ 0 is a positive constant. A positive point charge moving with a velocity, \(\vec{V}=v_0 \hat{i},\) where v0 is a positive constant, enters the magnetic field at x = a. The trajectory of the charge in this region can be like this.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A magnetic field

Answer: 1.

Question 30. A particle of mass M and positive charge Q, moving with a constant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_1=4 \hat{\mathrm{i}} \mathrm{ms}^{-1} \text {, }\) enters a
region of uniform static magnetic field normal to the x-y plane. The region of the magnetic field extends
from x = 0 to x = L for all values of y. After passing through this region, the particle emerges on the
other side after 10 milliseconds with a velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_2=2(\sqrt{3} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}) \mathrm{ms}^{-1}\) The correct statement(s) is (are):

  1. The direction of the magnetic field is the –x direction.
  2. The direction of the magnetic field is +z direction
  3. The magnitude of the magnetic field \(\frac{50 \pi M}{3 Q}\) units
  4. The magnitude of the magnetic field is \(\frac{100 \pi M}{3 Q}\) units.

Answer: 3. The magnitude of the magnetic field \(\frac{50 \pi M}{3 Q}\) units

Question 31. A conductor (shown in the figure) carrying constant current I is kept in the x-y plane in a uniform B magnetic field. IF F is the magnitude of the total magnetic force acting on the conductor, then the incorrect statement is:

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs Chapter 1 Magnetic Field A conductor carrying contant current

  1. \(\text { If } \vec{B} \text { is along } \hat{z}, F \propto(L+R)\)
  2. \(\text { If } \vec{B} \text { is along } \hat{x}, F=0\)
  3. \(\text { If } \vec{B} \text { is along } \hat{y}, F \propto(L+R)\)
  4. \(\text { If } \vec{B} \text { is along } \hat{z}, F=\)

Answer: 4. \(\text { If } \vec{B} \text { is along } \hat{z}, F=\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes For Chapter 1 Magnetic Field

Magnetic Effect Of Current And Magnetic Force On Charge Or Current

Magnet:

Even after being neutral (showing no electric interaction), two bodies may attract/repel strongly if they have a special property. This property is known as magnetism. This force is called magnetic force.

Those bodies are called magnets. Later on, we will see that it is due to circulating currents inside the atoms. Magnets are found in different shapes, but a bar magnet is frequently used for many experimental purposes.

When a bar magnet is suspended at its middle, as shown, and it is free to rotate in the horizontal plane it always comes to equilibrium in a fixed direction.

One end of the magnet (say A) is directed approximately towards the north and the other (say B) approximately towards the south. This observation is made everywhere on the earth.

Due to this reason the end A, which points towards the north direction is called NORTH POLE and the other end which points towards the south direction is called the SOUTH POLE. They can be marked as ‘N’ and ‘S’ on the magnet.

This property can be used to determine the north or south direction anywhere on the earth and indirectly east and west also if they are not known by another method (like rising of sun and setting of the sun).

This method is used by navigators of ships and aeroplanes. The directions are as shown in the figure. In all directions, E, W, N, and S are in the horizontal plane.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Magnet Rotates Due To The Earths Magnetic Field

The magnet rotates due to the earth’s magnetic field which we will discuss later in this chapter.

Pole Strength Magnetic Dipole And Magnetic Dipole Moment

A magnet always has two poles ‘N’ and ‘S’ and like poles of two magnets repel each other and the unlike poles of two magnets attract each other they form an action-reaction pair.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Pole Strength Magnetic Dipole And Magnetic Dipole Moment

The poles of the same magnet do not come to meet each other due to attraction. They are maintained we cannot get two isolated poles by cutting the magnet from the middle. The other end becomes a pole of the opposite nature.

So, ‘N’ and ‘S’ always exist together therefore they are Known as +ve and –ve poles. The north pole is treated as a positive pole (or positive magnetic charge) and the south pole is treated as a –ve pole (or –ve magnetic charge).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic The Poles Of The Same Magnet Do Not Come To Meet Each Other Due To Attraction

They are quantitatively represented by their ”POLE STRENGTH” +m and –m respectively (just like we have charges +q and –q in electrostatics). Pole strength is a scalar quantity and represents the strength of the pole hence, of the magnet also).

A magnet can be treated as a dipole since it always has two opposite poles (just like in an electric dipole we have two opposite charges –q and +q). It is called a Magnetic Dipole and it has a Magnetic M Dipole Moment. It is represented by. It is a vector quantity. Its direction is from –m to +m which means from ‘S’ to ‘N’)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Magnetic Dipole

M = m.lm m here lm m = magnetic length of the magnet. Lm is slightly less than lg (it is the geometrical length of the magnet = end-to-end distance). The ‘N’ and ‘S’ are not located exactly at the ends of the magnet. For calculation purposes, we can assume lm = lg [Actually lm/lg ~ 0.84].

The units of m and M will be mentioned afterward so that you can remember and understand them.

Magnetic Field And Strength Of Magnetic Field.

The physical space around a magnetic pole has a special influence due to which other poles experience a force. That special influence is called magnetic field and that force is called ‘magnetic force’.

This field is qualitatively represented by the ‘strength of magnetic field’ or b “magnetic induction” or “magnetic flux density”. It is represented by \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}\). It is a vector quantity.

Definition of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\): The magnetic force experienced by a north pole of unit pole strength at a point due to some other poles (called source) is called the strength of the magnetic field at that point due to the source.

Mathematically \(\vec{B}=\frac{\vec{F}}{m}\)

Here \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = magnetic force on the pole of pole strength m. m may be +ve or –ve and of any value. B S.\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\). unit of is Tesla or Weber/m2 (abbreviated as T and Wb/m2).

We can also write \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) According to this direction of on +ve pole (North pole) will be in the direction B of field and on –ve pole (south pole) it will be opposite to the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field It Will Be Opposite To The Direction Of B

The field generated by sources does not depend on the test pole (for its value and any sign).

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) due to various source

Due to a single pole:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Due To Single Pole

(Similar to the case of a point charge in electrostatics)

⇒ \(B=\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{m}{r^2} \text {. }\)

This is magnitude

The direction of B due to the north pole and south poles are as shown

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Direction Of B Due To North Pole And Due To South Poles

in vector form \(\vec{B}=\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{m}{r^3} \vec{r}\) here m is with a sign and = position vector of the test point for the pole.

Due to a bar magnet:

(Same as the case of electric dipole in electrostatics) Independent case never found. Always ‘N’ and ‘S’ exist together as magnets.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Due To Bar Magnet

at A (on the axis) \(=\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{\vec{M}}{r^3} \quad \text { for } \quad a \ll r\)

at B (on the equatorial) \(=-\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{\vec{M}}{r^3} \text { for } \mathrm{a} \ll \mathrm{r}\)

At General Point

⇒ \(B_r=2\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{M \cos \theta}{r^3} \quad \Rightarrow \quad B_n=2\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{M \sin \theta}{r^3}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Pole Due to Bar Magnet

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& B_{\text {res }}=\frac{\mu_0 M}{4 \pi r^3} \sqrt{1+3 \cos ^2 \theta} \\
& \tan \phi=\frac{B_n}{B_r}=\frac{\tan \theta}{2}
\end{aligned}\)

Magnetic lines of force of a bar magnet:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Magnetic Lines Of Force Of A Bar Magnet

Solved Examples

Example 1. Find the magnetic field due to a dipole of magnetic moment 1.2 A-m2 at a point 1 m away from it in a direction making an angle of 60º with the dipole axis.
Solution: The magnitude of the field is

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{M}{r^3} \sqrt{1+3 \cos ^2 \theta}\)

⇒ \(=\left(10^{-7} \frac{\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{A}}\right) \frac{1.2 \mathrm{~A}-\mathrm{m}^2}{1 \mathrm{~m}^3} \sqrt{1+3 \cos ^2 60^{\circ}}=1.6 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~T} \text {. }\)

The direction of the field makes an angle with the radial line where

⇒ \(\tan \alpha=\frac{\tan \theta}{2}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)

Example 2. The figure shows two identical magnetic dipoles a and b of magnetic moments M each, placed at a separation d, with their axes perpendicular to each other. Find the magnetic field at the point P midway between the dipoles.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Two Identical Magnetic Dipoles 1 and 2 Of Magnetic

Solution: Point P is in the end-on position for dipole a and in the broadside-on position for dipole b.

The magnetic field at p due to a is \(\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \mathrm{M}}{(\mathrm{d} / 2)^3}\) along the axis of a, and that due to b is \(B_b=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{M}{(d / 2)^3}\) parallel to the axis of b as shown in figure. The resultant field at P is, therefore.

⇒ \(B=\sqrt{B_a^2+B_b^2}=\frac{\mu_0 M}{4 \pi(d / 2)^3} \sqrt{1^2+2^2}\)

⇒ \(=\frac{2 \sqrt{5} \mu_0 \mathrm{M}}{\pi d^2}\)

The direction of this field makes an angle α with Ba such that tanθ = Bb/Ba = 1/2.

Magnet in an external uniform magnetic field

(same as the case of the electric dipole)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Magnet In An External Uniform Magnetic Field

Here θ is angle between and \(\vec{B} \text { and } \vec{M}\)

Note:

⇒ \(\vec{\tau}\) acts such that it tries to make \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \times \vec{B}\)

⇒ \(\vec{\tau}\) is the same about every point of the dipole’s potential energy is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes It’s potential energy

U = – MB cos θ = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

θ = 0º is stable equilibrium

θ = π is an unstable equilibrium

For small ‘θ’ the dipole performs SHM about θ = 0º position

t= 0– MB sin θ ;

I α = – MB sin θ

for small θ, \(\sin \theta \simeq \theta\) \(\alpha=-\left(\frac{\mathrm{MB}}{\mathrm{I}}\right) \theta\)

Angular frequency of SHM

⇒ \(\omega=\sqrt{\frac{M B}{I}}=\frac{2 \pi}{T} \quad \Rightarrow \quad T=2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{I}{M B}}\)

Here = \(I_{c m}\) if the dipole is free to rotate

=\(I_{hinge}\) if the dipole is hinged.

Example 3. A bar magnet having a magnetic moment of 1.0 × 10-4 J/T is free to rotate in a horizontal plane. A horizontal magnetic field B = 4 × 10-5 T exists in the space. Find the work done in rotating the magnet slowly from a direction parallel to the field to a direction 60º from the field.
Solution: The work done by the external agent = change in potential energy
= (–MB cosθ2) –(–MB cosθ1) = –MB (cos 60º – cos 0º)

⇒ \(=\frac{1}{2} M B=\frac{1}{2} \times\left(1.0 \times 10^4 \mathrm{~J} / \mathrm{T}\right)\left(4 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T}\right)=0.2 \mathrm{~J}\)

Example 4. A magnet of magnetic dipole moment M is released in a uniform magnetic field of induction B from the position shown in the figure. Find :

  1. Its kinetic energy at θ = 90º
  2. Its maximum kinetic energy during the motion.
  3. Will it perform SHM? Oscillation? Periodic motion? What is its amplitude?

Solution: Apply energy conservation at θ= 120º and θ= 90º

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Energy Conservation

= – MB cos 90º + (K.E.)

⇒ \(\mathrm{KE}=\frac{\mathrm{MB}}{2}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{KE}=\frac{\mathrm{MB}}{2}\)

K.E. will be the maximum whereas P.E. is the minimum. P.E. is minimum at θ= 0º. Now apply energy conservation between θ= 120º and θ= 0º. – MB cos 120º + 0 = –mB cos 0º + (KE)max

⇒ \((\mathrm{KE})_{\max }=\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{MB}\)

The K.E. is max at θ= 0º can also be proved by the torque method. From θ= 120º to θ= 0º the torque always acts on the dipole in the same direction (here it is clockwise) so its K.E. keeps on increasing till θ= 0º. Beyond that θ reverses its direction and then K.E. starts decreasing

θ = 0º is the orientation of M to here the maximum K.E.

Since ‘θ’ is not small.

θ = 0º is the orientation of M to here the maximum K.E.

Since ‘θ’ is not small.

Magnet In An External Nonuniform Magnetic Field

No special formulas are applied is such problems. Instead, see the force on individual poles and calculate the resistant force torque on the dipole.

Magnetic effects of current (and moving charge)

It was observed by OERSTED that a current-carrying wire produces a magnetic field near it.

It can be tested by placing a magnet in the nearby space, it will show some movement (deflection or rotation of displacement). This observation shows that a current or moving charge produces a magnetic field.

Oersted Experiment And Observations

Oersted experimented in 1819 whose arrangement is shown in the following figure. The following observations were noted from this experiment.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Oersted Experiment And Observations

  1. When no current is passed through the wire AB, the magnetic needle remains undeflected.
  2. When current is passed through the wire AB, the magnetic needle gets deflected in a particular direction and the deflection increases as the current increases.
  3. When the current flowing in the wire is reversed, the magnitude needle gets deflected in the opposite direction and its deflection increases as the current increases.
    1. Oersted concluded from this experiment that on passing a current through the conducting wire, a magnetic field is produced around this wire. As a result, the magnetic needle is deflected. This phenomenon is called the magnetic effect of current.
    2. In another experiment, it was found that the magnetic lines of force due to the current flowing in the wire are in the form of concentric circles around the conducting wire.

Frame Dependence Of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

The motion of anything is a relative term. A charge may appear at rest by an observer (say O1) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_1\)  1 moving at the same velocity concerning observer O2 and at velocity concerning observer O3 then due to that charge w.r.t. O1 will be zero and w.r. to O2 and O3 it will be and (that means different).

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Frame Depemdence Of B

In a current-carrying wire electrons move in the opposite direction to that of the current and +ve ions (of the metal) are static w.r.t. the wire.

Now if some observer (O1) moves with velocity Vd in the direction of motion of the electrons then electrons will have zero velocity and +ve ions will have velocity Vd in the downward direction w.r.t. O1. The density (n) of +ve ions is the same as the density of free electrons and their charges are of the same magnitudes.

So, w.r.t. O1 electrons will produce zero magnetic field but +ve ions will produce +ve same due to the current carrying wire does not depend on the reference frame (this is true for any velocity of the observer).

\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) due to magnet:

B produced by the magnet does not contain the term of velocity
B So, we can say that the due magnet does not depend on the frame.

\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) Due To A Point Charge

r A charge particle ‘q’ has velocity v as shown in the figure. It is at position ‘A’ at some time. Is the position vector of point ‘P’ w.r.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes B Due To A Point Charge

To position of the charge. Then at P due to q is

⇒ \(B=\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{q v \sin \theta}{r^2}\); here θ angle between \(\vec{v} \text { and } \vec{r}\)

⇒ \(\vec{B}=\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{q \vec{V} \times \vec{r}}{r^3}\) ; q with sign \(\vec{B} \perp \vec{v} \text { and also } \vec{B} \perp \vec{r} \text {. }\).

The direction will be found by using the rules of vector product.

Self Practice Problems

Question 1. The magnetic field is produced by the flow of current in a straight wire. This phenomenon is based on-

  1. Faraday’s Law
  2. Maxwell’s Law
  3. Coulbom’s Law
  4. Oersted’s Law

Answer: 4. Oersted’s Law

Question 2. The field produced by a moving charged particle is-

  1. Electric
  2. Magnetic
  3. Both electric and magnetic
  4. Nothing can be predicted

Answer: 3. Both electric and magnetic

Question 3. The magnetic field due to a small bar magnet at a distance varies as

  1. \(\frac{1}{d^2}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{d^{3 / 2}}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{d^{3 / 2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{d}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{d}\)

Question 4. A magnetic dipole of magnetic moment M is situated with its axis along the direction of a magnetic field of strength B. How much work will have to be done to rotate it through 180°?

  1. -MB
  2. +MB
  3. Zero
  4. +2MB

Answer: 4. +2MB

Question 5. The magnetic field due to a small magnetic dipole of magnetic moment M, at distance r from the centre on the equatorial line, is given by- (in the MKS system)

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \times \frac{M}{r^2}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \times \frac{M}{r^3}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \times \frac{2 M}{r^2}\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \times \frac{2 M}{r^3}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \times \frac{M}{r^3}\)

Biot-Savant’s Law ( Due To A Wire)

It is an experimental law. A current ‘i’ flows in a wire (may be straight or curved). Due to θ the length of the wire the magnetic field at ‘P’ is

⇒ \(\mathrm{dB} \propto \text { id } \ell \quad \Rightarrow \quad \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{r}^2} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \propto \sin \theta \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{dB} \propto \frac{\text { id } \ell \sin \theta}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Biot-savarts law

⇒ \(\mathrm{dB}=\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{\mathrm{id} \ell \sin \theta}{\mathrm{r}^2} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dB}}=\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{\overrightarrow{i d} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{r}^3}\)

Here = position vector of the test point w.r.t. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}\)

α = angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell} \text { and } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\). The Resultant \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dB}}\)

Using this fundamental formula we can derive the expression of \(\vec{B}\) due to a long wire.

⇒ \(\vec{B}\) due to a straight wire:

Due to a straight wire ‘PQ’ carrying a current ‘i’ the \(\vec{B}\) at A is given by the formula \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}}\left(\sin \theta_1+\sin \theta_2\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes B Due to Straight Wire

(Derivation can be seen in a standard textbook like your school book or concept of physics of HCV part 2) Direction:

B Due to every element of ‘PQ’ at A being directed inwards. So its resultant is also directed inwards. It is represented by (x)

The direction at various points is shown in the figure shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Direction Of B At Various Points

At points ‘C’ and ‘D’ = 0 (think how). For the case shown in figure B at \(A=\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 \pi r}\left(\sin \theta_2-\sin \theta_1\right)\)

Shortcut for Direction:

The direction of the magnetic field at point P due to a straight wire can be found by a slight variation in the right-hand thumb rule. If we stretch the thumb of the right hand along the current and curl our fingers to pass through point P, the direction of the fingers at P gives the direction of the magnetic field there.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Shortcut For Direction

We can draw magnetic field lines on the pattern of electric field lines. A tangent to a magnetic field line given the direction of the magnetic field existing at that point.

For a straight wire, the field lines are concentric circles with their centers on the wire and in the plane perpendicular to the wire. There will be an infinite number of such lines in the planes parallel to the above-mentioned plane.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Magnetic Field Lines On The Pattern Of Electric Field Lines

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Lines In The Planes Parallel

Example 5. Find the resultant magnetic field at ‘C’ in the figure shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Resultant Magnetic Field At C

Solution: It is clear that ‘B’ is at ‘C’ due to all the wires being directed. Also, B at ‘C’ due to PQ and SR are the same. Also due to QR and PS being the same

⇒ \(B_{r e s}=2\left(B_{P Q}+B_{S P}\right) \Rightarrow \quad B_{P Q}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{4 \pi \frac{a}{2}}\left(\sin 60^{\circ}+\sin 60^{\circ}\right),\)

⇒ \(B_{s p}=\frac{\mu_0 i}{4 \pi \frac{\sqrt{3} a}{2}}\left(\sin 30^{\circ}+\sin 30^{\circ}\right) \Rightarrow B_{r e s}=2\left(\frac{\sqrt{3} \mu_0 i}{2 \pi a}+\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi a \sqrt{3}}\right)=\frac{4 \mu_0 i}{\sqrt{3} \pi a}\)

Example 6. The figure shows a square loop made from a uniform wire. Find the magnetic field at the centre of the square if a battery is connected between points A and C.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The current will be equally divided at A.

Solution: The current will be equally divided at A. The fields at the center due to the currents in the wires AB and DC will be equal in magnitude and opposite in direction. The result of these two fields will be zero. Similarly, the resultant of the fields due to the wires AD and BC will be zero. Hence, the net field at the center will be zero.

Special case:

If the wire is infinitely long then the magnetic field at ‘P’ (as shown in the figure) is given by (using θ1 = θ2 = 90º and the formula of ‘B’ due to straight wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Magnetic Field

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi r} \quad \Rightarrow \quad B \propto \frac{I}{r}\)

The direction of at various is as shown in the figure. The magnetic lines of force will be concentric circles around the wire (as shown earlier)

If the wire is infinitely long but ‘P’ is as shown in the figure. The B direction at various points is as shown in the figure. At ‘P’.

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 \pi r}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes f the wire is infinitely long but ‘P’

Self Practice problems 

Question 6. A pair of stationary and infinitely long bent wires are placed in the xy plane as shown in The wires carry a current of i = 10 Amp. each as shown. The segments L and M are along the x-axis. The segments P and Q are parallel to the y-axis such that OS = OR = 0.02 m. The magnetic induction at the origin O is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes A Pair Of Stationary

  1. \(10^{-4} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)
  2. \(10^{-2} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)
  3. \(10^{-6} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)
  4. \(10^{-8} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)

Answer: 1. \(10^{-4} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)

Question 7. A current-carrying wire is bent into the shape of a square coil. The magnetic field produced at the center of the coil by one arm BC is B. Then the resultant magnetic field at the center due to all the arms will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes A Current Carrying Wire Is Bent Into The Shape Of A Square Coil.

  1. 4B
  2. \(\frac{B}{2}\)
  3. B
  4. \(\frac{2}{B}\)

Answer: 1. 4B

Question 8. As shown in the diagram, two perpendicular wires are placed very close to each other, but they are not touching each other. The points where the intensity of the magnetic field is zero are-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The points where the intensity of magnetic field is zero

  1. A
  2. B, D
  3. A, B
  4. B

Answer: 2. B, D

Question 9. At a distance of 10 cm. from a long straight wire carrying current, the magnetic field is 0.04. Tesla the magnetic field at the distance of 40 cm. will be

  1. 0.001T
  2. 0.02T
  3. 0.08T
  4. 0.16T

Answer: 1. 0.001T

⇒ \(\stackrel{\rightharpoonup}{B}\) due to circular loop

At centre: Due to each \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}\) element of the loop \(\stackrel{\rightharpoonup}{B}\) At ‘c’ is inwards (in this case)

⇒ \(\overline{B_{r e s}} \text { at ‘ } c \text { ‘ is } \otimes . B=\frac{\mu_0 N I}{2 R} \text {, }\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes At Centre A And R

N = No. of turns in the loop =\(\frac{\ell}{2 \pi R}\) l= length of the loop.

N can be fraction \(\left(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{3}, \frac{11}{3} \text { etc. }\right)\) or integer.

The direction of \(\stackrel{\rightharpoonup}{B}\): The direction of the magnetic field at the center of a circular wire can be obtained using the right-hand thumb rule. If the fingers are curled along the current, the stretched thumb will point toward the magnetic field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Direction Of B

Another way to find the direction is to look into the loop along its axis. If the current is in an anticlockwise direction, the magnetic field is towards the viewer. If the current is in a clockwise direction, the field is away from the viewer.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Another way to find the direction is to look into the loop along its axis

Semicircular And Quarter Of A Circle:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Semicircular and Quarter Of A Circle

On the axis of the loop= \(B=\frac{\mu_0 N^2 R^2}{2\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes On the axis of the loop

Direction can be obtained by the right-hand and thumb rule. Curl your fingers in the direction of the current then B the direction of the thumb points in the direction of at the points on the axis.

The magnetic field at a point not on the axis is mathematically difficult to calculate. We show qualitatively in the figure the magnetic field lines due to a circular current which will give some idea of the field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes On the axis of the loop.

A loop as a magnet:

The pattern of the magnetic field is comparable with the magnetic field produced by a bar magnet.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes A loop as a magnet

The side ‘I’ (the side from which the emerges out) of the loop acts as the ‘NORTH POLE’ and side II (the B side in which the enters) acts as the ‘SOUTH POLE’. It can be verified by studying the force on one loop due to a magnet or a loop.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Loops At North And South Poles

Mathematically:

⇒ \(B_{\text {amis }}=\frac{\mu_0 N I R^2}{2\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}} \cong \frac{\mu_0 N I R^2}{2 x^3} \text { for } x>R=2\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right)\left(\frac{I N \pi R^2}{x^3}\right)\)

It is similar to Baxis due to magnet \(=2\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{m}{x^3}\)

Magnetic dipole moment of the loop

M = INπR²

M = INA for any other shaped loop.

Unit of M is Amp. m²

Unit of m (pole strength) = Amp. m {since in magnet M = ml}

⇒ \({\mathrm{M}}=\mathrm{IN} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}} \text {, }\)

⇒ \(\vec{A}\) = unit normal vector for the loop.
To be determined by right hand rule which is also used to determine the direction of the axis. It is also from

‘S’ side to ‘N’ side of the loop.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes S’ side to ‘N’ side of the loop

Solenoid:

A solenoid contains a large number of circular loops wrapped around a non-conducting cylinder. (it may be a hollow cylinder or it may be a solid cylinder)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Solenoid

The winding of the wire is the uniform direction of the magnetic field is the same at all points of the axis.

⇒ \(\vec{B}\) on axis (turns should be very close to each other).

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0 n i}{2}\left(\cos \theta_1-\cos \theta_2\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Number Of Turns Per Unit Length

where n: number of turns per unit length.

⇒ \(\cos \theta_1=\frac{\ell_1}{\sqrt{\ell_1^2+\mathrm{R}^2}} ; \quad \cos \beta=\frac{\ell_2}{\sqrt{\ell_2^2+\mathrm{R}^2}}=-\cos \theta_2\)

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0 n i}{2}\left[\frac{\ell_1}{\sqrt{\ell_1^2+R^2}}+\frac{\ell_2}{\sqrt{\ell_2^2+R^2}}\right]=\frac{\mu_0 n i}{2}\left(\cos \theta_1+\cos \beta\right)\)

Note: Use the right-hand rule for direction (same as the direction due to the loop).

Derivation:

Take an element of width dx at a distance x from point P. [point P is the point on the axis at which we are going to calculate the magnetic field. Total number of turns in the element dn = ndx where n: number of turns per unit length.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Derivation

⇒ \(d B=\frac{\mu_0 i R^2}{2\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}(n d x)\)

⇒ \(B=\int d B=\int_{-\ell_1}^2 \frac{\mu_0 i R^2 n d x}{2\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}=\frac{\mu_0 n i}{2}\left[\frac{\ell_1}{\sqrt{\ell_1^2+R^2}}+\frac{\ell_2}{\sqrt{\ell_2^2+R^2}}\right]=\frac{\mu_0 n i}{2}\left[\cos \theta_1-\cos \theta_2\right]\)

For ‘Ideal Solenoid’:

Inside (at the midpoint)

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \ell>R \quad \text { or length is infinite } \\
& \theta_1 \rightarrow 0 \\
& \theta_2 \rightarrow \pi \\
& B=\frac{\mu_0 n i}{2}[1-(-1)] \\
& \mathbf{B}=\mu_0 \mathbf{n i}
\end{aligned}\)

If the material of the solid cylinder has relative permeability \(\text { ‘ } \mu_t^{\prime} \text { then } B=\mu_0 \mu_t \text { ni }\)

At the ends B \(B=\frac{\mu_0 n i}{2}\)

Comparison between ideal and real solenoid:

  1. Ideal Solenoid Real Solenoid

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Ideal Solenoid Real Solenoid

Self Practice Problems

Question 10. The radius of a circular coil is R and it carries a current of I ampere. The intensity of the magnetic field at a distance x from the centre (x >> R) will be:

  1. \(\mathrm{B}=\frac{\mu_0}{2} \frac{\mathrm{IR}^2}{\mathrm{x}^2}\)
  2. \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I^2}{2 x^3}\)
  3. \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I R}{2 x^2}\)
  4. \(B=\frac{\mu_0 \text { IR }}{2 x^3}\)

Answer: 2. \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I^2}{2 x^3}\)

Question 11. The magnetic field B at the centre of a circulate coil of radius r is times that due to a long straight wire at a distance r from it, for equal currents. Fig shows three cases; in all cases, the circular part has a radius of r and the straight ones are infinitely long. For the same current the field B at the centre P in cases 1,2, and 3 has the ratio.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The magnetic field B at the centre of a circulate coil of radius

Answer: 2. \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I^2}{2 x^3}\)

Question 12. If the intensity of the magnetic field at a point on the axis of the current-carrying coil is half of that at the centre of the coil, then the distance of that point from the centre of the coil will be

  1. \(\left(-\frac{\pi}{2}\right): \frac{\pi}{2}:\left[\frac{3 \pi}{4}-\frac{1}{2}\right]\)
  2. \(\left(-\frac{\pi}{2}+1\right):\left[\frac{\pi}{2}+1\right]:\left[\frac{3 \pi}{4}+\frac{1}{2}\right]\)
  3. \(-\frac{\pi}{2}: \frac{\pi}{2}: \frac{3 \pi}{4}\)
  4. \(\left(-\frac{\pi}{2}-1\right):\left[\frac{\pi}{4}-\frac{1}{4}\right]:\left[\frac{3 \pi}{4}+\frac{1}{2}\right]\)

Answer: 1. \(\left(-\frac{\pi}{2}\right): \frac{\pi}{2}:\left[\frac{3 \pi}{4}-\frac{1}{2}\right]\)

Question 13. If the intensity of the magnetic field at a point on the axis of current carrying coil is half of that at the centre of the coil, then the distance of that point from the centre of the coil will be

  1. \(\frac{R}{2}\)
  2. R
  3. \(\frac{3 R}{2}\)
  4. 0.766R

Answer: 4. \(\frac{3 R}{2}\)

Question 13. A current of 0.1 ampere flows through a coil of 100 turns and the radius is 5 cm. The magnetic field at the centre of the coil will be

  1. \(4 \pi \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T}\)
  2. \(8 \pi \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T}\)
  3. \(4 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T}\)
  4. \(2 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T}\)

Answer: 1. \(4 \pi \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T}\)

Question 14. A current I flows through a circular coil of radius r the intensity of the field at its centre is

  1. Proportional to r
  2. Inversely proportional I
  3. Proportional to I
  4. Proportional to I2

Answer: 3. Proportional to I

Question 15. In a current carrying long solenoid the field produced does not depend upon-

  1. Number of turns per unit length
  2. Current flowing
  3. The radius of the solenoid
  4. All of the above three

Answer: 3. Radius of the solenoid

Ampere’s Circuital Law :

The line integral \(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}\) on a closed curve of any shape is equal to (permeability of free space) times the net current through the area bounded by the curve.

⇒ \(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}=\mu_0 \Sigma \mathrm{I}\)

Note:

A line integral is independent of the shape of the path and the position of the within in it.

The statement \(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}=0\) does not necessarily mean that \(\vec{B}=0\) everywhere along the path but only that no net current is passing through the path.

Sign of current: The current due to which \(\vec{B}\) is produced in the same sense as \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}\) (i.e \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}\) positive will be taken positive and the current which produces \(\vec{B}\) in the sense opposite to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}\) will be negative

Solved Examples

Example 7. Find the values of \(\int \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d \ell}\) for the loops L1, L2, and L3 in the figure shown. The sense of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}\) is mentioned in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Sense Of DL

Solution: \(\text { for } L_1 \int \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d \ell}=\mu_0\left(I_1-\mathrm{I}_2\right)\)

here I1 is taken positively because magnetic lines of force produced by I1 are anti-clockwise as B d seen from the top. I2 produces lines of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) in a clockwise sense as seen from the top. The sense of is anticlockwise as seen from the top.

For \(L_2: \int \vec{B} \cdot \vec{d}=\mu_0 \quad\left(I_1-I_2+I_4\right)\) for \(\mathrm{L}_3: \int \vec{B} \cdot \vec{d} \ell=0\)

To find out the magnetic field due to infinite current carrying wire

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes To find out magnetic field due to infinite current carrying wire

By B.S.L \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) will have circular lines. \(\overrightarrow{d \ell}\) is also taken tangent to the circle.

⇒ \(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}=\) since \(\theta=0^{\circ} \text { so } \mathrm{B} \int \mathrm{d} \ell=\mathrm{B} 2 \pi \mathrm{R}\) (since B= const)

Now by amperes law: \(\text { B } 2 \pi R=\mu_0 I\) since \(B=\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 \pi R}\)

Hollow current carrying infinitely long cylinder : (I is uniformly distributed on the whole circumference)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes long cylinder

For r > R By symmetry, the amperian loop is a circle.

⇒ \(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}=\int \mathrm{B} \mathrm{d} \ell\) since 0=0

⇒ \(=\mathrm{B} \int_0^2 \mathrm{~d} \ell\) since b= const. \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi r}\)

r<R = \(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}=\int \mathrm{B} d \ell=\mathrm{B}(2 \pi \mathrm{r})=0\) = \(B_{\text {in }}=0\)

Graph:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Graph

Solid infinite current carrying cylinder:

Assume current is uniformly distributed on the whole cross-section area.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Solid Infinite Current Carrying Cylinder

Current density \(\mathrm{J}=\frac{\mathrm{I}}{\pi \mathrm{R}^2}\)

Case \(r \leq R\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes An Amperian Loop Inside The Cylinder

Take an American loop inside the cylinder. By symmetry it should be a circle whose centre is on the axis of the cylinder and its axis also coincides with the cylinder axis on the loop.

⇒ \(\iint \vec{B} \cdot \vec{d} \ell=\int \mathrm{B} \cdot \mathrm{d} \ell=\mathrm{B} \int \mathrm{d} \ell=\mathrm{B} \cdot 2 \pi \mathrm{r}=\mu_0 \frac{1}{\pi \mathrm{R}^2} \pi \mathrm{r}^2\)

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I r}{2 \pi R^2}=\frac{\mu_0 J r}{2} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \vec{B}=\frac{\mu_0(\vec{J} \times \vec{r})}{2}\)

Case 2: \(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \mathrm{d} \vec{\ell}=\int \mathrm{B} \mathrm{d} \ell=\mathrm{B} \int \mathrm{d} \ell=\mathrm{B} \cdot(2 \pi \mathrm{r})=\mu_0 \cdot \mathrm{I}\)

⇒ \(\Rightarrow \quad B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi r} \text { also } \frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi r}(\hat{J} \times \hat{r})=\frac{\mu_0 J \pi R^2}{2 \pi r}\)

⇒ \(\vec{B}=\frac{\mu_0 R^2}{2 r^2}(\vec{J} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}})\)

Self Practice Problems

Question 16. The intensity of the magnetic field at a point situated at a distance r close to a long straight current carrying r wire is B the intensity of the field at a distance \(\frac{r}{2}\) from the wire will be-

  1. \(\frac{B}{2}\)
  2. \(\frac{B}{4}\)
  3. 2B
  4. 4B

Answer: 3. 2B

Question 17. Two straight infinitely long and thin wires are separated 0.1 m apart and carry a current of 10 Amp. each in opposite directions. The magnetic field on point at a distance of 0.1 m from both wires is

  1. \(2 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)
  2. \(3 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)
  3. \(4 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)
  4. \(1 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)

Answer: 1. \(3 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2\)

Question 18. One ampere current is passed through a 2m long straight wire. The magnetic field in the air at a point distance of 3m from one end of the wire on its axis will be

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi}\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0}{8 \pi}\)
  4. zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Solved Examples 

Example 8. The figure shows a cross-section of a large metal sheet carrying an electric current along its surface. The current in a strip of width dl is Kdl where K is a constant. Find the magnetic field at a point P at a distance x from the metal sheet.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Magnetic Field At A Point P At A Distance x from the metal sheet

Solution: Consider two strips A and C of the sheet situated symmetrically on the two sides of P (figure). The magnetic field at P due to strip A is B 0 perpendicular to AP and that due to strip, C is BC perpendicular to CP. The resultant of these two is parallel to the width AC of the sheet. The field due to the whole sheet will also be in this direction. Suppose this field has magnitude B.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The resultant of these two is parallel to the width AC of the sheet

The field on the opposite side of the sheet at the same distance will also be B but in the opposite direction. Applying Ampere’s law to the rectangle shown in the figure.

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{~B} \ell=\mu_0 \mathrm{~K} \ell \quad \text { or, } \quad \mathrm{B}=\frac{1}{2} \mu_0 \mathrm{~K} \text {. }\)

Note that it is independent of x.

Example 9. Three identical long solenoids P, Q and R are connected as shown in the figure. If the magnetic field at the centre of P is 2.0 T, what would be the field at the centre of Q? Assume that the field due to any solenoid is confined within the volume of that solenoid only.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Three identical long solenoids

Solution: As the solenoids are identical, the currents in Q and R will be the same and will be half the current in P. The magnetic field within a solenoid is given by B = μ0ni. Hence the field in Q will be equal to the field in R and will be half the field in P i.e., will be 1.0 T.

Magnetic Field in a Toroid

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Magnetic Field In A Toroid

  1. A toroid is like an endless cylindrical solenoid, i.e. if a long solenoid is bent round in the form of a closed ring, then it becomes a toroid.
  2. Electrically insulated wire is wound uniformly over the toroid as shown in the figure.
  3. The thickness of the toroid is kept small in comparison to its radius and the number of turns is kept very large.
  4. When a current i is passed through the toroid, each turn of the toroid produces a magnetic field along the axis at its centre. Due to the uniform distribution of turns this magnetic field has the same magnitude at their centres. Thus the magnetic lines of force inside the toroid are circular.
  5. The magnetic field inside a toroid at all points is the same but outside the toroid, it is zero.
  6. If the total number of turns in a toroid is N and R is its radius, then the number of turns per unit length of the toroid will be \(\mathrm{n}=\frac{\mathrm{N}}{2 \pi \mathrm{R}}\)
  7. The magnetic field due to the toroid is determined by Ampere’s law.
  8. The magnetic field due to toroid is \(B_0=\mu_0 \text { ni } \quad \text { or } \quad B_0=\mu_0\left(\frac{N}{2 \pi R}\right) \mathrm{i}\)
  9. If a substance of permeability μ is placed inside the toroid, then B = uni
  10. If ur is the relative magnetic permeability of the substance, then B = uru0 ni

Self Practice Problems

Question 19. A toroid has n turn density, current i then the magnetic field is

  1. u0 ni
  2. \(\mu_0 \frac{i}{n}\)
  3. Zero
  4. \(\mu_0 n^2 i\)

Answer: 1. u0 ni

Question 20. The current on the windings on a Toroid is 2.0 A. There are 400 turns and the mean circumferential length is 40 cm. If the inside magnetic field is 1.0 T, the relative permeability is near to

  1. 100
  2. 200
  3. 300
  4. 400

Answer: 4. 400

Current And Magnetic Field Due To Circular Motion Of A Charge

According to the theory of atomic structure every atom is made of electrons, protons and neutrons. Protons and neutrons are in the nucleus of each atom and electrons are assumed to be moving in different orbits around the nucleus.

An electron and a proton present in the atom constitute an electric dipole at every moment but the direction of this dipole changes continuously and hence at any time the average dipole moment is zero.

As a result static electric field is not observed.

Moving charge produces a magnetic field and the average value of this field in the atom is not zero.

In an atom, an electron moves in a circular path around the nucleus. Due to this motion current appears to be flowing in the electronic orbit and the orbit behaves like a current-carrying coil. If e is the electron charge, R is the radius of the orbit and f is the frequency of motion of an electron in the orbit, then

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes In an atom an electron moving in a circular path around the nucleus

  1. Current in the orbit = charge × frequency = ef
  2. If T is the period, then \(f=\frac{1}{T}\) therefore \(\mathrm{i}=\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{T}}\)
  3. The magnetic field at the nucleus (centre) \(B_0=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 R}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{ef}}{2 R}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{e}}{2 R T}\)
  4. If the angular velocity of the electron is, then \(\omega=2 \pi f \text { and } f=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\)
    • ∴ \(\mathrm{i}=\mathrm{ef}=\frac{\mathrm{e} \omega}{2 \pi}\)
    • ∴ \(B_0=\frac{\mu_0 i}{2 R}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{e} \omega}{4 \pi R}\)
  5. If the linear velocity of the electron is v, then v Rw R(2f) or \(f=\left(\frac{v}{2 \pi R}\right)\) or \(f=\left(\frac{v}{2 \pi R}\right)\)
    • ∴ \(i=e f=\frac{e v}{2 \pi R}\)
    • ∴ \(B_0=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}}{2 R}=\frac{\mu_0 e v}{4 \pi R^2}\)
  6. Magnetic moment due to the motion of an electron in an orbit
    • \(M=i A=e f \pi R^2=\frac{e \pi R^2}{T}\) or, \(M=\frac{e \omega \pi R^2}{2 \pi}=\frac{e \omega R^2}{2}\) or, \(M=\frac{e v \pi R^2}{2 \pi R}=\frac{e v R}{2}\)

If the angular momentum of the electron is L, then
L mvR mR= mwR2

Writing M in terms of L

⇒ \(M=\frac{e m \omega R^2}{2 m}=\frac{e m v R}{2 m}=\frac{e L}{2 m}\)

According to Bohr’s second postulate \(m v R=n \frac{h}{2 \pi}\)

In ground state n = 1

⇒ \(L=\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)

∴ \(M=\frac{e h}{4 \pi m}\)

  1. If a charge q (or a charged ring of charge q) is moving in a circular path of radius R with a frequency for angular velocity w, then
  2. Current due to moving charge \(\mathrm{i}=\mathrm{qf}=\mathrm{q} \omega / 2 \pi\)
  3. The magnetic field at the centre of the ring \(M=i\left(\pi R^2\right)=q f \pi R^2=\frac{1}{2} q \omega R^2\)
  4. If a charge q is distributed uniformly over the surface of the plastic disc of radius R and it is rotated about its axis with an angular velocity w, then (a) the magnetic field produced at its centre will be \(B_0=\frac{\mu_0 q \omega}{2 \pi R}\)
  5. The magnetic moment of the disc will be
    1. dM = (di) pix2
      • \(=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi} d q \pi x^2=\frac{\omega q}{R^2} x^3 d x\)
      • \(\Rightarrow \quad M=\int d M=\frac{\omega q}{R^2} \int_0^R x^3 d x\)
      • \(\Rightarrow \quad M=\frac{q \omega R^2}{4}\)
      • \(\Rightarrow \quad M=\frac{\mathrm{q} \omega \mathrm{R}^2}{4}\)

Question 21. A circular loop has a radius of 5 cm and it carries a current of 0.1 amp. Its magnetic moment is-

  1. 1.32 × 10–4 amp. m2
  2. 2.62 × 10–4 amp. m2
  3. 5.25 × 10–4 amp. m2
  4. 7.85 × 10–4 amp. m2

Answer: 4. 7.85 × 10–4 amp. m2

Question 22. The magnetic moment of a circular coil carrying current is-

  1. Directly proportional to the length of the wire in the coil.
  2. Inversely proportional to the length of the wire in the coil
  3. Directly proportional to the square of the length of the wire in the coil
  4. Inversely proportional to the square of the length of the wire in the coil.

Answer: 3. Directly proportional to the square of the length of the wire in the coil

Magnetic force on moving charge

When a charge q moves with velocity, in a magnetic field, then the magnetic force experienced by the moving charge is given by the following formula:

⇒ \(\vec{F}=q(\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\) Put q with sign.

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\): Instantaneous velocity

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\): Magnetic field at that point.

Note:

  1. ⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \perp \overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}} \text { and also } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \perp \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)
  2. since \(\vec{F} \perp \vec{v}\) therefore power due to magnetic force on a charged particle is zero. (use the formula of power.
  3. P= \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\) = for its proof).
  4. Since the \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \perp \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) work done by the magnetic force is zero in every part of the motion. The magnetic force cannot increase or decrease the speed (or kinetic energy) of a charged particle.
  5. It can only change the direction of velocity.
  6. On a stationary charged particle, the magnetic force is zero.
  7. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}} \| \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}},\) then also magnetic force on charged particle is zero. It moves along a straight line if only a magnetic field is acting.

Solved Examples 

Example 10. A charged particle of mass 5 mg and charge q = +2uC has velocity \(\vec{v}=2 \hat{i}-3 \hat{j}+4 \hat{k}\). find out the magnetic force on the charged particle and its acceleration at this instant due to magnetic field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=3 \hat{\mathrm{j}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{k}} \quad \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \text { and } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) are in m/s and web/m2 respectively.

Solution:

⇒ \(\vec{F}=q \vec{v} \times \vec{B}=2 \times 10^{-6}(2 \hat{i}-3 \hat{j} \times 4 \hat{k}) \times(3 \hat{j}-2 \hat{k})=2 \times 10^{-6}[-6 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}+6 \hat{k}] N\)

By newton’s law \(\vec{a}=\frac{\vec{F}}{m}=\frac{2 \times 10^{-6}}{5 \times 10^{-6}}(-6 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}+6 \hat{k})\)

⇒ \(=0.8(-3 \hat{i}+2 \hat{j}+3 \hat{k}) \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)

Example 11. A charged particle has acceleration \(\vec{a}=2 \hat{i}+x \hat{j}\) in a magnetic field \(\vec{B}=-3 \hat{i}+2 \hat{j}-4 \hat{k}\). Find the value of x.
Solution: Since \(\vec{F} \perp \vec{B}\) since \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}} \perp \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) since \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=0\) ∴ \((2 \hat{i}+x \hat{j}) \cdot(-3 \hat{i}+2 \hat{j}-4 \hat{k})=0\)

-6+2x=0

x=3

Motion of charged particles under the effect of magnetic force

Particle released if v = 0 then fm = 0

∴ The particle will remain at rest

⇒ \(\vec{V} \| \vec{B} \text { here } \theta=0 \text { or } \theta=180^{\circ}\)

∴ Fm= 0

∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=0\)

∴ \(\vec{V}\) = const.

∴ The particle will move in a straight line with constant velocity

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Motion of charged particles under the effect of magnetic force

Initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}} \perp \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \text { and } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = uniform

In this case, since B is in the z direction the magnetic force in the z-direction will be zero. (since \(\overrightarrow{F_m} \perp \vec{B}\)

∴ the particle will always move in the xy plane.

∴ velocity vector is always \(\perp \vec{B}\)

∴ \(F_m=\mathrm{quB}=\text { constant. now } \mathrm{quB}=\frac{\mathrm{mu}^2}{\mathrm{R}} \Rightarrow \mathrm{R}=\frac{\mathrm{mu}}{\mathrm{qB}}=\text { constant. }\)

The particle moves in a curved path whose radius of curvature is the same everywhere,
such a curve in a plane is only a circle

∴ The path of the particle is circular.

⇒ \(R=\frac{m u}{q B}=\frac{p}{q B}=\frac{\sqrt{2 m k}}{q B}\) Here p= linear momentum; k= kinetic energy

Now \(v=\omega R \Rightarrow \omega=\frac{q B}{m}=\frac{2 \pi}{T}=2 \pi f\)

Time period T = 2πm/qB frequency f = Bq/2πm

Note: ω, f, T is independent of velocity.

Example 12. A proton (p), α-particle and deuteron (D) are moving in circular paths with the same kinetic energies in the same magnetic field. Find the ratio of their radii and periods. (Neglect interaction between particles).
Solution: \(R=\frac{\sqrt{2 m K}}{q B}\)

∴ \(R_p: R_a: R_D=\frac{\sqrt{2 m K}}{q B}: \frac{\sqrt{2.4 m K}}{2 q B}: \frac{\sqrt{2.2 m K}}{q B}=1: 1: \sqrt{2}\) t=2πm/qB

∴ \(T_p: T_\alpha: T_D=\frac{2 \pi m}{q B}: \frac{2 \pi 4 m}{2 q B}: \frac{2 \pi 2 m}{q B}=1: 2: 2\)

Example 13. In the figure shown the magnetic field on the left of ‘PQ’ is zero and on the right of ‘PQ’ it is uniform. Find the time spent in the magnetic field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Magnetic Field On The Left On ‘PQ’

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The path will be semicircular time spent

Example 14. A uniform magnetic field of strength ‘B’ exists in a region of width ‘d’. A particle of charge ‘q’ and mass ‘m’ is shot perpendicularly (as shown in the figure) into the magnetic field. Find the time spent by the particle in the magnetic field if

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes A Uniform Magnetic Field Of Strength ‘B’ Exists In A Region Of Width ‘d’

⇒ \(d>\frac{\mathrm{mu}}{\mathrm{qB}}\)

⇒ \(d<\frac{m u}{q B}\)

Solution: \(d>\frac{\mathrm{mu}}{\mathrm{qB}}\)

∴ \(\mathrm{t}=\frac{\mathrm{T}}{2}=\frac{\pi \mathrm{m}}{q B}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The magnetic field cu

⇒ \(\sin \theta=\frac{d}{R} \Rightarrow \theta=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{d}{R}\right)\) \(\omega t=\theta \Rightarrow t=\frac{m}{q B} \sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{d}{R}\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The magnetic field cu.

Question 15. What should be the speed of a charged particle so that it can’t collide with the upper wall? Also, find the coordinates of the point where the particle strikes the lower plate in the limiting case of velocity.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Speed Of Charged Particle So That It Can’t Collide With The Upper Wall

Solution: The path of the particle will be circular larger the velocity, the larger will be the radius. For particle not to s strike R < d.

Since \(\frac{m v}{q B}<d \quad \Rightarrow \quad v<\frac{q B d}{m} .\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The path of the particle will be circular larger the velocity

For limiting case \(v=\frac{q B d}{m}\)

R=d

Therefore coordinate = (–2d, 0, 0) l

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Coordinate

Self Practice Problems 

Question 23. In a hydrogen atom, an e– moves in Bohr’s orbit of radius r = 5 x 10–11 m. and makes 1017 revolutions per second. The magnetic moment produced due to the orbital motion of the e– is-

  1. 0.40π x 10–22 A-m2
  2. 2.2π x 10–22 A-m2
  3. 2π x 10–22 A-m2
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. 0.40π x 10–22 A-m2

Question 24. A charged particle is moving with velocity v under the magnetic field B. The force acting on the particle will be maximum if-

  1. v and B are in the same direction
  2. v and B are in the opposite direction
  3. v and B are perpendicular
  4. v does not depend on the direction B.

Answer: 3. v and B are perpendicular

Helical path:

If the velocity of the charge is not perpendicular to the magnetic field, we can break the velocity into two components – V11 parallel to the field and \(V_{\perp}\) perpendicular to the field.

The components v11 remains unchanged as the force \(\mathrm{q} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is perpendicular to it. In the plane perpendicular to the field, the particle traces a circle of radius \(r=\frac{m v_{\perp}}{q B}\) as given by the equation. The resultant path is a helix.

Complete analysis:

Let a particle have an initial velocity in the plane of the paper and a constant and uniform magnetic field also in the plane of the paper.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Paper And A Constant And Uniform Magnetic

The particle starts from point A1.

It completes its one revolution at A2 2nd revolution at A3 and so on. X-axis is the tangent to the helix points.

A1, A2, A3,……….all are on the x-axis. distance A1 A2 = A3 A4 = …………… = v cosθ. T = pitch where T = Period \(=\frac{\pi 2 m}{q B}\)

Let the particle’s initial position be (0,0,0) and v sinq in +y direction. Then
in x : Fx= 0, ax= 0, vx= constant = v cosθ, x = (v cosθ)t

In the y-z plane:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes In y-z plane

From the figure, it is clear that

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& y=R \sin \beta, v_y=v \sin \theta \cos \beta \\
& z=-(R-R \cos \beta) \\
& v_z=v \sin \theta \sin \beta
\end{aligned}\)

acceleration towards centre = (vsinθ)2/R = θ2R

∴ \(a_y=-\omega^2 R \sin \beta, a_z=-\omega^2 R \cos \beta\)

At any time: the position vector of the particle (or its displacement w.r.t. initial position)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}=x \hat{i}+y \hat{j}+z \hat{k}, x, y, z \text { already found }\)

Velocity \(\vec{v}=v_x \hat{i}+v_y \hat{j}+v_z \hat{k}, v_x, v_y, v_z \text { already found }\)

⇒ \(\vec{a}=a_x \hat{i}+a_y \hat{j}+a_z \hat{k}, a_x, a_y, a_z \text { already found }\)

Radius \(q(v \sin \theta) B=\frac{m(v \sin \theta)^2}{R} \quad \Rightarrow \quad R=\frac{m v \sin \theta}{q B}\)

⇒ \(\omega=\frac{v \sin \theta}{R}=\frac{q B}{m}=\frac{2 \pi}{T}=2 \pi f .\)

Charged Particle in \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} and \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

When a charged particle moves with velocity in an electric field and magnetic field then. The net force experienced by it is given by the following equation.

⇒ \(\vec{F}=q \vec{E}+q(\vec{V} \times \vec{B})\)

Combine force is known as Lorentz force

image-

In the above situation, the particle passes undeviated but its velocity will change due to the electric field. Magnetic force on it = 0.

Case 1

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} \| \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \text { and uniform } \theta \neq 0 \text {, }\) (\(\text { } \vec{E} \text { and } \vec{B}\) are constant and uniform)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes E And B Are Constsant And Uniform

⇒ \(\text { in } x: F_x=q E, a_x=\frac{q E}{m}, v_x=v_0 \cos \theta+a_x t, x=v_0 t+\frac{1}{2} a_x t^2\)

in yz plane:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes In yz Plane

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& q v_0 \sin \theta B=m\left(v_0 \sin \theta\right)^2 / R \\
& \Rightarrow \quad R=\frac{m v_0 \sin \theta}{q B}, \quad \omega=\frac{v_0 \sin \theta}{R}=\frac{q B}{m}=\frac{2 \pi}{T}=2 \pi f
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\vec{r}=\left\{\left(V_0 \cos \theta\right) t+\frac{1}{2} \frac{q E}{m} t^2\right\} \hat{i}+R \sin \omega t \hat{j}+(R-R \cos \omega t)(-\hat{k})\)

⇒ \(\vec{V}=\left(V_0 \cos \theta+\frac{q E}{m} t\right) \hat{i}+\left(V_0 \sin \theta\right) \cos \omega t \hat{j}+V_0 \sin \theta \sin \omega t(-\hat{k})\)

⇒ \(\vec{a}=\frac{q E}{m} \hat{i}+\omega^2 R[-\sin \beta \hat{j}-\cos \beta \hat{k}]\)

Magnetic force on a current-carrying wire:

B Suppose a conducting wire, carrying a current is placed in a magnetic field. Consider a small element dl of the wire (figure). The free electrons drift with a speed vd opposite to the direction of the current. The relation between the current i and the drift speed vd is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Magnetic force on a current carrying wire

Here A is the area of the cross-section of the wire and n is the number of free electrons per unit volume. Each electron experiences an average (why average?) magnetic force.

⇒ \(\vec{f}=-e \vec{v}_d \times \vec{B}\)

The number of Free electrons in the small element is considered in nAdl. Thus, the magnetic force on the wire of length dl is

⇒ \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=(\mathrm{nAd} \ell)\left(-\mathrm{e} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{d}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\right)\)

If we denote the length dl along the direction of the current, the above equation becomes

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& d \vec{F}=n A e v_d \vec{d} \ell \vec{B} \\
& d \vec{F}=i d \vec{\ell} \times \vec{B} .
\end{aligned}\)

using 1

The Quanity \(\text { id } \vec{\ell}\) is called a current element.

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{F_{\text {res }}}=\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dF}}=\int \mathrm{id} \vec{\ell} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=\mathrm{i} \int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

Since is the same at all points of the wire.

B If is uniform then \(\vec{F}_{\text {res }}=\mathrm{i}\left(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} \ell}\right) \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{F_{\text {res }}}=\mathrm{i} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

Here \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}}=\int \mathrm{d} \vec{\ell}\) = vector length of the wire = vector connecting the endpoints of the wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Vector length of the wire

The direction of magnetic force is perpendicular to the plane of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}} \text { and } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) according to right-hand screw rule. The following two rules are used in determining the direction of the magnetic force.

Right-hand palm rule: If the right hand and the palm are stretched such that the thumb points in the direction of current and the stretched fingers in the direction of the magnetic field, then the force on the conductor will be perpendicular to the palm in the outward direction.

Fleming left-hand rule: If the thumb, forefinger, and central finger of the left hand are stretched such that the first finger points in the direction of the magnetic field and the central finger in the direction of current, then the thumb will point in the direction of force acting on the conductor.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Fleming left hand rule

Note: f a current loop of any shape is placed in a uniform

⇒ \(\left.\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \text { then } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{\text {res }}}\right)_{\text {magnetic }}\) on it=0 (since \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}}=0\)

Point of application of magnetic force:

On a straight current-carrying wire the magnetic force in a uniform magnetic field can be assumed to be acting at its midpoint.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Point Of Application Of Magnetic Force

This can be used for the calculation of torque.

Example 16. A wire is bent in the form of an equilateral triangle PQR of side 10 cm and carries a current of 5.0 A. It is placed in a magnetic field B of magnitude 2.0 T directed perpendicularly to the plane of the loop. Find the forces on the three sides of the triangle.
Solution: Suppose the field and the current have directions as shown in the figure. The force on PQ is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Current Have Directions

⇒ \(\vec{F}_1=\overrightarrow{i \ell} \times \vec{B} \quad \text { or, } \quad F_1=5.0 \mathrm{~A} \times 10 \mathrm{~cm} \times 2.0 \mathrm{~T}=1.0 \mathrm{~N}\)

The rule of vector product shows that the force F 1 is perpendicular to PQ and is directed towards the inside of the triangle. The forces \(\vec{F}_2 \text { and } \vec{F}_3\) on QR and RP can also be obtained similarly. Both the forces are 1.0 N
directed perpendicularly to the respective sides and towards the inside of the triangle.

The three forces \(\vec{F}_1, \vec{F}_2 \text { and } \vec{F}_3\) will have zero resultant so that there is no net magnetic force on the triangle. This result can be generalized. Any closed current loop, placed in a homogeneous magnetic field, does not experience a net magnetic force.

Example 17. Two long wires, carrying currents i1 and i2, are placed perpendicular to each other in such a way that they just avoid contact. Find the magnetic force on a small length dl of the second wire situated at a distance from the first wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Two long wires, carrying currents

Solution: The situation is shown in the figure. The magnetic field at the site of d, due to the first wire is, \(\mathrm{B}=\frac{\mu_0 i_1}{2 \pi \ell}\)

This field is perpendicular to the plane of the figure going into it. The magnetic force on the length dl is,

⇒ \(\mathrm{dF}=\mathrm{i}_2 \mathrm{~d} \ell \mathrm{B} \sin 90^{\circ}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 \mathrm{~d} \ell}{2 \pi \ell}\)

This force is parallel to the current i1.

Example 18. The figure shows two long metal rails placed horizontally and parallel to each other at a separation l. A uniform magnetic field B exists in the vertically downward direction. A wire of mass m can slide on the rails. The rails are connected to a constant current source which drives a current i in the circuit. The friction coefficient between the rails and the wire is u.

  1. What soluble minimum value can prevent the wire from sliding on the rails?
  2. Describe the motion of the wire if the value of u is half the value found in the previous part.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes the motion of the wire if the value of u

The force on the wire due to the magnetic field is

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{i} \vec{\ell} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \quad \text { or, } \quad \mathrm{F}=\mathrm{i} \ell \mathrm{B}\)

It acts towards the right in the given figure. If the wire does not slide on the rails, the force of friction by the rails should be equal to F. If u0 is the minimum coefficient of friction which can prevent sliding, this force is also equal to u0 mg. Thus,

⇒ \(\mu_0 \mathrm{mg}=\mathrm{i} \ell \mathrm{B} \quad \text { or, } \quad \mu_0=\frac{\mathrm{i} \ell \mathrm{B}}{\mathrm{mg}}\)

If the friction coefficient is \(\mu=\frac{\mu_0}{2}=\frac{i \ell B}{2 \mathrm{mg}}\) the wire will slide towards right. The frictional force by the rails is

⇒ \(f=\mu \mathrm{mg}=\frac{\mathrm{i} \ell \mathrm{B}}{2}\) towards left.

The resultant force is \(\mathrm{i} \ell \mathrm{B}-\frac{\mathrm{i} / \mathrm{B}}{2}=\frac{\mathrm{i} / \mathrm{B}}{2}\) towards right. The acceleration will be \(\mathrm{a}=\frac{\mathrm{i} \ell \mathrm{B}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\) The
the wire will slide towards the right with this acceleration.

Example 19. In the figure shown a semicircular wire is placed in a uniform directed toward the right. Find the resultant magnetic force and torque on it.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes semicircular wire is placed in a uniform B

Solution: The wire is equivalent to forces on individual parts marked in the figure by and . By symmetry there will be a pair of forces forming couples.

⇒ \(\tau=\int_0^{\pi / 2} i(R d \theta) B \sin (90-\theta) \cdot 2 R \cos \theta\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The wire is equivalent

⇒ \(\tau=\frac{i \pi R^2}{2} B \quad \Rightarrow \quad \vec{\tau}=\frac{i \pi R^2}{2} B(-\hat{j})\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Forces On Individual Parts

Example 20. Find the resultant magnetic force and torque on the loop

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The resultant magnetic force

Solution: \(\overrightarrow{F_{\text {res }}}=0 \text {, }\) (since loop) and \(\vec{\tau}=i \pi R^2 B(-\hat{j})\) using the above method.

Example 21. In the figure shown find the resultant magnetic force and torque about ‘C’, and ‘P’.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Resultant Magnetic Force And Torque About ‘C’, and ‘P’.

Solution:

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{F}=\mathrm{I} \ell_{\mathrm{eq}} \mathrm{B} \\
& \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\text {nett }}=\mathrm{I} .2 \mathrm{R} . \mathrm{B}
\end{aligned}\)

since the wire is equivalent to

Force on each element is radially outward: tc = 0 point about

 

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Force On Each Element Is Radially Outwards

Example 22. Prove that magnetic force per unit length on each of the infinitely long w ire due to each other is \(\mu_0 I_1 I_2 / 2 \pi d\). Here it is attractive also.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The magnetic Force Per Unit Legth On Each Of The Infinitely wire

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The magnetic Force Per Unit Legth On Each Of The Infinitely wire.

on (2), B due to 1= \(=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}_1}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}} \otimes\)

therefore F on (2) on 1 m length

⇒ \(=I_2 \cdot \frac{\mu_0 I_1}{2 \pi d} \cdot 1\) towards left it is attractive

⇒ \(=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}_1 \mathrm{I}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\) (hence proved)

Similarly on the other wire also.

Note:

Definition of ampere (the fundamental unit of current) using the above formula.

If I1 = I2 = 1A, d = 1m then F = 2 × 10–7 N

“When two very long wires carrying equal currents and separated by 1m distance exert on
each other a magnetic force of 2 × 10–7 N on 1m length then the current is 1 ampere.”

The above formula can also be applied if one wire is infinitely long and the other is of finite length. In this case, the force per unit length on each wire will not be the same.

Force per unit length on \(P Q=\frac{\mu_0 I_1 I_2}{2 \pi d}\) (attractive)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Force per unit length

If the currents are in the opposite direction then the magnetic force on the wires will be repulsive.

Solved Examples

Example 23. Find the magnetic force on the loop ‘PQRS’ due to the loop wire.
Solution: \(\mathrm{F}_{\text {ras }}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}_1 \mathrm{I}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{a}} a(-\hat{\mathrm{i}})+\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}_4 \mathrm{I}_2}{2 \pi(2 \mathrm{a})} \mathrm{a}(\hat{\mathrm{i}})=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}_4 \mathrm{I}_2}{4 \pi}(-\hat{\mathrm{i}})\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Magnetic Force On The Loop ‘PQRS’ Due To The Loop Wire.

Example 24. A current loop ABCD is held fixed on the plane of the paper as shown in the figure. The arcs BC (radius = b) and DA (radius = a) of the loop are joined by two straight wires AB and. CD. A steady current I is flowing in the loop. The angle made by AB and CD at the origin O is 30º. Another straight thin wire with a steady current I1 flowing out of the plane of the paper is kept at the origin.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes A current loop ABCD

The magnitude of the magnetic field due to the loop ABCD at the origin (O) is:

  1. latex]\frac{\mu_0 I(b-a)}{24 a b}[/latex]
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{4 \pi}\left[\frac{\mathrm{b}-\mathrm{a}}{\mathrm{ab}}\right]\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 \pi}\left[2(b-a)+\frac{\pi}{3}(a+b)\right]\)
  4. Zero

Solution: Magnetic field due to loop ABCD

⇒ \(=\frac{\mu_0 1}{4 \pi}\left(\frac{\pi}{6}\right) \times\left[\frac{1}{a}-\frac{1}{b}\right]=\frac{\mu_0 1}{24}\left[\frac{b-a}{a b}\right]\)

Due to the presence of the current I1 at the origin:

  1. The forces on AD and BC are zero.
  2. The magnitude of the net force on the loop is given by \(\frac{\mu_0 I_1 I}{4 \pi}\left[2(b-a)+\frac{\pi}{3}(a+b)\right]\)
  3. The magnitude of the net force on the loop is given by \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{II}_1}{24 \mathrm{ab}}(\mathrm{b}-\mathrm{a}) \text {. }\)
  4. The forces on AB and DC are zero.

Solution: \(\vec{F}=\mathrm{i}(\vec{\ell} \times \vec{B})\)

The magnetic field due to I1 is parallel to AD and BC. So that force On AD and BC is zero.

Self-practice problems

Question 25. The force on a conductor of length l placed in a magnetic field of magnitude B and carrying in current I is given by (θ is the angle which the conductor makes with the direction of B)

  1. I l B sin θ
  2. I2lB2 sin θ
  3. IlB Cosθ
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{I}^2 \ell}{\mathrm{B}} \sin \theta\)

Answer: 1. I l B sin θ

Question 26. A charge ‘q’ moves in a region where an electric field and magnetic field both exist, then the net force on it-

  1. \(q(\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\)
  2. \(q \vec{E}+q(\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\)
  3. \(q \vec{E}+q(\vec{B} \times \vec{v})\)
  4. \(q \vec{B}+q(\vec{E} \times \vec{v})\)

Answer: 2. \(q \vec{E}+q(\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\)

Question 27. An electron moves with speed 2 × 105 m/s along the positive x-direction in the presence of a magnetic \(\vec{B}=\hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-3 \hat{k}\) induction (in tesla). The magnitude of the force experience by the electron in newtons is- (charge on the electron = 1.6 × 10–19 C)

  1. 1.18 × 10–13
  2. 1.28 × 10–13
  3. 1.6 × 10–13
  4. 1.72 × 10–13

Answer: 3. 1.6 × 10–13

Question 28. An electron (charge q coulomb) enters a magnetic field of H weber/m 2 with a velocity of v m/s in the same

  1. Direction as that of the field. The force on its electron is-
  2. Hqv newtons in the direction of the magnetic field
  3. Hqv dynes in the direction of the magnetic field
  4. Hqv newtons at a right angle to the direction of the magnetic field
  5. Zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Question 29. A long wire A carries a current of 10 amp. Another long wire B, which is parallel to A and separated by 0.1 m from A, carries a current of 5 amp. in the opposite direction to that in A. What is the magnitude and nature of the force experience per unit length of B- \(\left[\mu_0=4 \pi \times 10^{-1}\right? \text { W/amp-m] }\)

  1. Repulsive force of 10–4 N/m
  2. Attractive force of 10–4 N/m
  3. Repulsive force of 2π x 10–5 N/m
  4. Attractive force of 2π × 10–5 N/m

Answer: 1. Repulsive force of 10–4 N/m.

Torque on a current loop:

When a current-carrying coil is placed in a uniform magnetic field the net force on it is always zero.

However, as its different parts experience forces in different directions so the loop may experience a torque (or couple) depending on the orientation of the loop and the axis of rotation. For this, consider a rectangular coil in a uniform field B which is free to rotate about a vertical axis PQ and normal to the plane of the coil making an angle  with the field direction

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Torque On A Current Loop

The arms AB and CD will experience forces B(NI)b vertically up and down respectively. These two forces together will give zero net force and zero torque (as are collinear with the axis of rotation), so will not affect the motion of the coil.

Now the forces on the arms AC and BD will be BINL in the direction out of the page and into the page respectively, resulting in zero net force, but an anticlockwise couple of value \(\tau=F \times A r m=B I N L \times(b \sin \theta)\)

ie. τ = BIA sinθ with A = NLb ………….(1)

M A=  Now treating the current–carrying coil as a dipole of the moment \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}}=\mathrm{I} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) Eqn.

Can be written in vector form as \(\vec{\tau}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) \(\text { [with } \vec{M}=I \vec{A}=\text { NIA } \vec{n}\)

This is the required result and from this, it is clear that

Torque will be minimum (= 0) when sinθ = min = θ, i.e., θ = 0º, i.e. 180º i.e., the plane of the coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field i.e. normal to the coil is collinear with the field.

Torque will be maximum (= BINA) when sin = max = 1, i.e., θ = 90º i.e. the plane of the coil is parallel to the field i.e. normal to the coil is perpendicular to the field.

By analogy with dielectric or magnetic dipole in a field, in case of current–carrying in a field.

\(\mathrm{U}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \bullet \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \quad \text { with } \quad \mathrm{F}=\frac{\mathrm{dU}}{\mathrm{dr}}\)

and W = MB(1 – cosθ)
The values of U and W for different orientations of the coil in the field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The values of U and W for different orientations of the coil in the field

Instruments such as electric motors, moving coil galvanometers tangent galvanometers etc. are based on the fact that a current–carrying coil in a uniform magnetic field experiences a torque (or couple).

Example 25: A bar magnet having a magnetic moment of 2 × 10 4 JT–1 is free to rotate in a horizontal plane. A horizontal magnetic field B= 6 × 10–4 T exists in the space. The work done in taking the magnet slowly from a direction parallel to the field to a direction 60° from the field is
Solution: The work done in rotating a magnetic dipole against the torque acting on it, when placed in a magnetic field is stored inside it in the form of potential energy. When magnetic dipole is rotated from initial position θ = θ1 to final position θ = θ2, then work done = MB(cos θ1– cos θ2)

⇒ \(=\operatorname{MB}\left(1-\frac{1}{2}\right)=\frac{2 \times 10^4 \times 6 \times 10^{-4}}{2}=6 \mathrm{~J}\)

Self-practice Problems

Due to the flow of current in a circular loop of radius R, the magnetic induction produced at the center of the loop is B. The magnetic moment of the loop is [u0 = Permeability of vacuum]

  1. \(\frac{\mathrm{BR}^3}{2 \pi \mu_0}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{BR}^3}{\mu_0}\)
  3. \(\frac{\mathrm{BR}^2}{2 \pi \mu_0}\)
  4. \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{BR}^2}{\mu_0}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{BR}^3}{\mu_0}\)

Question 31. A current i flows in a circular coil of radius r. If the coil is placed in a uniform magnetic field B with its plane parallel to the field magnitude of torque act on the coil is-

  1. Zero
  2. 2πriB
  3. πr2iB
  4. 2π2iB

Answer: 3. πr2iB

Question 32. To double the torque acting on a rectangular coil of n turns, when placed in a magnetic field-

  1. The area of the coil and the magnetic induction should be doubled.
  2. The area and current through the coil should be doubled.
  3. Only the area of the coil should be doubled.
  4. Some turns are to be halved.

Answer: 3. Only the area of the coil should be doubled.

Question 33. An arbitrarily shaped closed coil is made of a wire of length L and a current ampere is flowing in it. If B the plane of the coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) The force on the coil is

  1. Zero
  2. IBl
  3. IBL
  4. \(\frac{1}{2} \text { IBL }\)

Answer: 1. Zero

Question 34. A current-carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field in four different orientations, 1,2, 3, and 4 arranged in the decreasing order of potential energy

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes A current carrying loop

  1. 1>3>2>4
  2. 1>2>3>4
  3. 1>4>2>3
  4. 3>4>1>2

Answer: 3. 1>4>2>3

Example: 26 (Read the following passage and answer the questions. They have only one correct option) In the given figure of a cyclotron, show the particle source S and the dees. A uniform magnetic field is directed up from the plane of the page. Circulating protons spiral outward within the hollow dees, gaining energy every time they cross the gap between the dees.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Oscillator

Suppose that a proton, injected by source S at the center of the cyclotron in Fig., initially moves toward a negatively charged dee. It will accelerate toward this dee and enter it. Once inside, it is shielded from the electric field by the copper walls of the dee; that is the electric field does not enter the dee.

The magnetic field, however, is not screened by the (nonmagnetic) copper dee, so the proton moves in a circular path whose radius, which depends on its speed, is given by

⇒ \(\text { Eq. } r=\frac{m v}{q B}\)

Let us assume that at the instant the proton emerges into the center gap from the first dee, the potential difference between the dees is reversed. Thus, the proton again faces a negatively charged dee and is again accelerated.

Thus, the proton again faces a negatively charged dee and is again accelerated. This process continues, the circulating proton always being in step, with the oscillations of the dee potential, until the proton has spiraled out to the edge of the dee system. There a deflector plate sends it out through a portal.

The key to the operation of the cyclotron is that the frequency f at which the proton circulates in the field (and that does not depend on its speed) must be equal to the fixed frequency fosc of the electrical oscillator, or \(\mathrm{f}=\mathrm{f}_{\text {oss }} \text { (resonance condition). }\)

This resonance condition says that, if the energy of the circulating proton is to increase, energy must be fed to it at a frequency fosc that is equal to the natural frequency f at which the proton circulates in the magnetic field.

Combining Eq. 1 and 2 allows us to write the resonance condition as \(\mathrm{qB}=2 \pi \mathrm{mf}_{\mathrm{osc}}\)

For the proton, q and m are fixed. The oscillator (we assume) is designed to work at a single fixed frequency fosc. We then “tune” the cyclotron by varying B until eq. 3 is satisfied and then many protons circulate through the magnetic field, to emerge as a beam.

Ratio of the radius of successive semi circular path

  1. \(\sqrt{1}: \sqrt{2}: \sqrt{3}: \sqrt{4}\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots\)
  2. \(\sqrt{1}: \sqrt{3}: \sqrt{5}\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots\)
  3. \(\sqrt{2}: \sqrt{4}: \sqrt{6} \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots\)
  4. \(1: 2: 3\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots\)

Solution: When the charge is accelerated by an electric field it gains energy for the first time \(K E_1=\frac{q V}{2}\)

For second time \(\mathrm{KE}_2=\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{qV}\)

For third time ,\(K E_3=\frac{5}{2} q V\)

Hence The ratio of radii are

⇒ \(r_1: r_2: r_3: \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots: \frac{\sqrt{2 m \frac{q v}{2}}}{q B}: \frac{\sqrt{2 m \frac{3}{2} q v}}{q B}: \ldots \ldots . .\)

⇒ \(r_1: r_2: r_3 \ldots \ldots \ldots:: \sqrt{1}: \sqrt{3}: \sqrt{5}\)

Change in kinetic energy of charged particle after every period is:

  1. 2qV
  2. qV
  3. 3qV
  4. None of these

Solution: In one full cycle it gets accelerated two times so change in KE = 2 qV.

If q/m for a charged particle is 106, the frequency of applied AC is 106 Hz. Then the applied magnetic field is:

(1) 2π tesla (2) π tesla (3) 2 tesla (4) can not be defined

Solution: \(f=\frac{q B}{2 \pi m} \quad \Rightarrow 10^5=\frac{10^{\circ} B}{2 \pi} \quad \Rightarrow 2 \pi T .\)

Distance traveled in each period is in the ratio of:

  1. \(\sqrt{1}+\sqrt{3}: \sqrt{5}+\sqrt{7}: \sqrt{9}+\sqrt{11}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{2}+\sqrt{3}: \sqrt{4}+\sqrt{5}: \sqrt{6}+\sqrt{7}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{1}: \sqrt{2}: \sqrt{3}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{2}: \sqrt{3}: \sqrt{4}\)

Solution: Distance traveled by particle in one time period:

⇒ \(\pi\left(r_1+r_2\right): \pi\left(r_3+r_4\right): \pi\left(r_5+r_6\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{\sqrt{2 m \frac{q V}{2}}}{q B}+\frac{\sqrt{2 m \frac{3 q V}{2}}}{q B}: \frac{\sqrt{2 m \frac{5 q V}{2}}}{q B}+\frac{\sqrt{2 m \frac{7 q V}{2}}}{q B}: \frac{\sqrt{2 m \frac{9 q V}{2}}}{q B}+\frac{\sqrt{2 m \frac{11 q V}{2}}}{q B} \ldots \ldots\)

⇒ \(S_1: S_2: S_3 \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots:(\sqrt{1}+\sqrt{3}):(\sqrt{5}+\sqrt{7}):(\sqrt{9}+\sqrt{11})\)

For a given charge particle a cyclotron can be “tuned” by :

  1. Changing applied a.c. Voltage only
  2. Changing applied a.c. Voltage and magnetic field both
  3. Changing the applied magnetic field only
  4. By changing the frequency of applied a.c.

Solution: The frequency of A.C. depends on charge and mass only so it can be tuned by magnetic field only.

Terrestrial Magnetism (Earth’s Magnetism):

Introduction :

The idea that the earth is magnetized was first suggested towards the end of the sixteenth century by Dr. William Gilbert. The origin of Earth’s magnetism is still a matter of conjecture among scientists but it is agreed upon that the Earth behaves as a magnetic dipole inclined at a small angle (11.5º) to the Earth’s axis of rotation with its south pole pointing north.

The lines of force of the earth’s magnetic field are shown in the figure which is parallel to the earth’s surface near the equator and perpendicular to it near the poles.

While discussing the magnetism of the earth one should keep in mind that:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Terrestrial Magnestism

The magnetic meridian at a place is not a line but a vertical plane passing through the axis of a freely suspended magnet, i.e., it is a plane that contains the place and the magnetic axis.

The geographical meridian at a place is a vertical plane that passes through the line joining the geographical north and south, i.e., it is a plane that contains the place and earth’s axis of rotation, i.e., the geographical axis.

The magnetic Equator is a great circle (a circle with the center at the earth’s center) on the earth’s surface which is perpendicular to the magnetic axis. The magnetic equator passing through Trivandrum in South India divides the earth into two hemispheres.

The hemisphere containing the south polarity of the earth’s magnetism is called the northern hemisphere (NHS) while the other is the southern hemisphere (SHS).

The magnetic field of the earth is not constant and changes irregularly from place to place on the surface of the earth and even at a given place it varies with time too.

Elements of the Earth’s Magnetism:

The magnetism of Earth is completely specified by the following three parameters called elements of Earth’s magnetism:

Variation or Declination θ: At a given place the angle between the geographical meridian and the magnetic meridian is called declination, i.e., at a given place it is the angle between the geographical north-south direction and the direction indicated by a magnetic compass needle,

Declination at a place is expressed at θº E or θº W depending upon whether the north pole of the compass needle lies to the east (right) or to the west (left) of the geographical north-south direction. The declination at London is 10ºW means that at London the north pole of a compass needle points 10ºW, i.e., left of the geographical north.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Variation Of Declination

Inclination or Angle of Dip Φ: It is the angle at which the direction of the resultant intensity of the earth’s magnetic field subtends with a horizontal line in the magnetic meridian at the given place.

It is the angle at which the axis of a freely suspended magnet (up or down) subtends with the horizontal in the magnetic meridian at a given place.

Here, it is worth noting that as the northern hemisphere contains the south polarity of earth’s magnetism, in it the north pole of a freely suspended magnet (or pivoted compass needle) will dip downwards, i.e., towards the earth while the opposite will take place in the southern hemisphere.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Inclination Or Angle Of Dip

The angle of dip at a place is measured by the instrument called Dip-Circle in which a magnetic needle is free to rotate in a vertical plane which can be set in any vertical direction. The angle of dip at Delhi is 42º.

Horizontal Component of Earth’s Magnetic Field BH: At a given place it is defined as the component of Earth’s magnetic field along the horizontal in the magnetic meridian. It is represented by BH and is measured with the help of a vibration or deflection magnetometer.

At Delhi, the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field is 35 μT, i.e., 0.35 G. If at a place the magnetic field of the earth is BI and the angle of dip Φ, then under figure (a).

and \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{H}}=\mathrm{B}_1 \cos \phi \\
& \mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{v}}=\mathrm{B}_1 \sin \phi
\end{aligned}\)

So that, \(\tan \phi=\frac{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{H}}}\)

And \(I=\sqrt{B_H^2+B_v^2}\) …..(2)

Self Practice Problems

Question 35. At a place, the magnitudes of the horizontal component and total intensity of the magnetic field of the earth are 0.3 and 0.6 oersted respectively. The value of the angle of dip at this place will be

  1. 60°
  2. 45°
  3. 30°

Answer: 1. 60°

Question 36. The angle of dip at a place on the earth gives-

  1. The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field.
  2. The location of the geographic meridian.
  3. The vertical component of the earth’s field.
  4. The direction of the earth’s magnetic field.

Answer: 4. The direction of the earth’s magnetic field.

Question 37. A bar magnet is placed north-south with its north pole due north. The points of zero magnetic field will be in which direction from the center of the magnet-

  1. North and south
  2. East and west
  3. Northeast and southwest
  4. Northwest and southeast

Answer: 2. East and west

Question 38. When the N-pole of a bar magnet points towards the south and the S-pole towards the north, the null points are at the-

  1. Magnetic axis
  2. Magnetic centre
  3. Perpendicular divider of magnetic axis
  4. N and s-pole

Answer: 3. Perpendicular divider of the magnetic axis

Magnetic Substances And Their Properties:

Classification of substances according to their magnetic behavior:

All substances show magnetic properties. An iron nail brought near a pole of a bar magnet is strongly attracted by it and sticks to it, Similar is the behavior of steel, cobalt, and nickel. Such substances are called ‘ferromagnetic ‘substances.

Some substances are only weakly attracted by a magnet, while some are repelled by it. They are called ‘paramagnetic’ and ‘diamagnetic ‘substances respectively. All substances, solids, liquids, and gases, fall into one or other of these classes.

Diamagnetic substance: Some substance, when placed in a magnetic field, are feebly magnetized opposite to the direction of the magnetizing field. These substances when brought close to a pole of a powerful magnet, are somewhat repelled away from the magnet. They are called ‘diamagnetic’ substances and their magnetism is called ‘diamagnetism’.

Examples of diamagnetic substances are bismuth, zinc, copper, silver, gold, lead, water, mercury, sodium chloride, nitrogen, hydrogen, etc.

Paramagnetic substances: Some substance when placed in a magnetic field, are feebly magnetized in the direction of the magnetizing field. This substance, when brought close to a pole of a powerful magnet, is attracted towards the magnet. These are called ‘paramagnetic’ substances and their magnetism is called ‘paramagnetism’.

Ferromagnetic substances: Some substance, when placed in a magnetic field, are strongly magnetized in the direction of the magnetizing field. They are attracted fast towards a magnet when brought close to either of the poles of the magnet. These are called ‘ferromagnetic’ substances and their magnetism is called ‘ferromagnetism’

Some important terms used in magnetism:

Magnetic induction:

When a piece of any substance is placed in an external magnetic field, the substance becomes magnetized. The magnetism so produced in the substance is called ‘induced magnetism’ and this phenomenon is called ‘magnetic induction’.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Some important terms used in magnetism

The number of magnetic lines of induction inside a magnetized substance crossing the unit area normal to their direction is called the magnitude of magnetic induction, or magnetic flux density, inside the substance. It is denoted by B.

Magnetic induction is a vector whose direction at any point is the direction of the magnetic line of induction at that point. The SI unit of magnetic induction is the tesla (T) or Weber/meter2 (Wb-m–2) or Newton/(amper-meter) (NA–1m–1). The CGS unit is ‘gauss’.

Intensity of magnetization (I):

The intensity of magnetization, or simply magnetization of a magnetized substance represents the extent to which the substance is magnetized.

It is defined as the magnetic moment per unit volume of the magnetized substance. It is denoted by I. Its SI unit is ampere/meter (Am–1). Numerically. I= M/V

In the case of a bar magnet, if m is the pole strength of the magnet, 2l is its magnetic length, and its area of cross-section, then

⇒ \(\mathrm{I}=\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{\mathrm{m} \times 2 \ell}{\mathrm{a} \times 2 \ell}=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{a}}\)

Thus, magnetization may also be defined as pole strength per unit area of cross-section.

Magnetic Intensity or Magnetic Field strength:

When a substance is placed in an external magnetic field, it becomes magnetized. The actual magnetic field inside the substance is the sum of the external field due to its magnetization. The (H) capability of the magnetizing field to magnetize the substance is expressed through a vector, called the ‘magnetic intensity’ of the field. It is defined through the vector relation.

⇒ \((\vec{H})=\frac{B}{\mu_0}-(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}}) \text {. }\)

Where is magnetic field induction inside the substance and is the intensity of magnetization? µ 0 is the permeability of space.

The SI unit of is the same as of, that is, ampere/meter (Am–1). The C.G .S. unit is ‘oersted’.

Magnetic permeability (µ):

The magnetic permeability of a substance is a measure of its conduction of magnetic lines of force (B) through it. It is defined as the ratio of the magnetic induction inside the magnetized substance to the magnetic intensity of the magnetizing field, that is,

⇒ \(\mu=\frac{\vec{B}}{\vec{H}} .\)

Numerically, µ = B/H.

ts SI unit is Weber/amper-metre) (Wb A–1 m –1) or \(\frac{\text { Newton }}{\text { Ampere }^2}\left(\mathrm{NA}^{-2}\right) \text {. }^2\)

Relative magnetic permeability (µr): The relative magnetic permeability of a substance is the ratio of the magnetic permeability µ of the substance to the permeability of free space µ 0, that is, \(\mu_r=\frac{\mu}{\mu_0} .\)

It is a dimensionless quantity and is equal to 1 for vacuum (by definition). Alternatively, the relative permeability of a substance is defined as the ratio of the magnetic flux density B in the substance when placed in a magnetic field and the flux density B 0 in a vacuum in the same field, that is,

⇒ \(\mu_r=\frac{B}{B_0} .\)

We can classify substances in terms of µr:

µr < 1 (diamagnetic)
µr > 1 (paramagnetic)
µr > > 1 (ferromagnetic)

Magnetic susceptibility (xm):

It is a measure of how easily a substance is magnetized in a magnetizing field. For paramagnetic and (H) diamagnetic substances, the magnetization is directly proportional to the magnetic intensity of the magnetizing field. That is.

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{I}}=\chi_{\mathrm{m}}(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{H}})\)

The constant xm is called the ‘magnetic susceptibility of the substance. It may be defined as the ratio of the intensity of magnetization to the magnetic intensity of the magnetizing field, that is, \(\chi_m=\frac{I}{H} \text {. }\)

It is a pure number because I and H have the same unit). Its value for vacuum is zero as there can be no magnetization in a vacuum. We can classify substances in terms of xm. Substances with positive values of xm are paramagnetic and those with negative values of xm are diamagnetic. For ferromagnetic substances, xm is positive and very (H) x large. However, for them, is not accurately proportional to, and so xm is not strictly constant.

Relation between Relative permeability (µ r) and magnetic susceptibility (xm): When a substance is placed in a magnetizing field, it becomes magnetized. The total magnetic flux density B within the substance is the flux density that would have been produced by the magnetizing field in vacuum plus the flux density due to the magnetization of the substance. If I am the intensity of magnetization of the substance, then, by definition, the magnetic intensity of the magnetizing field is given by –

⇒ \(H=\frac{B}{\mu_0}-I\)

Or \(\text { But } I=\chi_m H \text {, where } \chi_m\) is the susceptibility of the substance. B = µ 0 (H + I).
But I = xm H, where µ is the permeability of the substance.

⇒ \(\mu=\mu_0\left(1+\chi_m\right) \text {. }\)

or \(\frac{\mu}{\mu_0}=1+\chi_m\)

Properties of dia, para, and ferromagnetic substance: Diamagnetic substance: These substances are feebly repelled by a magnet. When placed in a magnetizing field, they are feebly magnetized in a direction opposite to that of the field.

Thus, the susceptibility Im of a diamagnetic substance is negative: Further, the flux density in a diamagnetic substance placed in a magnetizing field is slightly less than in the free space. Thus, the relative permeability µ r is less than 1.

Diamagnetic substances show the following properties.

When a rod of diamagnetic material is suspended freely between two magnetic poles, then its axis becomes perpendicular to the magnetic field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes When a rod of diamagnetic material is suspended freely between two magnetic poles

In a non-uniform magnetic field, a diamagnetic substance tends to move from the stronger to the weaker part of the field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes In a non-uniform magnetic field a diamagnetic substance

If a diamagnetic solution is poured into a U-tube and one arm of this U-tube is placed between the poles of a strong magnet, the level of the solution in that arm is depressed.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes If a paramagnetic solution is poured in a U-tube

A diamagnetic gas when allowed to ascend in between the poles of a magnet spreads across the field.

The susceptibility of a diamagnetic substance is independent of temperature. Paramagnetic substance: These substances are feebly attracted by a magnet. When placed in a magnetizing field, they are feebly magnetized in the direction of the field. T

Thus, they have a positive susceptibility xm The relative permeability µ r for paramagnetics is slightly greater than 1:

When a rod of paramagnetic material is suspended freely between two magnetic poles, then its axis becomes parallel to the magnetic field The poles produced at the ends of the rod are opposite to the nearer magnetic poles.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes When a rod of paramagnetic material is suspended freely between two magnetic poles

In a non-uniform magnetic field, the paramagnetic substances tend to move from the weaker to the stronger part of the magnetic field.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes In a non-uniform magnetic field a diamagnetic substance

If a paramagnetic solution is poured into a U-tube and one arm of the U-tube is placed between two strong poles, the level of the solution in that arm rises.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes If a paramagnetic solution is poured in a U-tube

A paramagnetic gas when allowed to ascend between the pole-pieces of a magnet, spreads along the field.

The susceptibility of a paramagnetic substance varies inversely to the kelvin temperature of the substance, that is, \(\chi_m \propto \frac{1}{T}\)

This is known as Curie’s law.

Ferromagnetic substances: These substances which are strongly attracted by a magnet, show all the properties of a paramagnetic substance to a much higher degree.

For example, they are strongly magnetized in the relatively weak magnetizing field in the same direction as the field. They have relative permeabilities of the order of hundreds and thousands. Similarly, the susceptibilities of ferromagnetic have large positive values.

Curie temperature: Ferromagnetism decreases with rise in temperature. If we heat a ferromagnetic substance, then at a definite temperature the ferromagnetic property of the substance “suddenly” disappears and the substance becomes paramagnetic.

The temperature above which a ferromagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic is called the’ Curie temperature’ of the substance. The curie temperature of iron is 770ºC and that of nickel is 358ºC.

Explanation of Dia-, para- and ferromagnetism based on the atomic model of magnetism:

The diamagnetic, paramagnetic, and ferromagnetic behavior of substances can be explained based on the atomic model, we know that matter is made up of atoms.

Each atom of any substance has a positively charged nucleus at its center around which electrons revolve in various discrete orbits.

Each revolving electron is equivalent to a tiny current loop (or magnetic dipole) and gives a dipole moment to the atom.

Besides this, each electron “spins” about its axis and this spin also produces a magnetic dipole moment. However, most of the magnetic moment of the atom is produced by electron spin, the contribution of the orbital revolution is very small.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes paramagnetic and ferromagnetic

Explanation of Diamagnetism: The property of diamagnetism is generally found is those substances whose atoms, or molecules, have an “even’ number of electrons that form pairs. The direction of the spin of one electron is opposite to that of the other. So, the magnetic moment of one electron is neutralized by that of the other.

As such, the net magnetic moment of an atom of a diamagnetic substance is zero. Diamagnetism is temperature-independent.

Explanation of paramagnetism:

The property of paramagnetism is found in a substance whose atoms, or molecules, have an excess of electrons spinning in the same direction. Hence atoms of paramagnetic substance have a permanent magnetic moment and behave like tiny bar-magnets.

Even then the paramagnetic substances do not exhibit any magnetic effect in the absence of an external magnetic field. The reason is that the atomic magnets are randomly oriented so the magnetic moment of the bulk of the substance remains zero.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Explanation Of Paramagnetism

Paramagnetism is temperature-dependent:

Curie’s Law: In 1895, Curie discovered experimentally that the magnetization I (magnetic moment per unit volume) of a paramagnetic substance is directly proportional to the magnetic intensity H of the magnetizing field and inversely proportional to the kelvin temperature T. That is \(I=C\left(\frac{H}{T}\right) \text {, }\)

where C is constant. This equation is known as Curie’s law and the constant C is called the Curie constant. The law, however, holds so long the ratio H/T does not become too large.

I cannot increase without limit. It approaches a maximum value corresponding to the complete alignment of all the atomic magnets constant in the substance.

Curie’s law can be expressed in an alternative form. We know that the magnetic susceptibility xm is defined as \(\chi_{\mathrm{m}}=\mathrm{I} / \mathrm{H}\)

Making this substitution in the above expression, we get \(\chi_{\mathrm{m}}=\mathrm{C} / \mathrm{T} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \chi_{\mathrm{m}} \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}} .\)

Hysteresis: Retentivity and coercivity: Hysteresis curve: When a ferromagnetic substance is placed in a magnetic field, it is magnetized by induction. If we vary the magnetic intensity H of the magnetizing field, the intensity of magnetization and the flux density B in the (ferromagnetic) substance do not vary linearly with H.

In other words, the susceptibility Im (= I/H) and the permeability µ = (=B/H) of the substance are not constants, but vary with H and also depend upon the history of the substance.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Hysteresis Retentivity And Coercivity

The variation in I with variation in H is shown in the above figure. The point O represents the initial unmagnetized state of the substance (I = 0) and a zero magnetic intensity (H = 0). As H is increased, I increase (non-uniformly) along OA. At A the substance acquires a state of magnetic saturation. Any further increase in H does not produce any increase in I.

If now the magnetizing field H is decreased, the magnetization I of the substance also decreases following a new path AB (not the original path AO). Thus I lag behind H. When H becomes zero, I still have a value equal to OB. The magnetization remaining in the substance when the magnetizing field is reduced to zero is called “residual magnetism”.

The power of retaining this magnetism is called the “retentivity” or the remanence of the substance. Thus, the retentivity of a substance is a measure of the magnetization remaining in the substance when the magnetizing field is removed. In figure OB represents the retentivity of the substance If now the magnetizing field H is increased in the reverse direction, the magnetization I decrease along BC, still lagging behind H, until it becomes zero at C where H equals OC.

The value OC of the magnetizing field is called the “coercive “ or coercivity” of the substance. Thus, the coercivity of a substance is a measure of the reverse magnetizing field required to destroy the residual magnetism of the substance.

As H is increased beyond OC, the substance is increasingly magnetized in the opposite direction along CD, at D the substance is again magnetically saturated.

By taking H back from its maximum negative value (through zero) to its original maximum positive value, a symmetrical curve DEFA is obtained. At points B and E where the substance is magnetized in the absence of any external magnetizing field, it is said to be a “permanent magnet”.

It is thus found that the magnetization I (or of B) behind H is called “hysteresis”. The closed curve ABCDEFA which represents a cycle of magnetization of the substance is known as the “hysteresis curve (or loop)” of the substance. On repeating the process, the same closed curve is traced again but the portion OA is never obtained.

Hysteresis loss: A ferromagnetic substance consists of local regions called “domains”, each of which is spontaneously magnetized. In an unmagnetised substance the directions of magnetization in different domains are different so that, on average, the resultant magnetization is zero. It can be proved that the energy lost per unit volume of a substance in a complete cycle of magnetization is equal to the area of the hysteresis loop (I-Hcurve).

Difference in magnetic properties of soft iron and steel: A comparison of the magnetic properties of ferromagnetic substances can be made by the comparison of the shapes and sizes of their hysteresis loops.

In the figure are shown hystersis loops of soft iron and steel for the same values of I and H. We can draw the following conclusions regarding the magnetic properties of this substance from these loops.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Difference In magnetic Properties of Soft Iron And Steel

The retentivity of soft iron (OB’) is greater than the retentivity of steel (OB).

The coercivity of soft iron (OC’) is less than the coercivity of steel (OC).

The hysteresis loss in soft iron is smaller than that in steel because the area of the soft iron is smaller than that of steel.

Curves between magnetic flux density B and magnetizing field H would reveal that the permeability of soft iron is greater than that of steel.

Section of magnetic materials:

The choice of a magnetic material for making a permanent magnet, electromagnet, core of transformer, or diaphragm of telephone earpiece can be decided from the hysteresis curve of the material.

Permanent magnets :

The material for a permanent magnet should have high retentivity so that the magnet is strong, and high coercivity so that the magnetization is not wiped out by stray external fields, mechanical ill-treatment, and temperature changes.

The hysteresis loss is immaterial because the material in this case is never put to cyclic changes of magnetization.

From these considerations, permanent magnets are made of steel. The fact that the retentivity of soft iron is a little greater than that of steel is outweighed by its much smaller coercivity, which makes it very easy to demagnetize.

Electromagnets: The material for the cores of electromagnets should have high permeability (or high susceptibility), especially at low magnetizing fields, and a high retentivity. Soft iron is a suitable material for electromagnets).

Transformer cores and telephone diaphragms: In these cases, the material goes through complete cycles of magnetization continuously. The material must therefore have a low hysteresis loss to have less dissipation of energy and hence a small heating of the material (otherwise the insulation of windings may break), a high permeability (to obtain a large flux density at low field), and a high specific resistance (to reduce eddy current loses).

Soft -iron is used for making transformer cores and telephone diaphragms: More effective alloys have now been developed for transformer cores. They are permalloys, mumetals, etc.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Comparison Chart of Dia, Para and Ferromagnetism

Electromagnet:

If we place a soft-iron rod in the solenoid, the magnetism of the solenoid increases hundreds of times. Then the solenoid is called an ‘electromagnet’. It is a temporary magnet.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Elecromagnet

An electromagnet is made by winding closely many turns of insulated copper wire over a soft-iron straight rod or a horse-shoe rod. On passing current through this solenoid, a magnetic field is produced in the space within the solenoid.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Horse Shoe Rod

Example 27: A magnetizing field of 1600 Am–1 produces a magnetic flux of 2.4 × 10–5 wb in an iron bar of cross-sectional area 0.2cm2. Calculate the permeability and susceptibility of the bar.

Solution: \(\mathrm{B}=\frac{\Phi}{\mathrm{A}}=\frac{2.4 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~Wb}}{0.2 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~m}^2}=1.2 \mathrm{~Wb} / \mathrm{m}^2=1.2 \mathrm{~N} \mathrm{~A}^{-1} \mathrm{~m}^{-1} \text {. }\)

The magnetizing field (or magnetic intensity) H is 1600 Am – 1. Therefore, the magnetic permeability is given by

⇒ \(\mu=\frac{B}{H}=\frac{1.2 \mathrm{NA}^{-1} \mathrm{~m}^{-1}}{1600 \mathrm{Am}^{-1}}=7.5 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~N} / \mathrm{A}^2 \text {. }\)

Now, from the relation \(\mu=\mu_0\left(1+\chi_m\right)\) the susceptibility is given by \(\chi_m=\frac{\mu}{\mu_0}-1 .\) We known that µ 0 = 4π × 10 – 7 N/A2

therefore \(\chi_{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{7.5 \times 10^{-4}}{4 \times 3.14 \times 10^{-7}}-1=596 .\)

Example 28. The core of the toroid of 3000 turns has inner and outer radii of 11 cm and 12 cm respectively. A current of 0.6 A produces a magnetic field of 2.5 T in the core. Compute the relative permeability of the core. (µ 0 = 4π × 10–7 T m A – 1).

Solution: The magnetic field in the space enclosed by the windings of a toroid carrying a current I 0 is µ0 n i0 where n is the number of turns per unit length of the toroid and µ0 is the permeability of free space. If the space is filled by a core of some material of permeability µ, then the field is given by B = µ n i0 But µ = µ 0ur, where µ r is the relative permeability of the core material. Thus,

⇒ \(B=\mu_0 u_r n i_0 \quad \text { or } \quad \mu_r=\frac{B}{\mu_0 n i_0}\)

Here B= 2.5T, i0= 0.7 A and n \(\frac{3000}{2 \pi r} m^{-1} \text {, }\) where r is the mean radius of the toroid \(\left(\mathrm{r}=\frac{11+12}{2}=11.5 \mathrm{~cm} 11.5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)\)

Thus, \(\mu_r=\frac{2.5}{\left(4 \pi \times 10^{-7}\right) \times\left(3000 / 2 \pi \times 11.5 \times 10^{-2}\right) \times 0.7}=\frac{2.5 \times 11.5 \times 10^{-2}}{2 \times 10^{-7} \times 3000 \times 0.7}\)

µr = 684.5

Self Practice Problems

Question 39. A ferromagnetic material is heated above its curie temperature. Which one is a correct statement-

  1. Ferromagnetic domains are perfectly arranged.
  2. Ferromagnetic domains become random.
  3. Ferromagnetic domains are not influenced.
  4. Ferromagnetic material changes itself into diamagnetic material.

Answer: 2. Ferromagnetic domains become random.

Question 40. To protect a sensitive instrument from external magnetic jerks, it should be placed in a container made of-

  1. Nonmagnetic substance
  2. Diamagnetic substance
  3. Paramagnetic substance
  4. Ferromagnetic substance

Answer: 4. Ferromagnetic substance

Question 41. The ratio of the intensity of magnetization and magnetic field intensity is known as

  1. Permeability
  2. Magnetic flux
  3. Magnetic susceptibility
  4. Relative Permeability

Answer: 3. Magnetic susceptibility

Question 42. If a magnetic material, moves from stronger to weaker parts of a magnetic field, then it is known as

  1. Diamagnetic
  2. Paramagnetic
  3. Ferromagnetic
  4. Anti-ferromagnetic

Answer: 1. Diamagnetic

Question 43. The susceptibility of a magnetic substance is found to depend on temperature and the strength of the magnetizing field. The material is a-

  1. Diamagnet
  2. Ferromagnet
  3. Paramagnet
  4. Superconductor

Answer: 2. Ferromagnet

Question 44. Property possessed by ferromagnetic substance only is-

  1. Attracting magnetic substance
  2. Hysteresis
  3. Susceptibility independent of temperature
  4. Directional property

Answer: 2. Hysteresis

Solved Miscellaneous Problems

Problem 1. A bar magnet has a pole strength of 3.6 A-m and a magnetic length of 8 cm. Find the magnetic field at (a) a point on the axis at a distance of 6 cm from the center towards the north pole and (b) a point on the perpendicular bisector at the same distance.
Answer: 8.6 × 10–4 T; 7.7 × 10–5 T.

M = 3.6 × 8 × 102 A.m2

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 \mathrm{Mr}}{\left(\mathrm{r}^2-\mathrm{a}^2\right)^2}=8.6 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~T} \text {. }\)

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{M}{\left(r^2+a^2\right)^{3 / 2}}=7.7 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T}\)

Problem 2. A loop in the shape of an equilateral triangle of side ‘a’ carries a current as shown in the figure. Find out the magnetic field at the center ‘C’ of the triangle.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes The Magnetic Field At The Centre ‘C’ Of The Triangle

Solution: B = B1 +B2 + B3 = 3B1

⇒ \(=3 \frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \times \frac{i}{\left(\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{3}}\right)} \times\left(\sin 60^{\circ}+\sin 60^{\circ}\right)=\frac{9 \mu_0 i}{2 \pi a}\)

Problem 3. Two long wires are kept along the x and y axes they carry currents  &  respectively in +ve x and B +ve y directions. Find at a point (0, 0, d).
Solution: \(\vec{B}=\vec{B}_1+\vec{B}_2=\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi} \frac{\hat{i}}{d} \quad\left((-\hat{j})+\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi} \frac{i}{d}(\hat{i})=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi d}(\hat{i}-\hat{j})\right.\)

Problem 4. Find ‘B’ at center ‘C’ in the following cases:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Find ‘B’ at centre ‘C’

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Find ‘B’ at centre ‘C’.

Answer:

  1. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 R} \otimes\)
  2. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{4 \mathrm{R}}\left(1+\frac{1}{\pi}\right) \otimes\)
  3. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\left(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{\pi}\right) \otimes\)
  4. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4}\left(\frac{1}{a}+\frac{1}{b}\right) \otimes\)
  5. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4}\left(\frac{1}{a}-\frac{1}{b}\right) \otimes\)
  6. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{4}\left(\frac{1}{a}-\frac{1}{b}\right) \otimes\)
  7. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\left(1-\frac{1}{\pi}\right) \otimes\)
  8. \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\left(1+\frac{1}{\pi}\right) \odot\)
  9. \(\frac{\mu_0 I \theta}{4 \pi}\left(\frac{1}{a}-\frac{1}{b}\right) \odot\)
  10. Solution: \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R} \times \frac{1}{2}=\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 R}\)
  11. \(B=B_1+B_2=\left(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R} \times \frac{1}{2}\right)+\left(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{I}{R}\right)=\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 R}\left(1+\frac{1}{\pi}\right)\)
  12. \(B=B_1+B_2=\frac{\mu_0}{2 a} \times \frac{1}{2}+\frac{\mu_0}{2 b} \times \frac{1}{2}=\frac{\mu_0 I}{4}\left(\frac{1}{a}+\frac{1}{b}\right)\)
  13. \(B=B_1+B_2=\frac{\mu_0}{2 a} \times \frac{1}{2}+\frac{\mu_0}{2 b} \times \frac{1}{2}=\frac{\mu_0 I}{4}\left(\frac{1}{a}+\frac{1}{b}\right)\)
  14. \(B=B_1+B_2=\frac{\mu_0}{2 a} \times \frac{1}{2}+\frac{\mu_0}{2 b} \times \frac{1}{2}=\frac{\mu_0 I}{4}\left(\frac{1}{a}+\frac{1}{b}\right)\)
  15. \(B=B_1-B_2=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}-\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi R}=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}\left(1-\frac{1}{\pi}\right)\)
  16. \(B=B_1+B_2=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}+\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi R}=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}\left(1+\frac{1}{\pi}\right)\)
  17. \(B=B_1-B_2=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 a}-\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2 b} \times \frac{\theta}{2 \pi}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I} \theta}{4 \pi}\left(\frac{1}{a}-\frac{1}{b}\right)\)

Problem 5. A thin solenoid of length 0.4 m and having 500 turns of wire carries a current 1A; then find the magnetic field on the axis inside the solenoid.
Answer: 5π × 10–4 T.

⇒\(B=\mu_0 n i=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ni}}{\ell}=5 \pi \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~T} \text {. }\)

Problem 6. A charged particle of charge 2C is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity of 10 m/s. Find the magnetic force on this charge due to Earth’s magnetic field. Given vertical component of the earth = 3T and angle of dip = 37º.
Answer: 2 × 10 × 4 × 10–6 = 8 × 10–5 N towards west.

⇒ \(\tan 37^{\circ}=\frac{B_V}{B_H} \Rightarrow \quad B_H=\frac{4}{3} \times 3 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T} \quad \Rightarrow \quad F=q v B_H=8 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~N}\)

Problem 7. A particle of charge q and mass m is projected in a uniform and constant magnetic field of B v strength B. The initial velocity vector makes an angle ‘θ’ with the. Find the distance traveled by the particle in time ‘t’.
Answer: vt

The speed of the particle does not change therefore distance covered by the particle is s = vt

Problem 8. Two long wires, carrying currents i 1 and i2, are placed perpendicular to each other in such a way that they just avoid contact. Find the magnetic force on a small length dl of the second wire situated at a distance l from the first wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Two long wires

Solution: The situation is shown in the figure. The magnetic field at the site of d, due to the first wire is, \(B=\frac{\mu_0 l_1}{2 \pi \ell}\)

This field is perpendicular to the plane of the figure going into it. The magnetic force on the
length dl is

⇒ \(\mathrm{dF}=\mathrm{i}_2 \mathrm{~d} \ell \mathrm{B} \sin 90^{\circ}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{i}_1 \mathrm{i}_2 \mathrm{~d} \ell}{2 \pi \ell}\)

This force is parallel to the current i1.

Example 29: Curves in the graph shown to give, as functions of radial distance r (from the axis), the magnitude B of the magnetic field (due to individual wire) inside and outside four long wires a, b, c, and d, carrying currents that are uniformly distributed across the cross sections of the wires. Overlapping portions of the plots are indicated by double labels. All curves start from the origin.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes Curves in the graph shown give, as functions of radial distance r

Which wire has the greatest radius?

  1. a
  2. b
  3. c
  4. d

Answer: Inside the cylinder

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& B .2 \pi r=\mu_0 \cdot \frac{I}{\pi R^2} \pi r^2 \\
& \Rightarrow \quad B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi R^2} \cdot
\end{aligned}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 1 Magnetic Field Notes outside the cylinder

⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi r}\)

Inside cylinder Bα r and outside \(\mathrm{B} \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{r}}\)

So at the surface nature of the magnetic field changes. Hence clear from the graph, wire ‘c’ has the greatest radius

2. Which wire has the greatest magnitude of the magnetic field on the surface?

  1. a
  2. b
  3. c
  4. d

Answer: The magnitude of the magnetic field is maximum at the surface of wire ‘a’.

3. The current density in wire a is

  1. Greater than in wire c.
  2. Less than in wire c.
  3. Equal to that in wire c.
  4. Not comparable to that of wire c due to lack of information.

Solution: Inside the wire.

⇒ \(B(r)=\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi} \cdot \frac{I}{R^2} \cdot r=\frac{\mu_0 J r}{2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{d B}{d r}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{~J}}{2}\)

i.e slope \(\propto \mathrm{J}\)

⇒ \(\propto\) current density

It can be seen that the slope of the curve for wire A is greater than for wire C.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Chapter 11 Three Dimensional Geometry

CBSE Class 12 Maths Chapter 11 Three-Dimensional Geometry Important Questions

Question 1. The coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular drawn from the point (2, -3. 4) on the y-axis is?

  1. (2, 3, 4)
  2. (-2, -3, -4)
  3. (0,-3,0)
  4. (2,0,4)

Solution: 3. (0,-3,0)

The coordinates of the foot perpendicular on the y-axis from the points (2, -3, 4) are (0, -3, 0)

Question 2. Find the direction cosines of a line which makes equal angles with the coordinate axes.

Or,

A line passes through the point with position vector \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}}+4 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) and is in the direction of the vector \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\). Find the equation of the line in Cartesian form.

Read and Learn More CBSE Class 12 Maths Important Question and Answers

Solution:

Let the line make angles α, β, and γ with OX, OY, and OZ axes with its dc’s l, m, and n respectively

Given, \(\alpha=\beta=\gamma\)

∴ \(\ell^2+m^2+n^2=1 \Rightarrow \cos ^2 \alpha+\cos ^2 \beta+\cos ^2 \gamma=1\)

⇒ \(3 \cos ^2 \alpha=1\)

(because \(\alpha=\beta=\gamma\))

or \(\cos ^2 \alpha=\frac{1}{3} \Rightarrow \cos \alpha= \pm \frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)

∴ Direction cosines are \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}, \frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}, \frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\) or \(\frac{-1}{\sqrt{3}}, \frac{-1}{\sqrt{3}}, \frac{-1}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Or,

Since the line passes through the point (2,-1,4) and its direction ratios are 1,1,-2;

⇒ Equation of a line in cartesian form is : \(\frac{x-2}{1}=\frac{y+1}{1}=\frac{z-4}{-2}\)

Question 3. Show that the lines \(\frac{1-x}{2}=\frac{y-3}{4}=\frac{z}{-1} \text { and } \frac{x-4}{3}=\frac{2 y-2}{-4}=z-1\) are coplanar.

Solution:

Given equation of lines are \(\frac{1-x}{2}=\frac{y-3}{4}=\frac{z}{-1}\) and \(\frac{x-4}{3}=\frac{2 y-2}{-4}=z-1\)

⇒ \(\frac{x-1}{-2}=\frac{y-3}{4}=\frac{z-0}{-1} \text { and } \frac{x-4}{3}=\frac{y-1}{-2}=\frac{z-1}{1}\)

In vector form, both the lines can be expressed as : \(\vec{r}=(\hat{i}+3 \hat{j})+\lambda(-2 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-\hat{k}) \text { and } \vec{r}=(4 \hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k})+\mu(3 \hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+\hat{k})\)

On comparing it with \(\vec{\mathrm{r}}=\vec{\mathrm{a}}_1+\lambda \vec{\mathrm{b}}_1 \text { and } \vec{\mathrm{r}}=\vec{\mathrm{a}}_2+\mu \vec{\mathrm{b}}_2 \text {; }\)

⇒ \(\vec{a}_1=\hat{i}+3 \hat{j}, \vec{b}_1=-2 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-\hat{k}\),

⇒ \(\vec{a}_2=4 \hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k} \text { and } \vec{b}_2=3 \hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+\hat{k}\)

The given lines are coplanar if \(\left(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1\right) \cdot\left(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right)=0\)

Now; \(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1=(4 \hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k})-(\hat{i}+3 \hat{j})=3 \hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+\hat{k}\)

and \(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\)

= \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}\hat{i} & \hat{j} & \hat{k} \\ -2 & 4 & -1 \\ 3 & -2 & 1\end{array}\right|\)=\(\hat{i}(4-2)-\hat{j}(-2+3)+\hat{k}(4-12)=2 \hat{i}-\hat{j}-8 \hat{k}\)

Now, \(\left(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1\right) \cdot\left(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right)=(3 \hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+\hat{k}) \cdot(2 \hat{i}-\hat{j}-8 \hat{k})\)=6+2-8=0

Hence, both lines are coplanar.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Chapter 11

Question 4. Find the shortest distance between the following lines: r = \(3 \hat{i}+5 \hat{j}+7 \hat{k}+\lambda(\hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+\hat{k}) \text { and } \vec{r}=(-\hat{i}-\hat{j}-\hat{k})+\mu(7 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}+\hat{k})\).

Solution:

Given lines are: \(\vec{r}=3 \hat{i}+5 \hat{j}+7 \hat{k}+\lambda(\hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+\hat{k})\)

and \(\vec{r}=(-\hat{i}-\hat{j}-\hat{k})+\mu(7 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}+\hat{k})\)

⇒ \(\vec{a}_1=3 \hat{i}+5 \hat{j}+7 \hat{k}, \vec{b}_1=\hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+\hat{k}\)

⇒ \(\vec{a}_2=-\hat{i}-\hat{j}-\hat{k}, \vec{b}_2=7 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}+\hat{k}\)

Now; \(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1=-4 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}-8 \hat{k}, \vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\)

= \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}
\hat{i} & \hat{j} & \hat{k} \\
1 & -2 & 1 \\
7 & -6 & 1
\end{array}\right|=4 \hat{i}+6 \hat{j}+8 \hat{k}\)

∴ distance between lines is given by d = \(\left|\frac{\left(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1\right) \cdot\left(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right)}{\left|\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right|}\right|\)

⇒ d = \(\left|\frac{(-4 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}-8 \hat{k}) \cdot(4 \hat{i}+6 \hat{j}+8 \hat{k})}{|4 \hat{i}+6 \hat{j}+8 \hat{k}|}\right|=\left|\frac{-16-36-64}{\sqrt{16+36+64}}\right|\)

or d = \(\frac{116}{\sqrt{116}}=\sqrt{116}\) units

Question 5. Find the shortest distance between the lines: \(\vec{i}=2 \hat{i}-\hat{j}+\hat{k}+\lambda(3 \hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k}) \text { and } \vec{r}=3 \hat{i}+2 \hat{j}-4 \hat{k}+\mu(4 \hat{i}-\hat{j}+3 \hat{k})\)

Solution:

Given lines are: \(\vec{i}=2 \hat{i}-\hat{j}+\hat{k}+\lambda(3 \hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k}) \text { and } \vec{r}=3 \hat{i}+2 \hat{j}-4 \hat{k}+\mu(4 \hat{i}-\hat{j}+3 \hat{k})\)

Here; \(\vec{a}_1=2 \hat{i}-\hat{j}+\hat{k}, \vec{b}_1=3 \hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k}, \vec{a}_2=3 \hat{i}+2 \hat{j}-4 \hat{k}, \vec{b}_2=4 \hat{i}-\hat{j}+3 \hat{k}\)

⇒ \(\left(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1\right)=\hat{i}+3 \hat{j}-5 \hat{k} \text { and } \vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2=\left|\begin{array}{ccc}
\hat{i} & \hat{j} & \hat{k} \\
3 & -2 & 5 \\
4 & -1 & 3
\end{array}\right|\)

⇒ \(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2=-\hat{i}+11 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k}\)

∴ \(\left|\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right|=\sqrt{1+121+25}=\sqrt{147}\)

⇒ The shortest distance b/w given lines is:

S.D. = \(\left|\frac{\left(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1\right) \cdot\left(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right)}{\left|\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right|}\right|\)

= \(\left|\frac{(\hat{i}+3 \hat{j}-5 \hat{k}) \cdot(-\hat{i}+11 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k})}{\sqrt{147}}\right|\)

= \(\left|\frac{-1+33-25}{\sqrt{147}}\right|=\frac{7}{\sqrt{147}}\) units

Question 6. Find the shortest distance between the lines \(\vec{\mathrm{r}}=(4 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-\hat{\mathrm{j}})+\lambda(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}-3 \hat{\mathrm{k}})\) and \(\vec{r}=(\hat{i}-\hat{j}+2 \hat{k})+\mu(2 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-5 \hat{k})\).

Solution:

Equation of lines are Equation of lines are \(\vec{r}=(4 \hat{i}-\hat{j})+\lambda(\hat{i}+2 \hat{j}-3 \hat{k})\) and \(\vec{r}=(\hat{i}-\hat{j}+2 \hat{k})+\mu(2 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-5 \hat{k})\)

where \(\vec{a}_1=4 \hat{i}-\hat{j}, \vec{b}_1=\hat{i}+2 \hat{j}-3 \hat{k}\), \(\vec{a}_2=\hat{i}-\hat{j}+2 \hat{k}, \vec{b}_2=2 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-5 \hat{k}\)

⇒ \(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1=-3 \hat{i}+2 \hat{k} \text { and } \vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\)

= \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}
\hat{i} & \hat{j} & \hat{k} \\
1 & 2 & -3 \\
2 & 4 & -5
\end{array}\right|\)

∴ \(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2=2 \hat{i}-\hat{j} \Rightarrow\left|\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right|=\sqrt{5}\)

⇒ Required S.D. = \(\left|\frac{\left(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1\right) \cdot\left(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right)}{\left|\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right|}\right|=\left|\frac{(-3 \hat{i}+2 k) \cdot(2 \hat{i}-\hat{j})}{\sqrt{5}}\right|=\left|\frac{-6}{\sqrt{5}}\right|=\frac{6}{\sqrt{5}}\) units

Question 7. Find the shortest distance between the following lines: \(\frac{x+1}{7}=\frac{y+1}{-6}=\frac{z+1}{1}\) and \(\frac{x-3}{1}=\frac{y-5}{-2}=\frac{z-7}{1}\)

Solution:

The given lines are \(\frac{x+1}{7}=\frac{y+1}{-6}=\frac{z+1}{1}\)….(1)

and \(\frac{x-3}{1}=\frac{y-5}{-2}=\frac{z-7}{1}\)….(2)

Line (1) passes through points (-1, -1, -1) with its Dr’s 7, -6, 1, and line (2) passes through points (3, 5, 7) with its Dr’s 1,-2, 1

So, vector equation of lines (1) and (2) are: \(\vec{r}_1=-\hat{i}-\hat{j}-\hat{k}+\lambda \cdot(7 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}+\hat{k}) \text { and } \vec{r}_2=3 \hat{i}+5 \hat{j}+7 \hat{k}+\mu(\hat{i}-2 \hat{j}+\hat{k})\)

which are of the form: \(\vec{r}_1=\vec{a}_1+\lambda \vec{b}_1 \text { and } \vec{r}_2=\vec{a}_2+\mu \vec{b}_2\)

Here; \(\vec{a}_1=-\hat{i}-\hat{j}-\hat{k}, \vec{b}_1=7 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}+\hat{k} \text {, }\)

⇒ \(\vec{\mathrm{a}}_2=3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+7 \hat{\mathrm{k}}, \quad \vec{\mathrm{b}}_2=\hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)

⇒ \(\vec{\mathrm{a}}_2-\vec{\mathrm{a}}_1=4 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+6 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+8 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)

and \(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2=\left|\begin{array}{ccc}\hat{i} & \hat{j} & \hat{k} \\ 7 & -6 & 1 \\ 1 & -2 & 1\end{array}\right|=-4 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}-8 \hat{k}\)

⇒ \(\left|\vec{\mathrm{b}}_1 \times \vec{\mathrm{b}}_2\right|=\sqrt{(-4)^2+(-6)^2+(-8)^2}=2 \sqrt{29}\)

∴ The shortest distance between given lines is:

S.D. = \(\left|\frac{\left(\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right) \cdot\left(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1\right)}{\left|\vec{b}_1 \times \vec{b}_2\right|}\right|=\left|\frac{(-4 \hat{i}-6 \hat{j}-8 \hat{k}) \cdot(4 \hat{i}+6 \hat{j}+8 \hat{k})}{2 \sqrt{29}}\right|\)

= \(\frac{116}{2 \sqrt{29}}=\frac{58}{\sqrt{29}}=2 \sqrt{29}\) units

CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023

CBSE Class 12 Maths Multiple Choice Questions And Answers

Question 1. If \(\mathrm{A}=\left[\begin{array}{ll}
0 & 1 \\
0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)
, then A is equal to

  1. \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}0 & 1 \\ 0 & 0\end{array}\right]\)
  2. \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}0 & 2023 \\ 0 & 0\end{array}\right]\)
  3. \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}0 & 0 \\ 0 & 0\end{array}\right]\)
  4. \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}2023 & 0 \\ 0 & 2023\end{array}\right]\)

Solution: 3. \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}0 & 0 \\ 0 & 0\end{array}\right]\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{A}=\left[\begin{array}{ll}
0 & 1 \\
0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{A}^2=\mathrm{A} \times \mathrm{A}=\left[\begin{array}{ll}
0 & 1 \\
0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\left[\begin{array}{ll}
0 & 1 \\
0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)

= \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
0 & 0 \\
0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{A}^{2023} = [latex]\mathrm{A}^2 \times \mathrm{A}^{2021}=\left[\begin{array}{ll}
0 & 0 \\
0 & 0
\end{array}\right] \cdot \mathrm{A}^{2021}=\left[\begin{array}{ll}
0 & 0 \\
0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 2. If \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
2 & 0 \\
5 & 4
\end{array}\right]\)
= P + Q, where P is symmetric and Q is a skew-symmetric matrix, then Q is equal to

  1. \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}2 & 5 / 2 \\ 5 / 2 & 4\end{array}\right]\)
  2. \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}0 & -5 / 2 \\ 5 / 2 & 0\end{array}\right]\)
  3. \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}0 & 5 / 2 \\ -5 / 2 & 0\end{array}\right]\)
  4. \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}2 & -5 / 2 \\ 5 / 2 & 4\end{array}\right]\)

Solution: 2. \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}0 & -5 / 2 \\ 5 / 2 & 0\end{array}\right]\)

⇒ \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
2 & 0 \\
5 & 4
\end{array}\right]=\mathrm{P}+\mathrm{Q}\)

Let \(\mathrm{A}=\left[\begin{array}{ll}
2 & 0 \\
5 & 4
\end{array}\right]\)

A = \(\mathrm{P}+\mathrm{Q} \Rightarrow \mathrm{A}=\frac{1}{2}\left(\mathrm{~A}+\mathrm{A}^{\prime}\right)+\frac{1}{2}\left(\mathrm{~A}-\mathrm{A}^{\prime}\right)\)

∴ Q = \(\frac{1}{2}\left(\mathrm{~A}-\mathrm{A}^{\prime}\right)\)

= \(\frac{1}{2}\left\{\left[\begin{array}{ll}
2 & 0 \\
5 & 4
\end{array}\right]-\left[\begin{array}{ll}
2 & 5 \\
0 & 4
\end{array}\right]\right\}=\frac{1}{2}\left[\begin{array}{cc}
0 & -5 \\
5 & 0
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}
0 & -5 / 2 \\
5 / 2 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 3. If \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 2 & 1 \\
2 & 3 & 1 \\
3 & a & 1
\end{array}\right]\)
 is a non-singular matrix and a ∈ A, then the set A is

  1. R
  2. {0}
  3. {4}
  4. R-{4}

Solution: 4. R-{4}

For non-singular matrix Δ ≠ 0

⇒ \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 2 & 1 \\
2 & 3 & 1 \\
3 & a & 1
\end{array}\right| \neq 0 \Rightarrow a-4 \neq 0 \Rightarrow a \neq 4 \Rightarrow A=R-\{4\}\) (because a ∈ A)

Question 4. If |A| = |k A|, where A is a square matrix of order 2, then the sum of all possible values of k is

  1. 1
  2. -1
  3. 2
  4. 0

Solution: 4. 0

|A|=|k A|

|A| = \(k^2|A|\)

⇒ \(k^2=1 \Rightarrow k= \pm 1\)

The sum of all possible values of k is 1+(-1)=0

Question 5. If \(\frac{d}{dx}\) [f(0)] = 0, then f(x) is equal to

  1. \(a+b\)
  2. \(\frac{a x^2}{2}+b x\)
  3. \(\frac{a x^2}{2}+b x+c\)
  4. \(b\)

Solution: 2. \(\frac{a x^2}{2}+b x\)

⇒ \(\frac{d}{d x}[f(x)]=a x+b\)

f(x) = \(\int(a x+b) d x\)

f(x) = \(\frac{a x^2}{2}+b x+C\)

f(0)=C=0

⇒ f(x) = \(\frac{a x^2}{2}+b x\)

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023

Question 6. Degree of the differential equation \(\sin x+\cos \left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)=y^2\) is

  1. 2
  2. 1
  3. Not Defined
  4. 0

Solution: 2. 1

⇒ \(\sin x+\cos \left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)=y^2 \Rightarrow \cos \left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)=y^2-\sin x \Rightarrow \frac{d y}{d x}\)

= \(\cos ^{-1}\left(y^2-\sin x\right)\)

∴ Degree =1

Question 7. The integrating factor of the differential equation \(\left(1-y^2\right) \frac{d x}{d y}+y x=a y \cdot(-1<y<1)\) is

  1. \(\frac{1}{y^2-1}\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{y^2-1}}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{1-y^2}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-y^2}}\)

Solution: 4. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-y^2}}\)

⇒ \(\left(1-y^2\right) \frac{d x}{d y}+y x=a y,-1<y<1\)

⇒ \(\frac{d x}{d y}+x \cdot \frac{y}{1-y^2}=\frac{\text { ay }}{1-y^2}\)

This is a linear differential equation of the form, \(\frac{d x}{d y}+P x=Q\), where \(P=\frac{y}{1-y^2}\) and \(Q=\frac{a y}{1-y^2}\)

I.F. =\(\mathrm{e}^{\int \mathrm{p} \cdot \mathrm{dy}}=\mathrm{e}^{\int \frac{\mathrm{y}}{1-y^2} \mathrm{dy}}\)

Put \(1-\mathrm{y}^2=\mathrm{t} \Rightarrow-2 \mathrm{dy}=\mathrm{dt} \Rightarrow \mathrm{ydy}=-\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{dt}\)

I.F = \(\mathrm{e}^{-\frac{1}{2} \int \frac{\mathrm{d}}{1}}=\mathrm{e}^{-\frac{1}{2} \log \mathrm{t}}=\mathrm{e}^{\log \left(\mathrm{t}^{-122}\right.}\)

∴ I.F. = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{t}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-y^2}}\)

Question 8. Unit vector along \(\overline{\mathrm{PQ}}\), where coordinates of P and Q respectively are (2, 1,-1) and (4, 4, -7), is

  1. \(2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}-6 \hat{k}\)
  2. \(-2 \hat{i}-3 \hat{j}+6 \hat{k}\)
  3. \(\frac{-2 \hat{i}}{7}-\frac{3 \hat{j}}{7}+\frac{6 \hat{k}}{7}\)
  4. \(\frac{2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}}{7}+\frac{3 \hat{\mathrm{j}}}{7}-\frac{6 \hat{\mathrm{k}}}{7}\)

Solution: 4. \(\frac{2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}}{7}+\frac{3 \hat{\mathrm{j}}}{7}-\frac{6 \hat{\mathrm{k}}}{7}\)

⇒ PQ = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OQ}}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OP}}\)

⇒ PQ = \((4 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-7 \hat{k})-(2 \hat{i}+\hat{j}-\hat{k}) \Rightarrow P Q=2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}-6 \hat{k}\)

Unit vector along \(\overrightarrow{P Q}=\frac{\overrightarrow{P Q}}{\overrightarrow{|P Q|}}=\frac{2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}-6 \hat{k}}{\sqrt{49}}=\frac{2 \hat{i}}{7}+\frac{3 \hat{j}}{7}-\frac{6 \hat{k}}{7}\)

Question 9. The position vector of the mid-point of line segment AB is \(3 \hat{i}+2 \hat{j}-3 \hat{k}\). If the position vector of point A is \(2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}-4 \hat{k}\). then the position vector of the point B is

  1. \(\frac{5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}}{2}+\frac{5 \hat{\mathrm{j}}}{2}-\frac{7 \hat{\mathrm{k}}}{2}\)
  2. \(4 \hat{i}+\hat{j}-2 \hat{k}\)
  3. \(5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \hat{\mathrm{j}}-7 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
  4. \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}}{2}-\frac{\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{2}+\frac{\hat{\mathrm{k}}}{2}\)

Solution: 2. \(4 \hat{i}+\hat{j}-2 \hat{k}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}}{2}\)

⇒ 2 \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}} \)

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023 Position vector Of The Mod Point Of Line Segment

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}=2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}} \)

= \(2(3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}-3 \hat{\mathrm{k}})-(2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{j}}-4 \hat{\mathrm{k}})\)

= \(4 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)

Question 10. Projection of vector \(2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{j}}\) on the vector \(3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}\) is

  1. 0
  2. 12
  3. \(\frac{12}{\sqrt{13}}\)
  4. \(\frac{-12}{\sqrt{13}}\)

Solution: 1. 0

Let \(\vec{a}=2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}\) and \(\vec{b}=3 \hat{i}-2 \hat{j}\)

Projection \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}}{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}|}=\frac{6-6}{\sqrt{9+4}}=\frac{0}{\sqrt{13}}=0\)

Question 11. The equation of a line passing through the point (1, 1, 1) and parallel to the z-axis is

  1. \(\frac{x}{1}=\frac{y}{1}=\frac{z}{1}\)
  2. \(\frac{x-1}{1}=\frac{y-1}{1}=\frac{z-1}{1}\)
  3. \(\frac{x}{0}=\frac{y}{0}=\frac{z-1}{1}\)
  4. \(\frac{x-1}{0}=\frac{y-1}{0}=\frac{z-1}{1}\)

Solution: 4. \(\frac{x-1}{0}=\frac{y-1}{0}=\frac{z-1}{1}\)

Equation of the line passing through (1, 1, 1) and parallel to the z-axis is \(\frac{x-1}{0}=\frac{y-1}{0}=\frac{z-1}{1}\) (Dr’s of line parallel to z-axis are 0, 0, 1)

Question 12. If the sum of numbers obtained on throwing a pair of dice is 9, then the probability that the number obtained on one of the dice is 4, is

  1. 1/9
  2. 4/9
  3. 1/18
  4. 1/2

Solution: 4. 1/2

Let E: The number obtained on one of the dice is 4.

E = {(1,4), (2, 4), (3, 4), (5, 4), (6, 4), (4, 1), (4, 2), (4, 3), (4, 5), (4, 6)}

F: Sum of numbers a pair of dice is 9 F: {(6, 3), (3, 6), (5, 4), (4, 5)}

E∩F = {(5, 4). (4, 5)}

P(E/F) = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}(\mathrm{E} \cap \mathrm{F})}{\mathrm{P}(\mathrm{F})}=\frac{\frac{2}{36}}{\frac{4}{36}}=\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 13. Anti-derivative of \(\frac{\tan x-1}{\tan x+1}\) with respect to x is

  1. \(\sec ^2\left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right)+c\)
  2. \(-\sec ^2\left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right)+c\)
  3. \(\log \left|\sec \left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right)\right|+c\)
  4. \(-\log \left|\sec \left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right)\right|+c\)

Solution: 3. \(\log \left|\sec \left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right)\right|+c\)

Let I = \(\int \frac{\tan x-1}{\tan x+1} d x=-\int \frac{1-\tan x}{1+\tan x} d x=-\int \tan \left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right) d x\)

= \(\frac{-\log \left|\sec \left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right)\right|}{-1}+C=\log \left|\sec \left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right)\right|+C\)

Question 14. If (a, b), (c, d), and (e, f) are the vertices of ΔABC and Δ denotes the area of ΔABC, then \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}
\mathrm{a} & \mathrm{c} & \mathrm{e} \\
\mathrm{b} & \mathrm{d} & \mathrm{f} \\
\mathrm{l} & \mathrm{l} & 1
\end{array}\right|\)
 is equal to

  1. 2Δ²
  2. 4Δ²

Solution: 2. 4Δ²

⇒ \(\Delta=\frac{1}{2}\left|\begin{array}{lll}
\mathrm{a} & \mathrm{b} & 1 \\
\mathrm{c} & \mathrm{d} & 1 \\
\mathrm{e} & \mathrm{f} & 1
\end{array}\right|\)

⇒ \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}
\mathrm{a} & \mathrm{b} & 1 \\
\mathrm{c} & \mathrm{d} & 1 \\
\mathrm{c} & \mathrm{f} & 1
\end{array}\right|=2 \Delta\)

⇒ \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}
\mathrm{a} & \mathrm{c} & \mathrm{c} \\
\mathrm{b} & \mathrm{d} & \mathrm{f} \\
1 & 1 & 1
\end{array}\right|=2 \Delta\)

[because |\(\mathrm{A}^{\prime}\)|= |A|]

⇒ \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}
\mathrm{a} & \mathrm{c} & \mathrm{e} \\
\mathrm{b} & \mathrm{d} & \mathrm{f} \\
\mathrm{l} & \mathrm{l} & 1
\end{array}\right|=4 \Delta^2\)

Question 15. The function f(x) = x |x| is

  1. Continuous and differentiable at x = 0.
  2. Continuous but not differentiable at x = 0.
  3. Differentiable but not continuous at x = 0.
  4. Neither differentiable nor continuous at x = 0.

Solution: 1. Continuous and differentiable at x = 0.

f(x) = \(x|x|=\left\{\begin{array}{cc}
x^2 ; x \geq 0 \\
-x^2 ; x<0
\end{array}\right.\)

⇒ \(f^{\prime}\left(0^{-}\right)=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{f(0+h)-f(0)}{h}=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{h^2-0}{h}=0 \in R\)

⇒ \(f^{\prime}\left(0^{-}\right)=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{f(0-h)-f(0)}{-h}=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{-h^2-0}{-h}=0 \in R\)

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023 Continous And Differentiable At x Is 0

∴ \(f^{\prime}\left(0^{+}\right)=f^{\prime}\left(0^{-}\right)\)

So f(x) is differentiable at x=0.

Also \(\mathrm{f}(\mathrm{x})\) is continuous at x=0

Question 16. If \(\tan \left(\frac{x+y}{x-y}\right)=k\), then \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) is equal to

  1. \(\frac{-y}{x}\)
  2. \(\frac{y}{x}\)
  3. \(\sec ^2\left(\frac{y}{x}\right)\)
  4. \(-\sec ^2\left(\frac{y}{x}\right)\)

Solution: 2. \(\frac{y}{x}\)

⇒ \(\tan \left(\frac{x+y}{x-y}\right)=k \Rightarrow \frac{x+y}{x-y}=\tan ^{-1} k\)

Differentiate with respect to x, (x-y)\(\left[1+\frac{d y}{d x}\right]-(x+y)\left[1-\frac{d y}{d x}\right]=0\)

⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}[(x-y)+(x+y)]=(x+y)-(x-y) \Rightarrow \frac{d y}{d x}=\frac{2 y}{2 x}=\frac{y}{x}\)

Question 17. The objective function Z = ax + by of an LPP has a maximum value of 42 at (4, 6) and a minimum value of 19 at (3, 2). Which of the following is true?

  1. a = 9, b = 1
  2. a = 5, b = 2
  3. a = 3, b = 5
  4. a = 5, b = 3

Solution: 3. a = 3, b = 5

Z=ax+by

Let A(4,6), B(3,2)

∵ \(Z_A=42, Z_1=19\)

⇒ 4 a+6 b=42….(1)

and 3 a+2 b=19……(2)

from Equation (1) and (2)

∴ a=3, b=5

Question 18. The corner points of the feasible region of a linear programming problem are (0, 4), (8, 0) and \(\left(\frac{20}{3}, \frac{4}{3}\right)\). If Z = 30x + 24y is the objective function, then (maximum value of Z – minimum value of Z) is equal to

  1. 40
  2. 96
  3. 120
  4. 136

Solution: Bonus

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023 Corner Points Of Feasible Regions

Zmax – Zmin = 240- 96 = 144

Statement of Assertion (A) is followed by a statement of Reason (R).

  1. Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).
  2. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A).
  3. (A) is true but (R) is false.
  4. (A) is false but (R) is true.

Question 19. Assertion (A): Maximum value of (cos-1 x)2 is π2.

Reason (R): Range of the principal value branch of \(\cos ^{-1} \mathrm{x} \text { is }\left[\frac{-\pi}{2}, \frac{\pi}{2}\right] \text {. }\)

Solution: 3. (A) is true but (R) is false.

Assertion : \(\cos ^{-1} x \in[0, \pi], \forall x \in[-1,1]\)

max. of \(\cos ^{-1} x\) is \(\pi\)

∴ max of \(v\left(\cos ^{-1} x\right)^2=\pi^2\)

Hence, Assertion is true.

Reason: The range of the principal value branch of \(\cos ^{-1} \mathrm{x}\) is \([0, \pi]\).

The reason is false.

Question 20. Assertion (A): If a line makes angle α, β, γ with the positive direction of the coordinate axes, then sin²α + sin²β + sin²β = 2

Reason (R): The sum of squares of the direction cosines of a line is 1.

Solution: 1. Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).

Assertion: \(l=\cos \alpha \cdot m=\cos \beta \cdot n=\cos \gamma\)

∵ \(l^2+m^2+n^2=1\)

∴ \(\cos ^2 \alpha+\cos ^2 \beta+\cos ^2 \gamma=1\)

⇒ \(\left(1-\sin ^2 \alpha\right)+\left(1-\sin ^2 \beta\right)+\left(1-\sin ^2 \gamma\right)=1\)

⇒ \(\sin ^2 \alpha+\sin ^2 \beta+\sin ^2 \gamma=2\)

The assertion is true.

Reason: Reason is also true as \(l^2+m^2+n^2=1\).

Both (A) and (R) are true and R is the correct explanation of A.

Very Short Answer Type Questions And Answers

Question 1. Evaluate \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\sin \frac{3 \pi}{4}\right)+\cos ^{-1}(\cos \pi)+\tan ^{-1}(1) \text {. }\)

Or,

Draw the graph of cos x, where x [0, 1]. Also, write its range.

Solution:

sin \(^{-1}\left(\sin \frac{3 \pi}{4}\right)+\cos ^{-1}(\cos \pi)+\tan ^{-1}(1)\)

= \(\sin \left(\sin \left(\pi-\frac{\pi}{4}\right)\right)+\cos ^{-1}(\cos \pi)+\tan ^{-1}(1)\) (because Range of \(\sin ^{-1} x\) is \(\frac{-\pi}{2}\), \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)

= \(\sin \left(\sin \frac{\pi}{4}\right)+\cos ^{-1}(\cos \pi)+\tan ^{-1}(1)=\frac{\pi}{4}+\pi+\frac{\pi}{4}=\frac{3 \pi}{2}\)

Or,

Let f(x) = cos-1 x, where x ∈ [-1, 0]

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023 Graph For Range

Range of f(x) is (\(\frac{\pi}{\pi}\))

Question 2. A particle moves along the curve 3y = ax’ + 1 such that at a point with x-coordinate 1, the y-coordinate is changing twice as fast at x-coordinate. Find the value of a.

Solution:

Given cure, \(3 y=a x^3+1, x=1\) and \(\frac{d y}{d t}=2 \frac{d x}{d t} \Rightarrow \frac{d y}{d x}=2\)

Now, differentiating \(3 \mathrm{y}=\mathrm{ax}^3+1\) with respect to x \(\frac{3 \mathrm{dy}}{\mathrm{dx}}=3 \mathrm{ax}^2\)

3 x 2= \(3 \mathrm{a}(1)^2\) (because x=1)

6 = 3a

∴ a = 2

Question 3. If \(\vec{a}, \vec{b}, \vec{c}\) are three non-zero unequal vectors such that \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{c}}\), yhen find the angle between \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\) – \(\vec{c}\).

Solution:

Given that, \(\vec{a} \cdot \vec{b}=\vec{a} \cdot \vec{c}\)….(1)

Let angle between \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}-\vec{c}\) be \(\theta\) then \(\cos \theta=\frac{\vec{a} \cdot(\vec{b}-\vec{c})}{|\vec{a}||\vec{b}-\vec{c}|}\)

⇒ \(\cos \theta=\frac{\vec{a} \cdot \vec{b}-\vec{a} \cdot \vec{c}}{|\vec{a}||\vec{b}-\vec{c}|}\)

∵ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}, \overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}, \overrightarrow{\mathrm{c}} \neq \overrightarrow{0} \text { and } \overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}} \neq \overrightarrow{\mathrm{c}}\)

⇒ \(\cos \theta=0=\cos \frac{\pi}{2}\) (from equation (1))

⇒ \(\theta=\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Aliter: Given that, \(\vec{a} \cdot \vec{b}=\vec{a} \cdot \vec{c}\)

⇒ \(\vec{a} \cdot(\vec{b}-\vec{c})=0\)

Since \(\vec{a}, \vec{b}, \vec{c}\) are non-zero unequal vectors

∴ \(\vec{a} \perp(\vec{b}-\vec{c})\)

Hence angle between \(\vec{a}\) and \((\vec{b}-\vec{c})\) is \(\frac{\pi}{2}\).

Question 4. Find the coordinates of points on line \(\frac{x}{1}=\frac{y-1}{2}=\frac{z+1}{2}\) which are at a distance of √11 units from the origin.

Solution:

Given line is \(\frac{x}{1}=\frac{y-1}{2}=\frac{z+1}{2}=\lambda\) (let)

Let arbitrary point on line is \(\mathrm{P}(\lambda, 2 \lambda+1,2 \lambda-1)\)

According to question \(\mathrm{OP}=\sqrt{11}\)

⇒ \(\sqrt{(\lambda-0)^2+(2 \lambda+1-0)^2+(2 \lambda-1-0)^2}=\sqrt{11}\)

⇒ \(\lambda^2+4 \lambda^2+4 \lambda+1+4 \lambda^2-4 \lambda+1=11 \Rightarrow 9 \lambda^2=9 \Rightarrow \lambda= \pm 1\)

Hence required points are (1,3,1)and (-1,-1,-3)

Question 5. If \(y=\sqrt{a x+b} \text {, prove that } y\left(\frac{d^2 y}{d x^2}\right)+\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)^2=0\)

Or,

If \(f(x)=\left\{\begin{array}{l}a x+b: 0<x \leq 1 \\ 2 x^2-x: 1<x<2\end{array}\right.\) is a differentiable function in (0, 2) then find the value of a and b.

Solution:

Given that, \(y=\sqrt{a x+b}\)….(1)

Differentiating with respect to x, \(\frac{d y}{d x}=\frac{1}{2 \sqrt{a x+b}} \times a=\frac{a}{2 y}\) [From eq.(1)]

⇒ \(2 y \frac{d y}{d x}=a \Rightarrow 2\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)^2+2 y \frac{d^2 y}{d x^2}=0\) [Again differentiating with respect to x]

⇒ \(y \frac{d^2 y}{d x^2}+\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)^2=0\)

Or,

Method-1: Given that. \(f(x)=\left\{\begin{array}{l}a x+b: 0<x \leq 1 \\ 2 x^2-x: 1<x<2\end{array}\right.\)

Every differentiable function is always continuous.

If f(x) is continuous at \(\mathrm{x}=1\) then \(\mathrm{RHL}=\mathrm{LHL}=\mathrm{f}(1)\)

R.H.L. \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 1} 2 x^2-x=1\)

f(1)=a+b

∴ a+b=1….(1)

Now, f(x) is differentiable at x=1

So, RHD = LHD

⇒ \(\left[\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dx}}\left(2 \mathrm{x}^2-\mathrm{x}\right)\right]_{\mathrm{x}=1}=\left[\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dx}}(\mathrm{ax}+\mathrm{b})\right]_{\mathrm{x}=1}\)

⇒ \((4 \mathrm{x}-1)_{\mathrm{x}=1}=\mathrm{a} \Rightarrow 4-1=\mathrm{a} \Rightarrow \mathrm{a}=3\)

3 + b = 1 [from eq.(1)]

∴ b = -2

Method-2: Given that, \(f(x)= \begin{cases}a x+b & ; 0<x \leq 1 \\ 2 x^2-x: & 1<x<2\end{cases}\)

Every differentiable function is always continuous. If f(x) is continuous at x=1 then RHL = LHL = f(1)

R.H.L. \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 1} 2 x^2-x=1\)

f(1)=a+b

∴ a+b=1….(1)

Now, f(x) is differentiable at x=1

∴ \(f^{\prime}\left(1^{-}\right)=f^{\prime}\left(1^{-}\right)\)

⇒ \(\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{f(1+h)-f(1)}{h}=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{f(1-h)-f(1)}{-h}\)

⇒ \(\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{\left\{2(1+h)^2-(1+h)\right\}-(a+b)}{h}=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{a(1-h)+b-(a+b)}{-h}\)

⇒ \(\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{2 h^2+3 h+(1-a-b)}{h}=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{-a h}{-h}\)

⇒ \(\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{h(2 h+3)+(1-a-b)}{h}=a \Rightarrow \lim _{h \rightarrow 0}(2 h+3)+\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{1-a-b}{h}=a\)

⇒ \(\lim _{h \rightarrow 0}(2 h+3)+\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} \frac{1-1}{h}=a\) [From eq.(1)]

⇒ 3 + 0 = a

⇒ a = 3 and b = -2 [From eq.(1)]

Short Answer Type Questions And Answers

Question 1. Evaluate \(\int_0^{\pi / 4}\) log(1+tan x) dx

Or,

Find \(\int \frac{d x}{\sqrt{\sin ^3 x \cos (x-\alpha)}}\)

Solution:

Let I \(=\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{4}} \log (1+\tan x) d x\)….(1)

⇒ I = \(\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{4}} \log \left[1+\tan \left(\frac{\pi}{4}-x\right)\right] d x \quad\left(\int_0^a f(x) d x=\int_0^a f(a-x) d x\right)\)

⇒ I = \(\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{4}} \log \left\{1+\frac{\tan \frac{\pi}{4}-\tan x}{1+\tan \frac{\pi}{4} \tan x}\right\} d x\)

⇒ I = \(\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{4}} \log \left\{1+\frac{1-\tan x}{1+\tan x}\right\} d x\)

⇒ I = \(\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{1}}\left\{\log \frac{2}{(1+\tan x)}\right\} d x\)

⇒ I \(=\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{4}} \log 2 d x-\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{4}} \log (1+\tan x) d x\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{I}=\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{4}} \log 2 \mathrm{dx}-\mathrm{I}\) (From (1))

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{I}=[\mathrm{x} \log 2]_9^{\frac{\pi}{4}}\)

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{I}=\frac{\pi}{4} \log 2 \Rightarrow \mathrm{I}=\frac{\pi}{8} \log 2\)

Or,

Let \(I=\int \frac{d x}{\sqrt{\sin ^3 x \cos (x-\alpha)}} \Rightarrow I=\int \frac{d x}{\sqrt{\sin ^3 x(\cos x \cdot \cos \alpha+\sin x \cdot \sin \alpha)}}\)

⇒ I = \(\int \frac{d x}{\sqrt{\sin ^4 x(\cot x \cdot \cos \alpha+\sin \alpha)}} \Rightarrow I=\int \frac{\mathrm{cosec}^2 x d x}{\sqrt{\cot x \cdot \cos \alpha+\sin \alpha}}\)

Put \(\cot x \cdot \cos \alpha+\sin \alpha=t^2 \Rightarrow-\mathrm{cosec}^2 x \cdot \cos \alpha d x=2 t d t \Rightarrow \mathrm{cosec}^2 x d x=\frac{-2 t d t}{\cos \alpha}\)

∴ I = \(-\frac{1}{\cos \alpha} \int \frac{2 \mathrm{t} d \mathrm{t}}{\sqrt{\mathrm{t}^2}} \Rightarrow \mathrm{I}=-\frac{2}{\cos \alpha} \int \mathrm{dt}=-\frac{2 \mathrm{t}}{\cos \alpha}+\mathrm{c}\)

I = \(-\frac{2}{\cos \alpha} \sqrt{\cot x \cos \alpha+\sin \alpha}+\mathrm{c} \Rightarrow \mathrm{I}=-\frac{2}{\cos \alpha} \sqrt{\frac{\cos x \cos \alpha+\sin \mathrm{x} \sin \alpha}{\sin x}}+\mathrm{c}\)

I = \(-\frac{2}{\cos \alpha} \sqrt{\frac{\cos (\mathrm{x}-\alpha)}{\sin x}}+\mathrm{c}\)

Question 2. Find \(\int e^{\cot ^{-1} x}\left(\frac{1-x+x^2}{1+x^2}\right) d x\)

Solution:

I = \(\int_{\log \sqrt{2}}^{\log \sqrt{5}} \frac{1}{\left(e^x+e^{-x}\right)\left(e^x-e^{-x}\right)} d x\)

I = \(\int_{\log \sqrt{2}}^{\log \sqrt{3}} \frac{e^{2 x}}{\left(e^{2 x}+1\right)\left(e^{2 x}-1\right)} d x\)

I = \(\int_{\log \sqrt{2}}^{\log \sqrt{3}} \frac{e^{2 x}}{\left(e^{2 x}\right)^2-1} d x\)

Put \(\mathrm{e}^{2 \mathrm{x}}=1 \Rightarrow \mathrm{e}^{2 \mathrm{x}} \mathrm{dx}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{dt}\); when \(\mathrm{x}=\log \sqrt{3}\) then t =3; when \(\mathrm{x}=\log \sqrt{2}\) then t=2

Now, \(I=\frac{1}{2} \int_2^3 \frac{d t}{t^2-1}\)

Question 4. Find the general solution of the differential equation (xy-x²)dy = y² dx

Or,

Find the general solution of the differential equation \(\left(x^2+1\right) \frac{d y}{d x}+2 x y=\sqrt{x^2+4}\)

Solution:

Given (xy-x²)dy = y² dx

⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}=\frac{y^2}{x y-x^2}\)

Put y = vx and \(\frac{d y}{d x}=v+x \frac{d v}{d x}\)

⇒ v+x \(\frac{d v}{d x}=\frac{v^2 x^2}{v x^2-x^2}\)

⇒ \(v+x \frac{d v}{d x}=\frac{v^2}{v-1}\)

⇒ \(x \frac{d v}{d x}=\frac{v^2}{v-1}-v\)

⇒ \(x \frac{d v}{d x}=\frac{v^2-v^2+v}{v-1}\)

⇒ \(x \frac{d v}{d x}=\frac{v}{v-1} \Rightarrow \frac{v-1}{v} d v=\frac{d x}{x}\)

On integrals both sides,

⇒ \(\int \frac{v-1}{v} d v=\int \frac{d x}{x} \Rightarrow \int\left(1-\frac{1}{v}\right) d v=\int \frac{d x}{x}\)

⇒ \(v-\log v=\log x+\log C\)

⇒ \(\frac{y}{x}-\log \frac{y}{x}=\log x+\log C\) (because y = vx)

⇒ \(\frac{y}{x}=\log \frac{y}{x}+\log x+\log C \Rightarrow \frac{y}{x}=\log C y\)

⇒ \(C y=e^{y / x} \Rightarrow y=C^{\prime} e^{y / x}\) (because \(\frac{1}{C}=C^{\prime}\))

Or,

Given differential equation is \(\left(x^2+1\right) \frac{d y}{d x}+2 x y=\sqrt{x^2+4}\)

⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}+\frac{2 x y}{1+x^2}=\frac{\sqrt{x^2+4}}{1+x^2}\)

This is a linear differential equation of the form \(\frac{d y}{d x}+P y=Q\).

where P = \(\frac{2 x}{1+x^2}\) and \(Q=\frac{\sqrt{x^2+4}}{1+x^2}\)

Now. I.F. = \(\mathrm{e}^{\int \mid {p dx}}=\mathrm{e}^{\int \frac{2 \mathrm{x}}{1+\mathrm{x}^2} \mathrm{dx}}=\mathrm{e}^{\left.\log x 1+\mathrm{x}^2\right)}\)

I.F. =1+x²

The solution of a given differential equation is given by

y (I.F.) = \(\int Q \cdot(\text { I.F. }) d x \Rightarrow y\left(1+x^2\right)=\int \frac{\sqrt{x^2+4}}{1+x^2}\left(1+x^2\right) d x\)

⇒ \(y\left(1+x^2\right)=\int \sqrt{x^2+4} d x\)

⇒ \(y\left(1+x^2\right)=\frac{x}{2} \int \sqrt{x^2+4}+2 \log \left|x+\sqrt{x^2+4}\right|+C\)

Question 5. Two balls are drawn at random one by one with replacements from an urn containing an equal number of red balls and green balls. Find the probability distribution of a number of red balls. Also, find the mean of the random variable.

Or,

A and B throw a die alternately till one of them gets a ‘6’ and wins the game. Find their respective probabilities of winning, if A starts the game first.

Solution:

Let X = number of reed balls, X = 0, 1, or 2

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023 Mean Of Random Variable

Mean = E(X) = ∑(X) P(X) = 1/2 + 1/2 = 1

Or,

Let S denote the success (getting a ‘6’) and F denote the failure (not getting a’6′)

∴ P(S) = 1/6, P(F) = 5/6

P(A wins in the first throw) = P(S) = 1/6

A gets the third throw, when the first throw by A and the second thrown by B result in failures.

i.e., P(A wins in third throw) = P(FFS) = P(F).P(F).P(S) = \(\frac{5}{6} \times \frac{5}{6}=\frac{1}{6}=\left(\frac{5}{6}\right)^2 \times \frac{1}{6}\)

Similarly P(A wins in the fifth throw) = P(FFFFS) = P(F) P(F) P(F) P(F) P(S)

= \(\left(\frac{5}{6}\right)^4\left(\frac{1}{6}\right)\) and so on

P(A wins) = \(\frac{1}{6}+\left(\frac{5}{6}\right)^2\left(\frac{1}{6}\right)+\left(\frac{5}{6}\right)^4\left(\frac{1}{6}\right)+\ldots \ldots . .=\frac{\frac{1}{6}}{1-\left(\frac{5}{6}\right)^{-2}}=\frac{\frac{1}{6}}{1-\frac{25}{36}}=\frac{\frac{1}{6}}{\frac{11}{36}}=\frac{6}{11}\)

P(B wins) = 1-P(A wins) = \(1-\frac{6}{11}=\frac{5}{11}\)

Question 6. Solve the following linear programming problem graphically. Minimize: Z = 5x + 10y

Subject to constraints:

  • x + 2y ≤ 120
  • x + y ≥ 60, x – 2y ≥ 0
  • x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0

Solution:

Minimize Z = 5x + 10y

Subject to constraints x + 2y ≤120, x + y ≥ 60, x 0, x -2y ≥ 0

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023 Graph For Constraints

So, the feasible region lies in the first quadrant.

∴ The feasible region is ABCDA.

On solving equations x-2y = 0andx + y = 60. we get D(40,20)

And on solving equations x-2y = 0 and x + 2y = 120, we get C(60,30)

The corner points of the feasible region are. A(60,0), E(120,0) ,C(60,30)and D(40,20).

The values of Z at these points are as follows;

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023 Corner Points Of Feasible Regions Of A Linear Programming

The minimum value of Z is 300 at A(60,0)

Long Answer Type Questions And Answers

Question 1. If \(A=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}-3 & -2 & -4 \\ 2 & 1 & 2 \\ 2 & 1 & 3\end{array}\right], B=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}1 & 2 & 0 \\ -2 & -1 & -2 \\ 0 & -1 & 1\end{array}\right]\), then find AB and use it to solve the following system of equations: x – 2y = 3, 2x – y – z = 2, and -2y + z = 3

Or,

If \(f(\alpha)=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\cos \alpha & -\sin \alpha & 0 \\
\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)
, prove that f(α), f(-β) = f(α-β).

Solution:

Given, \(A=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}-3 & -2 & -4 \\ 2 & 1 & 2 \\ 2 & 1 & 3\end{array}\right], B=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}1 & 2 & 0 \\ -2 & -1 & -2 \\ 0 & -1 & 1\end{array}\right]\)

AB = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-3 & -2 & -4 \\
2 & 1 & 2 \\
2 & 1 & 3
\end{array}\right]\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & 2 & 0 \\
-2 & -1 & -2 \\
0 & -1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)

= \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 0 & 0 \\
0 & 1 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)

⇒ AB = \(\mathrm{I}\)

i.e. \(\mathrm{A}=\mathrm{B^-1}\)….(1)

Now, given system of equations, is

x-2y=3

2x-y-z=2

-2y+z=3

This system can be written in matrix equation form as

⇒ \({\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & -2 & 0 \\
2 & -1 & -1 \\
0 & -2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\left[\begin{array}{l}
x \\
y \\
z
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{l}
3 \\
2 \\
3
\end{array}\right] }\)

BT X=C

⇒ X = (BT)-1 C = (B-1)T C

[(AT)-1 = (A-1)T]

⇒ X = AT C

⇒ \({\left[\begin{array}{l}
x \\
y \\
z
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{lll}
-3 & 2 & 2 \\
-2 & 1 & 1 \\
-4 & 2 & 3
\end{array}\right]\left[\begin{array}{l}
3 \\
2 \\
3
\end{array}\right] \Rightarrow\left[\begin{array}{l}
x \\
y \\
z
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{c}
1 \\
-1 \\
1
\end{array}\right] }\)

∴ x=1, y=-1, z=1

Or,

Given, \(f(\alpha)=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\cos \alpha & -\sin \alpha & 0 \\
\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)

f\((-\beta)=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\cos (-\beta) & -\sin (-\beta) & 0 \\
\sin (-\beta) & \cos (-\beta) & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\cos \beta & \sin \beta & 0 \\
-\sin \beta & \cos \beta & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)

∴ \(f(\alpha) \cdot f(-\beta)=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\cos \alpha & -\sin \alpha & 0 \\
\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\cos \beta & \sin \beta & 0 \\
-\sin \beta & \cos \beta & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)

⇒ f\((\alpha) \cdot f(-\beta)=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\cos \alpha \cos \beta+\sin \alpha \sin \beta & \cos \alpha \sin \beta-\sin \alpha \cos \beta & 0 \\
\sin \alpha \cos \beta-\cos \alpha \sin \beta & \sin \alpha \sin \beta+\cos \alpha \cos \beta & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)

⇒ f\((\alpha) \cdot f(-\beta)=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\cos (\alpha-\beta) & -\sin (\alpha-\beta) & 0 \\
\sin (\alpha-\beta) & \cos (\alpha-\beta) & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)

∴ \(f(\alpha), f(-\beta)=f(\alpha-\beta)\)

Question 2. Find the equations of the diagonals of the parallelogram PQRS whose vertices are P(4, 2, -6), Q(5, -3,1), R(12, 4, 5) and S(11, 9, -2). Use these equations to find the point of intersection of diagonals.

Or,

A-line l passes through point (-1, 3, -2) and is perpendicular to both the lines \(\frac{x}{1}\) = \(\frac{y}{2}\) = \(\frac{z}{3}\) and \(\frac{x+2}{-3}=\frac{y-1}{2}=\frac{z+1}{5}\). Find the vector equation of the line l. Hence obtain its distance from the origin.

Solution:

Given, the vertices of parallelogram PQRS are P(4, 2, -6), Q(5, -3,1), R(12, 4, 5) and S(11,9, -2).

Equation of diagonal PR is \(\frac{x-4}{12-4}=\frac{y-2}{4-2}=\frac{z+6}{5+6}\) i.e. \(\frac{x-4}{8}=\frac{y-2}{2}=\frac{z+6}{11}\)

Equation of diagonal QS is \(\frac{x-5}{11-5}=\frac{y+3}{9+3}=\frac{z-1}{-2-1}\) i.e. \(\frac{x-5}{6}=\frac{y+3}{12}=\frac{z-1}{-3}\)

Now, the coordinates of any point on diagonal PR is T(8λ + 4, 2λ+ 2, 11λ,- 6)

if point T also lies on the diagonal QS. then \(\frac{(8 \lambda+4)-5}{6}=\frac{(2 \lambda+2)+3}{12}=\frac{(11 \lambda-6)-1}{-3} \Rightarrow \frac{8 \lambda-1}{6}=\frac{2 \lambda+5}{12}=\frac{11 \lambda-7}{-3}\)

On solving, we get: λ = 1/2

Hence, the point of intersection of diagonals PR and QR is \(\mathrm{T}\left(8 \times \frac{1}{2}+4,2 \times \frac{1}{2}+2,11 \times \frac{1}{2}-6\right) \text { i.e. T }\left(8,3, \frac{-1}{2}\right)\)

Or,

Equation of a line l passes through point (-1, 3, 2 ) is \(\frac{x+1}{a}=\frac{y-3}{b}=\frac{z+2}{c}\)….(1)

If line l is perpendicular to lines \(\frac{x}{1}=\frac{y}{2}=\frac{z}{3}\) and \(\frac{x+2}{-3}=\frac{y-1}{2}=\frac{z+1}{5}\) both, then a + 2b + 3c = 0 ……(2)

and -3a + 2b + 5c = 0 ….(2)

From equation (2) and (3) \(\frac{a}{10-6}=\frac{b}{-9-5}=\frac{c}{2+6} \text { i.c. } \frac{a}{4}=\frac{b}{-14}=\frac{c}{8}\)

So, Dr’s offline l are 4, – 14, 8 i.e. 2, -7, 4

Equation of line l in cartesian does is \(\frac{x+1}{2}=\frac{y-3}{-7}=\frac{z+2}{4}\)

Equation of line l in vector form is \(\vec{r}=(-\hat{i}+3 \hat{j}-2 \hat{k})+\lambda(2 \hat{i}-7 \hat{j}+4 \hat{k})\)

The coordinates of any point on the line l are P(2λ, -1, + 3, 4λ – 2)

dr’s of line OP are 2λ-1, -7λ + 3, 4λ -2

Since. OP ⊥ l

2(2λ – 1) -7 (-7λ + 3) + 4(4λ – 2) = 0

⇒ 69λ = 31

∴ λ = 31/69

So, the coordinates of point P are P\(\left(\frac{-7}{69}, \frac{-10}{69} \cdot \frac{-14}{69}\right)\)

Now, the distance of line l from the origin is

OP = \(\sqrt{\left(\frac{-7}{69}\right)^2+\left(\frac{-10}{69}\right)^2+\left(\frac{-14}{69}\right)^2}\)

= \(\sqrt{\frac{49+100+196}{(69)^2}}=\sqrt{\frac{345}{(69)^2}}=\sqrt{\frac{5}{69}} \text { units }\)

Aliter:

Distance of line (l) from the origin (0, 0, 0) is D = \(\frac{\left|\vec{b} \times\left(\vec{a}_2-\vec{a}_1\right)\right|}{|\vec{b}|}\)

⇒ D = \(\frac{|(2 \hat{i}-7 \hat{j}+4 \hat{k}) \times[(-\hat{i}+3 \hat{j}-2 \hat{k})-(0 \hat{i}+0 \hat{j}+0 \hat{k})]|}{|2 \hat{i}-7 \hat{j}+4 \hat{k}|}\)

⇒ D = \(\frac{|-2 \hat{i}+\hat{k}|}{|2 \hat{i}-7 \hat{j}+4 \hat{k}|}=\frac{\sqrt{5}}{\sqrt{69}} \text { units }\)

Question 3. Using integration, find the area of the region bounded by line y =√3x, the curve \(y=\sqrt{4-x^2}\), and the y-axis in the first quadrant.

Solution:

Given, line y = A√3X…..(1)

curve y = \(y=\sqrt{4-x^2}\)….(2)

from equation (1) and (2) \(y=\sqrt{4-x^2}\) = 3x

⇒ 4 -X²= 3X²

⇒ x² = 1

⇒ x = 1

from equation (1) when x = 1 ⇒ y = √3

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Model Question Paper 2022-2023 Integration Area Of Bounded

The point of intersection of line (1) and curve (2) is B( 1, √3 )

Required Area = Area of the region APBOA

= Area of the region CBOC + area of the region APBCA

= \(\int_0^{\sqrt{3}} \frac{y}{\sqrt{3}} d y+\int_{\sqrt{3}}^2 \sqrt{4-y^2} d y=\left[\frac{y^2}{2 \sqrt{3}}\right]_0^{\sqrt{3}}+\left[\frac{y}{2} \sqrt{4-y^2}+\frac{4}{2} \sin ^{-1} \frac{y}{2}\right]_{\sqrt{3}}^2\)

= \(\left(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}-0\right)+\left[2 \cdot \frac{\pi}{2}-\left\{\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}+2 \cdot \frac{\pi}{3}\right\}\right]=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}+\left[\pi-\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}-\frac{2 \pi}{3}\right]=\frac{\pi}{3} \text { sq. units }\)

Question 4. A function f : [- 4, 4] → [O. 4] is given by f(x) = \(\sqrt{16-x^2}\) . Show that f is an onto function but not a one-one function. Further, find all possible values of ‘a’ for which f(a) =√7

Solution:

Given, function f:[-4,4] → [0,4] is given by \(f(x)=\sqrt{16-x^2}\)

One-one: f(-4) = \(\sqrt{16-(-4)^2}=0\)

f(4) = \(\sqrt{16-(4)^2}=0\)

⇒ \(f(-4)=f(4) \text { but }-4 \neq 4\)

Since different elements of the domain have the same image in the codomain.

So function f is not a one-to-one function.

Onto: Let \(y \in\lceil 0,4]\) such that \(f(x)=y=\sqrt{16-x^2} ; y \geq 0\)

⇒ x = \(\pm \sqrt{16-\mathrm{y}^2}\)

Here, \(16-y^2 \geq 0\)

⇒ (4-y)(4+y) \(\geq 0\)

⇒  (y-4)(y+4) \(\leq 0\)

⇒  \(-4 \leq y \leq 4 \text { and } y \geq 0\)

So, \(y \in[0,4]\)

Therefore the range of f=[0,4]= codomain of f.

So, function f is onto function.

if f(x)=\(\sqrt{7}\)

⇒ \(\sqrt{16-a^2}=\sqrt{7} \Rightarrow 16-a^2=7 \Rightarrow a^2=9 \Rightarrow a \pm 3\)

Assessment Questions And Answers

Question 1. Engine displacement is the measure of the cylinder volume swept by all the pistons of a piston engine. The piston moves inside the cylinder bore

The cylinder bore in the form of a circular cylinder open at the top is to be made from a metal sheet of area 75 π cm².

Based on the above information, answer the following questions:

  1. If the radius of the cylinder is r cm and the height is h cm. then write the volume V of the cylinder in terms of radius r.
  2. Find \(\frac{dV}{dr}\)
  3. Find the radius of the cylinder when its volume is maximum.

Or,

For maximum volume, h > r. State true or false and justify.

Solution:

Given \(\mathrm{r}\) and \(\mathrm{h}\) be the radius and height of the cylinder bore open at the top.

Then, \(\pi \mathrm{r}^2+2 \pi \mathrm{rh}=75 \pi \mathrm{cm}^2\) (given)

⇒ \(\mathrm{r}^2+2 \mathrm{rh}=75 \Rightarrow \mathrm{h}=\frac{75-\mathrm{r}^2}{2 \mathrm{r}}\)

(1) \(\mathrm{V}=\pi \mathrm{r}^2 \mathrm{~h}\)

V = \(\pi r^2\left(\frac{75-r^2}{2 r}\right)=\frac{\pi}{2}\left[75 r-r^3\right]\) [from equation (1)]

(2) Differential equation (2) with respect to \(\frac{\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{dr}}=\frac{\pi}{2}\left[75-3 \mathrm{r}^2\right]\)

(3) For maximum volume \(\frac{\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{dr}}=0 \Rightarrow \frac{\pi}{2}\left[75-3 \mathrm{r}^2\right]=0 \Rightarrow \mathrm{r}^2=25 \Rightarrow \mathrm{r}=5\)

Now, \(\frac{d^2 V}{d r^2}=\frac{\pi}{2}[-6 r] \Rightarrow \frac{d^2 V}{d r^2})_{r=5}=-\frac{\pi}{2} \times 30<0\)

Hence, volume is maximum at r=5

Question 37. Recent studies suggest that roughly 12% of the world’s population is left-handed.

Depending on the parents, the chances of having a left-handed child are as follows :

  • A: When both father and mother are left-handed: The chances of a left-handed child is 24%.
  • B: When the father is right-handed and the mother is left-handed: The chances of a left-handed child is 22%.
  • C: When the father is left-handed and the mother is right-handed: The chances of a left-handed child is 17%.
  • D: When both father and mother are right-handed: The chances of a left-handed child is 9%.

Assuming that P(A) = P(B) = P(C) = P(D) = 1/4 and L denotes the event that the child is left-handed.

Based on the above information, answer the following questions:

  1. Find P(L/C)
  2. Find P(L/A)
  3. Find P(A/L)

Or,

Find the probability that a randomly selected child is left-handed given that exactly one of the parents is left-handed.

Solution:

Given events are

  • A: When both father and mother are left-handed: The chances of a left-handed child is 24%.
  • B: When the father is right-handed and the mother is left-handed: The chances of left-handed children is 22%.
  • C: When the father is left-handed and the mother is right-handed: The chances of a left-handed child is 17%.
  • D: When both father and mother are right-handed: The chances of a left-handed child is 9%.

P(A) = P(B) = P(C) = P(D) = 1/4 and L: Child is left-handed.

Now, \(\mathrm{P}(\mathrm{L} / \mathrm{A})=\frac{24}{100}, \mathrm{P}(\mathrm{L} / \mathrm{B})=\frac{22}{100}, \mathrm{P}(\mathrm{L} / \mathrm{C})=\frac{17}{100}, \mathrm{P}(\mathrm{L} / \mathrm{D})=\frac{9}{100}\)

(1) \(\mathrm{P}(\mathrm{L} / \mathrm{C})=17 \%=\frac{17}{100}\)

(2) \(\mathrm{P}(\overline{\mathrm{L}} / \Lambda)=1-\mathrm{P}(\mathrm{L} / \mathrm{\Lambda})=1-\frac{24}{100}=\frac{76}{100}\)

(3) P(A/L)= \(\frac{P(A) \cdot P(L / A)}{P(A) \cdot P(L / A)+P(B) \cdot P(L / B)+P(C) \cdot P(L / C)+P(D) \cdot P(L / D)}\)

⇒ \(P(A / L)=\frac{\frac{1}{4} \times \frac{24}{100}}{\frac{1}{4} \times \frac{24}{100}+\frac{1}{4} \times \frac{22}{100}+\frac{1}{4} \times \frac{17}{100}+\frac{1}{4} \times \frac{9}{100}}=\frac{24}{24+22+17+9}=\frac{24}{72}=\frac{1}{3}\)

Or

Required probability = \(\mathrm{P}(\mathrm{L} / \mathrm{B} \cup \mathrm{C})=\frac{22}{100}+\frac{17}{100}=\frac{39}{100}\)

Question 3. The use of electric vehicles will curb air pollution in the long run.

The use of electric vehicles is increasing every year and the estimated electric vehicles in use at any time t is given by the function V: V(t) = 1/5 t³ — 5/2 t² + 25t-2 where t represents the time and t = 1, 2, 3 …. corresponds to years 2001, 2002, and 2003 respectively.

Based on the above information, answer the following questions

  1. Can the above function be used to estimate the number of vehicles in the year 2000? Justify.
  2. Prove that the function V(t) is an increasing function.

Solution:

Given that, \(V(t)=\frac{1}{5} t^3-\frac{5}{2} t^2+25 t-2\)….(1)

where t represents the time and t=1,2,3 \(\ldots\) corresponds to years 2001, 2002, 2003 ….respectively.

  1. When \(\mathrm{t}=0\), then \(\mathrm{V}(0)=-2\) that means there is no vehicles are used in the year 2000.
  2. Differentiating equation (1) concerning \(V^{\prime}(t)=\frac{3}{5} t^2-5 t+25=\frac{3}{5}\left(t^2-\frac{25}{3} t+\frac{125}{3}\right)\)

⇒ \(V^{\prime}(t)=\frac{3}{5}\left(t^2-\frac{25}{3} t+\left(\frac{25}{6}\right)^2-\left(\frac{25}{6}\right)^2+\frac{125}{3}\right)=\frac{3}{5}\left[\left(t-\frac{25}{6}\right)^2+\frac{875}{36}\right]\)

⇒ \(V^{\prime}(t)>0 \forall t \in 1,2,3 \ldots \ldots .\)

Hence, V(t) is increasing function.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 1 Relation And Functions

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes

Objective:  To verify that the relation R in the set L of all lines in a plane, defined by R = {(l,m):  \(\perp\)} is symmetric but neither reflexive nor transitive.

Material Required:

A piece of plywood, some pieces of wires (8). nails, white paper, glue, etc.

Method Of Construction:

Take a piece of plywood and paste a white paper on it. Fix the wires randomly on the plywood with the help of nails such that some of them are parallel, some are perpendicular to each other and some are inclined.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes It Is Parallel And Perpendicular

Demonstration:

1. Let the wires represent the lines \(l_1, l_2, \ldots, l_8\).

2. \(l_1\) is perpendicular to each of the lines \(l_2, l_3, l_4\).

3. \(l_6\) is perpendicular to \(l_7\).

4. \(l_2\) is parallel to \(l_3 \cdot l_7\) is parallel to \(l_4\) and \(l_5\) is parallel to \(l_8\).

5. \(\left(l_1, l_2\right),\left(l_1, l_3\right),\left(l_1, l_4\right),\left(l_6, l_7\right) \in \mathrm{R}\)

Observation :

1. In Given Above, no line is perpendicular to itself, so the relation R = {( l m): l \(\perp\) m) is not
reflexive (is/is not).

2. Given Above, \(l_1 \perp l_2.\mathrm{Is} l_2 \perp l_1\)? Yes (Yes/No)

⇒ \(\left(l_1, l_2\right) \in \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow\left(l_2, l_1\right) \in \mathrm{R}(\varepsilon / \in)\)

Similarly, \(l_1 \perp l_1,\) Is \(l_1 \perp l_2\)?  yes (Yes \No)

⇒ \(\left(l_3, l_1\right) \in \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow\left(l_1, l_1\right) \quad \mathrm{R}(\in / \in) \)

Also, \(l_6 \perp t_4\) Is \(l_7 \perp l_6 \text { ? yes (Yes/No) } \)

⇒ \(\left(l_0, l_0\right) \in \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow\left(l_3, l_4\right) \in \mathrm{R}(\epsilon / \in)\)

The relation R is symmetric (is/is not)

3. In , 1, \(l_1 \perp l_1\) and \(l_1 \perp l_3\). Is \(l_7 \perp l_3\) ? No. (Yes /No) i.e., \(\left(l_2, l_1\right) \in \mathrm{R}\) and \(\left(l_1, l_2\right) \in \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow\left(l_2, l_3\right) \notin \mathrm{R}(\notin f \in)\)

The relation R is not transitive (is/is not).

Result:

R = \(\{(l, \mathrm{~m}): l \perp \mathrm{m}\}\) is neither reflexive nor transitive but it is symmetric.

Application:

This activity can be used to check whether a given relation is an equivalence relation or not.

Viva Voice:

Question 1. Let R = {(a, b): a, b ∈ A} where A = (1. 2, 3. 4} if R is reflexive, write R in tabular form.
Answer:

R= {(1. 1). (2. 2), (3. 3), (4, 4)}.

Question 2. When does a relation R in set A called symmetric?
Answer:

If (a, b) ∈ R ⇒ (b, a) ∈ R for every a. b. c A, then the relation is called symmetric.

Question 3. When is a relation R in set A called reflexive?
Answer:

If (a, a) ∈ R. for every a ∈ A, it is called a reflexive relation.

Question 4. When is a relation R in set A called a transitive relation?
Answer:

If (a, b) ∈ R. (b. c) ∈ R ⇒ (a, c) ∈ R for every a. b, c ∈ A, then the relation is called transitive.

Question 5. If R – {(T1, T2): T1 and T2 are congruent triangles}, does R is reflexive?
Answer:

Yes. R is reflexive because each triangle is congruent to itself.

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 2 Relations And Functions

Objective: To verify whether the relation R in the set L of all lines in a plane, defined by R = {(l. m): l || m is an equivalence relation or not.

Material Required:

A piece of plywood, some pieces of wire (8). plywood, nails, white paper, glue.

Method Of Construction:

Take a piece of plywood of convenient size and paste a white paper on it. f ix the wares randomly on the plywood with the help of nails such that some of them are parallel, some are perpendicular to each other and some are inclined as shown below

Demonstration:

let the wires represent the lines \(l_1, l_7, \ldots, l_{\mathrm{x}}\).

⇒ \(l_1\) is perpendicular to each of the lines \(l_2, l_2, l_4\).

⇒ \(l_6\) is perpendicular to \(l_7\).

⇒ \(l_2\) is parallel to \(l_3, l_1\) is parallel to \(l_4\) and \(l_5\) is parallel to \(l_8\).

⇒ \(\left(I_2, l_3\right),\left(l_3, l_4\right),\left(l_5, l_8\right), \in \mathrm{R}\)

Observation:

1. In the above, every line is parallel to itself. So the relation R = {( l, m) : l || m } is reflexive relation (is/is not)

In The Above, observe that \(l_2 \| l_3\). Is \(l_3 \ldots l_2\)?

So,\(\left(l_3, l_3\right) \in \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow\left(l_3, l_2\right), \ldots \mathrm{R}(\mathbb{e} / \mathrm{e})\)

Similarly, \(l_3 \| l_4. Is l_4 \| l_3\) ?

So, \(\left(l_4, l_4\right) \in \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow\left(l_4, l_3\right) \in \mathrm{R}(\notin / \in)\)

and \(\left(l_3, l_8\right) \in \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow\left(l_8, l_3\right) \in \mathrm{R}(\notin / \in)\)

The relation R is symmetric (is/is not)

In the givenobserve that \(l_2 \| l_4\) and \(l_3 \| l_4\). Is \(l_2 \ldots l_4\)?

So, \(\left(l_2, l_2\right) \in \mathrm{R} and \left(l_3, l_4\right) \in \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow\left(l_2, l_4\right), \ldots \mathrm{R}(\in / \notin)\)

Similarly. \(l_3 \| l_4\) and \(l_4 \| l_2. Is l_3 \| l_2\) ?

So, \(\left(l_3, l_4\right) \in \mathrm{R},\left(l_4, l_2\right) \in \mathrm{R} \rightarrow\left(l_3, l_2\right) \in \mathrm{R}(\in, \notin)\)

Thus, the relation R is transitive (is/is not)

Hence, the relation R is reflexive and symmetric. and transitive. So, R is an equivalence relation.

Result:

The set of all lines in the plane that are parallel to each other defined as R = {(l, m): l|| m} is an equivalence relation.

Application:

This activity is useful in understanding the concept of an equivalence relation.

Viva Voice:

Question 1. If a relation is reflexive, symmetric, and transitive, then it is known as:
Answer:

An equivalence relation.

Question 2. If A = {1,2), B = {a, b}, then what is B x A?
Answer:

B x A = {(a. 1) (a. 2) (b, 1) (b, 2)}.

Question 3. What do you mean by an empty relation?
Answer:

A relation R in a set A is called an empty relation, if no element of A is related to any element of A i.e., \(\phi \subset A \times A\).

Question 4. Which methods are used to represent relation?
Answer:

There are two methods:

(1) Roster method (2) Set-builder method

Question 5. If R1 and R2 are two equivalence relations in set A. then R \(\cap R\). is equivalence or not.
Answer:

Yes R \(\cap\) R, will be an equivalence relation because both are reflexive, symmetric, and transitive therefore their intersection will be reflexive, symmetric, and transitive i.e. equivalence.

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 3 Relations And Functions

Objective: To demonstrate a function that is not one-one but is onto.

Material Required: Cardboard, nails, strings, adhesive, and plastic strips.

Method Of Construction:

1. Paste a plastic strip on the left-hand side of the cardboard and fix three nails on it as shown below. Name the nails as 1.2 and 3.

2. Paste another strip on the right-hand side of the cardboard and fix two nails on it as shown in Below. Name the nails as a and b.

3. Join nails on the left strip to the nails on the right strip as shown in the given below.

 

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes The Concept OF One One And Onto Function

Demonstration:

1. Take the set X = {1,2.3}

2. Take the set Y = {a, b}

3. Join (correspondence) elements of X to the elements of Y as Shown Above

Observation:

1. The image of the element 1 of X in Y is a.

The image of the element 2 of X in Y is b.

The image of the element 3 of X in Y is b So, Given Above represents a Function.

2. Two elements in X have the Same image in Y. So. the function is not one-one (one-one/not one-one).

3. The pre-image of each element of Y in X exists (exists/does not exist). So. the function is onto (onto/not onto)

Result:

Here, the given function is not one-one but is onto.

Application:

This activity can be used to demonstrate the concept of one-one and function.

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity  4 Relations And Functions

Objective:

To demonstrate a function that is one-one but not onto.

Material Required:

Cardboard, nails, strings, adhesive and plastic strips.

Method Of Construction:

  1. Paste a plastic strip on the left-hand side of the cardboard and fix two nails in it as shown in the Given below. Name the nails as a and b.
  2. Paste another strip on the right-hand side of the cardboard and fix three nails on it as shown in the given below. Name the nails on the right strip as 1.2 and 3.
  3. Join nails on the left strip to the nails on the right strip as shown in the Given Below

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes The Given Function Is Not One One But Is Onto

Demonstration:

1. Take the set X = {a. b}

2. Take the set Y = {1,2.3}

3. Join (correspondence) elements of X to the elements of Y as shown in Above

Observation:

1. The image of the element a of X in Y is 2

The image of the clement b of X in Y is 3

So, The given Above represents a Function.

3. The pre-image of each element 1 of Y in X does not exist (exists/does not exist). So, the function is not onto (onto/not onto).

4. Thus, figure 4.3 represents a function that is one-one but not onto.

Result:

Here, The given function is one-on-one but not one-on-one.

Application:

This activity can be used to demonstrate the concept of one-one and onto function.

Viva-Voice:

Question 1. What is the domain of f(x) = \(\frac{1}{x-5}\) ?
Answer:

The domain of function f(x) is R – {5} because f(x) is not defined at x = 5.

Question 2. What are the domain and range of the function f = {(1,2). (4. 5). (6. 8)}?
Answer:

Domain is {1.4. 6). Range is {2. 5. 8}.

Question 3. Is every relation R a function?
Answer:

No: every relation is not necessarily a function.

Question 4. Is every function a relation?
Answer:

Yes. every function is a relation.

Question 5. Is {(1.2). (3. 4). (5. 6)} one-one and onto?
Answer:

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes One One And Onto

yes, it is one-one and onto.

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 5 Relations And Functions

Objective:

To sketch the graphs of \(a^x\) and \(\log _3 x, a>0, a \neq 1\) and to examine that they are mirror images of each other.

Material Required:

Drawing board, geometrical instruments, drawing pins, thin wires, sketch pens, thick white paper, adhesive, pencil, eraser, a plane mirror, and squared paper.

Method Of Construction:

  1. On the drawing board, fix a thick paper sheet of convenient size 20 cm x 20 cm (say) with adhesive.
  2. On the sheet, take two perpendicular lines XOX’ and YOY’, depicting coordinate axes.
  3. Mark graduations on the two axes as shown in the given
  4. Find some ordered pairs satisfying y = ax and y logax. Plot these points corresponding to the ordered pairs and join them by free-hand curves in both cases.
  5. Fix thin wires along these curves using drawing pins.
  6. Draw the graph of y = x. and fix a wire along the graph, using drawing pins.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes To Examine The Mirror Images Of Each Other

Demonstration:

1. For \(a^x\) take a = 2 (say), find ordered pairs satisfying it plot these ordered pairs on the squared paper, and fix a drawing pin at each point.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Ordered Pairs On The Square Paper

2. Join the bases of drawing pins with a thin wire. This will represent the graph of \(2^x\).

3. \(\log _2\) x=y = y gives x = \(2^x\), Some ordered pairs satisfying it are:

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Ordered Pairs On The Graph Paper

Plot these ordered pairs on the squared paper (graph paper) and fix a drawing pin at each plotted point.

Join the bases of the drawing pins with a thin wire. This will represent the graph of Logix.

4. Draw the graph of line y = x on the sheet.

5. Place a mirror along the wire representing y = x. It can be seen that the two graphs of the given functions are mirror images of each other in the line y = x.

Observation:

The image of the ordered pair (1. 2) on the graph of y = 2X in y = x is (2,1). It lies on the graph of y = \(\log _2 x\).

2. Image of the point (4. 2) on the graph y = log2X in y = x is (2,4) which lies on the graph of y= \(2^x\)

Repeat this process for some more points lying on the two graphs.

Result:

Hence; The graphs of ax and log x are mirror images of each other.

Application:

This activity is useful in understanding the concept of (exponential and logarithmic functions) which are mirror images of each other in y = x,

Viva Voice:

Question 1. What is the domain of the logarithmic function?
Answer:

The domain of the logarithmic function is (0. \(\infty\)) i.e., all positive numbers.

Question 2. What is the range of logarithmic function?
Answer:

All real numbers.

Question 3. Are logarithmic functions defined for negative values?
Answer:

No. The log can be found only of positive numbers.

Question 4. Which formulae are used in the calculation of the logarithm?
Answer:

⇒ \(\log _a(m \times n)=\log _a m+\log _a n\)

⇒ \(\log _a(m)^n=n \log _x m\)

⇒ \(\log _a\left(\frac{m}{n}\right)=\log _a m-\log _a n\)

Question 5. What is the use of logarithms?
Answer:

It is used to simplify the calculations in the field of Chemistry. Physics and Engineering.

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 6 Inverse Trigonometric Function

Objective:

To draw the graph of sin-1 x, use the graph of sin x and demonstrate the concept of mirror reflection (about the line y = x).

Material Required:

Cardboard, white chart paper, ruler, colored pens, adhesive, pencil, eraser, cutter, nails, and thin wires.

Method Of Construction:

  1. Take cardboard of suitable dimensions, say, 30 cm x 30 cm.
  2. On the cardboard, paste a white chart paper of size 25 cm x 25 cm (say).
  3. On the paper, draw two lines, perpendicular to each other and name them XOX’ and YOY’ as rectangular axes.
  4. Graduate the axes approximately as shown. by taking the unit on the X-axis = 1.25 times the unit on the Y-axis.
  5. Mark approximately the points \((\frac{\pi}{6}, \sin \frac{\pi}{6}) \cdot(\frac{\pi}{4}, \sin \frac{\pi}{4}t) \ldots(\frac{\pi}{2}, \sin \frac{\pi}{2}\) in the coordinate plane and at each point fix a nail.
  6. Repeat the above process on the other side of the x-axis, marking the points \(\left(\frac{-\pi}{6}, \sin \frac{-\pi}{6}\right) \cdot\left(\frac{-\pi}{4}, \sin \frac{-\pi}{4}\right), \ldots,\left(\frac{-\pi}{2}, \sin \frac{-\pi}{2}\right)\) approximately and fix nails on these points as \(\mathrm{N}_3^{\prime}, \mathrm{N}_2^{\prime}, \mathrm{N}_3^{+}, \mathrm{N}_4^{\prime}\), Also fix a nail at O.
  7. Join the nails with the help of a tight wire on both sides of the x-axis to get the graph of sin x from \(\frac{-\pi}{2} \text { to } \frac{\pi}{2}\)
  8. Draw the graph of the line y = x (by plotting the points (1, 1 ), (2, 2), (3, 3), … etc., and fixing a wire on these points).
  9. From the nails \(\mathrm{N}_1, \mathrm{~N}_2, \mathrm{~N}_3, \mathrm{~N}_4\) draw perpendicular on the line y = x and produce these lines such that length of perpendicular on both sides of the line y – x are equal. At these points fix nails, \(\mathrm{I}_1, \mathrm{I}_2, \mathrm{I}_3, \mathrm{I}_4^{\prime}\)
  10. Repeat the above activity on the other side of the X-axis and fix nails at \(\mathrm{I}_1, \mathrm{I}_2, \mathrm{I}_3, \mathrm{I}_4^{\prime}\)
  11. Join the nails on both sides of the line y = x by a tight wire that will show the graph of y = sin’ x.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Inverse Trigonometric Function To Demonstrate The Concept Of Mirror Reflection

Demonstration:

Put a mirror on the line y = x. The image of the graph of sin x in the tile mirror will represent the graph of sin x showing that sin 1 x is a mirror reflection of sin x and vice versa.

Observation:

  1. The image of point \(N_1\) in the mirror (the line y=x ) is  \(\mathbf{I}_1\).
  2. The image of point \(\mathrm{N}_2\) in the mirror (the line \(\mathrm{y}=\mathrm{x} )\) is \(\mathrm{I}_2\).
  3. The image of point N, in the mirror (the line y=x ) is \(1_3\).
  4. The image of point \(\mathrm{N}_4\) in the mirror (the line \(\mathrm{y}=\mathrm{x} )\) is \(\mathbf{1}_4\).
  5. The image of point \(\mathrm{N}_1^{+}\) in the mirror (the line \(\mathrm{y}=\mathrm{x} )\) is \(\mathrm{I}_1{ }^{\prime}\).
  6. The image point of \(\mathrm{N}_2^{\prime}\) in the mirror (the line \(\mathrm{y}=\mathrm{x}) is \mathbf{I}_2{ }^{\prime}\).
  7. The image point of \(\mathrm{N}_3^{\prime}\) in the mirror (the line \(\mathrm{y}=\mathrm{x} )\) is \(\mathbf{1}^{\prime}\).
  8. The image point of \(\mathrm{N}_4^{+}\)in the mirror (the line \(\mathrm{y}=\mathrm{x} )\) is \(\mathbf{I}_{+}{ }^{\prime}\).
  9. The image of the graph of sin x in y=x is the graph of {Sin}^{-1} x and the image of the graph of \(\sin ^{\prime} x\) in y=x is the graph of Sin x.

Result:

Hence; we have drawn the graph of Sin’ X using the graph of sin x and demonstrated the concept of mirror reflection (about the line y = x).

Application:

A similar activity can be performed for drawing the graphs of \(\cos ^{-1} x, \tan ^{-1} x\) etc.

Viva Voice:

Question 1. If We put the mirror on line v :x. then what will be the reflection of \(\sin ^{-1}x\).

Answer: sin x

Question 2. What is the value of \(\sin ^{-1} (sin x)\).
Answer:

⇒ \(\sin ^{-1}(\sin x)\)=x , where x \(\in\left[-\frac{\pi}{2}, \frac{\pi}{2}\right]\)

Question 3. What is \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{x}\right)\) ?
Answer:

⇒ \({cosec}^{-1} x\)

Question 4. How can you explain \(\sin ^{-1}\)x?
Answer:

⇒ \(\sin ^{-1}\)x is an angle, the value of whose sine is x.

Question 5. Whenever no branch, of an inverse trigonometric function is given then we consider which branch?
Answer:

Principal Value Branch

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 7 Continuity And Differentiability

Objective:

To find analytically the limit of a function f (x) at x = c and also to check the continuity of the function at that point.

Material Required: Paper, pencil, calculator.

Method Of Construction:

Consider the function given by f(x)=\(\{\begin{array}{cc}
\frac{x^2-16}{x-4} & x \neq 4 \\
10, & x=4
\end{array}\).

Take some points on the left and some points on the right side of c (= 4). which are very near to c.

Find the corresponding values of f (x) for each of the points considered in step 2 above.

Record the values of points on the left and right side of c as x and the corresponding values of f(x ) in the form of a table.

Demonstration:

The values of x and f (x) are recorded as follows:

Table 1: For points on the left of c (= 4).

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Continuity And Differentiability Right X The Continuity Of The Function.

Table 2: For points on the right of c (= 4).

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Continuity And Differentiability Right X The Continuity Of The Function.

Observation:

The value of f (x) is approaching 8 as x → 4 from the left.

The value off (x) is approaching to 8 , as x → 4 from the right

Result:

If lim \(\lim _{x \rightarrow \infty} f(x)=\lim _{x \rightarrow c} f(x)\). then f(x) is said to be continuous at x = c otherwise it is discontinuous.

Application:

This activity is useful in understanding the concept of limit and continuity of a function at a point.

Viva Voice:

Question 1. Is logarithmic function continuous everywhere?
Answer:

No. The logarithmic function is continuous only in its domain.

Question 2. What are the conditions for a function to be continuous at a point of its domain?
Answer:

Function f is said to be continuous at a point of its domain if the left-hand limit, right-hand limit, and value of the function at that particular point are equal.

Question 3. Are sine and cosine functions continuous everywhere?
Answer:

Yes. sine and cosine functions are continuous everywhere.

Question 4. Is the function defined by f(x) = |xj. a continuous function?
Answer:

Yes, the modulus function f(x) = |x| is continuous at all points.

Question 5. If f and g are two continuous functions at x = a, then what is the algebra of a continuous function?
Answer:

  1. f + g is continuous at x = a.
  2. f -g is continuous at x -a.
  3. f.g is continuous at x = a.
  4. \(\frac{\mathrm{f}}{\mathrm{g}}\) is continuous at x = a, provided g(a)\(\neq  0\)

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 8 Continuity And Differentiability

Objective:

To verify that for a function f to be continuous at a given point \(x_0 \cdot \Delta y=\left|f\left(x_0+\Delta x\right)-f\left(x_0\right)\right|\) is arbitrarily small provided. Ax is sufficiently small.

Material Required:

Hardboard, white sheets, pencil, scale, calculator, adhesive.

Method Of Construction :

  1. Paste a white sheet on the hardboard.
  2. Draw the curve of the given continuous function as represented in the Given Below.
  3. Take any point A (\(x_0\). 0) on the positive side of the x-axis and corresponding to this point, mark the point P \(\left(x_0, y_0\right)\) on the curve.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Continuity And Differentiability Function F To Be Continuous At The Given point

Demonstration:

  1. Take one more point \(M_1\left(x_0+\Delta x_1, 0\right)\) to the right of A, where \(\Delta x_1\) is an increment in x.
  2. Draw the perpendicular from \(\mathrm{M}_1\), to meet the curve at \(\mathrm{N}_1\). Let the coordinates of \(\mathrm{N}_1 be\left(x_b+\Delta x_1 \cdot y_1+\Delta y_1\right)\)
  3. Draw a perpendicular from the point \(\mathrm{P}\left(\mathrm{x}_{10}, \mathrm{y}_0\right)\) to meet \(\mathrm{N}_1 \mathrm{M}_1 at \mathrm{T}_1\).
  4. Now measure \(\mathrm{AM}_1=\mathrm{Ax}_1\) (say) and record it and also measure \(\mathrm{N}_1 \mathrm{~T}_1=\Delta y_1\), and record it.
  5. Reduce the increment in x to \(\Delta \mathrm{x}_2 (i.e.. \left.\Delta \mathrm{x}_2<\Delta \mathrm{x}_1\right)\) to get another point \(\mathrm{M}_2\left(\mathrm{x}_0+\Delta \mathrm{x}_2, 0\right)\). Get the corresponding point \mathrm{N}_2 on the curve
  6. Let the perpendicular PT, intersects \(\mathrm{N}_2 \mathrm{M}_2 at \mathrm{T}_2\).
  7. Again measure A \(M_2=\Delta x_2\) and record it. Measure \(N_2 T_2=\Delta y_2\) and record it.
  8. Repeat the above steps for some more points so that \(\Delta\) x becomes smaller and smaller.

Observation:

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Continuity And Differentiability Observation Table

So, \(\Delta\)y becomes Smaller when \(\Delta\)x becomes smaller.

Thus \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0} \Delta\) y=0 for a continuous function.

Result:

Hence; we have verified that for a function f to be continuous at a given point \(x_0 \cdot \Delta y=\left|f\left(x_0+\Delta x\right)-f\left(x_0\right)\right|\) is arbitrarily small provided; \(\Delta\)x is sufficiently small.

Application:

This activity helps explain the concept of derivative (left hand or right hand) at any point on the curve corresponding to a function.

Viva Voice:

Question 1. A function f(x) is said to be continuous in an interval if it is continuous at every point in the domain of f(x). Is it true?

Answer: Yes

Question 2. Let f(x)=\(\begin{cases}{ll}\frac{|y|}{y}, & y \neq 0 \\ 0, & y=0\end{cases}\)., Is f continuous at y=0?
Answer:

No. \((\lim _{y \rightarrow 0}\). Does not exist as RHL =1, LHL=-1)

Question 3. Find the domain for the function \(f(x)=\frac{1}{x^2-7 x+12}\) where it represents a continuous function.
Answer:

⇒ \(\mathrm{R}-\{3,4\}\)

Question 4. Is the function defined by F(x)= \(\begin{cases}2 x-1, & x<0 \\ 2 x+1, & x \geq 0\end{cases}\) a continuous function at x=0
Answer:

Clearly. f(0)-2(0)+1-0+1=1

LHL =\(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0^{-}} f(x)=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} f(0-h)=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0}[2(0-h)-1]\)

=\(\lim _{h \rightarrow 0}[-2 h-1]=0-1=-1\)

RHL =\(\lim _{x \rightarrow p^{+}} f(x)=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0} f(0+h)=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0}[2(0+h)+1]=\lim _{h \rightarrow 0}[2 h+1]=1\)

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 9 Continuity And Differentiability

Objective: To verify Rolle’s Theorem.

Material Required:

A piece of plywood, wires of different lengths, white paper, sketch pen.

Method Of Construction:

  1. Take a cardboard of a convenient size and paste a white paper on it.
  2. Take two wires of convenient size and fix them on the white paper pasted on the plywood to represent the x-axis and y-axis
  3. Take a piece of wire 15 cm in length bend it in the shape of a curve and fix it on the plywood as shown in the Given Below.
  4. Take two straight wires of the same length and fix them in such a way that they are perpendicular to the x-axis at points A and B and meet the curve at points C and 1).

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Continuity And Differentiability To Verify The Rolle's Theorem

Demonstration:

  1. In the figure, let the curve represent the function y = f(x). Let OA = a units and OB = b units.
  2. The coordinates of the points A and B are (a. 0) and (b, 0), respectively.
  3. There is no break in the curve in the interval [a, b]. So, the function f is continuous on [a, b],
  4. The curve is smooth between x = a and x = b which means that at each point, a tangent can be drawn which in turn gives that the function f is differentiable in the interval (a, b).
  5. As the wires at A and B are of equal lengths, i.e., AC = BD, so f (a) = f (b).
  6. Because of steps (3), (4) and (5). conditions of Rolle’s theorem are satisfied. From the given above, we observe that tangents at P as well as Q are parallel to the x-axis. therefore f(x) at P and also at Q are zero.
  7. Thus, there exists at least one value c of x in (a. b) such that f(c) = 0.
  8. Hence, the Rolle’s theorem is verified.

Observation:

Let f(x)=\(x^2+2 x-8: x \in[-4,2]\)

a = -4 , b = 2

f(a)=0 , f(b)=0 Is f(a)=f(b) ?(Yes / No)

The slope of the tangent at P =0. So, \(\mathrm{f}(\mathrm{x})(\text { at } \mathrm{P})\)=0.

Result:

Thus, Rolle’s Theorem is verified.

Application:

This theorem may be used to find the roots of an equation.

Viva Voice

Question 1. What is Rolle’s Theorem?
Answer:

Let f be a real-valued function defined on [a, b] such that

f is contimuous on a, b

f is differentiable on (a, b)

f( a )=f( b )

Then. there exists at least a point c \(\in\)(a, b) such that \(f^{\prime}(\mathrm{c})\)=0

Question 2. If \(\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)_{x=0}\)=0 for a function, what is its meaning?
Answer:

Tangent to the curve at point x = a is parallel to the x-axis.

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 10 Continuity And Differentiability

Objective:

To verify Lagrange’s Mean Value Theorem.

Material Required:

A piece of plywood, wires, white paper, sketch pens, wires.

Method Of Instruction:

  1. Take a piece of plywood and paste a white paper on it.
  2. Take two wires of convenient size and fix them on the white paper pasted on the plywood to represent the x-axis and y-axis
  3. Take a piece of wire about 10 cm in length and bend it in the shape of a curve. Fix this curved wire on the white paper pasted on the plywood.
  4. Take two straight wires of lengths 10 cm and 13 cm and fix
    them at two different points of the curve parallel to the y-axis and their feet touching the x-axis.
  5. Join the two points, where the two vertical wires meet the curve, using another wire.
  6. Take one more wire of a suitable length and fix it in such a way that it is tangential to the curve and is parallel to the wire joining the two points on the curve.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Continuity And Differentiability Mean Value Theorem

Demonstration:

  1. Let the curve represent the function y- f (x). In the figure, let OA = a units and OB = b units.
  2. The coordinates of A and B are (a, 0) and (b, 0), respectively.
  3. MN is a chord joining the points M (a. f (a) and N (b, f (b)).
  4. PQ represents a tangent to the curve at the point. R (c, f (c)). in the interval (a, b).
  5. f(c) is the slope of the tangent PQ at x = c.
  6. \(\frac{f(b)-f(a)}{b-a}\) is the slope of the chord MN.
  7. MN is parallel to PQ, therefore. f(c) = \(\frac{f(b)-f(a)}{b-a}\) Thus, Lagrange’s Mean Value Theorem is verified.

Observation:

1. Let f(x)=\(x^2-4 x-3 ; x \in[1,4]\)

a = 1 , b = 4 .

f(a)=-6 , f(b)=-3

2. f(b)-f(a)=3

b-a=3

3. \(\frac{f(b)-f(a)}{b-a}=1\) = Slope of MN.

4. Since \(\mathrm{PQ} \| \mathrm{MN} \Rightarrow\) Slope of \(\mathrm{PQ}=\mathrm{f}(\mathrm{c})=\frac{\mathrm{f}(\mathrm{b})-\mathrm{f}(\mathrm{a})}{\mathrm{b}-\mathrm{a}}\)

2c-4 = 1 or c=2.5 \(\in\)[1.4]

Result :

Hence, we have verified Lagrange’s Mean Value Theorem.

Application:

Lagrange’s Mean Value Theorem has significant applications in calculus. For example, this theorem is used to explain the concavity of the graph.

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 11 Application Of Derivatives

Objective:

To understand the concepts of decreasing and increasing functions.

Material Required:

Pieces of wire of different lengths, pieces of plywood of suitable size, white paper, adhesive, geometry box, trigonometric tables.

Method Of Construction:

  1. Take a piece of plywood of a convenient size and paste a white paper on it.
  2. Take two pieces of wires of length say 20 cm each and fix them on the white paper to represent the x-axis and y-axis.
  3. Take two more pieces of wire each of suitable length and bend them in the shape of curves representing two functions and fix them on the paper as shown.
  4. Take two straight wires each of suitable length to show tangents to the curves at different points on them.

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Continuity And Differentiability Mean Value Theorem

Demonstration:

  1. Take one straight wire and place it on the curve (on the left) such that it is tangent to the curve at the point say \(P_1\), and make an angle \(\alpha_1\), with the positive direction of the x-axis.
  2. \(\alpha_1\), is an obtuse angle, so tana\(\alpha_1\) is negative, i.e., the slope of the tangent at \(P_1 \)(a derivative of the function at P_1) is negative
  3. Take another two points say \(P_2\) and\(P_3\) on the same curve* and make tangents using the same wire at \(P_2\) and\(P_3\) making \(\alpha_2\) And \(\alpha_3\), respectively with the positive direction of x-axis.
  4. Here again \(\alpha_2\) And \(\alpha_3\). are obtuse angles and therefore slopes of the tangents tan \(\alpha_2\) And tan\(\alpha_3\) on are both negative, be, derivatives of the function at \(P_2\) and\(P_3\) are negative.
  5. The function given by the curve (on the left) is a decreasing function,
  6. On the curve (on the right), take three points \(Q_1, Q_2, Q_3 \)t and using the other straight wires, form tangents at each of these points making angles \(\beta_j, \beta_2, \beta_3\), respectively with the positive direction of the x-axis, as shown. \(\beta_j, \beta_2, \beta_3\),are all acute angles.
  7. So, the derivatives of the function at these points are positive. Thus, the function given by this curve (on the right) is an increasing function.

Observation:

⇒ \(\alpha_1=\underline{120^{\circ}}>90^{\circ} \cdot \alpha_2-135^{\circ}>90^{\circ} \cdot \alpha_2=150^{\circ}>90^{\circ}, \tan \alpha_1\)

=\(-\sqrt{3}, (negative), \tan a_2=-1, (negative) \tan a_1-\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}, (negative\)). Thus the function decreasing

⇒ \(\beta_1=\underline{30^{\circ}}<90^{\circ} \cdot \beta_2=45^{\circ},<90^{\circ}, \beta_3=60^{\circ},<90^{\circ}, \tan \beta_1\)

=\(\underline{1 / \sqrt{3}}. (positive), \tan \beta_2-1 (positive), \tan \beta_3-\underline{\sqrt{3}}(positive)\). Thus, the function is increasing.

Result:

  1. The function is an increasing function at the point if the slope of the tangent is positive at that point.
  2. The function decreases at the point if the slope of the tangent is negative at that point.
  3. If a function is increasing in one interval and decreasing in another interval or vice-versa then for the entire interval, it is neither increasing nor decreasing.

Application:

Utis activity may be useful in explaining the concepts of decreasing and increasing functions.

Viva Voice:

Question 1. What is the condition for strictly increasing function f?
Answer:

f is strictly increasing in (a. b) if f'(x) > 0 for each x e (a. b).

Question 2. What do you mean by the critical point of a function?
Answer:

A point c in the domain of a function f is called a critical point at which either f’ (c) = 0 or f is not differentiable.

Question 3. What is the condition for strictly decreasing function f?
Answer:

f is strictly decreasing in (a. b) if f'(x) < 0 for each x \(\epsilon\) (a, b).

Question 4. If the curve has an upward trend as shown. Is it increasing or decreasing?
Answer:

Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Application Of Derivatives The Curve Has Upward Trend

It is an increasing function.

CBSE Class 12 Maths Practical Notes Activity 12 Application Of Derivatives

Objective:

To understand the concepts of local maxima. local minima and point of inflection.

Materials Required:

A piece of plywood, wires adhesive, white paper.

Methods Of Construction:

  1. Take a piece of plywood of a convenient size and paste a white paper on it.
  2. Take two pieces of wires each of length 40 cm and fix them on the paper on plywood in the form of the x-axis and y-axis.
  3. Take another wire of a suitable